Home

SERVICE MANUAL

1. 10104 REF NO 40 000 SERIES KASSDKASO1TSN SS T A 27MHz XRESET FLASH gt 5 16322 a5 TC7SB66FU TE85R als 2 5 10321 TC74VCX245FK 052 TO 5 5 4111572 8960 DTC124EUA T106 STREAM 7 SWITCH STREAM 6 STREAM 5 STREAM 4 JL1154 gt STEAM 3 gt STREM 2 gt SIREAM 1 gt SIREAM 0 on o o o 0 E ari acid 256M DDR 5 8 5 55 ers 28 2 C gt 0 BUFFER 1101 R729 K4H561638H UCB3T awe 165 009 M SDA JL106 XCOFDM
2. P CONT i 101 _ 1205 256Mbit 27 X100 A MN fe 32Mbit EP o7MHz RD 065 BOARD 0101 104 BUFFER FLASH ROM X300 U301 20MHz r A mo Rm qom BL un TUNER RDXA ET REGULATOR FU101 RESET SPDIF 313 E 106 10321 i lt SPDIFO_LL 10311 OFDM CONTROLLER SUPER SPDIF SEL DEMODULATOR AGC 7510 7 EMMA SWITCHING REGULATOR SRV 2057EK 22 22 2022 E TXDO LL Bees pum 3 RXDO LL 50 SI SCLK 16200 C200 SDA OPTICAL SCL ADATA 2 AIOBD PICK UP RESET ABCK BLOCK TTA ALRCK AIOL
3. MDO BA DADRSO Mot AM M DADRS1 E 01201 li DADRS3 e 5 um B5 DDR SDRAM DADRS4 i MD5 MD6 01 DADRS6 MD7 y4 D2 DADRS7 5 03 DADRS8 M MD9 wa 4 DADRS9 M TP160 v5 0408510 DADRS11 M 12 2 E5 DADRSI2 ABS F5 DDATAD M MD14 AM F4 015 65 DDATA2 M e DDATAS DADRSG TADRS6 J4 DDATA4 DADRS10 TADRS10 15 DDATAS DDATAG C H5 DDATAZ MM 8 DDATAB MAS DDATA9 DADRS11 TADRS11 MAB 0 DADRS2 TADRS2 e N 1 12 e 3 26 4 87 5 Gt 6 DADRS12 4 TADRS12 TADRS1 2 63 DDATA 8 TBAO TADRS 1 DDATA 9 TBA TADRS9 H3 DDATA2 0 TADRS10 TADRS8 e 7 D9 DDATA2 4 TADRS3 TADRS4 RADDOO GPIOO1 HAD DDATA2 5 Y pot E9 HAD
4. IT CONTROLLER m Replace only with part number specified 10 000 SERIES E 8 10k 0108 JL209 49 DTC124EUA T106 5 M BAK C135 d 7 01 278 6 5 0 127 SK 3 0108 100 25 07 DE DAP202uT106 16V JL210 JL274 ta 0105 PINI 250211481146 5 Er B m 0 MUTE CONTROL a 5 E 5 __ oo gt lt L2 R A L2 LIN 22 i TM T CN105 17 LIN 16 R OU o L OUT 5 5 5 5 5 5 KEY YIN a ne eee um LED PLT V You LED DIVX TO 3 5 Een LED DIVX D TEXIVIN LED A TV SAVE CSYNC FLCLK LED_HDD2 TO FR 274 SCL N SDA CN203 RCSEL1 THROUGHTHE RCSEL2 o FAR 007 BLANK 2 4 26 li 1185 R102 100 FLST B L186 RIO 100 FLDATA L187 R148 100 ALH 2 SWION9V L188 R146 100 P CONT2 L189 R152 0 TO 2 5 ANTV SW DRON CN106 11P FANCTL RFTHRU 11 GND TUON
5. CN201 5 EA2 12 m DENEN B EA4 14 RE FAG 16 17 EA8 EA9 19 ______ EA10 20 8 EA12 R254 7 MA6 10205 RDY IROA MAS re EAM S29GL032A90TFIR30H TC74LCX245FK EL ap RDY IROB MM 1 Iu C am fap 17 Wee Mat He EA22 E LLA22 33 0 1 47 47 36 1 16 5 XRESET FLASH 1257 47 CHIP E Ste 1 5 EDO E RN 16W Shyy D E riis ED1 5 602 CI CONTROL 10201 gt E onim 4 ED5 De EASA ED6 EA20A Easa I ED7 EA21A _____ ED8 46 ED9 47 Eara 1 11 012 50 0207 126 50 DTBR _ m x 14 126 SCL DTBR l sf 1141 0 55 57 ECB EC7 B s
6. CN101 50 171 siaa P175 A RD 065 BOARD 7 7 m E e 47 DVD DRIVE ade P187 amp 46 REF NO 20 000 SERIES 8I P183 W TO 2 7 3 7 4 7 5 7 es gt L105 10uH p E gt 9 08 6405 10V 663 V43D gt e B 8172 3 3k 214 7 EC 79 e gt E OSCEN WIEN ee 5 T 30 29 28 DVD x UNIT mme TP136 TP102 e OSCNT 6110 22 103 21 143 e 20 TP144 TP145 P146 e GNDA P151 Sw 17 gt gt 16 Log Lop Jv 15 Sw2 GNDD EE 14 20 127 9 133 94 220 105 C174 36 ope 47 0 10 9 8 GNDA e RF P161 Har e 220 101001 5 5 NES ii 31 92 130 AV ENC DEC 80 e S4 8139 220 1501 S DVD DRIVER HFONM VOFLD SSODOUT DSROB GPIO46 HFONP VOHSB SSODIN DTROB GPIO45 WRPULSEM VOVSB SSOCKIN RIBOB GPIO44 ST2 WRPULSEP C NOT USE ST2 PKPULSE2 NRZIM D101 lt REMI 1 100 Su PKPULSE2 NRZIP lt RMO ST1 TDRV PKPULSEIM WW lt TO 4 7 PKPULSEIP 51 N Di
7. L4 VIDEO DECODER 1018 C1004 R1018 50 50 REF NO 40 000 SERIES 1 330 01006 5 04 2506408111068 BUFFER YIN 2 rit JL1017 149 81034 __ 1026 28A1576A T106 QR 50 0 50 680 C1001 01001 50 11005 61109 61110 E E 2 E 2 E 2SA1576A T106 OR 74 256408171068 1000 28238382 A Fle ee BUFFER 50 R1058 1066 1068 1070 1074 E 752 108 C R IN AW a lt R1002 K JL1016 81059 1 6 14 m TL TL WW __ 1025 Eug JL1216 2 E C1108 STREAM 7 STREAM 7 OOODCODCOCCCOOCO O 0O000 0000 0000 C CC 20100 9 c1019 5 STREAM 6 STREAM 6 61002 81019 gt 552 2 lt 5 2 g EES 330 He 855 ES ESRBESRERSERBRBEERESRBRBRERBEtS S8RB38 8588 STREAMS 01007 5 5 S 9 gt 01003 5 0 250408111068 4 STREAM 4 3 BUFFER 25 1576 1106 2 9 23 7 DVDD10 DVRs STREAM 3 G IN G BPF 403 STREAM 3 81003 0 0 11015 C1106 C1058 DYMI ROY8 01085 7 10 106 01058 1 STREAM 2 22 2 0 STREAM 2 ve Y 006 Rova R1035 01927 STREAM 1 STREAM 1 T pb T T 088 Rovio ss 0 1 000 0 DCR
8. 10 RDR HXD870 HXD970 HXD1070 TP1005 HIOCS16B VIDEO SIGNAL RXD2 BRIDGE AUDIO TXD2 BRIDGE bs TP1004 CHROMA Y Y CHROMA SIGNAL D DASPB ATOADRO gt gt ATOADR2 LL 8 8 2 5 8 BIB N cc CN5604 ATIADR2 m ATIADRO R5623 ATIADRI i rA HDD F R5626 6 02 UNIT ATIDMACK R5627 SATA BRIDGE ATIIORDY i E 105602 AGNDI m 88SA8040 TBC1C000 e AVDDH ATIDIOR B3053 z 85630 E ATIDMARQ ue X5502 25MHz ATIDIOR 5 ri MODE ATIDATAO gt ATIIORDY ex lt MODEO 22 PORN lt XRESET ATIADRI T0 2 7 3 7 4 7 7 7 33 H 4 1 7 GNDD 2 VHIR8 SS z 5 L d 3 RD 065 5 7 4 37 4 38 RDR HXD870 HXD970 HXD1070 For Schematic Diagram Refer to page 4 55 for printed wiring board RD 065 BOARD 6 7 HDMI DV USB BLOCK A REF NO 20 000 SERIES 01001 4 5 AV
9. Exit Divide Erase Move Combine pue 6 Select a chapter using gt and press ENTER Select Move and press ENTER Select a new location for the chapter using lt gt and press ENTER The chapter moves to the new location 97 98 100 Dubbing HDD DVD Before Dubbing HDD In this section dubbing refers to copying a recorded title on the internal hard disk drive HDD to another disc or vice versa You can dub a playing title using the HDD DVD DUB button see HDD DVD Dubbing page 99 or you can select to dub multiple titles all at once see Dubbing Using Dubbing List page 100 You can also dub an entire DVD disc to make a backup copy see Making a Backup Disc DVD Backup on page 103 Before you start read the following precautions which are common to all dubbing methods If you want to record from a digital video camera connected to the DV IN jack see DV Camcorder Dubbing on page 104 To record from equipment connected to the LINE IN jacks see Recording from Connected Equipment on page 79 Before you start You cannot record both the main and sub sound on the HDD when HDD Recording Format is set to Video Mode in the Recording setup DVD RWs DVD RWs Video mode DVD Rs or DVD Rs Video mode For bi
10. SSS DVDD33G3V 5 9 4 7 xo ponr ix Output of H lock clock for video decoder SST km He voos Powersupply input 63V frv EO km FCVDD3 Powersupply 63V SSS km 0 Output of FSC for video decoder 2 Km Powersupply 0VforVDEQ SSS 12 14 smoor O 16 Powersuppty npu 0v rbi DgmGND Lu DVDDMGG3V Powersupply input O O Powersupply input O O Oo DVDDMG3V Powers Lis DVDDMG3V Powersupply input O oO Oo 1m NM 1m 5 1m ADLVDDS Powersupply LM o Me PLLOND Mio TESTMODE FnedaGND MH MB INSOWD Mi DVDDMG3V Powersupply input O oO Mi DVDDMG3V Mis DVDDMG3V Powersupply 7 Mx wm O Output of ROWGIOaddes TI ADLOND 22 Ni
11. Opening Foreign Markets Mornin 2 Hobbles and Interests EFF News J weather Family Houses 2 information available Q Your recorder will automatically begin recording when the programme starts To modify the timer setting see page 60 Some examples of timer event icon types are G red Indicates that the whole programme is set to be recorded grey Indicates that the programme 15 set to be recorded using Series Recording page 57 To scroll the EPG display by page Page mode Press PAGE while the EPG display 15 turned on to display the previous next eight channels Record to Sets the recording destination If there is not enough available DVD disc space for the recording the recorder automatically records the programme to the HDD even if you select DVD Recovery Recording Recording Mode Sets the recording mode page 52 VPS PDC Sets the VPS PDC function See the VPS PDC function For analogue broadcasting only below Update Sets the recorder automatically replacing the previous timer recording with the new one Link page 58 Series Recording page 57 To enter a title name select Set Title Name and press ENTER page 42 If you make a mistake
12. Album Size 999 001 13 00 6 05 2007 4 Photos Elephant 1280x768 128KB 002 13 30 6 05 2007 A Giraffe 1280x768 128KB 003 13 44 6 05 2007 Bear 1280x768 128KB 15 03 6 05 2007 1280x768 128KB 1 Photo List 1 E Photo Album Album Size 999MB HDD Remain 226 5G 1 Album name Album size To rotate an image Press ANGLE repeatedly during a slideshow Each time you press ANGLE the image turns clockwise by 90 Hint You can start slideshow by selecting Start Slideshow from the sub menu Sub menu Press to display sub menu The sub menu displays options applicable only to the selected item The displayed options differ depending upon the model situation and disc type Photo Album HDD File Zoo Start Slideshow 001 Elephant Start Audio Slideshow 12 Photos 002 Giraffe File Options 003 Bear 5 Print 004 Lon to DVD 005 Ostrich Detailed Information Multi Mode 006 Monkey 007 Calf 008 Koala 009 Swan 010 Gorilla A 011 Hippopotan 012 Kangaroo Sub menu 4 Scroll bar Appears when all of the JPEG image files do not fit on the list To view the hidden JPEG image files press 5 Album
13. 0751 752 12101 VDD 16101 VDD DET jo eub uL uA c t p RFTHRU 1 43 FANCTL TUON 1 TUON 60 SWVION9V i SWVIONSV 81 cci 101 P_CONT 52 SWVIONSV 15MHz SWVIONSV 6 oy 1 102 102 1 5 DCCON 7 1 POWER FAIL DET 1 2 IN our 1 POWER BLOCK DIAGRAM xau 02 2 2 32 768kHz hi DET ANT 87 CN105 FLPON SDET2 soe 9 num 2 6 f RESE 0 0 0 4 3 poses E RCSEL2 pse 97 uma 8 En BLANK LED D 99 LED DIVX 39 FUNC ON LED PLTV SU 2265 53 7 f 17 2 7 19 BUFFER KEY3 S gt 19 m 7 XRST DAM TO T HSM TO T DAT TO M ASCK HST TO M Q110 112 Q103 105 SAMUTE SAMUTE CONTROL V45R8E AMUTE1 CN101 2 2 77 1 TXD1 DBGPO 6 2 8 DT TUON ANTSV SW DET ANT P CONT2 RST XRST1 DAM HSM DAT TO M ASCK HST TO M DDC SW1 HPD DSDA DSCL CEC AMUTE1 X525P CN103 FOR CHECK DT 120 BOARD CN103 2 2 SEE PAGE 3 5 TO FROM FR 274 BOARD
14. com Ex o Pe ES 555 47 Mp 1609 7 ae C 0302 R304 8305 117 306 4 303 318 ae MER 17 2 __ 2197 60 O10 5 3 22 amma m ie ej gt Q o 12 ON R425 ORO S Om 5 245552605 UT gl m R323 5 lt lt OF 4 12 ks L ES om 10101 10102 10103 10104 1401 16402 1403 16601 gt e ole O Co 0101 0102 0103 0104 0105 0108 0110 0111 0112 0301 0303 0304 0401 0402 0403 0404 0406 0407 0408 0410 0411 0413 0506 0507 0604 0605 9669 150 851 9 ne zu ess moo KO at R Be p 020 20 2 P O ete 82 REBERCE T ZLINKS AS ATTENT
15. 9 15 jacks 19 22 3 LINE I DECODER jack 31 4 G LINK jack 17 15 Country Area Code For details see page 145 Number Area Code 0118 Argentina ar 0121 Australia au 0120 Austria at 0205 Belgium be 0218 Brazil br 0301 Canada ca 0312 Chile cl 0314 China cn 0411 Denmark dk 0609 Finland fi 0618 France fr 0405 Germany de 0811 Hong Kong hk 0914 India in 0904 Indonesia id 0920 Italy it 1016 Japan jp 1118 Korea kr 1 ANALOG AERIAL IN OUT jacks 2 LINE 2 OUT R AUDIO L VIDEO 5 DIGITAL AERIAL IN OUT jacks 6 HDMI OUT high definition multimedia interface out jack 19 22 DIGITAL OUT COAXIAL jack 22 AC IN terminal 23 9 LINE 3 TV jack 19 LINE 2 OUT S VIDEO jack 19 11 COMPONENT VIDEO OUT Y Pr Cr jacks 19 Number Area Code 1325 Malaysia my 1324 Mexico mx 1412 Netherlands nl 1426 New Zealand nz 1415 Norway no 1611 Pakistan pk 1608 Philippines ph 1620 Portugal pt 1821 Russia ru 1907 Singapore sg 0519 Spain es 1905 Sweden se 0308 Switzerland ch 2023 Taiwan tw 2008 Thailand th 0702 United Kingdom gb 2119 USA us 1 41 Language Code List For details see page 140 The language spellings conform to the ISO 639 1988 E F standard Number Language code 0101 Afar aa 0102 Abkhazian ab 0106 Afrikaans af 0113 Amha
16. 71 15050 IE S 5 nO MW CO CO 4 4 KR lt O 30 ET 8 04586 16 1 POWER BLOCK BLOCK VIDEO AUDIO BLOCK MEMORY BLOCK SATA IDE IF HDMI DV USB BLOCK DVD DRIVE RD 065 5 Uses unleaded solder e B R106 T 44 UP 4 SOON o 6 We 9 NL 1 EN SA ES 2 E EP o Ar C hd ES at NOS vee 0 188 m EI 4 ER 4 J RDR HXD870 HXD970 HXD1070 RD 065 BOARD SIDE B tr Uses unleaded solder RD 065 BOARD SIDE B CN101 3 CN103 2 CN501 4 CN502 5 CN601 5 CN3801 4 CN5101 E 2 CN5201 60 2 hm inn infi T du 7 jij 045 04544 Tait 84541 z 04571 F4 1200 16201 16501 11102 11201 101301 103101 103702 14531 14541 164561 14571 14701 164702 164703 165103 05701 M U rm 9 gt 00 nO gt 0102 01801 0
17. Weather Family City Houses Tennis No information available e Jump e Search 2 Selecta programme using 4 9 gt 3 Press the red button The date start and stop times programme position recording mode etc settings appear 10 30SUN 25 11 Date Extend SUN 25 11 Off Detailed Settings Record Set Details Recording Mode VPS PDC Z Update Cancel Genre No Category EPG Link On Series Recording Off VPS PDC 0 8 Set Title Name 4 Select Set Details and press ENTER 5 Set Series Recording to On and press 6 RETURN 6 Select and press ENTER The selected programme is set for recording and appears in the Timer List page 60 The other programmes in the series will be set for recording appear in the Timer List as each previous recording is completed For example if there are three programmes in a series the second programme will be set for recording only after the first recording is finished The third programme will be set for recording only after the second recording is finished You can search for link programmes using Series Search page 58 Ajuo 51950 104 13W L gt continued 57 98 60 EPG Link
18. o P100 TEST MODE FPIND n 1000 AV 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 ES i i i i o O io i i G io 5 5 5 5 S qox 2 mw 22 2S eL eh 8 eb 19 719 f 0 5 55 GO 5 5 5 515 5 515 D D iD 5 55 iD 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 95 5 5 SM 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 8 11005 a a a gt 15uH va gt gt O V42R5 1 7 vaan gt V 1R5_IN 6400 1009 C1010 1062 C1063 C1064 1065 C1007 1008 01059 1060 1061 61014 1012 1013 01066 01067 61068 1011 01048 01050 1048 C037 1023 61022 C 1021 220 1 0 17 1000 1000 220 1 1 0 1 1000 1000 100 1 0 1 1000 1000p 000p 1 100 1000 00 1000 10 Y 6 6 16V 50V 50V A 6 6 3V 16V 50V 50V AV 6 3V 6 16V 50V 50V V 63V 4V 50V 63V V 10V 55 X6S F 55 65 5 X6S F 65 XOS XS EMMA BLOCK RD 065 2 7 4 31 4 32 X525P AMUTE ADPOW ADCCLKO DACCLKO AILRCKO AIBCKO AIBDO 22 AOLRCK 232RST gt SPDIFO LL YOUT COUT PR ROUT Y GOU T PB BOUT C RI BI Gl X525P AMUTE ADP
19. gt 7 lt i E rJ a 27 0 suoljesadg 215 9 10613 gt continued 5 46 48 6 Select Screen and press ENTER For DVD RW DVD R VR mode the recorder starts finalising the disc Go to step 9 7 DVD RW DVD RW Video mode DVD R DVD R Video mode only Select a title menu style and press ENTER The menu appears in the selected title menu style when the menu or menu for a DVD RW DVD R is selected on the DVD equipment 8 DVD RW DVD RW Video mode DVD R DVD R Video mode only Select Yes and press ENTER The recorder starts finalising the disc 9 Press SYSTEM MENU to exit 6 Hint You can check whether the disc has been finalised or not Press DISPLAY after step 1 page 40 Notes Depending on the condition of the disc recording or the DVD equipment discs may not play even if the discs are finalised The recorder not be able to finalise disc if it was recorded on another recorder Inserting an unfinalised disc into other DVD equipment may damage the recorded contents When using a DVD RW you can edit or record on the disc even after finalising However the title menu will not be displayed Finalise the disc again to display the title menu Unfinalising a disc
20. 1416 1408 22 JTSEL SP1DAT6 GPIO18 1307 1409 DINT 2 SP1DAT GPIO19 TP1414 3 e C122 615 2200 Mis AF18 C127 X 947769 3 3k 19 10V EXIT Md E AW CTS1B TTXRO GPIO41 1402 ABI ARI TP1412 413 TC74VHC125FK m 2 425 232RST C136 TP131 C1 001 XRESET fy 1 5 6800p AEI6 AV ENC DEC TOV 144 ies CBHLPPICRAPC qa B 16V CBHWBLCID 101001 C146 MC10050F1 105 LU1 A F 10 1 10 0 33 1 AE15 93V C148 0 33 AE14 3i TH I mu 6 3V GWAGC gs cus 5 AFI2 0 01 11 CADO 16V 16 6107 AG13 R104 B AJ16 M 4700 11 AHIS 90V 41000 15 16V G T B 14 5 Boss C116 C120 0 0 1 10V Ev 5 F al cis cise 159 0154 6153 11001 AJ2 R274 220 1 0 1 1000p 1000p 011 1 10 0 A 6 3V 16V 50V 50V 16V 6 3V AN 167 9 C117 C100 X6S F B B F X6S 10006 000 H E 11004 TO 7 7 X 6 GNDS o Q102 go BU Ry TP 50V 118 AGIT 01051 1 01052 10V T 6 3 XS TP119 A720 TEO LE SWRF1 SWRF3 RFP6 24 FEO LE SWRF2 SWRFA RFPS 9 ADIN LE RFP4 7128 123 22 TPG120
21. 50V AVDD1 ROY12 ATS1 13 1 5 DVDD1J 01086 5 AVDD3A DGND7 ATS3 ROFDIE AGND1 FCLK8 78 mi gt AN C1 DVDDII 9 i 1 4 C1104 8 C1033 01043 46 VCLY RGRED 78 1055 2119 0 01 C1044 16V 1 5 H 25V 0 1 RSTB 74 CXRESET B 16V AVI SLAO 73 11 lt i id gt ii emm ox IC1002 ia 1 1001 o ls a SDRAM lt 101002 HY57V161610FTP 6DR C 3 3 16302 MM1563DFBE ACY VIDEO DECODER AGNDA4 69 VRTI 1 1001 se 6 1088 1096 0 C1037 16V 3 3 65 04 DN ACS UPD64015AGM UEU A 16V DRDOO C1061 AVDD3B AGNDAS 66 ET AVDD3C 10CB 51051 3 3 SV 9 0 157 ADDA 64 85 1 TO 4 5 16319 S 1112B50MC L7JTFG o co co co 080015 2563 PX 26 o lo j lo 158 asc AGNDA2
22. Input of serial flash interface data Output of serial flash command address AVDDiS Powersupply input Analog SV S Lapis Powersupply iput Analog3 3V Papi __ Powersupply Lapis AVDD33 Powersupply iput Analog3 3V AVDD3S Powersupply input Analog33V _ _ SPIERRB FeeaGND Lap 6 FmdaGND FmdaGND cass 0 Output of buffer memory interface column address strove connol Caes mao Output of buffer memory interface address bus Input output of digital video data 2 5 4 RLDM W AEIO WLDM _ _ AER _ __ _ _ AE18 CBHLPP CRAP LAEH CBHLPPCRAPC A4 A3 B4 Bl LD D BC RC C Pinno o LAE semara Input output of digital video data 1 ani Output of butter memory interface 2 E PES ie EM weno Ea ye E des E EA EN e Less E
23. po 212 208 ABCK SEE PAGE 3 7 11 13 5456 204 202 000 57 59 60 62 166 165 0 29 32 190 187 RXD1B T 312 r 6101 35 40 DADRSO 12 TXD1B RDXA C RDXA 3 5 DM 1 5 193 192 DBAO DBA1 BITE CK CK 171 170 DCLK DCLKB ATX SPDIF e mm 5 8 1 5 m d RSTSWB Ja RESET 197 DRASB 3 309 196 170 27 200 169 3 5 1005 0005 201 167 0050 0051 97 94 91 90 STREAMO 7 n GCCBO x CET AV 114 BOARD PPORT23 302 2 2 3 4 15 RD DIR MDC1 WR STR MDC3 MDC6 MDC2 MDC4 MDCS IC205 MDC10 32Mbit 1001 M FLASH ROM 161001 VIDEO 2 5 DECODER MDC 2 5 5 Abbreviation 38 40424 AUS Australian model 39 41 4345 202 2 5 5149046042 A N 23568 9 BUFFER 508000 40136 3430 ib 4 31353741 52100015 12124546 43 47 50 52 RDATADIS SDRAO 19 18 42 0 10 ael 21002 SDRAM RADDO SDRABP 5 5 SDRWE SDRRAS SDRRAS 208 2 5 50506 7 SW SDRCKE 203 204 2 5 i LATCH 713 26
24. Q 0602 3 O 0603 3 MD Ble gt lt gt 0606 85 TO E NM gt 0751 1304 0752 F 6 A gt 6 24 8 _ 4 6 e D103 O 077 222 0 0 ati 4 AO LO m 201 IES 24297 ONCE O OMEOM b x 2 1 Q 531 O O OU O e J 55 Gee Wye 75O C CONTACT UPPER SIDE 0 oooo oooo oooo oooood 666 5 00000000000000000000 Oo 0000000 l Orossoo R197 R198 C463 e 2 3 4 5 7 CONTROLLER IR POWER FAN CONT VIDEO AUDIO EURO TUNER 4 49 AV 114 RDR HXD870 HXD970 HXD1070 DT 120 BOARD SIDE A ar Uses unleaded solder eg e m c dris 3 5 H fe Di 0 1040 Ini gt ra C10 C106 dL be o 7 07 Yao Li VN LE O Xu Cu e 25 3 E T LE 08 us He is D n B eio Eble V 000000300008 16 1 2 3 4 9 1 9 9 DT 120 BOARD S
25. 0 232RST AD 2 AILRCKO TC74VHCOOFT EKJ RB501V 40TE 17 R3344 330 XRESET x0 SVDIN lt 103701 SPDIF 0 2 7 4 7 6 7 717 TC7WH34FU TE12R 63703 232RST G DAT TO M pART 2 i 4 05701 HST TO M SPDIFO LL 2SC4154TP 1EF DIGITAL OPUT E5701 O s TC7SHOSFU TSRSOVIE OUH 9701 SIGNAL PATH 85703 T al oT 9 Medo i od 4 VIDEO SIGNAL num 0 596 50V ere AUDIO Ct 150 8 C3701 L CHROMA Y Y CHROMA SIGNAL BURREN C5707 C5705 C5708 C5702 C5706 ae gt gt 1 1000 220 1 1000 SWP gt gt 22 i AND GATE VIDEO AUDIO BLOCK 4 33 4 34 RD 065 3 7 RDR HXD870 HXD970 HXD1070 For Schematic Diagram Refer to page 4 55 for printed wiring board RD 065 BOARD 4 7 MEMORY BLOCK 101001 2 5 A REF NO 20 000 SERIES MC10050E1 05 LUT A Am Am N w Am N D 55 w m N D AM
26. 0206 8207 9 6k AUDIO STZ6 8N T146 5212 ciu G REC Y CHROMA SIGNAL re 0207 LI STZ6 8N T146 G X Wh am ns um FL DRIVER LINE 2 IN FUNCTION SW 4 25 4 26 FR 274 RDR HXD870 HXD970 HXD1070 DV USB REMOCON RECEIVER POWER SW FL 178 4 27 For Schematic Diagram Refer to page 4 59 for printed wiring board FL 178 BOARD DV USB REMOCON RECEIVER POWER SW 30 000 SERIES CN101 6P JL101 TBN 6 E JL1 0 _ 5 RD 065 JL103 BOARD 6 7 4 CN5101 THROUGHTHE E 8 RV 003 HARNESS 2 JL105 TAN 1 4 40 FL102 C102 L104 1 00 8109 33 0 VFB 2 11 Bridge USB Ee d B type CN102 3 4 Li JL108 i D USBDP 1 JL107 GND 5 A Wr A USBDM 1 u GND 4 00 1110 RD 065 V45USB J BOARD 6 7 i 5 e L102 CN5201 USBVEB 33 THROUGHTHE rt 0 RV 001 HARNESS 1 GND 8 R104 m SEE PAGE TE 33 GND USB Ut 4 40 dd 105 type GND 101 REMOTO CONTROL RECEIVER 10101 GP1UM27XKOSF R112 0 ONE TOUCH DUB
27. Mt MANUAL INSTRUCTION DUTCH AEP1 MANUAL INSTRUCTION DANISH AEP2 MANUAL INSTRUCTION MANUAL INSTRUCTION MANUAL INSTRUCTION MANUAL INSTRUCTION SWEDISH AEP2 FINNISH AEP2 DUTCH AEP2 ENGLISH AUS Ae The components identified by mark or dotted line with mark are critical for safety Replace only with part number specified 203 RDR HXD870 HXD970 HXD1070 Sony Corporation 9 883 952 12 Home Electronics Network Company 2 204 Published by Quality Assurance Dept Heverse 988395212 pdf Revision History ome at 2007 05 Official Release 6 10 1 1 2007 10 Revised 1 Change of repair parts list RDR HXD870 HXD970 HXD1070 of Australian model Nm Change of service note Page 7 through Page 11 Change of block diagrams Change of schematic diagrams and printed wiring boards Change of service mode Pages 6 6 6 9 and
28. ea SOS vss voos 9 pars Ckmemid 5 9 9 OOO 3 marv Nowe 9 noos 9 amp O OwpwofssaldmasipmltENCDECICS SSS 99 1 _ Input of seriat data signal from ENCDECICS 0 NN o m AUN 5 2 5 2 AV ENCODER DECODER 1C1001 MC10050F1 105 LU1 A RD 65 BOARD Pinno __ Dg rasp 0 Dappor O Output of DDRSDRAM adres 0 As I O Input output of DDRSDRAM data 13 bmw Notopento public O Notopen to public O S S S S AB Notopento public O _ AM Notopento public O AI Notopen topublic O SS SOS Ais Not open to public O Output of vertical schronizaon 11111111 Am AB DALGND Fixed at L 15095 Output of DA converter for analog video signal red Output of DA converter for analog video signal blue 6 7 8 9 10 1 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 Y 2 2 5 n 5 4 LDQM
29. EC9 EA10A EA9A zl 04 E EC10 F um ____ ms M 12 SDA DTBR DTA143EUA T106 Ec anum LL 5 gt CI TPS 0 ami Sm a ES CLIPS 2 DTC124EUA T106 CLIPS 4 SWITCH GUTER CL TPS 4 CI 5 5 1810 58 250408171068 CLTPS 6 CLIPS 6 Q 7511 8 SWITCH qms 0 1 5 1811 TI 8 1512 1512 LIPS 9 CI TPS 9 CI TPS 10 151 3 TPS 10 181 3 0 181 4 1514 1515 Qe 181 5 10208 27 2 4 2 ST890BDR 27MHZ 89 181 6 181 6 RESET gt 0 2 a RESET BU FRASH NEG 151 8 XRESET_FRASH TS1_8 SW 151 9 151 9 AEP1 151 10 18110 UK AUS 3 n 5 56 D 5V gt gt E GNDD CI CONTROL 4 17 4 18 DT 120 2 5 RDR HXD870 HXD970 HXD1070 For Schematic Diagram Refer to page 4 4 for waveform Refer to page 4 51 for printed wiring board MM1689FHBE F 40 1 DT 120 BOARD 3 5 19907 VW v 0 1 SWITCH CO 2V R674R673 DIGITAL TUNER a 2 of 30 C341 d A REF NO 40 000 SERIES 5 T 1 I R305 4 Oud C392 22 wW T B UNE m 5
30. Powersupply in DVDDNQSV Powersupply input DVDDISQSV PFowrsphyapt O oo 70 OUT 5 8 CO Em 5 2018 Input output of DDRSDRAM data 18 DvbbosQsv Pewerapbyipt 5 5 reaa S ea Fixed at L Input output of DDRSDRAM data 20 Input output of DDRSDRAM data 7 H6 VRBC DVDD25 2 5V EDINT Power supply input Input of EJTAG DINT Input of EJTAG reset JTRST HLCI Input of H lock clock for video decoder Fixed at L Power supply input 3 3V for ADC AD2_ GND GND for ADC DDQM2 Output of data mask 2 vcome Es Input output of data strobe 2 EN E EN AD2 VDD3 Input output of DDRSDRAM data 23 Input output of DDRSDRAM data 4 Input output of DDRSDRAM data 5 Power supply input Input of EJTAG clock Power supply input 1 0V for V DEC GND for V DEC Ki Powersupply input 0VforPLL Output of PWM X4 0 Output of PWM for 27MHiz VCXO I Xs smckour 0 xs Dal OOO
31. gt The disc is upside down Insert the disc with the labelled side facing up gt The disc is not correctly inserted gt Moisture has condensed inside the recorder In this case if the recorder is on leave it on if it is off leave it off for about an hour until the moisture evaporates gt Ifthe disc was recorded on another recorder and was not finalised page 45 the recorder cannot play the disc The recorder does not start playback from the beginning gt Resume play was activated page 81 gt You have inserted a DVD whose Title menu or DVD menu automatically appears on the TV screen when it is first inserted Use the menu to start playback The recorder starts playing automatically gt The DVD VIDEO features an auto playback function Playback stops automatically gt Ifthe DVD has an auto pause signal the recorder stops playback at the auto pause signal Some functions such as Stop Search or Slow motion Play cannot be performed gt Depending on the DVD you may not be able to do some of the operations above See the instruction manual supplied with the disc The language for the sound track cannot be changed gt Multilingual tracks are not recorded on the DVD being played gt The DVD VIDEO prohibits the changing of the language for the sound track gt Try changing the language using the DVD VIDEO s menu You dubbed a title but the title did not
32. 3 5 3 6 RDR HXD870 HXD970 HXD1070 3 4 RD 065 BLOCK DIAGRAM RD 065 BOARD DVD 001 2 7 4 7 to 7 7 OPTICAL AV ENC DEC Pt CN4701 4701 2 7 CARE AHT WZEN W2EN AED 8 9 12 AE21 AD24 VIODO PKPULSEP2P W3EN PKPULSEP2M STREAMO 7 8 AF23 AD23 W1EN WIEN C RN 4702 2 7 pa LDDEN E i E B22 AIOBD PA3 D puso ds cn om 9 NE ENS 6 2 gt 3 AIOLRCK PB5 SEE PAGE 3 6 RF RF E REN AH12 BE SDA VDEC 9 8 52 53 54 S AJ23 2301 3301 3302 PAS EUN Y AUS only cuatro 6 ET 03305 3306 B nd G IN 023 500 2 E gt VREFIO Em 2 E 2 6 i V43A a n BE NM VAB TDRV COIL DANE ihe ice env a 800501 al REF16 42 SPINDLE pm 103101 20 97 jue RD me OP o HT oid anon ko gt 1
33. 3 min 15 45 sec SEP Approx Approx Approx 1 60 3 min 1 The values in the above table are for reference only Actual times for dubbing also require time for creating disc s control information and other data This is the maximum recording speed of this recorder The recording speed cannot exceed the value indicated in the above table even when using discs that support higher recording speeds In addition depending on the disc condition the recorder may be unable to record at the maximum recording speed indicated in the table High speed dubbing is not available when dubbing titles recorded in SEP SLP or EP mode to DVD RWs DVD Rs 2 lt 99 lt gt urgana continued 1 01 To titles on the Dubbing List 1 Follow steps 1 to 7 of Dubbing Using Dubbing List on page 100 The Title Edit display appears Q Notes The Dubbing List you created remains after dubbing To edit the existing Dubbing List select Use Previous Dubbing List in step 4 The Dubbing List is cleared when Making a Backup Disc DVD Backup 10 Select Yes or and press ENTER To erase the backup data on the HDD select Yes you change Input Line System setting in the To make another backup disc later select Basic setup page 130 you reset the recorder page 158 you o
34. I Input of line 2 S video detection signal EN __ 26 AVOUT 0 Oupuofnlinkswichsigna 0 ___ 27 SDA 10 Inpuvoutput of TIC data signal o 28 5 0 Ouputof IC clock signal 0404 29 XRESET O Oumutofsysemresetsigna for EUROMSP _30__ ies M ES 35 36 E 38 EN gt ES Lum Em L9 EN 8 E EA EN 8 140 EH 5 o M BATTDET ART Output select signal 2 Nc 5 1 RFTARU O Output of tuner power supply contol sigl NC Pew ES E o EN Outputof FLD grid power supply on signal o P NN e NN Ee MUTECTL CSYNCN 1 Input of C synchronizaion eomposte video ignal pecon of tuner power supply convoi siga of serial TXD signal Output of seriat RXD signat 11 orus S osa eaa 36 ANISV SW Output of system power supply contol signal
35. Newel Am svi 5 Am Newel OSS ADS WREMSWRENREE 5 Output of negative cock for DDRSDRAM _ m m B4 0 Oupurof DDRSDRAM addres Bs pappo Output of DDRSDRAM address 3 Be VO ipwwpwofDDRSDRAMdma i B 10 Inpuvouput of DDRSDRAM daa i5 m Doo IO Tapuvoutput of DDRSDRAM dita 9 7 5 6 m ooms Bi Notopento public _ Ouputof yO Bi Not opento public 0 7 Not opento public 0 Owtputof awa OO Not opento public 0 Bis Notopento public 0 Bi6 Not opento public Output of HDMITDMS consol SSS Powersupply G3V forba SOS Ouipu of DA converter for video signal chrominane Ouipu of DA converter for analog video signal green COMM 0 Ouiputof postive clockforDDRSDRAM SSS WEB Outpucofcommandwriteenable SSCS O Out of DDRSDRAMchipselet 0 7 OwpwofDDRSDRAMaMmw papper O OwpworDDRSDRAMaMmw 2010 Input output DDRSDRAM data ideo s ip select 0 1
36. To clear the check mark press ENTER again To clear all check marks select Single Mode 9 Repeat step 8 to select all of the albums or JPEG image files you want to copy 10 Press gt The sub menu appears 11 Select and press ENTER 12 Select the destination album using and press ENTER To cancel select Q Note Albums or JPEG image files are not copied to the HDD in the following cases when the HDD disc space is insufficient for copying when there are already the maximum number of files and or albums on the HDD 120 Connecting the USB device You can connect a USB device digital still camera Memory card reader and USB memory to the USB jack on the recorder to view JPEG image files or copy to the HDD Refer to the operating instructions supplied with the USB device before connecting DVD recorder s 1S 0 009 aD to USB jack rep USB cable not supplied USB output Digital still camera pe Signal flow Copying JPEG image files to the HDD DISC USB HDD 1 Insert a disc that you are going to copy to the HDD or connect the USB device to the USB jack on the recorder 2 Press SYSTEM MENU The System Menu appears 3 Select Photo Album and press ENTER The Photo Album menu appears Copying JPEG image albums to a disc
37. Um O Output of ROWGIO addres 7 Vi ATIDIORB 7 UO JO DGND Digital GND Output of data 09 for IDE I F 0009 ATODO04 ATOINTRQ Output of INTRQ signal for IDE I F EN Ew 70 EN E o Output of a o ATORESETB O O Output of DMC ACK signal forIDEVF lO Oo wo 55 5 12 Pinno o Output of chip select signal 1 for IDE Output chip select signal 0 for IDE I F O Output of data 14 for IDE I F wn o Vo Vo Vo Vo Le xu Yu AND vis SPoREQBIGPIONS LX mm o mappe vn Rab xu wb o 5 13 5 14 RDR HXD870 HXD970 HXD1070 SECTION 6 SERVICE MODE Prepairing for Service tool Color monitor Service remote controller Part code J 6090 203 A OPEN CLOSE button Number button 10 button FRM TIM button CHAP button ESC button DISP button CX button STILL STEP button SIDE A button CHAPTER SKIP but
38. ee CN103 e 9 164502 0502 11 11 CN1401 5 5 nec e e FOR CHECK 6501 amp ga CN201 T CN4501 14501 1C4511 1 7 Q601 SW 1 5V SWITCHING REGULATOR DT 120 BOARD REG 1 5V REG R223 SHUNT REG V 3D AM CN201 FOR CHECK 0302 5 5 1 5V REG 1001 1203 1 AV ENC DEC T a pm plume ARD prm gt COUPLER IC601 4521 1 7 USB L um 2 5V REG USB H OCIO 4 7 5 5 1 320 gl 5 5 1C320 22071 4 DECODER 5 5 16201 200 1102 64Mbit SDRAM EEPROM 64Mbit FLASH ROM 300 4 5 4 7 4 7 4 7 i 5 5 2 REG m V43D H AV 114 BOARD 4701 4703 3701 3702 ig PM D103 V45V BUFFER BUFFER AND GATE esd a enm E vesc n 2 7 8 7 8 7 Led m P CONT P CONT BACK UP T 101 3201 3202 3101 IT CONTROLLER AUDIO DAC AUDIO LPF AUDIO ADC 1 5 3 7 3
39. 2 1 UPPER CASE 4 Upper case 2 Tapping screw 8 Three screws special front point screw D 1 Tapping screw 2 2 TRAY COVER ASSEMBLY 2 gt m Ss SSK 25 SG 2 Open the tray lt 3 A claws D The stiff wire 4 Tray cover assembly 2 2 2 3 FRONT PANEL SECTION D Three claws 8 Front panel section 2 4 FR 274 BOARD FL 178 BOARD 9 Connector 10 4 Connector 6 CN102 CN101 2 The wire pin that holds except GX350 the harness is set up RON 6 FL 178 board D Flexible flat cable 2 Three screws FLR 012 5core Flexible flat cable 17core CN203 Flexible flat cable 11core CN202 FR 274 board 2 3 2 5 DVD DRIVE Four screws 6 Harness 7p 5 Connector 13p 5604 201 5 Two screws BV3 4 Connector 4p CN203 02 Two screws PSW3 x 6 63 Clamp L35 04 1 Remove harness 4501 01 5101 25 DVD drive Screw P3 Connector 10 9 Screw CN5201 Screw x 4 8 Connector 6p CN101 4 Six screws 2 Connector 10p CN102 3 Screw x 4 except GX350 CD The wire that holds the harness is set up qi T lt lt li
40. 2 Selecta title and press The sub menu appears m gt e gt a 7 5 i i i J rJ a continued 39 Hints When Screen Display is set to default in the Options setup page 149 information automatically appears on the screen when the recorder is operated To increase disc space see To open up disc space page 92 Q Note Playing time of MP3 audio tracks may not be displayed correctly 9 21529 14014 GAG 42 44 5 Changing the Name of a Recorded Programme HDD You can label a DVD title or programme by entering characters You can enter up to 64 characters for a title recorded in the HDD DVD RW DVD R VR mode 40 characters for a title recorded in the DVD RW DVD RW Video mode DVD R DVD R Video mode but the actual number of characters displayed in the menus such as the Title List will vary The steps below explain how to change the name of the recorded programme Number buttons 0000 C CLEAR TITLE LIST S Bx EXIT d RETURN 4 gt gt 9 1 Press TITLE LIST 2 Select a title and press gt The sub menu appears 3 Select Edit
41. RESET EAR 210 002 XCI 5 EAQ XCI VCC 5V D 001 EA10 XRESET FLASH G XRESET FLASH mee 29 gt FAI 2 27MHz EAN gt 13 EA12 gt EAD CL TPS 0 14 EA13 CL TPS 0 Gis gt FAIS PS 1 14 3 2 5 TPS 2 15 EAS CI TPS 3 cans EA16 m P CI TPS 4 CLTPS 4 17 EA17 5 gt cag _ 1020 TPS 6 TPS 6 EA19 gt Eno CL TPS 7 EA20 TPS 8 oss gt FA20 _TPS_ 21 5 9 uU P CLTPS 10 E22 gt LLA22 gt EDO EDO EDI EDI F106 F103 gt 02 QO E gt 03 04 gt EDS gt 5 ED6 D42 5V 06 ED7 gt Es ro gt ED9 ED9 ED10 ED10 vis gt EDI gt EDI gt 2 ED13 gt 014 gt 015 015 2 120 1 5 4 15 4 16 RDR HXD870 HXD970 HXD1070 For Schematic Diagram Refer to page 4 4 for waveform Refer to page 4 51 for printed wiring board AEP2 MODEL ONLY DT 120 BOARD 2 5 CI CONTROL
42. Select DV and press ENTER Select Manual Dubbing and press ENTER Select the recording destination Record to Hard Disk Drive or Record to DVD and press ENTER Press D gt The scene starts to play 7 Find the point on the DV Digital8 format tape that you want to start dubbing from using lt 4 gt gt lt dil and press Il 8 Select Start Rec and press ENTER The recorder starts dubbing Ac N c 9 Select Pause Rec and press ENTER The recorder pauses dubbing 10 Repeat steps 6 to 9 to dub more scenes 11 Select Stop Rec and press ENTER The selected scenes are dubbed as a single title To cancel during Manual Dubbing Press SYSTEM MENU To lock the recorder Child Lock You can lock all of the buttons on the recorder so that the settings are not cancelled by mistake When the recorder is turned off hold down on the recorder until LOCKED appears in the front panel display The recorder does not work except for timer recordings while the Child Lock is set To unlock the recorder hold down on recorder until UNLOCKED appears in the front panel display Playback options DS OSD 9 19 Buttons Operations AUDIO Selects stereo or monaural audio tracks recorded on the disc when pressed repeatedly in normal playback mode 44 Goes to the next or previous previous track when pressed during next pl
43. nre N COMPONENT VIDEO QUT j gt LINE 3 TV DIGITAL AERIAL continued 33 34 36 Setting external decoder PAY TV Canal Plus analogue decoder programme positions To watch or record PAY TV Canal Plus analogue programmes set your recorder to receive the programme positions using the on screen display In order to set the programme positions correctly be sure to follow all of the steps below Number buttons MENU cJ tx ENTER 1 Press SYSTEM MENU The System Menu appears 2 Select Initial Setup and press ENTER 25 Initial Setup Clock Setting 0 00 Digital Tuner Input Line System gt PAL SECAM Analog Tuner Power Save Off Video In Out HELP Setting gt Audio In EPG Type Select gt GUIDE Plus Audio Out Easy Setup Start Language Recording v Eight Basic Operations Getting to Know Your DVD Recorder 1 Inserting a Disc DATA CD open close pvp 1 Press DVD 2 Press amp open close and place a disc on the disc tray Recording playing side facing down 3 Press amp open close to close the disc tray Wait until LOAD disappears from the front panel display Unused DVDs are formatted automatically For DVD RW discs DVD RWs are formatted in the recording format VR mode or Vi
44. programme list by page Press the DAY buttons to change the programme list by day Auo 104 snid 10109 continued 65 66 68 To unlock the Video Window The Video Window is locked so that it does not change programme positions when you move the cursor across other titles From select the logo of the programme position that is locked and press the red button Unlock changes to and the Video Window is unlocked lock the Video Window select the logo of the programme position you want to lock and press the red button Lock Q Notes The Video Window is locked during recording and the lock indicator appears in the Video Window You cannot unlock the Video Window while recording If you are watching programmes through a set top box receiver the Video Window may not change as fast as you move the cursor In this case lock the Video Window page 66 2 Select Channels Categories or Keywords and press the yellow button Add Channels Select the programme position using gt and press ENTER add more programme positions press the yellow button You can register up to 16 programme positions To cancel the registration select a programme position and press the red button Delete Categories Select the category using I and press ENTER To add more categories p
45. 1 10W 1 10W 1 10W 1 10W 1 10 AEP UK 1 10 AEP UK 1 10 UK 1 10 UK 1 10 UK 1 10 UK Ref 0601 101 102 X601 C101 C102 C103 C104 C105 C106 C107 C108 C109 C110 C111 C112 C113 C114 C115 C116 C117 C118 C119 C120 C121 C124 C125 C126 C127 C128 C129 C130 C131 C134 C135 C136 C137 C138 C140 C142 C144 C147 C148 C149 C154 C155 C191 C192 C193 Part No 1 693 741 11 1 813 965 31 1 579 463 11 1 813 713 21 1 114 130 11 1 107 820 11 1 164 937 11 1 107 820 11 1 164 937 11 1 107 820 11 1 114 130 11 1 107 820 11 1 107 820 11 1 164 156 11 1 114 130 11 1 107 820 11 1 114 130 11 1 107 820 11 1 126 204 11 1 107 820 11 1 114 130 11 1 107 820 11 1 114 130 11 1 107 820 11 1 114 130 11 1 107 820 11 1 107 820 11 1 114 130 11 1 107 820 11 1 107 820 11 1 114 130 11 1 107 820 11 1 107 820 11 1 107 820 11 1 107 820 11 1 114 130 11 1 114 130 11 1 107 820 11 1 107 820 11 1 107 820 11 1 117 681 11 1 126 204 11 1 164 842 11 1 164 842 11 1 107 820 11 1 107 820 11 1 114 130 11 1 107 820 11 1 114 130 11 Description TUNER TUNER TMFE2 407A lt VIBRATOR gt VIBRATOR CRYSTAL 15MHz VIBRATOR CRYSTAL 32 768 VIBRATOR CRYSTAL 18 432MHz DT 120 AG BOARD not supplied AEP1 AEP3 UK Ref No 40000 series DT 120 BG BOARD not supplied
46. 1 114 130 11 1 125 777 11 1 114 130 11 1 114 130 11 1 114 130 11 1 114 130 11 1 114 130 11 1 114 130 11 1 114 130 11 1 100 966 91 1 114 130 11 1 107 820 11 1 164 937 11 1 107 820 11 1 164 937 11 1 107 820 11 1 162 962 11 1 125 777 11 1 100 566 91 1 164 937 11 1 164 862 11 1 164 870 11 1 127 573 11 1 164 360 11 1 164 360 11 1 100 566 91 1 100 566 91 1 125 777 11 1 125 777 11 1 125 777 11 1 125 777 11 1 126 209 11 1 114 130 11 1 164 937 11 1 114 130 11 1 126 210 21 1 114 130 11 1 126 210 21 1 114 130 11 1 164 937 11 1 126 209 11 1 114 130 11 1 164 937 11 1 125 777 11 1 125 777 11 Description CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP ELECT CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP ELECT CHIP CERAMIC CHIP ELECT CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP ELECT CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAM
47. 3 2 25 4154 1 11 GND 10 cour Vis T os 1 8 750 9 JL278 8 7 Ia 6 5 GND 0751 SIGNAL PATH 25 1576 106 er 4 CR OUT IR SW LL GND VIDEO SIGNAL AUDIO doni 5 1268 8752 100p KS 2 L705 4 7k 1269 CHROMA Y CHROMA SIGNAL epp 7 01 1 470 0 22 752 5 0 1709 50 10V 6 3V 5 5V 755 100 KN101 KN102 4 7k JL710 8753 8754 Ag VERUS R756 150 k 0752 JL708 Cm JL714 2SC4081T106R I F SW AEP UK only IT CONTROLLER IR 4 5 4 6 AV 114 1 5 RDR HXD870 HXD970 HXD1070 For Schematic Diagram Refer to page 4 47 for printed wiring board 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 114 BOARD 2 5 POWER FAN CONT AUS only Note The components identified by mark or dotted I 1 E oye REF NO 10 000 SERIES sm line with mark are critical for safety A o Replace only with part number specified gt 6 gt db 6 mm CN302 24 GND V412R 1 C lt lt 41329 gt Q lt lt lt 35 V 12R1E TO DT 120 BOARD CONT2 A DET_ANT DETANT 41332 ANTSLSW iid SEE PAGE 4 22 DTBON JL31
48. 5 5 64702 8 4 1402 HADRST 5 3 5 5 8 5 5 5 5 5 5 BUFFER 1 TC7SZO8FU TESSR 222 TP1403 JTDI 5 8 lt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt SPDIFSEL gt 1080P gt 1080P XDVI lt TXDO LL 501 VDEC RXDO LL SDA VDEC CN470 1 28 4 26 25 TP6045 23 TP6048 21 6103 TP6063 TP6056 6057 6058 6065 GND RFEXLL 75 2 2 2 alo ls e z 5 e z 5 oio e 5 AW TP1430 R1403 SP1STRT SS1STRT GPIO10 VIVSB RTSOB GPIO36 EP om SPIREQB SSTERRB GPIO11 VIHSB CTSOB GPIO37 SPIDATOISSIDATIGPIOI2 CSYNC GPIO54 D 87704 1404 FOR CHECK e SPIDATISSOCLK GPIQIS bi 05 1405 TCTAVCX245FK ____ T Kus e DUE
49. 50V 50V 6 3V 6 3V 6 3V 6 3V 25V 25V 25V 25V 25V 4V 16V 16V 16V Ref C1038 C1039 C1040 C1041 C1042 C1043 C1044 C1045 C1046 C1047 C1048 C1049 C1050 C1051 C1052 C1053 C1054 C1055 C1056 C1057 C1058 C1059 C1060 C1061 01062 01063 01064 01065 01066 01067 01068 C1069 C1070 C1071 C1072 C1073 C1074 C1075 C1076 C1077 C1078 C1079 C1080 C1081 C1082 C1083 C1084 C1085 C1086 C1087 C1088 C1089 C1090 C1091 C1092 C1093 C1094 C1095 C1096 C1097 Part No 1 107 820 11 1 107 820 11 1 114 130 11 1 164 937 11 1 126 210 21 1 107 820 11 1 107 820 11 1 107 820 11 1 107 820 11 1 107 820 11 1 107 820 11 1 107 820 11 1 107 820 11 1 107 820 11 1 107 820 11 1 107 820 11 1 107 820 11 1 107 820 11 1 107 820 11 1 114 130 11 1 114 130 11 1 124 779 00 1 164 937 11 1 114 130 11 1 114 130 11 1 107 820 11 1 114 130 11 1 114 130 11 1 114 130 11 1 114 130 11 1 114 130 11 1 114 130 11 1 114 130 11 1 114 130 11 1 114 130 11 1 114 130 11 1 114 130 11 1 114 130 11 1 114 130 11 1 114 130 11 1 114 130 11 1 164 937 11 1 114 130 11 1 164 937 11 1 126 210 21 1 114 130 11 1 114 130 11 1 114 130 11 1 114 130 11 1 114 130 11 1 107 820 11 1 114 130 11 1 114 130 11 1 126 210 21 1 114 130 11 1 114 130 11 1 162 912 11 1 162 912 11 1 114 130 11 1 114 130 11 Description CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP ELECT
50. programme 1 Select Easy Setup in Basic and press ENTER 2 Select Start and press ENTER 3 Follow the instructions for Easy Setup page 26 from step 2 Signal Check You can check the signal strength and quality of the channel 1 Select Signal Check in Digital Tuner and press ENTER 2 Select Next Screen and press ENTER Signal Check RF Channel Add New Channels Signal Strength 80 EE gt 0 25 50 75 100 Signal Quality 100 Good To check the signal strength and quality of other channels select a channel using m D TV Language Selects main and sub audio subtitle languages or teletext language for bilingual programmes 1 Select D TV Language in Digital Tuner and press ENTER 2 Select Next Screen and press ENTER Bs Language Settings Primary Audio 4 English Secondary Subtitle Teletext Secondary Audio Primary Subtitle 3 Selectan item using 44 4 Selecta language using lt gt 1 32 Aerial Reception Settings Digital Tuner The Digital Tuner setup helps you to make digital tuner and programme position settings for the recorder 1 Press SYSTEM MENU while the recorder is in stop mode 2 Select Initial Setup and press ENTER 3 Select Digital Tuner and press ENTER The Digital Tuner setup display appears with the following options The default
51. to select Title View and press ENTER then select 8 Titles using 44 and press ENTER 3 Select Edit using and press ENTER 4 Select Set Thumbnail using 44 press ENTER The display for setting the thumbnail point appears and the title starts to play 5 While watching the playback picture press gt gt lt lt gt to select the scene you want to set for a thumbnail picture and press Playback pauses You can also select a scene using the PLAY MODE button page 89 6 Select OK using and press ENTER The scene is set for the title s thumbnail picture To return to the Title List press RETURN To change the thumbnail preview mode Set Preview HDD only You can select Quick Preview or Normal for the thumbnail preview mode in the Title List Set Set Preview in the Options setup page 150 To turn off the Title List Press TITLE LIST 6 Hint You can select Title List from the System Menu Notes The title names may not appear for DVDs created on other DVD recorders t may take a few seconds for the thumbnail pictures to be displayed After editing the title thumbnail picture may change to the first scene of the recording title After dubbing the title thumbnail picture set on the source recording is cancelled 4 Title List Example HDD 4 Titles T 13 00 FRI 20 04 Pr4 SL
52. 0 0 0 100 5 100 1005 4 100 1005 4 100 5 0 0 0 10K 5 10 1005 4 10K 1005X4 10K 5 Remarks 1 16W 1 16W 1 16W 1 16W 1 16W 1 16W 1 16W 1 16W 1 16W 1 16W 1 16W 1 16W 1 16W 1 16W 1 16W 1 16W 1 16W 1 16W 1 16W 1 10W 1 10W 1 10W 1 16W 1 16W 1 16W 1 16W 1 16W 1 16W Ref R4711 R4712 R4713 R4714 R4721 R4722 R4723 R4724 R4725 R4726 R4727 R4728 R4729 R4731 R4732 R5101 R5102 R5103 R5104 R5105 R5106 R5107 R5108 R5109 R5110 R5111 R5113 R5114 R5115 R5116 R5117 R5118 R5119 R5120 R5121 R5122 R5123 R5124 R5125 R5127 R5129 R5130 R5131 R5132 R5133 R5134 R5135 R5140 R5141 R5201 R5202 R5203 R5204 R5205 R5207 R5212 R5213 R5214 R5215 R5216 R5217 Part No 1 218 965 11 1 218 965 11 1 218 965 11 1 218 990 81 1 234 372 11 1 234 372 11 1 218 937 11 1 218 933 11 1 218 933 11 1 218 933 11 1 218 965 11 1 218 965 11 1 218 990 81 1 218 961 11 1 218 961 11 1 234 381 11 1 234 381 11 1 218 977 11 1 218 977 11 1 234 702 11 1 234 702 11 1 218 939 11 1 218 939 11 1 218 937 11 1 218 965 11 1 218 953 11 1 218 965 11 1 218 965 11 1 218 965 11 1 218 965 11 1 218 977 11 1 218 870 11 1 211 987 11 1 211 987 11 1 211 987 11 1 211 987 11 1 218 965 11 1 218 965 11 1 218 953 11 1 218 965 11 1 218 940 11 1 218 990 81 1 218 864 11 1 218 990 81 1 218 990 81 1 218 990 81 1 218
53. 0 5 0 5 5 5 5 0 5 5 5 5 0 5 0 5 0 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 Remarks Ref 1 16W R3814 1 16W R3816 AUS R3817 R3818 1 16W R3820 1 10W R3821 1 16W R3823 AEP UK R3824 1 16W R3828 AUS R3829 1 16W 1 16W R3830 R3831 1 16W R3832 AEP UK R3833 1 10W R3835 AUS 1 16W R3837 AUS 3838 1 16W 3839 AUS R3840 1 16W R3841 1 16W R3842 AUS R3843 1 10W R3844 AUS R3845 1 16W R3846 AUS 1 16W R3847 1 16W R3848 AUS R3849 R3850 1 10W R3851 AUS 1 16W 3857 AUS R3862 1 16W R3871 AUS R4501 1 16W R4504 AUS 1 16W R4505 R4507 1 16W R4511 AUS R4521 R4531 1 16W AEP UK R4541 1 16W R4552 AUS R4553 R4554 R4556 1 16W AEP UK R4558 1 16W R4559 AUS R4573 1 16W R4574 1 16W R4575 1 16W R4581 1 16W R4701 R4702 1 16W R4703 R4704 1 16W R4705 1 16W R4706 R4707 R4708 R4709 R4710 8 24 Part No 1 218 933 11 1 218 940 11 1 218 940 11 1 218 933 11 1 218 940 11 1 218 933 11 1 218 940 11 1 242 962 21 1 234 379 21 1 234 379 21 1 234 379 21 1 234 379 21 1 234 379 21 1 234 379 21 1 218 935 11 1 242 963 21 1 242 963 21 1 242 963 21 1 242 963 21 1 218 940 11 1 218 962 11 1 218 933 11 1 218 933 11 1 218 940 11 1 218 953 11 1 218 933 11 1 218 940 11 1 218 965 11 1 218 935 11 1 242 963 21 1 218 990 81 1 218 990 81 1 218 969 11 1 216 295 91 1 216 059 00 1 216 059 00 1 216 05
54. 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 5 20 5 5 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 Remarks 25V 25V 16V 25V 25V 16V 16V 25V 25V 16V 16V 25V 16V 16V 25V 16V 16V 50V 50V 25V 50V 50V 25V 10V 50V 50V 10V 16V 10V 10V 10V 10V 10V 10V 16V 25V 25V 10V 10V 10V 10V 10V 10V 10V 16V Ref C431 C432 C434 C435 C436 C437 C438 C439 C440 C441 C442 C443 C444 C445 C446 C447 C450 C451 C452 C453 C454 C455 C456 C457 C458 C460 C461 C462 C463 C464 C468 C469 C471 C472 C473 C474 C475 C476 C478 C481 C482 C484 C485 C486 C487 C488 C489 C490 C491 C492 C493 C496 C497 C498 C499 C500 C503 C505 C506 C507 Part No 1 107 826 11 1 165 908 11 1 107 826 11 1 165 908 11 1 165 908 11 1 165 908 11 1 115 156 11 1 107 826 11 1 107 826 11 1 115 156 11 1 164 156 11 1 165 908 11 1 165 908 11 1 165 908 11 1 165 908 11 1 162 970 11 1 107 713 11 1 107 713 11 1 104 658 91 1 104 658 91 1 104 658 91 1 126 963 11 1 126 960 11 1 126 964 11 1 104 658 91 1 165 908 11 1 165 908 11 1 115 156 11 1 164 156 11 1 164 156 11 1 164 156 11 1 164 156 11 1 126 964 11 1 126 964 11 1 126 933 11 1 126 964 11 1 126 964 11 1 162 970 11 1 216 864 11 1 164 156 11 1 164 315 11 1 164 315 11 1 216 864 11 1 104 655 91 1 104 655 91 1 104 655 91 1 104 655 91 1 104
55. AEP2 DT 120 AS BOARD not supplied AUS Ref No 40000 series K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K lt CAPACITOR gt CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP ELECT CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP ELECT CHIP ELECT CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP 0 1uF 0 001uF 0 1uF 0 001uF 0 1uF 0 1uF 0 1uF 0 1uF 0 1uF 0 1uF 47uF 0 1uF 0 1uF 0 1uF 0 1uF 0 1uF 0 1uF 0 1uF 0 1uF 0 1uF 0 1uF 0 1uF 0 1uF 0 1uF 0 1uF 100uF 47uF 2PF 2PF 0 1uF 0 1uF 0 1uF 1090 1090 2090 2090 2090 0 25 0 25 Remarks 6 3V 16V 50V 16V 50V 16V 6 3V 16V 16V 25V 6 3V 16V 6 3V 16V 16V 16V 6 3V 16V 6 3V 16V 6 3V 16V 16V 6 3V 16V 16V 6 3V 16V 16V 16V 16V 6 3V 6 3V 16V 16V 16V 16V 16V 50V 50V 16V 16V 6 3V 16V 6 3V 8 9 Ref No C194 C201
56. Additional Information Troubleshooting If you experience any of the following difficulties while using the recorder use this troubleshooting guide to help remedy the problem before requesting repairs Should any problem persist consult your nearest Sony dealer Power The power does not turn on gt Check that the mains lead is connected securely Tuner The channel is not found or stored or missed gt Make sure that your aerial is properly connected to the recorder gt Confirm with your dealer that you are in an area that can receive a digital signal gt Check your aerial installation Picture There is no picture gt Re connect all connecting cords securely The connecting cords are damaged gt gt Check connection to your TV page 15 Switch the input selector on your TV such as to and AV 1 so that the signal from the recorder appears on the TV screen 4 Check that the Video In Out setup is set to the appropriate item that conforms to your system page 136 If you connect the recorder to your TV via only the COMPONENT VIDEO OUT jacks set Component Video Out in the Video In Out setup to Progressive page 136 A scrambled channel is selected When playing a double layer DVD the video and audio may be momentarily interrupted at the point where the layers switch 1 GUIDE Plus system in the UK only GUIDE Plus
57. C431 C433 C522 C524 C590 C591 C592 C593 C594 C595 C596 C597 Part No 1 164 156 11 1 164 156 11 1 162 919 11 1 164 156 11 1 126 204 11 1 126 197 11 1 126 204 11 1 162 964 11 1 162 927 11 1 164 156 11 1 125 889 11 1 162 970 11 1 124 779 00 1 164 156 11 1 164 156 11 1 126 204 11 1 126 204 11 1 164 156 11 1 107 826 11 1 126 204 11 1 165 908 11 1 126 204 11 1 162 970 11 1 125 889 11 1 125 889 11 1 164 156 11 1 126 204 11 1 127 715 91 1 162 915 11 1 164 156 11 1 164 156 11 1 127 715 91 1 164 315 11 1 162 915 11 1 125 889 11 1 164 156 11 1 164 156 11 1 107 826 11 1 164 156 11 1 107 826 11 1 164 156 11 1 164 156 11 1 164 156 11 1 164 156 11 1 164 156 11 1 164 156 11 1 164 156 11 1 164 156 11 1 125 889 91 1 127 760 11 1 107 820 11 1 107 820 11 1 164 850 11 1 164 850 11 1 164 850 11 1 164 156 11 1 164 156 11 1 126 210 21 1 164 156 11 1 126 210 21 Description CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP ELECT CHIP ELECT CHIP ELECT CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP ELECT CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP ELECT CHIP ELECT CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP ELECT CHIP CERAMIC CHIP ELECT CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP ELECT CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC C
58. For details refer to the operating instructions supplied with your TV Then select your country region using lt and press ENTER The tuner preset data will be downloaded from your TV to this recorder For details see page 15 If the aerial cable is connected to the DIGITAL AERIAL IN jack hookup A only or to skip this setting select Do notset Then select your country region using and press ENTER To set the programme positions manually see page 131 8 select the receiver brand using and press ENTER If you select Other providers you can select a receiver brand from a list of all available brands If your receiver brand is not on the list select The receiver brand list is automatically updated so your receiver may be available at a later date Select your brand when it becomes available Until then use 222 9 Select the connection you used for your set top box receiver using and press ENTER When the set top box receiver is connected to the recorder using hookup B with both an aerial cable and a SCART cord select either Line1 or Antenna The display asks for confirmation 10 Press ENTER to select Continue The Video Window switches to the specified programme position 11 select YEs using and press ENTER The display asks for confirmation If the Video Window does not switch to the specified programme position select NO
59. MONO AUDIO FR 2 4 BOARD Q206 b 0205 A o C3 10201 FL DRIVER Q203 204 V412RIE TRASFORMER 5201 213 212 DVD 5203 204 207 REC STOP INPUT SELECT REC 8208 211 CH CH PLAY STOP DC AC CONVERTER TO FROM RD 065 BOARD CN5201 SEE PAGE 3 8 TO FROM RD 065 BOARD CN5101 SEE PAGE 3 8 TO FROM AV 114 BOARD CN106 SEE PAGE 3 3 3 9 ND201 FLUORESCENT DISPLAY 5 9 s101 REMOTE CONTROL RECEIVER TPBP 7777 FL101 6 1 CN103 3 10 RDR HXD870 HXD970 HXD1070 RDR HXD870 HXD970 HXD1070 3 6 POWER BLOCK DIAGRAM SWITCHING REGULATOR SRV 2057EK mU TRANSFORMER SW 1 5V T SPINDLE DVD P401 das E MOTOR OPTICAL PICK UP BLOCK 0401 402 gx oP201 VD3V rw SW 12V 1 0201 pss 477 2 7 IC501 ZR ENT H D 0 6 5 B OA R D TRACKING COIL DRIVE 7 B 1 2 FOCUS COIL DRIVE SPINDLE MOTOR DRIVE 1C3703 5V REG SLED MOTOR DRIVE 1C1302 2 7 LOADING MOTOR DRIVE RESET 7 7 3 7 T 8 C202 7 1 VREF_D 1 SHUNT REG deu EV 5 8V M EV 5 8V EV 5 8V sw 3 3v
60. Note Indications on the FL display are retained and this information is also retained as an OSD 6 Press the ESC key on the service remote controller to quit Aging mode and return to Normal mode Note during recording Recording is stopped f during playback Playback is paused f during erasure of all memory data from the HDD the unit stops after all memory data have been erased 6 2 15 HDD Check Mode Turn ofthe main power ON 2 screen after exiting all menu screens press ESC on the service remote controller 3 Press 4 Press 0 5 Press 1 Used to check if the HDD has an error or not HDD CHECK MODE Press the number of the item you want to check 1 HDD Information 2 5 Attribute Information 3 S M A R T DST 4 HDD R W Check THHEHDD INT is selected change SCAN FWD 6 Press ESC Returns to the original screen 6 22 6 3 Setup Related Menu 6 3 1 Firmware Downloading In case of any event as described below be sure to download the software using the Version Upgrade CD Disc by following the Software Download Method shown below 1 When engine RD board or drive is replaced or when the AV board is replaced 2 When HDD is replaced 3 When message is displayed on the Version Information in the Service Mode Software Download Method 1 Eject the tray 2 Place the Version Upgrade disc on the
61. Options 80000 Options 2 continued 1 45 pue 3 your four digit password using number buttons and press ENTER To change the password enter your four digit password in the Current Password row using the number buttons and press ENTER Then enter new password in New Password row using the number buttons The password setting password changing setting is completed Q Note If you forgot your password reset the recorder page 158 DVD Playback DVD VIDEO only Playback of some DVD VIDEOs can be limited according to a predetermined level such as the age of the users Scenes may be blocked or replaced with different scenes 1 select DVD Playback in Parental Lock and press ENTER To register a new password see Set Password Change Password on page 145 25 Initial Setup Playback Change Password Change Level Parental Lock DVD Playback Standard HDMI Output D TV Age Limit Options Options 2 2 Select Standard and press ENTER s initial Setup Playback Parental Control Standard Parental Lock HDMI Output Password Options Options 2 Code Number 3 Enter your four digit password using the number buttons and press ENTER Colour Selects the method of outputting video signals for the HDMI jack RGB 0 255 Outputs RGB 0 255
62. Press REC repeatedly to set the duration Each press advances the time in 30 minute increments The maximum duration is six hours 0 30 1 00 5 30 normal recording lt 6 00 The time counter decreases minute by minute to 0 00 then the recorder stops recording the power turns off To cancel the Quick Timer Press REC repeatedly until the counter appears in the front panel display The recorder returns to normal recording mode To stop recording press REC STOP Q Note If you turn off the recorder during recording recording is stopped Auo anfiojeue 104 gt continued 75 Checking Changing Cancelling Timer Settings HDD You can change or cancel timer settings using the SCHEDULE list buttons 000 Colour buttons GUIDE lt 7 Changing timer settings 1 Press GUIDE 2 Select Schedule in the Menu bar The SCHEDULE list appears Auo anfiojeue 104 Pr2 25 10 10 8 displays programmes you ve Set to Record Press to use Press the green button for manual ___ recording Press to view Press to view Info Grid Search MyTV Record Schedule Qual Freq Dest 25 May Friends SP Once HDD 25 May Travel SP Once
63. R723 1 234 791 21 RES NETWORK 150X4 2010 R724 1 234 791 21 RES NETWORK 150X4 2010 lt VIBRATOR gt R725 1 218 965 11 10K 5 1 16W R726 1 218 965 11 RES CHIP 10K 5 1 16W X300 1 813 966 21 VIBRATOR CRYSTAL SMD 20MHz R728 1 218 990 81 SHORT CHIP 0 R729 1 218 990 81 SHORT CHIP 0 FL 178 BG BOARD not supplied AEP UK R733 1 218 990 81 SHORT CHIP 0 FL 178 1640 HCA BOARD not supplied R1001 1 218 937 11 RES CHIP 47 5 1 16W AUS R1002 1 218 937 11 47 5 1 16W Ref No 30000 series OK OK of OK OK OK ok ok OK ok OK K OK OK OK K K KK K KK K K R1003 1 218 937 11 RES CHIP 47 5 1 16W R1004 1 218 937 11 RES CHIP 47 5 1 16W CAPACITOR R1017 1 218 947 11 390 5 1 16W R1018 1 218 947 11 RES CHIP 330 5 1 16W C101 1 115 156 11 CERAMIC CHIP 10V R1019 1 218 947 11 RES CHIP 390 5 1 16W C102 1 115 156 11 CERAMIC CHIP 10V C107 1 107 726 91 CERAMIC CHIP 0 01uF 10 16V R1020 1 218 947 11 RES CHIP 330 5 1 16W C111 1 125 972 61 ELECT 100uF 2096 16V R1021 1 218 839 11 METAL CHIP 470 0 5 1 10 1022 1 218 839 11 METAL CHIP 470 0 5 1 10 lt gt R1023 1 218 839 11 METAL CHIP 470 0 5 1 10 R1024 1 218 839 11 METAL CHIP 470 0 5 1 10 103 1 785 828 21 CONNECTOR SQUARE TYPE 105 1 817 693 11 CONNECTOR USB 1025 1 208 893 11 METAL CHIP 1 8K 0 5 1 16W 106 1 815 381 11 CONNECTOR FPC FFC R1026 1 208 893
64. RADIATION WHEN OPEN AVOID DIRECT EXPOSURE TO THE BEAM VORSICHT KLASSE SICHTBARE UND UNSICHTBARE LASERSTRAHLUNG WENN GE FFNET DIREKTEN KONTAKT MIT DEM STRAHL VERMEIDEN ADVARSEL SYNLIG OG USYNLIG LASERSTR LING AF KLASSE 3B VED BNING UNDGA DIREKTE UDS ETTELSE FOR STRALING ADVARSEL SYNLIG OG USYNLIG LASERSTR LING KLASSE 3B NAR DEKSEL APNES UNNGA DIREKTE EKSPONERING FOR STR LEN VARNING KLASS 38 SYNLIG OCH OSYNLIG LASERSTRALNING NAR DENNA DEL UNDVIK ATT DIREKT EXPONERA DIG FOR STR LNINGEN VARO AVATTUNA LUOKAN JA LASERSATEILYA V LT SUORAA ALTISTUMISTA This label is located on laser protective housing inside the enclosure This Product includes FontAvenue fonts licenced by NEC corporation FontAvenue is a registered trademark of NEC corporation Copy guard function Since the recorder has a copy guard function programmes received through an external tuner not supplied may contain copy protection signals copy guard function and as such may not be recordable depending on the type of signal IMPORTANT NOTICE Caution This recorder is capable of holding a still video image or on screen display image on your television screen indefinitely If you leave the still video image or on screen display image displayed on your TV for an extended period of time you risk permanent damage to your television scre
65. SP 3 hours 35 minutes LSP 4 hours 29 minutes ESP 5 hours 23 minutes LP 7 hours 11 minutes EP 10 hours 46 minutes SLP 14 hours 21 minutes SEP 17 hours 57 minutes When recording to DVD RW or DVD R SLP is the longest recording time available If you select SEP the recording mode will automatically revert to SLP N Hint To easily select a manual recording mode press REC MODE repeatedly to display and select a manual recording mode using 1 12 2 Once the text page is displayed this may take some time follow the on screen instructions to obtain your required selection On some pages the TV programme may also be displayed on the text screen On screen instructions will inform you how to change the displayed programme If you are instructed to press or Select when viewing the text pages press ENTER To exit the text service Follow the on screen instructions or press PROG Selecting digital text from other channels Digital text services may also be available on other digital channels This is sometimes indicated by a small symbol on your TV screen superimposed on the programme you are watching 1 Select a channel 2 Press text or the button indicated on screen by the broadcaster The text information appears 3 Access required information using lt the colour buttons and or the number buttons If you are instructed to press
66. TV mode switch to this when you use the TV stuner mainly When you start playback the input source for the TV is set to the recorder automatically DVD mode switch to this when you use the recorder s tuner mainly To check the current mode press DISPLAY page 40 If you have a Sony DVD player or more than one Sony DVD recorder If the supplied remote interferes with your other Sony DVD recorder or player set the command mode number for this recorder and the supplied remote to one that differs from the other Sony DVD recorder or player after you have completed Step 6 Easy Setup The default command mode setting for this recorder and the supplied remote is DVD3 You can check the current Command Mode in the front panel display For details see page 149 The default command mode setting for this recorder and the supplied remote is DVD3 The remote does not function if different command modes are set for the recorder and remote Set the same command mode pue sdmyooH 23 pue gt continued 25 Changing programme positions of the recorder using the remote You can change programme positions of the recorder using the number buttons Number buttons INPUT ENTER Example for channel 50 Press 5 0 then press ENTER 6 Hint If the aerial cables are connected to both DIGITAL AERIAL IN and ANALOG AERIAL IN
67. Yes and press ENTER Notes When dubbing to a DVD R DVD R is stopped partway in step 8 you cannot play or record on the disc You cannot make a backup disc of DVD R DLs DVD R DLs You may not use the DVD Backup function depending on the recording quality or physical condition of the disc or characteristics of the recording device and authoring software Notes You cannot connect more than one piece of digital video equipment to the recorder You cannot control the recorder using another device or another recorder of the same model You cannot record date time or the contents of the cassette memory onto the disc If you record from a DV Digital8 format tape that 15 recorded in multiple sound tracks such as a tape with multiple sampling frequencies 48 kHz 44 1 kHz or 32 kHz no sound or an unnatural sound will be output when playing back the sampling frequency switch point on the disc In order to use this recorder s Auto Chapter setting page 104 be sure to correctly set the clock on your digital video camera before shooting The recorded picture may be momentarily affected or the start and end points of a title may be different from what you have set if the source DV Digital8 format tape is in any following conditions In this case see Recording from Connected Equipment page 79 There is a blank space in the recorded portion of the tape Th
68. and press ENTER until the Video Window switches to the specified programme position To receive GUIDE Plus system data your recorder must be turned off when not in use If your recorder is connected to a set top box receiver be sure to leave the set top box receiver turned on After initial setup it may take up to 24 hours to begin receiving TV programme listings Note You cannot set tuner system or OSD Language to a country region or language that is not supported by the GUIDE Plus system Clock Setting The recorder will automatically set the clock when any digital channels have been scanned and stored Go to the Type Select setting Select Auto when a programme position in your local area broadcasts 8 time signal The Clock Setting 5 display appears 5 1 Select the programme position of the station that carries a time signal using m w 2 Select Start using and press ENTER If a clock signal cannot be found press 975 RETURN and set the clock manually Select to set the clock manually The Manual Clock Setting display appears 1 Select the time zone for your area using lt gt and press 2 Select On if you are now on summer time and press ENTER 3 Setthe day month year hour and minutes using tb gt and press ENTER to start the clock EPG Type Select Select the EPG Electronic Progra
69. es E ies i ES je EH Fm 5 5 AG13 WALPF 14 Ro ____ PKPULSEIM AW PKPUSEIP _ WRPULSEM Pinno VO wRPULSEP Ams rone rane 5 Am par Dans 5 Am Gur amo 5 Ami E REP As Fg 5 Panis Po 5 Panis ason As Pano An RFTZSWREUREPL SSS spiro FmdaGND 5 OFFUISEWRCKP OFPULSEWRCKM PKPULSEENRZM AM PKPULSENNRZIP AN mom A Ay P Am Ap Amp An A RN An EM FCEPM Read channel frequency comparator Ans rcr 5 EXm Am c _____ OOS maour Amo sov
70. signals Select this when connecting to an RGB 0 255 device RGB 16 235 Outputs RGB 16 235 signals Select this if colours appear overly rich and the black appears too deep YCbCr 4 2 2 Outputs 10 bit YCbCr 4 2 2 component signals YCbCr 4 4 4 Outputs 8 bit YCbCr 4 4 4 component signals Notes Some settings may not be available depending on the connected device When a DVI device is connected you cannot select YCbCr 4 2 2 YCbCr 4 4 4 When Screen Resolution is set to 720 x 5761 7720 x 4801 in the Output setup you cannot select YCbCr 4 2 2 Audio Output Selects the type of audio signal output from the HDMI OUT jack Auto Outputs Dolby Digital MPEG and DTS audio signals as a bitstream signal Normally select this position PCM Converts all audio signals except for DTS signals to PCM Bitstream Select this if the Priority connected device is compatible with bitstream audio Notes The PCM signals may not be output even when you select Auto depending on the Audio settings number of audio channels and the HDMI connected device The Audio Output function is not available when a DVI device is connected 4 Select Code geographic area as the playback limitation level and press ENTER The area is selected When you select Number press the number buttons to select and ent
71. 1 12 Checking Changing Cancelling Timer Settings List 1 14 Recording from Connected Equipment 09 1 1 14 GUIDE Plus For analogue broadcasting only 1 15 Introduction to the GUIDE Plus System 1 15 Watching TV Using GUIDE Plus System 1 15 Searching for Programme Using GUIDE Plus __________ 1 16 Listing Up Your Favourite Programme Information 1 16 Making Changes to the GUIDE Plus System 1 16 Timer Recording For analogue broadcasting only 1 17 Before 1 17 Timer Recording GUIDE Plus Manual 1 17 Checking Changing Cancelling Timer Settings eee 1 18 Recording from Connected Equipment 1 19 1 19 Playing Recorded Programme DVD 1 19 Pausing a TV Broadcast Pause Pause Live TV 1 21 Playing from Beginning of Programme You Are Recording Chase Play HH HH 1 21 Playing a Previous Recording While Making Another Simultaneous Rec and Play HMM 1 21 Searching for a Time Title Chapter Track etc 1 21 Erasing and Editing 1 22 Before Editing o9 ______________ 122 Erasing and Editing a Title 0222 1 22 Erasing and Editing
72. 1 16W 1 16W 1 16W 1 16W 1 16W 1 16W 1 16W 1 16W 1 16W 1 16W 1 16W 1 16W 1 16W Ref 1260 R1261 R1262 R1263 R1264 R1265 R1266 R1267 R1268 R1269 R1270 R1271 R1272 R1273 R1274 R1275 R1276 R1277 R1278 R1279 R1281 R1282 R1283 R1284 R1285 R1286 R1287 R1288 R1289 R1301 R1302 R1303 R1312 R1313 R1314 R1401 R1402 R1403 R1404 R1405 R1406 R1407 R1411 R1412 R1413 R1414 R1415 R1416 R1421 R1422 R1802 R1803 R1804 R1812 R1813 R1814 R2301 R2302 R2304 R2316 R2501 Part No 1 218 933 11 1 234 400 21 1 234 400 21 1 218 990 81 1 218 935 11 1 234 370 21 1 234 370 21 1 218 933 11 1 234 400 21 1 234 400 21 1 218 990 81 1 218 935 11 1 218 935 11 1 234 370 21 1 234 370 21 1 218 933 11 1 218 933 11 1 218 990 81 1 218 990 81 1 218 948 11 1 234 371 21 1 234 371 21 1 234 371 21 1 218 937 11 1 218 937 11 1 218 937 11 1 234 371 21 1 218 933 11 1 218 933 11 1 218 839 11 1 218 847 11 1 218 847 11 1 218 847 11 1 218 847 11 1 216 864 11 1 218 933 11 1 218 933 11 1 218 933 11 1 218 933 11 1 218 933 11 1 218 933 11 1 218 933 11 1 234 378 21 1 218 965 11 1 218 973 11 1 218 933 11 1 218 933 11 1 218 933 11 1 218 965 11 1 218 965 11 1 218 945 11 1 218 947 11 1 218 935 11 1 218 945 11 1 218 947 11 1 218 935 11 1 218 959 11 1 218 990 81 1 218 990 81 1 218 965 11 1 218 951 11 Description RES CHIP CONDUCTOR NET
73. 1 218 990 81 1 218 965 11 1 218 965 11 1 218 935 11 1 216 864 11 1 218 990 81 1 218 938 11 1 218 938 11 1 218 935 11 1 218 965 11 1 218 823 11 1 218 823 11 1 218 823 11 1 218 823 11 1 218 823 11 1 218 823 11 1 218 823 11 1 218 823 11 1 218 965 11 1 218 965 11 1 218 965 11 1 218 965 11 1 218 965 11 1 218 965 11 1 218 965 11 1 218 965 11 1 218 965 11 1 218 965 11 1 218 973 11 1 218 973 11 1 218 973 11 1 218 973 11 1 218 973 11 1 218 941 81 1 218 941 81 1 218 846 11 1 218 846 11 1 218 831 11 1 218 827 11 1 218 935 11 1 218 965 11 1 218 990 81 1 218 941 81 1 218 965 11 1 218 990 81 1 218 990 81 1 234 714 11 1 234 714 11 1 234 791 21 1 234 372 11 1 234 372 11 1 234 372 11 1 234 372 11 1 234 372 11 1 234 714 11 Description TRANSISTOR TRANSISTOR TRANSISTOR RESISTOR SHORT CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP SHORT CHIP SHORT CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP SHORT CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP SHORT CHIP SHORT CHIP RES NETWORK RES NETWORK RES NETWORK 150X4 2010 RES NETWORK RES NETWORK RES NETWORK RES NETWORK RES
74. 1020 25 1021 25 C1022 25 C1023 25V 1024 2 1025 10V C1026 6 3V C1027 16V C1028 16V C1029 50 01030 50V 1031 50V C1032 25 C1033 25 1034 4V 01035 25 01036 4V 1037 8 10 Part No 1 164 156 11 1 117 681 11 1 164 156 11 1 117 681 11 1 127 760 11 1 124 778 00 1 107 820 11 1 107 820 11 1 125 889 11 1 100 966 91 1 100 966 91 1 163 037 11 1 114 130 11 1 114 130 11 1 114 130 11 1 125 889 11 1 164 937 11 1 125 889 11 1 114 130 11 1 114 130 11 1 114 130 11 1 164 937 11 1 164 937 11 1 114 130 11 1 114 130 11 1 114 130 11 1 114 130 11 1 114 130 11 1 164 858 11 1 164 858 11 1 164 858 11 1 164 858 11 1 162 912 11 1 162 912 11 1 162 912 11 1 162 912 11 1 164 872 11 1 164 872 11 1 164 872 11 1 164 872 11 1 162 912 11 1 162 912 11 1 162 912 11 1 162 912 11 1 164 854 11 1 164 854 11 1 164 854 11 1 164 854 11 1 114 130 11 1 114 130 11 1 114 130 11 1 114 130 11 1 162 970 11 1 162 970 11 1 162 970 11 1 162 970 11 1 162 970 11 1 126 210 21 1 107 820 11 1 107 820 11 1 107 820 11 Description CERAMIC CHIP ELECT CHIP CERAMIC CHIP ELECT CHIP CERAMIC CHIP ELECT CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CE
75. 16 9 size titles cannot be dubbed to DVD RW DVD R DVD RW DVD R Video mode When dubbing to a DVD R DL DVD R DL Video mode in Real Time Dubbing mode the dubbing contents are divided into titles 4 Total size of the selected titles and available space on the disc to be dubbed approximate 5 Selected title s thumbnail picture D Selecta title and press ENTER The selected title changes colour When you select HDD gt DVD in step 3 you can change the title order or search for a title by genre see 3 Playing the Recorded Programme Title List on page 38 6 Repeat step 5 to select all of the titles in the order you want to dub 1 Select Next using gt and press ENTER The Edit display appears For details about editing see edit titles on the Dubbing List on page 102 8 Select Next using gt and press ENTER The Start Dubbing display appears Dubbing Video mode Start Dubbing 12228 HDD DVD R Video Mode Back Recording Mode Input Disc Name Finalise Dub Time Oh 3m High Speed DISCO1 Recording Mode Disc Name Finalise Off Dubbing List Total Current DVD Remain Start Dubbing 0 76 L n 446 9 Select an option using and press ENTER The options differ depending on the dubbing direction or disc type Recording Mode Changes the dubbing mode of al
76. 20 10 10 20 20 20 20 20 10 5 5 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 5 2 5 2 Remarks Ref 16 0508 10V 0510 16 6511 10V C515 10V C516 10V C517 10V C518 16V C519 16V C520 10V C528 25 0529 10V 0530 10V 6531 10V C532 10V C541 25 6542 50V C543 50V 6544 10V 0545 10V 6547 10V C550 50V 6551 50V C552 50 C602 10V 0603 10V C604 10V 0605 10V C606 25V C608 25V C609 25V C611 25V C613 50V C614 50V C615 16V C616 50V C617 50V C618 25 C619 0620 25 0621 50V C622 50V C623 C624 6 3V C625 6 3V C626 6 3V C627 6 3V C628 6 3V C629 35 0630 10V C631 35 C632 25V C633 25V C635 25V 0636 25V C638 25V 0639 50V C640 50V C641 50V C642 50V C643 8 4 Part No 1 164 315 11 1 164 156 11 1 164 230 11 1 164 156 11 1 164 315 11 1 164 230 11 1 100 831 91 1 164 315 11 1 100 831 91 1 104 655 91 1 104 655 91 1 104 655 91 1 104 655 91 1 104 655 91 1 126 963 11 1 126 963 11 1 126 963 11 1 126 963 11 1 126 933 11 1 104 662 91 1 104 662 91 1 104 662 91 1 162 927 11 1 162 966 11 1 162 966 11 1 162 927 11 1 162 915 11 1 162 915 11 1 125 891 11 1 104 658 91 1 126 947 11 1 164 156 11 1 164 156 11 1 162 927 11 1 162 970 11 1 164 156 11 1 164 156 11 1 164 156 11 1 115 156 11 1 162 924 11 1 162 924 11 1 162 908 11 1 162 908 11 1 115 156 11 1 164 156 11 1 164 156 11 1 162 970 11 1 164 173 11 1 164 739 11 1 162 970 11
77. 4 28 TO FR 274 BOARD CN201 THROUGH THE FLR 010 FFC SEE PAGE 4 25 RDR HXD870 HXD970 HXD1070 For Schematic Diagram Refer to page 4 55 for printed wiring board RD 065 BOARD 1 7 POWER BLOCK REF NO 20 000 SERIES EU 8 1 0 CC vas A TP4502 4503 B m 4501 C4 45078 04901 54535 8 gt 197 90V V43D B X65 B 43 C4562 gt 4 4505 C451 1 1 V45HD V43V 4501 13 gt e gt 2 7 Thee 3 3V REG V45D EV45 8 V 220 000p gt VD AV 50V B V 1R5_IN m 65 V 1R5_IN 4506 4507 4 5 6 1 SW 1 53V 3 104561 GND D oer agar cna S sw 1 53V 4 W TN gv TO GND D 5 TP4508 4509 4 C4513 TP4608 5 1112B SM Lestra REGURATOR sw 3 33V 6 gt 630 427 6 3V 4 B 6 3V 65 CN201 C4504 B V43D c TP6096 V43HD 185 IN 1 e VIN gt 1R5_ THROUGH THE pie T Ww PR 076 HARNESS GND D 24570 gt VHA TP4510 5 51 4 36 vas o e 7 5 4521 2 C s gt TP4501 4539 164502 4 im C 4
78. 56 1 834 073 11 CABLE FLEXIBLE FLAT FAD 008 65 7 621 255 55 SCREW P 2X8 AEP2 57 1 787 624 11 FAN DC 58 1 834 075 11 CABLE FLEXIBLE FLAT FRA 006 66 2 684 970 01 SHIELD TAPE 1 A 59 3 077 331 31 3 67 3 087 220 01 TAPE NON HOLOGENE 68 3 268 333 02 SHIELD GASKET 60 1314 555 HDD S GALAXY S 250GB E ASSY AN U301 1 693 743 11 TUNER TUPADTC D101HB HXD970 AEP UK NUGO1 1 693 741 11 TUNER TMFE2 407A 60 1314 556 HDD S GALAXY S 500GB E ASSY HXD1070 60 1314 557 HDD W XL160 S 160GB GA ASSY The components identified by mark amp contain HXD870 AUS confidential information 60 1317 949 HDD S GALAXY S 250GB GA ASSY Strictly follow the instructions whenever the HXD970 AUS components are repaired and or replaced The components identified by mark or dotted line with mark are critical for safety Replace only with part number specified 8 2 8 2 ELECTRICAL PARTS LIST NOTE Due to standardization replacements in the parts list may be different from the parts specified in the diagrams or the components used on the set e XX X mean standardized parts so they may have some difference from the original one e tems marked are not stocked since they are seldom required for routine service Some delay should be anticipated when ordering these items CAPACITORS uF Ref No C104 C105 C106 C107 C109 C110 C111 C112 C
79. After replacing the HDD perform YES Factory Check on SERVICE NOTE page 10 When performing Factory Check the data saved to the HDD by the customer is erased Replace the SATA cable NO Obtain customer consent before performing Factory Check Does the problem still occur YES Replace the HDD with a new one and perform Factory Check Refer to Note Does the problem still occur Write down the HDD information on the HDD return sheet before replacing the Engine For information about replacing the Engine Therefore put the original HDD back in the unit see page 2 4 of Chapter 2 DISASSEMBLY Then follow the procedure to replace the Engine After replacing the Engine perform Setting the Model Name on Service Note page 6 There may be a problem with the Engine When performing Factory Check the data saved to the HDD by the customer is erased Obtain customer consent before performing Factory Check Does the problem still occur Final check Note Performing Check will not erase the HDD data Another defect has occurred 4 4 Display E02 FLD Note When E02 is displayed the user data has already broken due to system DATA Error Replace the HDD Refer to Note Is the HDD free from abnormal noises Factory check Final check Note Performing Final Check will not erase the HDD Replace the HD
80. Automatically update the date start and stop times settings when changing the Electronic Programme Guide Set EPG Link to in step 5 of Series Recording on page 57 Recording Split Programmes Movies and other programmes that are split into 2 or more parts are called Split Programmes If you set the timer for one part of a Split Programme the other parts are automatically recorded For example if the first half is set to be recorded the last half will be recorded automatically To search for link programmes 1 Press TIMER 2 Select the timer setting and press gt 3 When the following options appear in the sub menu select an option and press ENTER Alternate Search Searches for repeat programmes The repeat programmes are displayed in the EPG Series Search Searches for programmes ina series The programmes in the series are displayed in the EPG Recommendation Search Searches for programmes recommended by broadcaster as a link for current series The recommended programmes are displayed in the EPG To set the programme for recording follow the instructions for Recording TV programmes using the EPG page 55 from step 2 Notes Only the earliest part of the Split Programme is displayed on the Timer List Any next Split Programme part that starts 3 or more hours later cannot be recorded automatically This recorder is featured with an EPG timer auto extend
81. Basic Next Screen Digital Tuner Audio Language Analog Tuner Subtitle Language Video In Out Auto Language Audio In DVD Menu Language Audio Out Subtitle Display Recording v OSD Language Switches the display language on the screen Audio Language DVD VIDEO only Switches the language of the sound track Subtitle Language DVD VIDEO only Switches the language of the subtitles recorded on the disc Audio Output Settings Audio Out The Audio Out setup allows you to switch the method of outputting audio signals when you connect a component such as an amplifier receiver with a digital input Jack If you connect a component that does not accept the selected audio signal a loud noise or no sound will come from the speakers and may affect your ears or cause speaker damage 1 Press SYSTEM MENU while the recorder is in stop mode 2 Select Initial Setup and press ENTER 3 Select Audio Out and press ENTER The Audio setup appears with the following options The default settings are underlined Initial Setup Basic Dolby Digital Digital Tuner DTS Output Dolby Digital PCM Analog Tuner 96 kHz PCM Output Video In Out MPEG Output Audio In Audio DRC Audio Out Language Recording Dolby Digital Output HDD DVDs only Selects the type of Dolby Digital signal Dolby Digital Select this when the recorder is connected to an audio compone
82. C1205 C1206 Part No 1 125 777 11 1 125 777 11 1 125 777 11 1 124 779 00 1 100 966 91 1 114 130 11 1 164 937 11 1 126 209 11 1 114 130 11 1 164 937 11 1 125 777 11 1 125 777 11 1 125 777 11 1 125 777 11 1 125 777 11 1 125 777 11 1 125 777 11 1 125 777 11 1 125 777 11 1 126 209 11 1 114 130 11 1 164 937 11 1 126 209 11 1 114 130 11 1 164 937 11 1 164 840 11 1 164 842 11 1 164 840 11 1 164 842 11 1 125 777 11 1 114 130 11 1 164 937 11 1 126 209 11 1 100 966 91 1 114 130 11 1 164 937 11 1 114 130 11 1 107 820 11 1 164 943 81 1 114 130 11 1 107 820 11 1 164 937 11 1 114 130 11 1 107 820 11 1 164 937 11 1 164 937 11 1 114 130 11 1 107 820 11 1 164 937 11 1 164 937 11 1 114 130 11 1 107 820 11 1 114 130 11 1 114 130 11 1 107 820 11 1 114 130 11 1 164 943 81 1 164 943 81 Description CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP ELECT CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP ELECT CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP ELECT CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP ELECT CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP ELECT CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC
83. CERAMIC CHIP ELECT CHIP CERAMIC CHIP ELECT CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP ELECT CHIP ELECT CHIP ELECT CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP 1uF 0 1uF 0 1uF 0 1uF 0 1uF 0 1uF 0 1uF 0 1uF 0 1uF 0 1uF 47uF 47uF 0 1uF 0 1uF 47uF 1uF 100uF 100PF 0 001uF 100uF 4 7uF 4 7uF 4 74 100uF 100uF 4 74 22uF 470PF 47uF 2 2UF 4 74 47uF 1uF 47uF 47uF 47uF 10uF 22PF 2090 2090 2090 1090 2090 5 10 10 20 10 10 10 10 20 20 10 20 5 20 10 10 20 10 20 10 10 20 20 20 10 5 Remarks 6 3V 16V AEP2 16V AEP2 16V AEP2 16V AEP2 16V AEP2 16V AEP2 16V AEP2 16V AEP2 16V AEP2 16V AEP2 16V 16V 16V 16V AEP2 6 3V AEP2 10V 16V 50V 10V 50V 16V 10V 6 3V 6 3V AEP2 6 3V 16V AEP2 16V 6 3V 6 3V 50V 16V AEP2 10V 6 3V AEP2 16V AEP2 10V AEP2 16V 10V 10V 16V 16V 16V 10V 50V The components identified by mark or dotted line with mark are critical for safety Ref No 0358 0359 0361 0364 0366 0367 0368 0369 0370 0372 0373 0375 0378 0379 0380 0381 C382 C383 C384 C385 C388 C389 C391 C392 C393 C394 C395 C396 C397 C398 C399 C400 C401 C402 C404 C406 C408 C409 C412 C413 C414 C415 C416 C417 C418 C421 C422 C423
84. CN203 SEE PAGE 3 9 TO FROM RD 065 BOARD CN2301 2 2 SEE PAGE 3 7 RDR HXD870 HXD970 HXD1070 3 3 DT 120 BLOCK DIAGRAM 19 1 01004 1008 B IN ug x 164 LJ 24 576MHz E 01003 1007 G IN FROM 2 AV 114 BOARD a CN302 1 2 01001 1005 3 4 C R IN 1 LPF E Vi 01002 1006 LPF 1 2 JQ wee K l i 01 120 BOARD e ah sm i m 7 6106 PPORT20 EMMA 201 1 5 Cl X300 CONTROLLER Eu 66 XCOFDM_RESET 2 5 VCXO 16321 1 5 BUFFER 1300 57 9 CN102 4 2 IC311 39 10313 a T UT mem 3 5 A PPORT3 IC322 1 5 V432V 0305 PPORT40 2 1 Veik Y dd 27MHZ OUT SDA SDA DTBR SCL SCL DTBR 501 ADATA PD 06E RAAD 1
85. Divides a title into two titles page 94 Combine Combines two titles page 97 Chapter Edit Edits chapters page 95 Set Thumbnail Changes the title s thumbnail frame that appears in the Title List page 39 Recording Mode Sets the picture quality of the dubbing Bilingual Sets how a bilingual audio programme is dubbed Cancel Exits sub menu 4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 to edit all of the titles 5 Goto step 8 of Dubbing Using Dubbing List on page 100 to dub edited titles DV Camcorder Dubbing Before DV Camcorder Dubbing This section explains dubbing with a DV camcorder and playing the contents of a DV camcorder via the DV IN jack on the front panel If you want to dub by way of the LINE IN jacks see Recording from Connected Equipment on page 79 The DV IN jack on this recorder conforms to the i LINK standard Follow the instructions in Preparing for DV camcorder dubbing and then move on to the section on dubbing For more information about i LINK see About i LINK on page 163 How chapters are created The contents dubbed to the HDD or DVD become a single title This title is divided into chapters When dubbing to the HDD or a DVD RW DVD R VR mode and when Auto Chapter HDD VR is set to in the Recording setup page 143 each shooting session on the tape becomes a chapter on the disc For other discs the recorder divides the titl
86. Field Outputs a stable generally shake free image Frame Outputs a sharp image but may be prone to shake Auto Outputs a generally less sharp but more stable still image Seamless Playback HDD DVD RW DVD R in VR mode only On Playback is smooth but with a trade off against the accuracy of the edit points Off You may notice momentary interruption at edited points during playback of a VR mode Playlist Angle Indicator DVD VIDEOS only screen if various angles multi angles for a scene are recorded on the disc the TV screen On Displays Qe on the TV Off Does not display QO on Auto Chapter HDD VR HDD DVD RW DVD R in VR mode only On The recorder detects changes in the picture and sound and automatically inserts chapter marks up to 99 chapters for one title recorded on the HDD Off No chapter mark is inserted Notes The actual chapter mark interval may vary depending on the amount of information contained in the video to be recorded Chapter marks are automatically inserted where the date or time information changes on the tape when Auto Chapter HDD VR is set to during DV dubbing to the HDD or a DVD RW DVD R VR mode Auto Chapter Video DVD RW DVD R in Video mode only No No chapter mark is inserted Separation 10 minutes Inserts chapter marks at approximately 10 minute intervals 15 minutes Inserts
87. IN V 20 GND L 5 E 22 GND lt 23 C R IN C318 0314 C329 0324 0423 C335 C338 100 4 7 47 47 0 i GND C R N us cg AEP2 MODEL ONLY e gt Y_IN C P_CONT2 PS vr ssw 70 5 5 B gt gt V43 38W V43 3A C TO Vest 6300 B 2 5V REG i a gt 300 D 5V 8 S 1170825UC OTKTFG F300 gt 41412 6315 4 7 t JL416 gt 09 L C603 B 22 6 3V gt 0 3 3 V 1 5V AR 62 258 91411 22 co c 2 Crom r o 4 VVVVVV 8300 D42 5V 00 Co Go Ea E EE ES 2 g 9 lt S VVVV JL413 gt 3 3 GNDD JL407 C301 1 gt DT TUON R357 SW 11417 11421 gt DT43 3V 5 8 gt VN F301 F302 C342 i 41420 3 30 9 gt 41422 11423 os FIFFI TIL gt V4338W GNDT EM C343 GNDD lt QoL C 60 M POWER 4 21 4 22 DT 120 4 5 RDR HXD870 HXD970 HXD1070 For Schematic Diagram Refer to page 4 4 for waveform Refer to page 4 51 for printed wiring board DT 120 BOARD 5 5
88. OwprofUSBpowremud N DgmGND Nis Ni Powersupply input O oOo Ni Powersupply input _ 5 10 200010 DVDDMG3V 7 Nis AVDDSR PowrsmpyipuGGVfrRE _ RADDMGPOD Nn O Output of ROWGIO address Nu GND DemGND P use m USED DP vo USB_D_CONNECT Conmecioncommiof eplupmsumeofDe 10 P amoo DoD Dem ND O O O DVDDIXIOV O ri y O o WR Output of data 10 for IDE I F Input output of IDE I F data 2 O PI ATODOG PIS Po ORI RO RIO DVDDIQ LOV RB RM RIS R9 RO ORI R22 R23 RM 8 T ATODIORB Output of DIOR signal for IDE ATODOS Output of data 08 for IDE ATOD12 Output of data 12 for IDE ATODO7 O
89. Press DISP 4 Press DIG ANA four times OSD Filter Setting OSD Filter 5 Press ESC Returns to the original screen Tips As the setting value becomes greater jitter is reduced on a CRT display However as lines for characters appear thick complex characters may become difficult to read On the contrary as the setting value becomes smaller jitter increases on a CRT display However as lines for characters become sharper complex characters become more legible Note1 A new setting becomes active as soon as it is made As a new setting is stored in nonvolatile memory it will be retrieved when the unit it turned on the next time Note2 After the factory preset values are downloaded the setting value for the OSD Filter will be the default Value 4 Key operation of OSD Filter setting Remarks _ Rev x 3 SPEED Rev x 3 SPEED Changing the setting value for the OSD 04 Default valued The setting value increases byl 3 SPEED Filter x 3 SPEED CLEAR The setting value is reset to default 4 __ ESC To exit the OSD Filter Setting and clear the screen Appears the tuner screen The setting value decreases 1 6 24E RDR HXD870 HXD970 HXD1070 SECTION 7 ADJUSTMENTS 7 1 Video System Adjustment Preparing for Adjustment 1 Equipments Oscilloscope Reference Disk HLX 507 PAL sin
90. Press SUBTITLE previous ANGLE next while the Album List is displayed Each time you press SUBTITLE previous ANGLE next the entire Album List changes to the next previous page of the album To change the album order Sort Titles HDD only 1 Press while the Album List is displayed 2 Select Sort Titles using 44 and press ENTER 3 Select the item using 44 and press ENTER Order Sorted By number In order of album number By favourite In order of playback times The album that is most often played is listed at the top By album In alphabetical order To search for the album by genre Genre HDD only 1 Press while the Album List is displayed 2 Select Genre using and press ENTER 3 Select the genre using 4 4 and press ENTER The albums in the selected genre appear To display all albums select Genres To cancel Programme play Set Programme to Cancel Programme Play in the Mode menu during playback To erase the programme Set Programme to Erase Programme List in the Play Mode menu Hints You can select and play a track that is set to Set Skip The programme you made remains after Programme play finishes To play the same programme again set Programme to Start Programme Play in the Mode menu However the programme is cleared after you press Youcan repeat Programme play Set Repeat
91. RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP SHORT CHIP SHORT CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP SHORT CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP SHORT CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP SHORT CHIP SHORT CHIP SHORT CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP SHORT CHIP 22K 10K 0 AEP2 10K 0 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 100 100 0 56 56 68 68 0 0 0 47 47 47 47 22 22 0 CONDUCTOR NETWORK 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 Remarks Ref 1 16W R625 1 16W R626 1 16W R627 R628 R629 1 16W 1 16W R641 R642 R643 1 16W R644 R650 R651 R660 R661 R662 R666 1 16W R668 1 16W R671 R672 1 16W R673 1 16W R674 1 16W 1 16W R678 1 16W R678 1 16W R679 1 16W 1 16W R679 1 16W R680 1 16W 1 16W R680 1 16W 1 16W R681 1 16W 1 16W R681 1 16W R682 1 16W R682 1 16W R683 1 16W R685 R686 1 16W R687 1 16W R688 R689 1 16W R690 1 16W R691 1 16W R692 1 16W R693 R694 R695 R696 1 16W R698 1 16W 1 16W R699 R700 1 16W R701 1 16W R 02 1 16W R703 1005 4 AEP2 8 14 Part No 1 234 400 21 1 234 400 21 1 234 400 21 1 234 400 21 1
92. SP 51 68 105 210 2 Standard mode LSP 63 84 130 265 2hr 30 min ESP 75 100 155 315 3 LP 100 135 210 420 4 EP 150 20 315 635 6 SLP 200 270 425 850 8 SEP 255 340 530 1060 10 Long duration 1 The approximate recording time is for 12 cm DVD discs The approximate recording times for DVD R DL Double Layer DVD R DL Dual Layer discs are as follows HQ 1 hour 51 minutes HSP 2 hours 41 minutes SP 3 hours 35 minutes LSP 4 hours 29 minutes ESP 5 hours 23 minutes LP 7 hours 11 minutes EP 10 hours 46 minutes SLP 14 hours 21 minutes SEP 17 hours 57 minutes 72 When recording DVD RW or DVD R SLP is the longest recording time available If you select SEP the recording mode will automatically revert to SLP 6 Hint To easily select a manual recording mode press REC MODE repeatedly to display and select a manual recording mode using lt gt Auo anfiojeue 104 continued 71 1 Press GUIDE Pr2 25 10 10 Record Channels Home Friends The one with the Male Nanny A jealous Ross mocks Rache s choice of an over sensitive male nanny for Emma while Phonbe must choose between two unexpected BBC2 2 10 00 120Min B A Search My TV Schedule Tue 25 10 00 10 30 Tast Channel IONE Flimbles Starship Friends This Alias This
93. Ss SAVE 176 J CSYNCI N x P SAVE 5414 41 0 IN L2 RI RUG 72 sw 14407 R473 L2 RIN gt 486 gt 5476 5 L2 LIN 470 J 68 0 5 1 4408 9 2 J 2 Avi RN 1914426 R48 J 488 474 9 5 14409 RATS 1L4412 JL4413 gt 2 gt e AUDIO L AV LI 11470 4 G 2 LIN gt OuH 2 C455 41471 AV2 gt 47 L e gt lt gt 41472 JL4403 VIN NNOUT C418 0097 1473 N JL4410 C478 AV2 lt 1 5 AAGCD 0 VNOUT m 41474 1 JLA414 VYOUT 109 VTR Vorvas v3 IN 5 0406 AUDIO BOUT uz C481 2502114 146 BOUT b adf R482 R COUT B S xb o 100 i gog i COMPONENT R COUT LLI gt gt _ Y 9 aan 114405 7 VIDEO OUT 00000 25 5 blz Gl 2 af S 7 e Mf a DS i ola R CIN gt st wo SoFo 0 0 0 0 0 0 BN gt ATIS lt RGBOU 2 AW RGBOUT AV2 ROUT SAVE JL401 0 AV2 ROUT lt AV2 LOUT e lt 2 LOUT mpm _ pa JL4406 16 LOUT DTC124EUA T106 cp 0499 0443 i 0402 LOUT 2 1w T T DTZ TT11 6 8B 447 001 lt fas 7 mi
94. TRANSFORMER C215 C216 26 0 1 25 1197 146 K pn 0208 0 1 20 12V SWITCH 155355 17 SUV ST 8 8 11 C207 E 2700 2 CY 200V 5 0209 155355 17 R217 02 Ox 1 1224 114 10k gt 0212 2 SDPB31H3C0100 0202 ae 223 250189811008 PNI af DSC e E E gt R10 2 PO gt 5 8227 27k FL DRIVE Q205 DTC124EUA T106 LED DRIVE R251 47 R252 47 Q204 MUN2213T1 SWITCH R236 10k ae CN203 17 BOARD LPO CN106 THROUGH THE FLR 010 FFC SEE PAGE 4 20 EN V 12RI 14 GND FLCLK AV 114 10 FLSTB STZ6 8N T146 CN105 THROUGH THE 007 FFC SEE PAGE 4 6 0203 STZ6 8N T146 2 gt 5 i D204 STZ6 8N T146 5201 coh amp 0 9 OPEN CLOSE 5 VIDEO CN202 11 AW I 9178 84 1146 pU E Ls Ga E FAR 006 FF m SLE PAGE 4 6 SIGNAL PATH el ius 22 STOP VIDEO SIGNAL
95. appear in the HDD Title List gt The title contained a copy protection signal so it was moved page 99 High speed dubbing is not possible gt The title cannot be dubbed at high speed page 100 Even if A B erasure is performed so that a title does not contain mixed picture sizes it is still treated as a title with mixed picture sizes HDD DVD Dubbing is not possible gt The title cannot be dubbed page 99 Display The clock has stopped gt Set the clock again page 129 gt The clock stopped due to a power failure that lasted for more than 1 hour Reset the clock page 129 The timer indicator is flashing gt The disc does not have enough space gt Insert a recordable disc into the recorder gt The inserted DVD is protected page 44 The clock does not appear in the front panel display when the recorder is turned off gt Front Panel Display is set to Off in the Options setup page 149 Remote control The remote does not function gt Different command modes are set for the recorder and remote Set the same command mode page 149 The default command mode setting for this recorder and the supplied remote is DVD3 You can check the current command mode in the front panel display page 149 gt The batteries are weak gt The remote is too far from the recorder 1 38 The subtitle language cannot be changed or turned off gt Multilin
96. audio signals If you do the speakers may be damaged when a peak level section is played On cleaning Clean the cabinet panel and controls with a soft cloth slightly moistened with a mild detergent solution Do not use any type of abrasive pad scouring powder or solvent such as alcohol or benzine On cleaning discs disc lens cleaners Do not use cleaning discs or disc lens cleaners including wet or spray types These may cause the recorder to malfunction Operating temperature 5 to 35 Operating humidity 2596 to 8096 Supplied accessories Mains lead 1 Aerial cable 1 Remote commander remote 1 Set top box controller 1 R6 size AA batteries 2 Specifications and design are subject to change without notice Notes about the discs To keep the disc clean handle the disc by its edge Do not touch the surface Dust fingerprints or scratches on the disc may cause it to malfunction Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight or heat sources such as hot air ducts or leave it in a car parked in direct sunlight as the temperature may rise considerably inside the car After playing store the disc in its case Clean the disc with a cleaning cloth Wipe the disc from the centre out Do not use solvents such as benzine thinner commercially available cleaners or anti static spray intended for vinyl LPs Do not use the following discs disc that has a non standard sh
97. can free up disc space by erasing titles page 92 Adjust the recording picture quality if necessary page 59 Notes To play a recorded disc on other DVD equipment finalise the disc page 45 digital teletext is operated while recording its contents will be recorded on the disc If the subtitles are displayed while recording they will be recorded on the disc Recording mode Like the standard x3 recording modes of video tapes you can select the desired recording mode using the REC MODE button Recording modes with higher quality provide a more beautiful recording but the large data volume also results in a shorter recording time Conversely a longer duration provides a longer recording time but the lower data volume results in a coarser picture quality Press REC MODE repeatedly to switch the recording modes To select further options for recording mode manual recording mode set Manual Mode to go to setup in the Recording setup page 141 To record pictures in higher quality than HQ mode on the HDD set Manual Rec Mode to go to setup and then select HQ For details about manual recording mode see page 141 For timer recording you can also select AUTO as recording mode which maximizes the recording quality for the space available on the disc if recording to DVD or to fit onto a blank disc if recording to HDD Viewing a
98. component is incorrect gt The recorder is in reverse play fast forward slow motion or pause mode gt If the audio signal does not come through the DIGITAL OUT COAXIAL HDMI OUT jacks check the Audio Out setup page 138 gt The recorder supports only MP3 audio Dolby Digital and MPEG audio for DivX video files Press AUDIO and select MP3 audio or MPEG audio No sound is output from the HDMI OUT jack gt Try the following Turn the recorder off and on again Turn the connected equipment off and on again Disconnect and then connect the HDMI cord again gt The HDMI OUT jack is connected to a DVI device DVI jacks do not accept audio signals gt The equipment connected to the HDMI OUT jack does not conform to the audio signal format In this case set Audio Output to PCM in the HDMI Output setup page 148 jeuonippy continued 1 53 Sound distortion occurs gt Set Analog Tuner Level in the Audio In setup to Compression page 137 Sound is noisy gt When playing aCD with DTS sound tracks noise will come from the LINE 2 OUT R AUDIO L jacks LINE 3 TV jack or LINE 1 DECODER jack page 109 The sound volume is low gt The sound volume is low on some DVDs The sound volume may improve if you set Audio DRC in the Audio Out setup to On page 139 gt Set Analog Tuner Level in th
99. ise 5 i 2 PEE il jesgsgssgsss2sg38 i DE FAR 007 FLEXIBLE FLAT CABLE RU 001 RV 003 DIGITAL 006 HARNESS HARNESS TUNER FAN FLEXIBLE 5 o al a 5 l s wf 131111113 a CN201 5 FLR 010 AB FLEXIBLE 1 CN102 10P CN101 6P FLAT CABLE FR 274 BOARD FL 178 BOARD FRAME SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM 4 1 4 2 RDR HXD870 HXD970 HXD1070 4 2 SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS WAVEFORMS THIS NOTE IS COMMON FOR SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS AV 114 BOARD DT 120 BOARD In addition to this the necessary note is printed in each block For schematic diagrams capacitors are in uF unless otherwise noted pF 50V or less are not indicated except for electrolytics and tantalums All resistors are in ohms 1 4 W Chip resistors 1 10 W un less otherwise specified 10009 MQ2 1000kQ Caution when replacing chip parts New parts must be attached after removal of chip Be careful not to heat the minus side of tantalum capacitor be cause it is damaged by the heat All variable and adjustable resistors have characteristic curve B unless otherwise noted non flammable resistor fusible resistor pane
100. open 751 ae o O CLOSE gt ICM U601 CONTROLLER S VIDEO IC101 VDD TUNER VDD DET AERIAL V 1R5_IN 601 VIDEO 4 CN3801 IN y ATODAT10 15 a 0 15 IDE OUT im EURO MSP IC1 02 AUDIO L 13 43 18 432 2 MSPSTAT POWER EAL i DET 102 1 AUDIO 31 1201 l XRESET F 32 768KHz i MSPSTAT i DADRSO 12 161221 5802 COMPONENT 512Mbit x2 5602 VIDEO 47 DDR SDRAM 105602 DPIN ATIDAT10 15 SATA RXP RXN H D D i 05202 64Mbit BRIDGE E 15202 SDRAM 15 1102 IT EU RR PEN LIII Lo TET eee IIIS 64Mbit 6 FLASH ROM 4 2 S VIDEO 9201 205 204 105103 CN3802 C 5207 213 5101 AT1DAT10 15 ATIDAT10 15 FUNCTION POWER DV PHY N IDE HDD LINE2 IN SWITCH 5102 101 SY ONE TOUCH DUB 13 TXD RXD 13 VIDEO AUDIO L 0 3 RECEIVER n 5 7 2 XTAL OSC R HDD DVD USBDP2 AUDIO R 0 201 JA5801 1 SEG1 16 FLCLK TEE GRD1 12 FLDRVE FLSTB 15 USBDM1 SDA m USBDP1 SCL FLUORESCENT USBVFB CEC HPD DISPLAY EE 1 2 T201 nid GNIS TPAP TPAN CONVERTER s DV TPB
101. or Select when viewing the text pages press ENTER To exit the text service Follow the on screen instructions or press text or EXIT Z RETURN Q Notes The maximum continuous recording time to the HDD is 12 hours for a single title A title longer than 12 hours is divided Situations below may cause slight inaccuracies with the recording time Recording a programme with poor reception or a programme or video source of low picture quality Recording on a disc that has already been edited Recording only a still picture or just sound Programmes are recorded in the following aspect ratio n the original aspect ratio when recording to the HDD when Recording Format 15 set to Video Mode Off in the Recording setup page 144 DVD RWSs DVD Rs VR mode In 4 3 when recording to DVD RWs DVD Rs When recording to DVD R DLs Video mode the title is divided when the layer switches Unrecordable pictures Pictures with copy protection cannot be recorded on this recorder Copy control Recordable discs signals Copy Free DD Copy Once HDD The recorded disc can be played only CPRM compatible equipment page 10 Ajuo 5495 4 104 59911185 0 apiny 51 Timer Recording Standard EPG HDD You can set the timer for a total of 32 programmes up t
102. page 47 to format DVD RWSs DVD Rs in Video mode See the Photo Album list to check which albums have been copied page 122 Q Notes You may not be able to play the slideshow depending on DVD equipment e You cannot copy JPEG image files to a recordable DVD which has been recorded using other recorders devices DATA DVDs finalised on this recorder may not be able to play on other equipment page 45 No more than 99 slideshows can be recorded to a disc When copying an album containing more than 99 JPEG image files to a disc slideshows will be created with every 99 JPEG image files and recorded to a disc For DVD Rs the available disc space does not increase even if you erase slideshows Copying JPEG image files to a disc HDD DVD RW DVD R You can copy the edited JPEG image files to a DVD RW DVD R Video mode A slideshow is also recorded to the disc as a video file You can play the slideshow on other DVD equipment that may not be compatible with the playback of JPEG image files 1 insert a DVD RW DVD R in Video mode 2 Press SYSTEM MENU The System Menu appears 3 Select Photo Album and press ENTER The Photo Album menu appears Copying all JPEG image files from the connected USB device USB DVD RW DVD R 1 Connect the USB device to the USB jack on the recorder Insert a blank DVD RW DVD R Video mode 2 Press SYSTEM MENU The System Menu appears 4 Sel
103. page 66 The displayed category depends upon the programme data received by this recorder Movies Sport and Children are examples of possible categories Sets the profile for your favourite programmes page 67 Schedule Displays the list of timer settings page 77 Auo anfojeue 104 5 10109 continued 63 To select a programme position quickly using the TV broadcast station logo 1 Press GUIDE The GUIDE Plus system Screen appears 2 Press the yellow button Channels Pr2 25 May 10 10 8 Press or gt to select a channel Press ENTER to return to the at this channel position BBCI 01 Select a channel one fol Ein li tv Promotional Panel 3 Select the TV broadcast station logo using 4 4 gt and press ENTER The display returns to Grid and the programme currently being broadcast by the selected TV station is selected 4 Selecta programme using and press ENTER To return to the Home position Press the blue button The cursor returns to the home position on the Grid To set a programme for timer recording See One Button Recording GUIDE Plus in the UK only page 73 To close the GUIDE Plus system Press GUIDE Hints Press the PAGE buttons to change
104. refer to the instructions supplied with the printer 9114 127 Press amp repeatedly until the programme position of the station that carries a time signal appears Press to select Start and press ENTER f the recorder does not receive a time signal from any station press RETURN and set the clock manually f the Auto Clock Set function did not set the clock correctly for your local area try another station for the Auto Clock Set function or set the clock manually Manual Manual Clock Set Set the clock manually Select Clock Setting in Basic and press ENTER Select Manual and press ENTER Initial Setup Manual Clock Setting Digital Tuner Analog Tuner Time Zone Video In Out Audio In Summer Time Off Audio Out Language Recording Austria Vienna Press lt to select the time zone for your area and press Select if you are now on summer time and press ENTER initial Setup Manual Clock Setting Digital Tuner Analog Tuner Date MON Video In Out Audio In 2007 Y Time Audio Out 9 Time Zone Austria Language Recording v Summer Time off pue continued 1 29 130 132 D Press 44 to set day and press Set the month year hour and minutes in sequence Press amp w
105. system does not appear gt DEven if you complete Setup TV programme listings do not appear until the recorder receives the GUIDE Plus data Turn off the recorder but do not unplug it Wait for 24 hours It may take several days for the recorder to receive the GUIDE Plus data for all programme positions If the recorder does not receive the GUIDE Plus data after 24 hours set the host channel manually page 69 gt The country region or postal code is incorrect Correctly set your country region and postal code page 26 gt When the recorder is connected to a set top box receiver the set top box receiver must be turned on to download the GUIDE Plus data gt Area numbers that cannot be received using GUIDE Plus are set Select Easy Setup in the Basic setup from Initial Setup in the System Menu and follow the on screen instructions to make the settings again page 26 gt The Time Lock function on your cable box is activated Set this function to off gt If the host channel has changed or moved the programme guide data cannot be received In this case follow the steps in Searching for the GUIDE Plus host channel page 68 to update the host channel setting If the problem persists after waiting for one day search for the host channel at the following website and set the host channel manually page 69 www europe guideplus com The programme position number in
106. the title is divided when the layer switches Recording stereo and bilingual programmes The recorder automatically receives and records stereo and bilingual programmes based on the ZWEITON system or the NICAM system The HDD when HDD Recording Format is set to Video Mode Off in the Recording setup page 144 and a DVD RW VR mode or DVD R VR mode can record both main and sub sounds You can switch between main and sub when playing the disc The HDD when HDD Recording Format is set to Video Mode in the Recording setup page 144 anda DVD RW DVD R DVD RW Video mode or DVD R Video mode can record only one sound track main or sub at a time Select the sound track in the Audio In setup before recording starts Set Bilingual Recording to default or B R in the Audio In setup page 138 About HDD Recording format see page 144 ZWEITON German stereo system When a stereo based programme is received Stereo appears When a bilingual ZWEITON based programme is received L R or L R appears NICAM system To record a NICAM programme be sure to set NICAM Select to NICAM default in the Audio In setup If the sound is not clear when listening to NICAM broadcasts set NICAM Select to Standard page 137 Hint You can select the audio main or sub while recording bilingual programmes
107. them out to the customer and recommend their replacement 4 Look for parts which through functioning show obvious signs of deterioration Point them out to the customer and recommend their replacement 5 Check the B voltage to see it is at the values specified 6 Flexible Circuit Board Repairing Keep the temperature of soldering iron around 270 C during repairing Do not touch the soldering iron on the same conductor of the circuit board within 3 times e Be careful not to apply force on the conductor when soldering or unsoldering 5 SERVICE NOTE l DISK REMOVAL PROCEDURE IF THE TRAY CANNOT BE EJECTED FORCED EJECTION 5 2 BOARD CONNECTION SERVICE REMOTE CONTROLLER 5 3 MODEL NAME SETTING METHOD WHEN ENGINE TSR PLAC BID 6 4 HOW TO DIAGNOSE HDD 7 441 Detective 4 2 HDD Recognition SEATS sese Vete ou oup eee ieu pesa aun 7 4 3 Display E01 FLD with unrecognized 8 4 4 Display E02 on 9 4 5 When playing a video MP3 or JPG the contents freeze 9 4b Factory Checka aeiia 10 RAE Teee TM 10 4 8 Performance 11 1 GENERAL 1 1 1 1 Quick Guide to Disc Types mm 1 2 Hookups and Settings em 1 3 Hooking Up the Recorde
108. 0 0 5 1 10W 0 59 1 10W 0 0 0 1M 5 1 10 820 5 1 10 0 0 100 1005 4 AEP1 AEP3 UK AUS 33 1005X4 AEP2 100 1005X4 AEP1 AEP3 UK AUS 33 1005X4 AEP2 100 5 1 10 AEP1 AEP3 UK AUS 33 5 1 10 AEP2 100 5 1 10 AEP1 AEP3 UK AUS 33 5 1 10 AEP2 100 5 1 10 AEP1 AEP3 UK AUS 33 5 1 10 AEP2 0 10K 5 1 10 10K 5 1 10 150 5 1 10 0 0 0 0 0 0 33 1005 4 33 1005 4 33 1005 4 33 5 1 16 33 5 1 16 33 5 1 16 33 5 1 16 33 5 1 16 0 Ref No Part No Description Remarks Ref No Part No Description Remarks R704 1 218 935 11 33 5 1 16W 1057 1 216 864 11 SHORT CHIP 0 R705 1 218 935 11 33 5 1 16W R1058 1 218 965 11 10K 5 1 16W R706 1 218 935 11 33 5 1 16W R1059 1 218 965 11 RES CHIP 10K 5 1 16W R707 1 218 935 11 33 5 1 16W R1060 1 218 961 11 4 7K 5 1 16W R709 1 218 965 11 10K 5 1 16W R1061 1 218 961 11 4 7K 5 1 16W R714 1 216 295 91 SHORT CHIP 0 lt TRANSFORMER gt R715 1 218 990 81 SHORT CHIP 0 R719 1 218 971 11 33K 5 1 16W 1300 1 445 211 11 TRANSFORMER HIGH FREQUENCY R720 1 218 965 11 RES CHIP 10K 5 1 16W R721 1 234 372 11 RES NETWORK 100 1005X4 TUNER R722 1 234 372 11 RES NETWORK 100 1005X4 A U301 1 693 743 11 TUNER TUPADTC D101HB
109. 00000 Power On X 81 Power ON Test 81 0 00000 82 all Sequential Read Verify Test H M S 83 Power OFF Test 83 0 00000 Power off H MS 15s 84 Complete T Power ON Test 8 Power OFF Test 9 Power ON Test a Power OFF Test b Complete Fig 1 FL Display Flow The logo for Factory Check and Performance Check is recorded in ATA ATAPI History Error 11 display _81 HDD ERR 82 This section is extracted from instruction manual RDR HXD770 HXD870 HXD970 HXD1 070 3 113 760 11 1 WARNING To reduce the risk of fire or electric shock do not expose this apparatus to rain or moisture To avoid electrical shock do not open the cabinet Refer servicing to qualified personnel only The mains lead must be changed only at a qualified service shop Do not expose the battery to excessive heat such as direct sunlight fire or the like CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT LASER KLASSE 1 LUOKAN 1 LASERLAITE KLASS 1 LASERAPPARAT This appliance is classified as a CLASS 1 LASER product The CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT MARKING is located on the rear of the unit CAUTION The use of optical instruments with this product will increase eye hazard As the laser beam used in this DVD recorder is harmful to eyes do not attempt to disassemble the cabinet Refer servicing to qualified personnel only CAUTION CLASS 3B VISIBLE AND INVISIBLE LASER
110. 01 yy JL236 E 2 10 28 TU pocow 829 IT CONTROLLER nar DBGP2 lt 8 2L LC87F06J2A F58W3 E N D DBGP 1 ride 7 GND 5 UNC N DBGP 0 L 5 THROUGH THE FUNC I FUNC ON DBGPO lt lt 6 FAR 006 FFC ON lt BLANK LED PLTV R183 100 4 E BLANK gt ATH Wy LED Q MW 5 TO 4 5 NIN LED_DIVX R184 100 7 4 25 4 5 AVUN SAUL LED DIVX R186 100 RCSEL2 JL LED A TV LED HDD2 L C2IN JL e s 1102 AGC SCL 5 G M 4 SDA mer IC101 VDD DET TO 5 5 Nell 101 40 51 103 9P s oe 5 5 7 EJ GND 5 RD 4 AUS only DATTO J 8104 47K 8 3 TO T RTOMAIN GND z viv 1 GTOMAIN 2 5 0102 C R IN 2SC4154TP 1 EF E AEP UK only 0110 AMUTEI TO RD 065 3 7 DTA143EUA T106 R OUT BOARD EPGEQ CN2301 xs 211 9m THROUGH THE JL FAR 006 FFC xs 2 19 GND 5 EPGEQ 0 Ar guo 4 34 R112 10k CN 18 4 9 2 my GND R208 1102 E TI 16 GIN 2 6 4 9 0 nm V 2 IN RESET 0112 S R210 14 3 2 2904154TPMEF 059 13 G JL276 JL280 VIT vni 12
111. 1 Audio Video cord 1 Australian Set top box controller 1 AEP UK model R6 size AA batteries 2 EURO AV adapter with selector 1 Australian model EURO AV adapter 1 Australian model Specifications and design are subject to change without notice DVD RECORDER SONY WARNING WHEN SERVICING DO NOT APPROACH THE LASER EXIT WITH THE EYE TOO CLOSELY IN CASE IT IS NECESSARY TO CONFIRM LASER BEAM EMISSION BE SURE TO OBSERVE FROM A DISTANCE OF MORETHAN 25 cm FROMTHE SURFACE OF THE OBJECTIVE LENS ON THE OPTICAL PICK UP BLOCK CAUTION The use of optical instrument with this product will increase eye hazard CAUTION Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT LASER KLASSE 1 LUOKAN 1 LASERLAITE KLASS 1 LASERAPPARAT SAFETY RELATED COMPONENT WARNING COMPONENTS IDENTIFIED BY MARK A OR DOTTED LINE WITH MARK ON THE SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS AND IN THE PARTS LIST ARE CRITICAL TO SAFE OPERATION REPLACE THESE COMPONENTS WITH SONY PARTS WHOSE PART NUMBERS APPEAR AS SHOWN IN THIS MANUAL OR IN SUPPLEMENTS PUBLISHED BY SONY Unleaded solder Boards requiring use of unleaded solder are printed with the lead free mark LF indicating the solder contains no lead Caution Some printed circuit boards may not come printed with the lead free mark due to their particular size LEAD FR
112. 1 16W RES CHIP 220 5 1 16W RES CHIP 220 5 1 16W RES CHIP 220 5 1 16W RES CHIP 47K 5 1 16W RES CHIP 220 5 1 16W RES CHIP 820 5 1 16W RES CHIP 820 5 1 16W RES CHIP 820 5 1 16W SHORT CHIP 0 RES CHIP 3 3K 5 1 16W RES CHIP 3 3K 5 1 16W RES CHIP 3 3K 5 1 16W METAL CHIP 4 7K 0 5 1 0W METAL CHIP 100 5 1 10W SHORT CHIP 0 RES CHIP 10K 5 1 16W RES CHIP 33 5 1 16W RES CHIP 33 5 1 16W RES NETWORK 33 1005X4 Ref No R205 R206 R210 R211 R219 R220 R221 R222 R223 R230 R233 R234 R236 R237 R238 R239 R240 R241 R242 R243 R244 R245 R248 R252 R253 R256 R271 R273 R274 R281 R301 R306 R307 R310 R311 R312 R313 R314 R317 R318 R319 R320 R503 R504 R505 R506 R507 R510 R511 R515 R516 R601 R602 R603 R604 R1001 R1003 R1004 R1005 R1006 R1013 Part No 1 242 963 21 1 242 963 21 1 218 935 11 1 218 990 81 1 234 377 21 1 234 377 21 1 218 973 11 1 218 973 11 1 218 933 11 1 218 990 81 1 218 990 81 1 218 990 81 1 218 933 11 1 218 965 11 1 218 933 11 1 218 965 11 1 218 933 11 1 218 965 11 1 218 933 11 1 218 965 11 1 218 933 11 1 218 965 11 1 218 965 11 1 218 965 11 1 218 965 11 1 218 965 11 1 216 295 91 1 216 295 91 1 216 295 91 1 218 990 81 1 218 973 11 1 218 957 11 1 218 957 11 1 218 953 11 1 218 953 11 1 218 953 11 1 218 973 11 1 218 953 11 1 242 963 21 1 242 963 21 1 242 963 21 1 242 963 21 1 218 953 11 1 218 953 11 1
113. 10K 5 METAL CHIP 10K 5 METAL CHIP 2 2K 5 METAL CHIP 2 2K 5 METAL CHIP 3 3K 5 METAL CHIP 5 6K 5 METAL CHIP 10K 5 METAL CHIP 2 2K 5 METAL CHIP 2 2K 5 METAL CHIP 3 3K 5 METAL CHIP 3 3K 5 METAL CHIP 47 5 METAL CHIP 47 5 METAL CHIP 47 5 lt SWITCH gt SWITCH TACTILE 4 OPEN CLOSE SWITCH TACTILE REC STOP INPUT SELECT SWITCH TACTILE SWITCH TACTILE REC SWITCH TACTILE CHANNEL SWITCH TACTILE CHANNEL SWITCH TACTILE PLAY SWITCH TACTILE STOP SWITCH TACTILE DVD SWITCH TACTILE HDD Remarks 1 10W 1 10W 1 10W 1 10W 1 10W 1 10W 1 10W 1 10W 1 10W 1 10W 1 10W 1 10W 1 10W 1 10W 1 10W 1 10W 1 10W 1 10W 1 10W 1 10W 1 10W 1 10W 1 10W 1 10W 1 10W 1 10W 1 10W 1 10W Ref 1201 1 445 207 11 Description TRANSFORMER TRANSFORMER DC DC CONVERTER Remarks C100 C101 C103 C104 C105 C106 C107 C113 C114 C115 C116 C117 C120 C121 C122 C124 C125 C127 C128 C129 C130 C131 C133 C134 C135 C136 C137 C140 C141 C142 C143 C144 C145 C146 C149 C152 C153 C154 C155 C156 C157 C158 C159 C162 C163 C164 C165 C166 C167 C169 1 164 937 11 1 164 937 11 1 126 210 21 1 114 130 11 1 164 937 11 1 107 820 11 1 164 936 11 1 100 581 81 1 100 581 81 1 164 943 81 1 125 777 11 1 164 937 11 1 125 777 11 1 164 939 11 1 164 939 11 1 125 777 11 1 114 130
114. 11 1 119 923 11 1 125 777 11 1 114 130 11 1 127 760 11 1 137 987 81 1 125 777 11 1 125 777 11 1 164 943 81 1 125 777 11 1 164 942 11 1 100 415 91 1 100 415 91 1 100 966 91 1 100 966 91 1 164 943 81 1 164 943 81 1 100 966 91 1 164 943 81 1 164 937 11 1 124 779 00 1 114 130 11 1 100 415 91 1 165 448 81 1 164 943 81 1 164 943 81 1 107 820 11 1 114 130 11 1 126 210 21 1 164 937 11 1 164 858 11 1 164 858 11 1 107 820 11 1 125 777 11 80 65 BS BOARD supplied UK RD 65 DS EM BOARD not supplied AUS CAPACITOR CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP ELECT CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP ELECT CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP ELECT CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP Ref No 20000 series K K K KK K K K K K K K K K K K K 0 001uF 0 001uF 220uF 1uF 0 001 uF 0 1uF 680PF 0 0047uF 0 0047uF 0 01uF 0 001uF 0 1uF
115. 11 METAL CHIP 1 8K 0 5 1 16 1027 1 208 893 11 METAL CHIP 1 8K 0 5 1 16 lt IC gt R1028 1 208 893 11 METAL CHIP 1 8K 0 5 1 16W R1029 1 218 929 11 RES CHIP 10 5 1 16W 101 6 600 392 01 GP1UM27XKOSF R1030 1 218 929 11 10 5 1 16W COIL R1031 1 218 929 11 10 5 1 16W 1032 1 218 929 11 10 5 1 16W L102 1 400 180 21 INDUCTOR EMI FERRITE 1608 1033 1 218 951 11 RES CHIP 680 5 1 16W L103 1 400 180 21 INDUCTOR EMI FERRITE 1608 R1034 1 218 951 11 680 5 1 16W L104 1 400 180 21 INDUCTOR EMI FERRITE 1608 L105 1 400 180 21 INDUCTOR EMI FERRITE 1608 R1035 1 218 951 11 RES CHIP 680 5 1 16W R1036 1 218 951 11 RES CHIP 680 5 1 16W lt RESISTOR gt R1037 1 218 973 11 RES CHIP 47K 5 1 16W R1038 1 218 973 11 RES CHIP 47K 5 1 16W R104 1 216 803 11 METAL CHIP 33 5 1 10W R1039 1 218 973 11 47K 5 1 16W R105 1 216 803 11 METAL CHIP 33 5 1 10W R108 1 216 803 11 METAL CHIP 33 5 1 10W R1040 1 234 378 21 RES NETWORK 10K 1005X4 R109 1 216 803 11 METAL CHIP 33 5 1 10W R1042 1 234 372 11 RES NETWORK 100 1005 4 R112 1 216 864 11 SHORT CHIP 0 1043 1 234 372 11 RES NETWORK 100 1005X4 R1044 1 234 372 11 RES NETWORK 100 1005X4 R113 1 216 864 11 SHORT CHIP 0 R1045 1 234 372 11 RES NETWORK 100 1005X4 SWITCH R1046 1 218 941 81 100 5 1 16W R1047 1 234 372 11 RES NETWORK 100 1005 4 101 1 771 410 21 SWI
116. 115 156 11 1 107 826 11 1 165 908 11 1 165 908 11 1 165 908 11 1 165 908 11 1 165 908 11 1 165 908 11 1 107 826 11 1 164 156 11 1 164 156 11 1 115 156 11 1 165 908 11 1 165 908 11 1 165 908 11 1 165 908 11 1 165 908 11 1 165 908 11 1 107 826 11 When indicating parts by reference number please include the board name The components identified by mark or dotted line with mark are critical for safety Replace only with part number specified Abbreviation Australian model AUS Description CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP ELECT CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP ELECT ELECT CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP ELECT ELECT CERAMIC CHIP ELECT ELECT CERAMIC CHIP ELECT ELECT CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP ELECT CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP 0 1uF 0 1uF 100uF 0 1uF 0 1uF 100uF 100uF 0 1uF 0 1uF 220uF 100uF 0 1uF 100uF 100uF 0 1uF 100uF 100uF 100PF 0 1uF 10uF 0 1uF 0 1uF 100 100 0 1uF 0 1uF 0 1uF 0 1uF 20 20
117. 130 11 1 114 130 11 1 114 130 11 1 114 130 11 1 114 130 11 1 164 943 81 1 114 130 11 1 100 966 91 1 164 937 11 1 164 937 11 1 114 130 11 1 114 130 11 1 114 130 11 1 114 130 11 1 114 130 11 1 114 130 11 1 114 130 11 1 114 130 11 1 114 130 11 1 107 820 11 1 114 130 11 1 107 820 11 1 117 681 11 1 126 210 21 1 126 210 21 1 127 760 11 1 127 760 11 1 126 205 11 1 124 779 00 1 114 130 11 1 127 760 11 1 127 760 11 1 218 967 11 1 114 130 11 1 164 943 81 1 114 130 11 1 100 966 91 1 164 937 11 1 164 937 11 1 164 937 11 1 164 937 11 1 164 937 11 1 114 130 11 1 125 889 11 Description CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP ELECT CHIP ELECT CHIP ELECT CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP ELECT CHIP ELECT CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP RES CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP 10uF 0 01uF 68PF 15PF 1uF 1uF 1uF 1u
118. 16W Ref R5817 R5818 R5821 R5822 R5824 R5825 R5826 R5827 R5828 R5829 R5831 R5832 R5833 R5834 R5836 R5837 R5838 R5839 R5842 R5843 R5844 R5845 R5846 R5848 R5852 R5853 R5854 R5855 R5856 R5857 R5859 R5861 R5862 R5863 R5864 R5865 R5867 R5868 R5869 R5870 R6001 X5101 X5201 5502 1 218 961 11 1 218 961 11 1 218 961 11 1 218 961 11 1 163 038 91 1 234 370 21 1 234 370 21 1 234 370 21 1 234 370 21 1 218 938 11 1 218 990 81 1 164 360 11 1 218 933 11 1 218 933 11 1 218 965 11 1 218 990 81 1 218 935 11 1 218 949 11 1 218 947 11 1 218 947 11 1 218 947 11 1 218 947 11 1 218 961 11 1 218 961 11 1 218 965 11 1 218 965 11 1 218 965 11 1 234 369 21 1 218 965 11 1 218 965 11 1 218 965 11 1 218 965 11 1 218 961 11 1 218 951 11 1 218 953 11 1 218 990 81 1 218 950 11 1 218 957 11 1 218 961 11 1 218 970 11 1 218 990 81 1 813 049 21 1 795 904 21 1 813 052 21 Description RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP CERAMIC CHIP RES NETWORK RES NETWORK RES NETWORK RES NETWORK RES CHIP SHORT CHIP CERAMIC CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP SHORT CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES NETWORK RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP SHORT CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP SHORT CHIP VIBRATOR
119. 2 BLOCK DIAGRAMS OVERALL BLOCK DIAGRAM 3 1 BLOCK DIAGRAM 3 3 120 BLOCK DIAGRAM 3 5 RD 065 BLOCK DIAGRAM 22g FR 274 FL 178 BLOCK DIAGRAM See 3 9 POWER BLOCK DIAGRAM 3 11 SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS AND PRINTED WIRING BOARDS FRAME SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM 4 1 SCHENATIC DIAGRAMS 4 3 MAVEBORNIS viti isum are tou 4 4 AV 114 1 5 IT CONTROLLER IR SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM 4 5 AV 114 2 5 POWER FAN SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM 4 7 AV 114 3 5 VIDEO AUDIO SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM 4 9 AV 114 4 5 EURO SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM 4 11 AV 114 5 5 TUNER SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM 4 13 e DT 120 1 5 2 1 SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM 4 15 DT 120 2 5 CI CONTROL SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM 4 17 DT 120 3 5 DIGITAL TUNER SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM 4 19 DT 120 4 5 POWER SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM 4 21 DT 120 5 5 VIDEO DECODER SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM 4 23 FR 274 FL DRIVER LINE 2 IN FUNCTION SW SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM 4 25 FL 178 DV USB REMOCON RECEIVER POWER SW SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM 4 27 RD 065 1 7 POWER BLOCK SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM 4 29 RD 065 2 7 EMMA BLOCK SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM RH 4 31 RD 065 3 7 VIDEO AUDIO BLOCK SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM 4 33 RD 065 4 7 MEMORY BLOCK SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM 4 35 RD 065 5 7 SATA IDE IF SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM 4 37
120. 2090 5 10 5 5 0 25PF 0 25PF 1090 1090 5 10 10 5 5 5 20 20 20 20 20 20 Remarks 90V 29V 50V 25V 50V 50V 50V 50V 50V 6 3V 6 3V 6 3V 6 3V 6 3V 50V 50V 50V 50V 16V 25V 25V 25V 50V 50V 50V 50V 50V 50V 10V 10V 35V 25V 25V 50V 25V 25V 25V 25V 10V 50V 50V 50V 50V 10V 25V 25V 25V 50V 50V 25V 50V 50V 50V 50V 50V 50V 10V 50V 10V 10V Ref Description Remarks Ref Part Description Remarks C751 1 164 156 11 CERAMIC CHIP 0 25 0523 6 501 855 01 DIODE DAN217UT106 AEP UK D524 6 501 855 01 DIODE DAN217UT106 0752 1 162 927 11 CERAMIC CHIP 100PF 5 50 0526 8 719 988 61 DIODE 155355 17 0527 8 719 988 61 DIODE 155355 17 753 1 162 927 11 CERAMIC CHIP 100PF 5 50V AEP UK 0528 8 719 988 61 DIODE 155355 17 0754 1 162 927 11 CERAMIC CHIP 100PF 5 50V 0529 8 719 083 63 DIODE UDZSTE 1713B AEP UK 0530 8 719 083 63 DIODE UDZSTE 1713B 0531 8 719 081 42 DIODE UMZ6 8N T106 lt CONNECTOR gt D801 8 719 081 42 DIODE UMZ6 8N T106 CN103 1 779 277 11 CONNECTOR LIF NON ZIF 9P lt FUSE gt CN105 1 784 496 11 CONNECTOR FFC FPC 17 106 1 568 830 11 CONNECTOR SOCKET NIC150 1 576 863 21 FUSE 0 5A 32V CN302 1 784 746 11 CONNECTOR FFC 24P NIC317 1 576 863 21 FUSE 0 5A 32V DIODE IC gt D101 8 19 988 61 DIODE 155355 17 10101
121. 218 966 11 1 218 953 11 1 218 953 11 1 217 907 11 1 217 907 11 1 218 971 11 1 218 966 11 1 218 965 11 1 218 965 11 1 218 953 11 1 218 953 11 1 218 965 11 1 218 843 11 1 218 839 11 1 218 967 11 1 218 967 11 1 218 965 11 Description RES NETWORK RES NETWORK RES CHIP SHORT CHIP RES NETWORK RES NETWORK RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP SHORT CHIP SHORT CHIP SHORT CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP SHORT CHIP SHORT CHIP SHORT CHIP SHORT CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES NETWORK RES NETWORK RES NETWORK RES NETWORK RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP 33 1005X4 33 1005X4 33 0 5 4 7 1005X4 4 7 1005X4 47 47 22 0 0 0 22 10 22 10 22 10 22 10 22 10 10 10 10 10 1K 47 1K 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 33 1005 4 33 1005 4 33 1005 4 33 1005 4 1K 1K 12K 10K 680 470 15K 15K 10K 5 5 5 5 5 5 Remarks Ref R1016 R1017 1 16W R1018 R1019 1021 1027 1 16W R1028 1 16W R1029 1 16W R1030 R1030 1 16W R103
122. 22 FOER PHY_DO E13 D13 E12 TPAP 1102 4 7 D12 E11 D11 00 7 07 10 010 Eng never 014 5103 6 29 31 33 35 W21 Y21 AA21 U23 SCLK 015 SCLK 38 40 42 44 V22 124 U24 N23 R23 PHYLREQ 5101 30 32 34 36 M22 722 T21 P21 22 5 PHYLPS LREQ 39 41 43 45 20 821 LPS 016 BRVTINKON LPS 5101 i Z LINKON E16 LKON i e PHY XRST 20 24 22 1 23 GPIO52 RESETB V23 Y23 V21 AA23 RADDO1 Y22 P22 U22 P23 021 U20 AB24 R24 M21 RADD22 HADRS13 JTSEL 5 DINTEN HADRS6 EJSNGEN 7 3 TDI ms ws JTMRST DINT EDINT RST V43D HADRS5 7 13 F21 JTCL JTDO JTMS JTRST EDINT OFPULSE DDC SW1 Note1 The HDMI block is highly confidential and prohibited from releasing to public Note2 The components identified by mark amp contain confidential information Strictly follow the instructions whenever the components are repaired and or replaced 3 8 HDD UNIT TO FROM FL 178 BOARD CN102 SEE PAGE 3 9 TO FROM FL 178 BOARD CN101 SEE PAGE 3 9 JA5801 3 5 FL 178 274 BLOCK DIAGRAM FLDATA TO FROM AV 114 BOARD CN105 SEE PAGE 3 4 S VIDEO LINE2 IN VIDEO AUDIO L
123. 234 400 21 1 234 400 21 1 218 990 81 1 218 990 81 1 216 864 11 1 216 295 91 1 216 864 11 1 218 847 11 1 218 847 11 1 216 864 11 1 216 864 11 1 216 864 11 1 216 857 11 1 216 820 11 1 216 864 11 1 216 864 11 1 234 372 11 1 242 963 21 1 234 372 11 1 242 963 21 1 216 809 11 1 216 803 11 1 216 809 11 1 216 803 11 1 216 809 11 1 216 803 11 1 216 864 11 1 216 833 11 1 216 833 11 1 216 811 11 1 216 864 11 1 216 864 11 1 216 864 11 1 216 864 11 1 216 864 11 1 216 864 11 1 242 963 21 1 242 963 21 1 242 963 21 1 218 935 11 1 218 935 11 1 218 935 11 1 218 935 11 1 218 935 11 1 216 295 91 Description CONDUCTOR NETWORK CONDUCTOR NETWORK CONDUCTOR NETWORK CONDUCTOR NETWORK CONDUCTOR NETWORK CONDUCTOR NETWORK SHORT CHIP SHORT CHIP SHORT CHIP SHORT CHIP SHORT CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP SHORT CHIP SHORT CHIP SHORT CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP SHORT CHIP SHORT CHIP RES NETWORK RES NETWORK RES NETWORK RES NETWORK METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP SHORT CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP SHORT CHIP SHORT CHIP SHORT CHIP SHORT CHIP SHORT CHIP SHORT CHIP RES NETWORK RES NETWORK RES NETWORK RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP SHORT CHIP Remarks 1005 4 AEP2 1005 4 AEP2 1005X4 AEP1 AEP3 UK AUS 1005X4 AEP1 AEP3 UK AUS 1005X4 AEP1 AEP3 UK AUS 1005X4 0 0 0
124. 30 mVp p Fig 7 3 4 Component Video Output Y Check Purpose This check confirms that the component Y signal output has the rated amplitude If this signal level 1 not correct brightness of the video signal will not be too dark or too thin when the COMPONENT connector output signal is connected to a projector having COMPONENT input Test point COMPONENT VIDEO OUT Y connector terminated 750 Specification 1 0 V 0 07 Vp p Check method Note 1 Do not set RGB OUT to ON Note 2 Do not connect the HDMI OUT 1 Insert the PAL reference disc and play back the 100 color bars 2 Confirm that the Y signal level is 1 0 V 0 07 Vp p 1 0 0 07Vp p Fig 7 4 300 30 mVp p 7 2 5 Component Video Output B Y Pb Check Purpose This check confirms that the B Y signal of the component video conforms to the PAL standard If this signal level is not correct color of the video signal will have different color when the COMPONENT connector output signal is connected to a projector having COMPONENT input connector terminated in 750 Check method Note 1 Do not set RGB OUT to ON Note 2 Do not connect the HDMI OUT 1 Insert the PAL reference disc and play back the 100 color bars 2 Confirm that the burst signal level is 700 mV 50 mVp p 1 700 50 Y Fig 7 5 Specification 6 Component Video Output R Y Pr Check Purpose This check conf
125. 6 11 2 LD degration judgment of DEBUG OSD Subscreen 4 1 While the User Operation screen is being displayed press ESC on the service remote controller 2 Press DISP on the service remote controller 3 Press 2 on the service remote controller 4 Press DIG ANA three times Note For correct measurement of items 1 to 4 indicated in the display below leave the unit at room temperature 25 C for a while before turning it on and do not load a disc To update the value for each item press the SEARCH key while subscreen 4 is displayed For details on each item and the conditions of updating the values see table below ATA ATAPI LD Degrade 0070 104 OK 0068 96 00A3 41 C 0067 26 C OOO FFD5 Description of each item and conditions for updating data D ipti Conditions for updating by eset puoi pressing the SEARCH key Degradation judgment of LD for CD Regarded as NG when the abcr CD value is 120 or higher same standard as for the PC drive No disc inserted in the disc tray Degradation judgment of LD for DVD Regarded as NG when the No disc i datea pup value is 12046 or higher same standard as for the PC drive Current temperature inside Writer No disc inserted in the disc tray Temperature approx 25 C inside the Writer during adjustment No disc inserted in the disc tray Writer adjustment data for straight non
126. 6 2 6 Cautions for handling the HDD 6 7 6 2 7 ADD Error ecce 6 9 6 2 8 ATA ATAPI History ERR HAIR 6 10 6 2 9 How to confirm HDD Access 6 10 6 2 10 ATA ATAPI Debugging Screen Second Screen and LD Deterioration Judgment for writer 6 11 6 2 11 History of VR Recording related Errors lt 6 13 62512 DV Serice aes 6 17 EPG Service Modesto 6 19 bn 6 21 6 015 HDD Check Mode a 6 22 6 3 Setup Related Menu mmm e 6 23 6 3 1 Firmware Downloading mM 6 23 6 3 2 Area Specific Channel Setting HH 6 23 6 3 3 OSD Filter Setting Subscreen 4 lt lt 6 24 7 ADJUSTMENTS 7 1 Video System Adjustment gm 8 REPAIR PARTS LIST EX PICO DEV EWG oxi mta pa 8 1 SECTION 8 1 S FECTION 8 2 8 3 4 SERVICE NOTE 1 DISK REMOVAL PROCEDURE IF THE TRAY CANNOT BE EJECTED FORCED EJECTION Remove the upper case 2 Insert the stiff wire in the hole and eject the tray D stiff wire Open the tray 54 NOTES DURING THE FORCED EJECTION 1 If the forced eject
127. 60 78 There is no DVD inside the recorder There is not enough disc space for the recording The set top box receiver was turned off The set top box controller was incorrectly connected page 15 The settings in Setup in the Menu bar have been changed page 68 The recorder was in the process of dubbing A scrambled channel is selected 4 jeuonippy VV th V VM The channel activated Parental Lock is selected page 146 continued 1 55 The disc tray does not open and TRAYLOCKED appears in the front panel display gt Contact your Sony dealer or local authorized Sony service facility REPAIR appears in the front panel display gt 5 repair function is activated to repair the hard disk drive or disc when the recorder is turned on after a power failure has occurred during recorder operation such as while recording or when some errors have occurred Leave the recorder on until REPAIR disappears from the front panel display E01 appears in the front panel display gt There is a problem in the HDD Contact your nearest Sony dealer Note that contents on the HDD may be erased when servicing this unit E02 appears in the front panel display gt hard disk error has occurred and you cannot make a new recording to the HDD Press and hold on the recorder for more than five seconds to turn the recorder off
128. 63 159 VRB2 0YG 62 m 33 JL1013 21006 9 161 12 626 31 9 VRT3 JL706 PRESS 163 08009 gt REG 164 08008 16V 16320 1622 165 VRB3 DGND6 se X1001 gt 1 5V REG E 166 cj CUN 10320 1k MM1561FFBE 167 x0 54 8709 10k JL703 JL702 AVDD3E DVDD3E 53 C1117 2 gt 9 2 3 2 0 2 m SDRCAS 1000p 50V B SDRCLK 159 5080015 52 1116 SDRRAS SDRCKE gt 0 8 Eme 2 ACRI 1000 50 1 5 171 VLPF2 SDRA10 on 173 VRB4 174 ee 94 F TY 179 AGNDS 3 5 5 E amp E a a 2 5 zx gt a ea 72 N ta wn ad S e JL1014 Eee GNDD 1082 0100 61079 1083 1081 1065 EJ W 40 G vasaa gt 81042 100 SDRCAS SDRCLK SDRRAS SDRCKE SDRCS SDRABP L SDRA10 SDRA9 VIDEO DECODER DT 120 5 5 4 23 4 24 RDR HXD870 HXD970 HXD1070 For Schematic Diagram Refer to page 4 45 for printed wiring board ND201 FLUORESCENT TUBE DISPLAY 274 BOARD FL DRIVER LINE 2 IN FUNCTION SW A REF NO 30 000 SERIES L201 100uH B 0201 250189871008 DSC R209 DC DC CONVERTER 4 E c27 Q203 10k
129. 7 3 7 30 1 5 E 313 a S po FOR CHECK DEMODULATOR P p JA5801 01 1 1 5 ETA AE 5801 1 5 p 3 5 6102 2562 1 7 15802 BUFFER 5 1 5 31 TUNER VREF 7 5 5 103 5701 3 1 101 VDD DET 4571 7 15601 SPDIF SELECT 1 5 24571 1 7 1 5602 7 7 DT43 3V re E eer CONTROLLER 5 5 C5203 2 5 15101 6 7 32Mbit 7 Dj 306 4 5 RUTER SWR vavo 1202 AVLTH SW W VSUSB BUFFER 4 5 5 9 o 2 9 USB H OCIO TEA 255 oe j 1 208 2 5 9 E 5V SW USB H PPONO 203 204 2 5 CN102 dua TE Iam FR 274 _ FL 1 78 l a ND v 201 USB Eta ae NES BOARD model r Note1 The block is highly confidential and prohibited from releasing to public Note2 The components identified by mark amp contain confidential information Strictly follow the instructions whenever the components are repaired and or replaced 3 11 3 12E RDR HXD870 HXD970 HXD1070 SECTION 4 SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS AND PRINTED WIRING BOARDS 4 1 FRAME SCHEMATIC DI
130. 7 Flexible flat cable 28core F 9 2 4701 Connector 2 CN103 2 6 DC FAN D Two screws BV3 2 DC fan 2 4 2 7 HARD DISK 8 Screw BV3 and wire clamp 2 Screw BV3 Two screws Hard disk 7 Two screws 6 32UNCX4 SG 6 Two screws 6 32UNCX4 SG Harness 7pin power 4 Harness 4pin data 2 8 AV 114 BOARD 4 Flexible flat cable FRA 006 7 Two screws BV3 40core CN101 6 Two screws 2 BV3 a k Earth plate AV 114 board 3 Flexible flat cable FAD 008 24core CN302 D Flexible flat cable 2 Flexible flat cable 11core 106 17core CN105 2 5 2 9 01 120 3 Three screws BV3 6 4 Three screws BV3 5 Flexible flat cable FVR 001 6 DT 120 AG board EXCEPT AEP2 28core CN104 DT 120 BG board 2 CD Flexible flat cable 24core CN106 2 10 POWER SUPPLY BLOCK 2 Three screws ord 12p 3 Two board holders 2 11 CIRCUIT BOARDS LOCATION RD 65 board Power supply block DT 120 board AV 114 board FR 274 board 2 7 RDR HXD870 HXD970 HXD1070 SECTION 3 BLOCK DIAGRAMS 3 1 OVERALL BLOCK DIAGRAM 52 a CN201 AEP2 model 510 120
131. 864 11 1 216 821 11 1 216 829 11 1 216 829 11 1 216 811 11 1 216 829 11 1 216 821 11 1 216 864 11 Description METAL CHIP 100 METAL CHIP 470 METAL CHIP 100 METAL CHIP 100K METAL CHIP 100K METAL CHIP 3 9K METAL CHIP 3 9K METAL CHIP 10K SHORT CHIP 0 METAL CHIP 15K METAL CHIP 680 METAL CHIP 10K SHORT CHIP 0 METAL CHIP 15K METAL CHIP 680 METAL CHIP 22K METAL CHIP 12K METAL CHIP 1K METAL CHIP 75 INDUCTOR FERRITE BEAD SHORT CHIP 0 METAL CHIP 1K SHORT CHIP 0 METAL CHIP 10K METAL CHIP 10K METAL CHIP 1K SHORT CHIP 0 SHORT CHIP 0 METAL CHIP 10K SHORT CHIP 0 METAL CHIP 100 METAL CHIP 100 METAL CHIP 1K METAL CHIP 3 3K METAL CHIP 3 3K METAL CHIP 1K METAL CHIP 3 3K METAL CHIP 3 3K METAL CHIP 330 METAL CHIP 4 7K METAL CHIP 22 METAL CHIP 100 METAL CHIP 2 2K 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 INDUCTOR FERRITE BEAD 1608 INDUCTOR FERRITE BEAD 1608 INDUCTOR FERRITE BEAD 1608 METAL CHIP METAL CHIP SHORT CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP SHORT CHIP 100 220K 0 1K 4 7K 4 7K 150 4 7K 1K 0 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 Remarks 1 10W 1 10W 1 10W 1 10W 1 10W 1 10W 1 10W 1 10W 1 10W 1 10W 1 10W 1 10W 1 10W 1 10W 1 10W 1 10W 1 10W 1 10W 1 10W 1 10W 1 10W 1 10W 1 10W 1 10W 1 10W 1 10W 1 10W 1 10W 1 10W 1 10W 1 10W 1 10W 1 10W
132. 990 81 1 218 965 11 1 218 990 81 1 218 990 81 1 218 990 81 1 218 859 11 1 218 845 11 1 218 939 11 1 218 990 81 1 218 990 81 1 218 990 81 1 218 973 11 1 218 973 11 1 218 990 81 1 218 990 81 Description RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP SHORT CHIP RES NETWORK RES NETWORK RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP SHORT CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES NETWORK RES NETWORK RES CHIP RES CHIP RES NETWORK RES NETWORK RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP SHORT CHIP METAL CHIP SHORT CHIP SHORT CHIP SHORT CHIP SHORT CHIP RES CHIP SHORT CHIP SHORT CHIP SHORT CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP RES CHIP SHORT CHIP SHORT CHIP SHORT CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP SHORT CHIP SHORT CHIP 10K 5 10K 5 10K 5 0 100 1005 4 100 1005 4 47 5 22 5 22 5 22 5 10K 5 10K 5 0 4 7 5 4 7 5 100 1005 4 100 1005 4 100K 5 100K 5 68 1005X4 68 1005X4 68 5 68 5 47 5 10K 5 1K 5 10K 5 10K 5 10K 5 10K 5 100K 5 9 1K 0 5 56 0 5 56 0 5 56 0 5 56 0 5 10K 5 10K 5 1K 5 10K 5 82 5 0 5 1K 0 5 0 0 0 0 10K 5 0 0 0 3 3K 0 5 820 0 5 68 5 0 0 0 47K 5 47 5 0 0 Remarks Ref No 1 16W R5220 1 16W R5221 116W R5222 R5445 R5606 R56
133. BOUT 8 FUNCTION R346 9 GNDV E 10 N LINK 100k 8 S 11 60UT icol E 42NC LINE 55 5 eo 13 GNDV 180k S 146NDV x 15 5 5 16 BLANK GOUT 17 6NDV 5 O 1BGNDV Gu cet V YIN 0507 7 0504 OH Qui 3 5 HN1COSFU TE85R t L856 Vv D503 1858 1857 rr 9 0508 E c JL537 2 so DTAT24EUA T106 gt ES oa Sam Ti JL540 8573 1 212 5 1542 32 GIN B JL543 1 E 0529 UDZSTE 17138 Q i 38 mE37DEGORDER we 5 RII c 38 GNDV g 40 V YOUT 2 V YIN L502 L860 77 e 1861 Be 1 cei c Lc n 8504 8505 68 0 5 3 9 AEP UK 0 75 0 5 AUS EURO 4 12 AV 114 4 5 RDR HXD870 HXD970 HXD1070 For Schematic Diagram Refer to page 4 4 for waveforms Refer to page 4 47 for printed wiring board 1 2 3 4 5 6 8 9 114 BOARD 5 5 TUNER REF NO 10 000 SERIES EE 0601 TUNER TMFE2 4707A z z SIGNAL PATH gt VIDEO SIGNAL Vae gt AUDIO E m CHROMA Y CHROMA SIGNAL 7 gt E BH TO 2 5 gt GND B JL604 JL618 AGC Q60
134. C202 C203 C204 C205 C206 C207 C208 C209 C210 C211 C212 C213 C221 0222 0301 0302 0303 0304 0306 0307 0309 0313 0314 0315 0318 0319 0320 0324 0326 0329 0332 0334 0335 0338 0339 0340 0341 0342 0343 0353 0354 0356 Part 1 114 130 11 1 107 820 11 1 107 820 11 1 107 820 11 1 107 820 11 1 107 820 11 1 107 820 11 1 107 820 11 1 107 820 11 1 107 820 11 1 126 204 11 1 126 204 11 1 107 820 11 1 107 820 11 1 126 204 11 1 114 130 11 1 165 908 11 1 117 681 11 1 162 927 11 1 165 908 11 1 164 937 11 1 117 681 11 1 165 908 11 1 127 760 11 1 127 760 11 1 127 760 11 1 117 681 11 1 117 681 11 1 127 760 11 1 124 778 00 1 164 315 11 1 126 204 11 1 125 889 91 1 127 760 11 1 126 204 11 1 165 908 11 1 126 204 11 1 165 908 11 1 165 908 11 1 126 204 11 1 126 204 11 1 124 779 00 1 165 908 11 1 162 919 11 Note Replace only with part number specified Description CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP ELECT CHIP ELECT CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP ELECT CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP ELECT CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP ELECT CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP ELECT CHIP ELECT CHIP CERAMIC CHIP ELECT CHIP CERAMIC CHIP ELECT CHIP CERAMIC CHIP
135. CHIP SHORT CHIP SHORT CHIP SHORT CHIP SHORT CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP SHORT CHIP SHORT CHIP METAL CHIP 10K 100 100 100K 100K 330 1K 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 330 470 100K 100K 100K 100 0 100 330 0 UK 0 0 100 100 470 0 AEP UK 3 3K 820 3 3K 680 750 1K 0 3 3K 2 2K 100 0 100 100 15K 0 100K 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 0 5 5 5 0 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 Remarks Ref 1 10W R310 1 10W R311 1 10W R312 1 10W R313 1 10W R314 1 10W R315 1 10W R316 1 10W R318 1 10W R401 1 10W R402 1 10W R403 1 10W R404 1 10W R407 1 10W R408 1 10W R413 1 10W R414 1 10W R415 1 10W R416 1 10W R417 1 10W R418 1 10W R419 1 10W R420 1 10W R421 1 10W R422 R425 1 10W R428 1 10W R430 R431 R432 R433 1 10W R435 1 10W R436 1 10W R437 R438 1 10W R439 1 10W R444 1 10W R445 1 10W R447 1 10W R448 1 10W R453 R454 1 10W R455 1 10W R458 1 10W R459 R461 1 10W R462 1 10W R463 1 10W R465 R468 1 10W R469 R470 R471 R472 R473 1 10W R474 1 10W R475 1 10W R476 R477 R478 1 10W R479 8 Part No 1 216 829 11 1 216 820 11 1 216 833 11 1 216 848 11 1 216 837 11 1 218 895 11 1 218 879 11 1 216 864 11 1 216 295 91 1 216 818 11 1 216 818 11 1 216 295 91 1 216 295 91 1 216 817 11 1 216 81
136. CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP 0 1uF 10uF 10uF 0 001uF 100uF 0 001uF 0 1uF 0 1uF 0 1uF 0 1uF 0 1uF 0 1uF 0 1uF 100uF 0 001uF 100uF 0 001uF 2PF 2PF 0 001uF 100uF 10uF 0 001uF 0 1uF 0 01uF 0 1uF 0 001uF 0 1uF 0 001uF 0 001uF 0 1uF 0 001uF 0 001uF 0 1uF 0 1uF 1uF 0 01uF 0 01uF 1090 1090 1090 2090 2090 1090 2090 1090 1090 1090 1090 1090 1090 1090 1090 1090 1090 2090 1090 2090 1090 0 25 0 25 0 25 0 25 1090 1090 2090 2090 1090 1090 1090 1090 1090 1090 1090 1090 1090 Remarks Ref 10V 01207 10V 01208 10 16 01209 10V C1210 1211 6 3 01212 50V 01213 4V 6 3 01214 50V 01215 01216 10V C1217 10V 1218 10V 10V 01219 10V 01220 01221 10V 01222 10V 1223 10V 10V 1224 4V 01225 01226 6 3 01227 50V 01228 4V 6 3 01229 50 1230 1231 50V 01235 AUS 01236 50V AEP UK 01291 50 01301 AUS C1302 50V 01303 UK 01304 10V C1312 6 3V 01313 50V 01315 4V 1316 10V 01401 6 3 1421 50V 01801 6 3 01802 16 0180
137. E12 R1 to R12 F2 to F10 Italian A to H Ireland A to J South Africa 4 to 11 13 UHF E21 to E69 R21 to R69 B21 to B69 F21 to F69 CATV S01 to S05 S1 to S20 France BtoQ HYPER 521 to S41 The above channel coverage merely ensures the channel reception within these ranges It does not guarantee the ability to receive signals in all circumstances For details see channels page 135 Video reception Frequency synthesizer system Audio reception Split carrier system Aerial out 75 ohm asymmetrical aerial socket Timer Clock Quartz locked Timer indication 24 hour cycle digital Power back up duration 1 hour Video recording format MPEG 2 MPEG 1 Audio recording format applicable bit rate Dolby Digital 2 ch 256 kbps 128 kbps in EP SLP and SEP mode PCM 160 Resetting the Recorder You can reset the recorder to all its factory settings 1 Make sure that the recorder is turned on and remove the disc 2 Hold down stop on the recorder and press on the recorder settings are reset and the recorder turns off Inputs and outputs LINE 2 OUT AUDIO Phono jack 2 Vrms 10 kilohms VIDEO Phono jack 1 0 Vp p S VIDEO 4 pin mini DIN Y 1 0 Vp p C 0 3 Vp p PAL LINE 2 IN AUDIO Phono jack 2 Vrms more than 22 kilohms VIDEO Phono jack 1 0 Vp p S VIDEO 4 pin mini DIN Y 1 0 Vp p C 0 3 Vp p PAL LINE 3 TV 21 pin CVBS OUT S Video RGB OUT
138. F 003 004 F004 005 005 006 006 007 F 007 008 008 HDD 001 F 001 Files 5 Remain Album Size 2 8 1 9 226 5G 5 Select an album or JPEG image file using and press gt The sub menu appears 6 Select an item and press ENTER To copy two or more albums or JPEG image files select Multi Mode To copy all the albums and JPEG image files select Copy all to HDD and go to step 11 To copy the album or file selected in step 5 only select to HDD and go to step 11 7 Select an album or JPEG image file and press ENTER A check mark appears in the check box by the selected item To clear the check mark press ENTER again To clear all check marks press to select Single Mode from the sub menu 8 Repeat step 7 to select all of the albums or JPEG image files you want to copy 9 Press gt The sub menu appears 10 Select Copy to HDD and press ENTER The display asks for confirmation 11 Select Yes and press ENTER To cancel select No 11 Select Yes and press ENTER The selected JPEG image albums are copied in the PICTURE folder on the disc The JPEG image album names are automatically labelled as ALBUM If you want to play the disc on other DVD equipment finalise the disc page 45 To cancel select No Hints See 8 Reformatting a Disc
139. For DVD RWs Video mode DVD RWs Video mode that have been finalised to prohibit additional recording or editing can be unfinalised to allow further recording or editing For DVD RWs VR mode If you cannot record or edit on a DVD RW VR mode that has been finalised with other DVD equipment unfinalise the disc Guide Digital Services For Freeview users only EPG Electronic Programme Guide The Electronic Programme Guide is a guide showing the television programme schedule for a day or more at a time on your television via the Digital Terrestrial Television tuner included in this recorder The EPG provides a quick and easy way to View a complete list of all available channels View a channel list related to a chosen date or genre Set a programme to be recorded page 55 Note Digital Services availability and content depend on the broadcaster Digital Services are not instantly available when the recorder is first turned on Viewing a list of available channels Colour buttons 5j GUIDE 9 9 INFO TM EXIT Pod ENTER RETURN PAGE 9 PAGE Q Note recorder is not able to unfinalise DVD RWs Video mode that have been finalised on another recorder 1 insert a disc See 1 Inserting a Disc on page 36 2 Press SYSTEM MENU The System Menu appears 3 Select Disc Setup and press ENTER Disc Setup Input Disc
140. HDD DVD RW DVD R You copy the edited JPEG image albums to a DVD RW DVD R Video mode A slideshow is also recorded to the disc as a video file You can play the slideshow on other DVD equipment that may not be compatible with the playback of JPEG image files 1 insert DVD RW DVD R in Video mode 2 Press SYSTEM MENU The System Menu appears 3 Select Photo Album and press ENTER The Photo Album menu appears 4 select View Edit Photos on the HDD and press ENTER The Photo Album list appears 5 Select an album using and press gt The sub menu appears 6 Select Multi Mode and press ENTER To copy the album selected in step 5 only go to step 10 7 Selectan album and press ENTER A check mark appears in the check box by the selected item To clear the check mark press ENTER again To clear all check marks select Single Mode 8 Repeat step 7 to select all of the albums you want to copy 9 Press gt The sub menu appears 10 Select Copy to DVD and press ENTER The display asks for confirmation 1 29 Select the item and press ENTER To copy from DATA CDs DATA DVDs DVD RWs DVD Rs select View Photos on a CD DVD To copy from the connected USB device select View Photos on a USB Device The Photo Album list appears Example CD DVD Photo Album CD DVD Album Select Album 001 F 001 002 F 002 003
141. MENU while the recorder is in stop mode 2 Select Disc Setup and press ENTER The Disc Setup setup appears with the following options The default settings are underlined Disc Setup Input Disc Name Next Screen Format Protect Disc gt Off Finalise Format DVD RW Optimise HDD VR Mode Basic Input Disc Name You can label a disc For details see page 43 Protect Disc You can protect a disc against erasure For details see page 44 Format DVD RW DVD RW only The recorder automatically starts formatting in VR mode or Video mode whichever is selected below when a new unformatted DVD RW is inserted VR Mode Automatically formats the disc Video Automatically formats the disc Mode in Video mode Format You can manually re format a DVD RW DVD RW or DVD R disc to make a blank disc For details see page 47 Printing JPEG Image Files You can print JPEG image files on the HDD or connected USB device by connecting a PictBridge compatible printer to the USB jack on the recorder Refer to the instructions supplied with the printer SYSTEM gni MENU et ENTER 1 Connect a PictBridge compatible printer to the USB jack on the recorder i 8 O PictBridge compatible printer Finalise Finalises a disc to play it on other DVD equipment For details see page 45 Optimise HDD As yo
142. NETWORK RES NETWORK 2504081 8 2504081 8 2504081 8 0 10K 5 10K 5 33 5 0 0 56 5 56 5 33 5 10K 5 100 0 5 100 0 5 100 0 5 100 0 5 100 0 5 100 0 5 100 0 5 100 0 5 10K 5 10K 5 10K 5 10K 5 10K 5 10K 5 10K 5 10K 5 10K 5 10K 5 47 5 47 5 47 5 47 5 47 5 100 5 100 5 910 0 5 910 0 5 220 0 5 150 0 5 33 5 10K 5 0 100 5 10K 5 0 0 56 1005 4 56 1005 4 100 1005 4 100 1005 4 100 1005 4 100 1005 4 100 1005 4 56 1005 4 Remarks 1 16W 1 16W 1 16W 1 16W 1 16W 1 16W 1 16W 1 10W 1 10W 1 10W 1 10W 1 10W 1 10W 1 10W 1 10W 1 16W 1 16W 1 16W 1 16W 1 16W 1 16W 1 16W 1 16W 1 16W 1 16W 1 16W 1 16W 1 16W 1 16W 1 16W 1 16W 1 16W 1 10W 1 10W 1 10W 1 10W 1 16W 1 16W 1 16W 1 16W Ref R194 R197 R199 R201 R202 R203 R204 R205 R206 R207 R208 R209 R210 R211 R213 R214 R215 R216 R217 R219 R221 R222 R223 R224 R225 R226 R227 R228 R229 R230 R231 R233 R234 R236 R239 R240 R241 R242 R243 R244 R245 R246 R247 R248 R249 R250 R251 R252 R253 R254 Part No 1 234 714 11 1 218 990 81 1 218 990 81 1 234 371 21 1 234 371 21 1 234 371 21 1 234 371 21 1 234 371 21 1 234 371 21 1 234 371 21 1 234 37 1 21 1 234 371 21 1 218 990 81 1 218 965 11 1 218 937 11 1 218 941 81 1 218 941 81 1 218 990 81 1 216 864 11 1 218 9
143. Name Next Screen Format Protect Disc b Finalise Format DVD RW VR Mode Optimise HDD Basic Format 4 select Finalise and press ENTER Disc Setup Next Screen Unfinalise Optimise HDD 5 Select Unfinalise and press ENTER Disc Setup Basic Finalise Format Unfinalise xx min required Optimise HDD 6 select Start and press ENTER The recorder starts unfinalising the disc Unfinalising may take several minutes 1 Press GUIDE This display consists of an information box and an 8 channel programme list covering a 30 minute period Example of EPG Display Guide Digital Thu 10 Aug 10 08 kel D001 DDE NEWS 15 7 10 00 11 30 1 DDE News News Thu 10 Aug 10 00 10 30 11 00 8 2 DDE NEWS 15_ DDE News DDE News NCE Live from Prag NCE New Opening Foreign Markets Morning 7 3 NCE 1 and interests Johi EFF News New EFF News 6 Channel J Family 4 City Hou 9 intormati labi 5 Timer Jump Search 1 Indicates the currently selected channel number and station name with the programme title and genre 2 Indicates the currently selected programme and allows you to move ar
144. Otherwise time code data are obtained through an AV C command Rec Date of DVdecode Stream RT ASPECT CGMS Rec Time of DVdecode Stream Aspect Ratio of DVdecode Stream CGMS of DVdecode Stream from left to right CGMS data of bits 5 4 Audio ch 2 bits 3 2 Audio ch 1 and bits 1 0 Video NE CGMS Copy Generation Management System The two digit codes added to broadcast programs represent the following 00 Copy freely 10 Once copy 11 Never copy APSTB APS trigger bit of DV decode stream DEC With without DV decode stream input With input Signal type 525 60 625 50 1125 60 1250 50 or Invalid 15 indicated Without input 15 indicated un F Sampling Frequency of DVdecode Stream If SF is 44 kHz it is considered that 44 1 kHz audio is input and sound is muted on the unit QUANTIZATION of DV decode Stream AUDIO MODE DVdecode Stream QU AMODE 5 Press 5 Returns to the original screen 6 17 4 4 2 pomu st Aouonbojg Sur dures ZHX pp eusrs orpne uy 9921108 po129joud doo 1ouu o ounjoid ou jou urojs s 20815 enjoe Surjos ou J 8449 ourT p
145. Output of lower byte data I O mask control I O I O Input output of buffer memory interface data bus DVDD15 1 5V Input output of buffer memory interface data bus Power supply input AA24 FWEB GWEB Output of ROM GIO write enable 14 5 1 Power supplyinpat ___ Me Aw 9 Ouiputofuppertyte data VO mask control SSS o Rwerapiypt ___ AB SPISTRT RADDIS 0 OwpwofROMlOaMw S aci Ma __ Ouiputof buffer memory interface adaressbus D O Owpwofbefermemoryimer ceadesbu I Tach __ Output of SDRAM ciock enabie comot Output of ber memory interface address bus 5 3 1 3 2 4 MCLKOUT Output of clock for SDRAM AB22 AIOBD I 2 3 Output of ROM GIO address 8 15 1 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 5 6 1 3 AC mons 5 LACE SPIEN Fixed NDS ACH semara ACH 5 mA Output of buffer memory interface address bus 5 Output of buffer memory interface address bus 1 Output of buffer memory interface address bus 8 r b vo Output of buffer memory interface bank address emm Not used EON Output of serial flash interface data Output of serial flash interface clock
146. POWER FAN CONT AV 114 2 5 4 7 4 8 RDR HXD870 HXD970 HXD1070 For Schematic Diagram Refer to page 4 4 for waveforms Refer to page 4 47 for printed wiring board TEXTVI N A AV 1 1 4 BOARD 3 5 R458 VIDEO AUDIO m REF NO 10 000 SERIES SIGNAL PATH Q403 ISA1602AM1TP 1EF 10403 MM1503XNRE VIDEO SIGNAL AUDIO CHROMA Y CHROMA SIGNAL RTOMAIN C456 C500 C496 C434 s 25V 16V F B TURN mz SS TU_RIN lt lt 445 8 TU LIN 2202 0 5 TO 5 5 JL493 TU VIN gt gt 0404 UMD2N TR NNCD3 9F T1B D418 155355 17 4 C463 L C481 0 1 0 1 25 T 25 F F Y REC zz 4 9 0411 PB gt gt C UMD2N TR BUFFER B 5E 0410 28C4154TP 1EF F x RCSEL1 0408 am 9504154 gt 472 475 10 BA45
147. PSs ac G 8 amp 2 VYOUT VIDEO AUDIO AV 114 3 5 4 9 4 10 RDR HXD870 HXD970 HXD1070 For Schematic Diagram Refer to page 4 47 for printed wiring board 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 114 4 5 EURO R515 TA 560 JL533 REF NO 10 000 SERIES AW 5 R517 R518 12 0 1 5k JL53110 1532 12 0 Q502 R569 R566 ISA1602AM1TP 1EF A tk 22k aN SWITCH SQU 1 9 C551 D501 0 Mr d UDZS TE17 5 1B 1 7 Q511 JL527 oar H 4 41529 BUFFER Rage mr DL JL534 n e JL514 0526 8562 ALIN lt W 155355 1 17 4 9 C550 3 0504 EN 4 9 22 2504154 e SE 22 9 1 5 AV IN OUT eu 0510 46 SWITCH 2804154 1 2 BUFFER 2 3 R565 15k 2 GTOMAIN B gt E gt 0509 29 4154 FUNC IN um p 406 2 5 lt SAMUTE gt AV LTH SW D530 ues UDZSTE 1713B GND 1 bi g 12 1 gt 55 N 1 RTOMAIN E 1 ROUT ROUT 2 RIN AV1 RIN 3 LOUT gt 4 GNDA AVI LIN lt 7BOUT C
148. Press PLAY MODE during playback The Play Mode menu appears 2 Select A B Repeat and press ENTER point is selected Play Mode Search Mode Set point B Repeat Off Programme 3 While monitoring the sound press ENTER at the starting point point A of the portion to be played repeatedly Set point is selected 4 Continue playing to locate the ending point point B and press ENTER Repeat starts To cancel A B Repeat Press CLEAR Or set A B Repeat to Off in the Play Mode menu Hint You can select Repeat from Play Mode in the System Menu Playing from a DV Camcorder Connect your DV camcorder to the DV IN jack on the front panel Press SYSTEM MENU The System Menu appears Select DV and press ENTER Select Playback and press ENTER Start playback on the DV camcorder Images from the DV camcorder appear on your TV screen N To cancel playback Press SYSTEM MENU Hint You can dub the playing tape contents During playback press HDD or DVD to select the dubbing destination and press REC To stop dubbing press REC STOP Q Note Repeat is not available for MP3 audio tracks Playing repeatedly Repeat You can play repeatedly all the tracks or a single track on an album or disc 1 Press PLAY MODE during playback The Play Mode menu appears 2 Select Repeat and press ENTER
149. Promotional Sally Jessy Raph Our b Panel Armageddon News at Ten The Secret Football Emmerdale Homes gt 2 Select a programme using gt To search for programme by category or by keyword select Search in the Menu Bar See Searching for a Programme Using the GUIDE Plus System on page 66 for more information about searching for a programme You can select a programme from TV page 67 3 Press the red button Record or REC The set programme and Time Slot change colour and the recorder is ready to start recording When recording from a set top box receiver be sure to turn it on Unlike a VCR there is no need to turn off the recorder before the timer recording starts To record DVD See Checking Changing Cancelling Timer Settings on page 77 To make more detailed timer settings See Checking Changing Cancelling Timer Settings on page 77 To confirm change or cancel a timer recording See Checking Changing Cancelling Timer Settings on page 77 To stop recording during timer recording Press REC STOP Note that it may take a few seconds for the recorder to stop recording On screen instructions may appear after pressing REC STOP In this case follow the on screen instructions Auo anf
150. R601 R602 GNDS 10k 10k 5P R603 gl C 1C1001 AJ2 TO 2 7 TP612 T9139 m LPS2 AW AE Sw2 GNDD R604 R234 LPS1 AEG 8233 BLACK OSCNT TP6001 TP6002 RED R129 AGS 0 60 UNIT CN G 1 WREWSWRFSRIP3 R236 14 LG FPDVI RFT2 SWRF2 RFP2 aoe R239 23 0k uc 00 HU PDIN OFPULSEWRCKM R241 GNDD OFPULSEWRCKP DDO TP196 REF16 10k 22 HW FOR CHECK 8245 WLDM FPDVO f H GNDD 10 DVD DRIVE 2 RD 065 7 7 4 41 4 BA RDR HXD870 HXD970 HXD1070 134 ITCHING REGULATOR 202 1105 250V P CONT OO 0401 SF5LC20U SW 43 3V T101 Q401 A SWITCHING TRANSFORMER MPA2733GR RECT t qul 0103 on OR see EV 5 120 4 5 LT1505 2W gt 0402 tL 0404 R405 CN202 LT1505 RAOG 14EKA lt 45 8V 47 SEE PAGE 4 15 DENEN gt D402 D102 R108 C112 S CS ISS133 p LT1505 D109 PR1007L 100p R111 1k 140051 15K SNe SW 41 5
151. RD 065 6 7 HDMI DV USB BLOCK SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM 4 39 RD 065 7 7 DVD DRIVE SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM MH 4 41 SWITCHING REGULATOR SRV 2057EK SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM 4 43 PRINTED WIRING BOARDS 4 45 FR 274 FL DRIVER LINE 2 IN FUNCTION SW PRINTED WIRING 4 45 AV 114 IT CONTROLLER IR POWER FAN CONT VIDEO AUDIO EURO TUNER PRINTED WIRING BOARD 4 47 DT 120 EMMA2LL CI CONTROL DIGITAL TUNER POWER VIDEO ENCODER PRINTED WIRING BOARD 4 5 RD 065 POWER BLOCK EMMA BLOCK VIDEO AUDIO BLOCK MEMORY BLOCK SATA IDE IF HDMI DV USB BLOCK DVD DRIVE PRINTED WIRING BOARD 4 55 FL 178 DV USB REMOCON RECEIVER POWER SW PRINTED WIRING BOARD 4 5 9 5 IC PIN FUNCTION DESCRIPTION 5 1 IT CONTROL IC IC101 LC87F06J2A F58W3 E 114 BOARD 5 1 5 2 ENCODER DECODER IC IC1001 MC10050F1 105 LU1 A RD 65 BOARD 5 3 6 SERVICE MODE SERVICE MODE MAP 6 2 6 2 Diaenostie esee nett preste depen en eat 6 3 6222 1 Model E 6 3 6 0 TR 6 4 6 2 3 Version Information and Other Information ___________ 6 4 6 2 4 RF Level Simplified Diagnosis Subscreenl 6 5 6 2 5 HDD Information for the HDD return sheet Simplified measurement mode 6 6
152. RW gt s Repeat from Play Mode in the Video mode DVD R Video mode set the start DOSES and stop points within the same title Note You cannot select Repeat Programme when no programme remains 84 1 20 Buttons 4111 8 gt slow freeze frame HDD Operations pause mode LD VCD 1 2 DA D Playback direction only 2 DivX video file only Plays in slow motion when pressed for more than one second in Plays one frame at a time when pressed briefly in pause mode To resume normal playback press D gt I pause Pauses playback To resume normal playback press D gt Q Notes Angles and subtitles cannot be changed with titles recorded on this recorder JPEG image files made with a DVD camcorder can only be played as a slideshow For video files containing JPEG image files and movies the recorder can play movie parts only Notes on playing DVDs with a DTS sound track DTS audio signals are output only through the DIGITAL OUT COAXIAL jack When you play a DVD with DTS sound tracks set DTS Output to in the Audio Out setup page 139 Creating your own programme Programme HDD EI finalised disc only You can play the contents of the HDD or a disc in the order you want by arranging the order of the titles chapters albums tracks on the HDD or disc to create your own programme You can make a progr
153. SEP mode PCM Inputs and outputs LINE 2 OUT AUDIO Phono jack 2 Vrms 10 kilohms VIDEO Phono jack 1 0 Vp p S VIDEO 4 pin mini DIN Y 1 0 Vp p C 0 3 Vp p PAL LINE 2 IN AUDIO Phono jack 2 Vrms more than 22 kilohms VIDEO Phono jack 1 0 Vp p S VIDEO 4 pin mini DIN Y 1 0 Vp p C 0 3 Vp p PAL LINE TV 21 pin CVBS OUT S Video RGB OUT upstream HXD1070 RMT D248P AEP Model UK Model RDR HXD870 HXD970 HXD 1070 Australian Model RDR HXD870 HXD970 USB USB jack Type A For connecting digital still camera Memory card reader and USB memory USB jack Type B For connecting PictBridge compatible printers General Power requirements 220 240 V AC 50 60 Hz Power consumption 49 W Dimensions approx 430 x 76 5 X 286 mm width height depth incl projecting parts Hard disk drive capacity RDR HXD870 160 GB RDR HXD970 250 GB RDR HXD1070 500 GB Mass approx 4 7 kg Operating temperature 5 C to 35 C Operating humidity 25 to 80 LINE 1 DECODER AEP UK only 21 Supplied accessories CVBS IN OUT S Video RGB IN Decoder AEP UK only DV IN 4 pin i LINK 5100 DIGITAL OUT COAXIAL Phono jack 0 5 Vp p 75 ohms COMPONENT VIDEO OUT Y Pr Cr Phono jack Y 1 0 Vp p 0 7 Vp p 0 7 Vp p G LINK mini jack AEP UK only HDMI OUT HDMI 19 pin Standard Connector Mains lead 1 Aerial cable 1 Remote commander remote
154. Select Photo Album and press ENTER The Photo Album menu appears To cancel printing Press ENTER To display the connected printer 5 Select Confirm Printer of USB in the Select the item and press ENTER To print JPEG image files on the HDD select View Edit Photos on the HDD To print JPEG image files from the connected USB device select View Photos on a USB Device The Photo Album list appears 6 Select an album and press ENTER Photo Album fim Zoo Album Size 999 File 001 Elephant Bal 12 Photos 002 Giraffe 003 Bear 004 Lion ai 007 WR 008 Koala 009 Swan gt 010 Gorilla 2 52 0 Hippopotantus 012 Kangaroo Sa 226 5G m gt 1 58 7 Selecta file using and press gt The sub menu appears 8 Select the item and press ENTER To print two or more files select Multi Mode To print the file selected in step 7 only go to step 12 9 Select a file and press ENTER A check mark appears in the check box by the selected item To clear the check mark press ENTER again To clear all check marks select Single Mode 10 Repeat step 9 to select all files you want to print 11 Press gt The sub menu appears 12 Select Print and press ENTER
155. Summary screen Turn of the main power ON 2 screen after exiting all menu screens press ESC on the service remote controller 3 Press DISP 4 Press 7 0 1 2 3 012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567 EPG EURO Next Data Download Time 14 00 Duration 01h30m Gemster Data Fail Count 00 EPG Data Receive Err Summary Data Start End MD CH 03 31 13 00 13 30 DL 03 001853 03 31 09 00 11 00 DL 03 001192 03 31 08 00 08 05 HS 000654 03 31 00 00 00 00 000000 03 31 00 00 00 00 000000 03 31 00 00 00 00 000000 TotalErr 000000 000000 000000 000000 000000 000000 Used when the EPG data cannot be acquired The detailed screen appears every time when DIG ANA is The next download starting time for the EPG data is displayed Lines 01 02 Next Data Download Time Starting time Duration Duration required for acquiring the EPG data The Gemster EPG data cannot be found Lines 03 Number times of Host Scan and Schedule Download DT models only Always 00 except DT model Lines 09 14 The 6 latest error logs when EPG data were received are displayed with the latest one at the top Month day when reception started Method for acquiring the EPG data HS Host scanning process DL Downloading process of the EPG data Total number of received packages A number 999 999 or greater is displayed as 999999 Total Err Total errors during reception The
156. Symphony 4 Samba 5 Live 6 Piano 7 My heart Genre Name 8 Paradise The Best HDD D Jazz Remain Total 5 30MB 228 86 Creating your own programme Programme You can play the contents of the HDD or connected USB device in the order you want by arranging the order of the tracks on the HDD or connected USB device to create your own programme You can make a programme of up to 24 steps 1 Press gt while the Album List is displayed 2 Select Play Mode using 4 and press ENTER The Play Mode menu appears 3 Select Programme and press ENTER 4 Select Input Edit Programme and press ENTER Programme gt Album 001 104 Track 001 002 01 001 001 Album 001 Track 001 Album 002 Track 002 Album 003 Album 004 Album 005 Album 006 Album 007 Album 008 D Select an album example Album 001 using 4 and press gt 6 Select a track example Track 001 using and press ENTER The track is programmed If you make a mistake select the step number example 01 using tl and press CLEAR 1 To programme other tracks press 4 amp gt to select a step number and repeat steps 5 and 6 8 Press Programme play starts 4 Select an album or track and press ENTER Playback starts from the selected album or track To stop playback Press stop To scroll the list display by page Page mode
157. The display asks for confirmation Recorder Settings Basic 4 The Basic setup helps you to make clock and other recorder related settings 1 Press SYSTEM MENU while the recorder is in stop mode 2 Select Initial Setup and press ENTER 3 Select Basic and press ENTER The Basic setup appears with the following options The default settings are underlined To turn off the display press SYSTEM 1 MENU e Initial Setup 2 A Clock Setting Input Line System Digital Tuner Analog Tuner Power Save Video In Out HELP Setting Audio In EPG Type Select Audio Out Easy Setup Language Recording Clock Setting 3 The recorder will automatically set the clock when any digital channels have been scanned 4 and stored Auto Auto Clock Set Turns on the Auto Clock Set function when a programme position in your local area broadcasts a time signal 1 Select Clock Setting in Basic and press ENTER 2 Select Auto and press ENTER e Initial Setup Auto Clock Setting Digital Tuner Analog Tuner Date Video In Out Time Audio In Clock Set CH Audio Out Language Recording v Options 2 setup page 150 To restart the connected USB device Select Restart USB Device of USB in the Options 2 setup page 150 6 Hint Printing options such as paper size or layout differ depending on the printer For details
158. a Chapter HMM 1223 Creating and Editing a Playlist A 1 53 Dubbing HDD lt DVD RH eH m 1 24 Before Dubbing 99956 up e DIRE PIA M RUE 1 24 HDD DVD Dubbing errerik 1 24 Dubbing Using Dubbing List HH 1 24 Making a Backup Disc DVD Backup 1 25 DV Camcorder Dubbing 1 25 Before DV Camcorder Dubbing HH 1 25 Dubbing an Entire DV Format Tape DV One Touch Dubbing 1 26 Dubbing Selected Scenes Manual Dubbing 1 26 Playing from DV 1 26 Aado NETT 1 26 Playing Audio Tracks from CD DVD 1 26 Searching for an Audio Track HM 1 27 About 1 27 Preparing for Using Jukebox HH 1 27 Playing Audio Tracks Using Jukebox USB Device cee 1 28 Managing Audio Tracks on Music Jukebox 1 28 JPEG Image Piles 1 29 About the Photo Album Function 1 29 Preparing for Using the Photo Album Function 1 29 Using the Photo Album List mH mH 1 30 Managing JPEG Image Files on the HDD gt 1 30 Printing JPEG Image Files HR 1 31 Settings and Adjustments 1 31 Disc Settings Disc Setup MA 1 31 Recorder Settings Basic MM 1 31 Aerial Reception Settings Digital Tuner 1 32 Aerial Reception Settings Analog Tuner M 1 32 Video Settings Video In Out 1 33 Audio Input
159. and press ENTER 3 Select Start and press ENTER 4 Select Yes and press ENTER The update starts To cancel press SYSTEM MENU The new software will be available next time the recorder is turned on gt If the HDMI OUT jack is used for video output changing the Screen Resolution setting in the HDMI Output setup may solve the problem page 147 Connect the TV and the recorder using a video jack other than HDMI OUT and switch the TV s input to the connected video input so that you can see the on screen displays Change the Screen Resolution setting in the HDMI Output setup and switch the TV s input back to HDMI If the picture still does not appear repeat the steps and try other options gt The recorder is connected to an input device that is not HDCP compliant page 19 gt When picture noise appears after you change the Screen Resolution setting hold down stop on the recorder and press amp open close on the recorder TV programme reception does not fill the screen gt Set channel manually in Manual CH Setting in the Analog Tuner setup page 133 gt Select the correct source using the INPUT button or select a channel of any TV programme using the PROG buttons The picture is breaking up gt The signal strength is low gt Check aerial installation TV programme pictures are distorted Reorient the TV aerial Adjust the pictu
160. beginning Note Any error message with is displayed RecErr on the 1 of the forth screen Drive System Related Errors Drv Hard Err Abnoemality in the drive hardware or filmware Timeout waiting for drive operation Repair failed Format failed Although TMP is not written it may be Video mode disc No response from the mechanical control computer Media Key Block reading error Next Writable Address surpassed and impossible to use Optical Power Control failed Power Calibration Area has been used up Reading failed ECC 4 byte Code for Error Correction failed etc Because some data are invalid data cannot be written Recording Management Area has been used up Close Rzone failed Repair Rzone failed Reserve RZone failed Video mode TMP VMGI Write Error Video mode VTSI BUP Write Error After Layer Change Layer Change not be recovered finalizing Video mode Close Rzone failed at dual layer disc Drv Timeout Fail Repair Format NG Mey Be V mode Mech No Res MKB invalid NWA Exhaust OPC NG PCA Full Read Err Read Only Disc RMA Full Rzn Cls NG Rzn Rpr NG Rzn Rsv NG TMP VMG VTSI B Wr Err VTSI B2 Wr Err VTSI Wr Err VTSI2 Wr Err Write Err May Be PVR V Final fail DLVR trace NG HDD Related Errors ERROR MESSAGE DESCRIPTION Dubbing Related Errors ERROR MESSAGE DESCRIPTION Mem get NG Video Mode Copy Memory has
161. case follow the on screen instructions Recording does not stop after you press gt Press REC STOP Timer recording is not complete or did not start from the beginning gt There was a power failure during recording If the power recovers when there is a timer recording the recorder resumes recording Should the power failure continue for more than 1 hour reset the clock page 129 gt Another timer setting overlapped the timer setting page 60 78 gt Disc space was not sufficient gt The VPS PDC function is working Contents previously recorded were erased gt Data that is not playable on this recorder but was recorded on a DVD with a PC will be erased from the disc when the disc is inserted The VPS PDC function does not operate gt Check that the clock and date are set correctly gt Check that the VPS PDC time you set is correct there might be a mistake in the TV programme guide If the broadcast you wanted to record did not send the correct VPS PDC information the recorder will not start recording gt Ifthe reception is poor the VPS PDC signal might be altered and the recorder might not start recording gt The VPS PDC function may not work if the GUIDE Plus host channel setup is not complete gt The VPS PDC function does not work when the GUIDE Plus data is being downloaded 156 Playback The recorder does not play any type of disc except HDD
162. chapter marks at approximately 15 minute intervals Auto Chapter DVD R RW DVD RW DVD R only No No chapter mark is inserted Separation 10 minutes Inserts chapter marks at approximately 10 minute intervals 15 minutes Inserts chapter marks at approximately 15 minute intervals pue continued 1 43 Limitation Settings Parental Lock The Parental Lock setup allows you to set the password and limit the operations 1 Press SYSTEM MENU while the recorder is in stop mode 2 Select Initial Setup and press ENTER 3 Select Parental Lock and press ENTER The Parental Lock setup display appears with the following options The default settings are underlined To turn off the display press S YSTEM MENU initial Setup Playback Next Screen Parental Lock DVD Playback HDMI Output D TV Age Limit Options Options 2 Set Password Change Password You set or change the password that gives access to the Channel Options settings in the Digital Tuner setup and the Parental Lock settings 1 Select Set Password or Change Password in Parental Lock and press ENTER 2 Select Next Screen and press ENTER The display for registering a password appears Example when you select Set Password in step 1 eS Initial Setup Playback Set Password Parental Lock HDMI Output
163. code Number buttons lt t4 ENTER PLAY Press PLAY MODE during playback The Play Mode menu appears Select Search Mode and press ENTER 3 Select a search method and press ENTER Time Search for HDD DVDs DATA DVDs DATA CDs VIDEO CDs Searches for a starting point by entering the time code Title Search for HDD DVDs DATA DVDs CDs Chapter Search for HDD DVDs Track Search for VIDEO CDs DivX video file only bs Except Super VIDEO CDs 3 Available only when playing without PBC functions gt continued 69 90 92 The display for entering number appears Example Chapter Search Search Mode Time Search Input Chapter Number A B Repeat Title Search Repeat Chapter Search Programme Press the number buttons to select the number of the title chapter time code etc you want For example Time Search To find a scene at 2 hours 10 minutes and 20 seconds enter 21020 If you make a mistake select another number Press ENTER The recorder starts playback from the selected number To open up disc space To open up disc space on a DVD RW or DVD RW Video mode erase the title with the largest number in the title list Largest title number List HDD 10 Titles 4 Titles 0 IEW 13 00 FRI 20 04 Pr4 SLP NN 13 00 Fri20 04 Pr4
164. connected to other video equipment having DV jacks see page 104 The DV jack on this recorder can only input DVC SD signals It cannot output signals The DV jack will not accept MICRO MV signals from equipment such as a MICRO digital video camera with an i LINK manual of the equipment to be connected jack For further precautions see the notes on 2 104 2 About the name i LINK For details on precautions when connecting i LINK is a more familiar term for IEEE 1394 this recorder also see the instruction manuals 5 data transport bus proposed by SONY is FORTHE a trademark approved by many corporations B 5 IEEE 1394 is an international standard Required i LINK cable standardized by the Institute of Electrical and 3 Electronics Engineers Use the Sony i LINK 4 pin to 4 pin cable i LINK and are trademarks 163 PLAY MODE button 84 89 109 TV PROG programme buttons 111 Q4 input select button 24 The button has a tactile dot TV 22 volume buttons 24 Use the tactile dot as a reference when operating the recorder Front panel 1 on standby button 26 11 PROGRAM buttons 36 2 remote sensor 24 The button has tactile 8 Disc tray 36 12 INPUT input select button 61 79 13 LINE 2 IN S VIDEO
165. disc normal playback may not be possible For example the picture may be unclear playback may not appear smooth the sound may skip and so on Depending on the disc playback may take some time to start Some files cannot be played For MP3 audio tracks and DivX video files the recorder can play up to 99 albums each on a DATA CD or DATA DVD Up to 99 tracks and files under an album can be played For JPEG image files the recorder can load up to 99 albums and or up to 999 files under an album on a DATA CD DATA DVD or the connected USB device at a time To view unloaded albums reload them Proceeding to the next or another album may take some time The image size that can be displayed is limited The following image sizes can be displayed width 160 5 120 pixels by height 120 3 840 pixels This recorder supports MP3 audio tracks recorded with a sampling frequency of 32 kHz 44 1 kHz and 48 kHz No more than 1 GB MP3 audio track can be played The recorder does not conform to audio tracks in mp3PRO format The recorder cannot play a DivX video file of a size larger than 720 width x 576 height 4 GB The recorder may not play a DivX video file when the file has been combined from two or more DivX video files Notes on copying JPEG image files MP3 audio tracks e You cannot copy JPEG image files MP3 audio tracks to the HDD if The total number of JPEG image albums on the HDD exceeds 9
166. erased 94 Erasing a chapter Erase 1 After step 4 of Erasing and Editing a Chapter select Erase Move Chapter Edit HDD World Sports Rec time 1h00m Chapter 20 Exit Divide Erase Combine 2 Select a chapter using lt gt and press ENTER 3 Select Erase and press ENTER The display asks for confirmation 4 select Yes and press ENTER The chapter is erased Combining multiple chapters Combine 1 After step 4 of Erasing and Editing a Chapter select Combine Chapter Edit HDD World Sports Rec time 1h00m Combine 2 Move the combining bar using lt gt and press ENTER The two adjacent chapters of the combining bar are combined 96 Dividing a title Divide HDD ET If you want to dub a long title to a disc but do not want to reduce the picture quality divide the title into two shorter titles Note that dividing a title cannot be undone Only playlist titles can be divided for DVD RWs DVD Rs in VR mode 1 2 After step 2 of Erasing and Editing a Title select Edit and press ENTER Select Divide and press ENTER For the HDD select a type of editing and press ENTER For details see page 92 The display for setting the dividing point appe
167. explanations do not apply to DVDs that are created on other recorders and played back on this recorder Disposal of Old Electrical amp Electronic Equipment Applicable in the European Union and other European countries with separate collection systems This symbol on the product or on its packaging indicates that this product shall not be treated as household waste Instead it shall be handed over to the applicable collection point for the recycling of electrical and electronic equipment By ensuring this product is disposed of correctly you will help prevent potential negative consequences for the environment and human health which could otherwise be caused by inappropriate waste handling of this product The recycling of materials will help to conserve natural resources For more detailed information about recycling of this product please contact your local Civic Office your household waste disposal service or the shop where you purchased the product The manufacturer of this product is Sony Corporation 1 7 1 Konan Minato ku Tokyo 108 0075 Japan The Authorized Representative for EMC and product safety is Sony Deutschland GmbH Hedelfinger Strasse 61 70327 Stuttgart Germany For any service or guarantee matters please refer to the addresses given in separate service or guarantee documents RDR HXD870 HXD970 HXD1070 SECTION 1 GENERAL 1 1 Precautions This equipment has been tested and fo
168. functionality that allows EPG timer recordings to be made in case of an early start before the scheduled start time or late finish after the scheduled end time When Link is set to you cannot change the date start and stop time settings Checking Changing Cancelling Timer Settings Timer List HDD You can check change or cancel the timer settings using the Timer List Q Note You cannot change the timer settings with Link set to TIMER 9 14 gt ED 44 O Press TIMER The Timer List display appears Timer List 10 30 SUN 25 11 VPS PDC 0 8 Counts 4 32 OK T 22 00 22 15 Fa 0 Overlap DEF DEF 20 30 21 30 Overlap 21 00 22 00 or 16 00 17 00 DEF New Input Timer information displays the recording date time recording mode etc When all of the timer settings do not fit on the list the scroll bar appears To view the hidden timer settings press 44 Using the Quick Timer function You can set the recorder to record in 30 minute increments Press REC repeatedly to set the duration Each press advances the time in 30 minute increments The maximum duration is six hours 0 30 1 00 5 30 normal recording lt 6 00 The time counter decreases minute by minute to 0 00 then the recorder s
169. jacks you can switch between digital mode and analogue mode using the INPUT button 26 Select Guide Digital to use the digital electronic programme guide see Guide to Digital Services For Freeview users only on page 48 Select Guide Digital if you receive only digital broadcasts 25 initial Setup A EPG Type Select Digital Tuner Analog Tuner GUIDE Plus Video In Out Guide Digital Audio In Audio Out Language Recording v Select GUIDE Plus to use the Gemstar GUIDE Plus electronic programme guide see GUIDE Plus For analogue broadcasting only on page 63 TV Screen Size page 144 If you have a wide screen TV select Wide 16 9 If you have a standard TV select Standard 4 3 This will determine how wide screen images displayed on your TV Progressive When you connect a progressive format TV to this recorder using the COMPONENT VIDEO OUT jacks select Compatible HDD caution messages Read the HDD caution messages and press ENTER select Finish Setup using and press ENTER Easy Setup is completed To return to the previous step Press RETURN 6 Hint If you want to run Easy Setup again select Easy Setup in the Basic setup from Initial Setup in the System Menu page 130 28 Step 6 Easy Setup Make the basic adjustments by following the on scr
170. mark are critical for safety Replace only with part number specified POWER BLOCK 4 29 4 30 RD 065 1 7 RDR HXD870 HXD970 HXD1070 For Schematic Diagram Refer to page 4 55 for printed wiring board AUDIO SIGNAL REF NO 20 000 SERIES C1044 C1045 2p 2p AEP UK 6 5 11831 RIBI 1 tp AUS 101 301 E cpp T Wy C1045 01044 i94 161 302 93302 63 EY EY 1315 61812 R1312 5 AM B vw 5 61301 1302 2 P 1 55 VREF D OUT NAL PATH Tog R1814 1813 fo 16V 77128 2 2 1 11811 15uH 33 330 ty gay 1 A WW VIDEO SIGNAL 61814 61813 EA Y Y CHROMA 330 50V ISA1602AM1TP 1EF e CHROMA Y Y CHROMA FSC BPF Y X1001 a 24 5 6MHz 27 X101 ISA1602AM1TP 1EF 16 9344MHz gt HCL BPR 0 1816 gt 10V 7 HADRS7 E HADRS7 TO 4 7 HADRS6 HADRS6 HADRS5 HRS lt TP1201 gt 3 7 4 7 5 7 7 7 R1030 R1031 100 220 AEP UK gt 47 150 2 esssessassssassasse ssusgssss 58888 888 88885 55885 885 FB BS 8 5 amp 555 5555555555555 5888 eee E Rf ream 552 164702 TRST 5 c o
171. n EIE Da 69 gt o to USB jack USB device 1 27 Searching for an Audio Track You can search a disc by album or track As albums and tracks are assigned individual numbers select the album or track by entering its number Number buttons G0 G9 t4 ENTER PLAY MODE 1 Press PLAY MODE during playback The Play Mode menu appears 2 Select Search Mode and press ENTER 3 Select a search method and press ENTER Album Search except for CD Track Search The display for entering the number appears Example Album Search Play Mode Search Mode Album Search Input Album Number Repeat Track Search Programme Copying audio tracks DISC HDD 1 Insert a disc that you are going to copy to the HDD 2 Press to start playback Press HDD DVD DUB For CDs all the tracks on the disc are copied to the HDD For DATA CDs DATA DVDs the current album is copied to the HDD To cancel copying Press ENTER 6 Hint You can copy all the contents on the disc by selecting DVD CD gt HDD in Dubbing in the System Menu Copying an album USB HDD You can copy up to 99 albums or 999 tracks on the USB device to the HDD 1 Connect the USB device to the USB jack on the recorder page 112 Press SYSTEM MENU The System Menu appears ENTER Select Listen to Music from USB Device and press EN
172. noe ensured Strm TransfNG Tracon Tm NG VC Cell Max VC CopyCancel VC FlushC NG VC HDD C VC HDD Inf NG VC HDD Info NG VC Idling NG VC Pck Anl NG VC Transf Stp VC TSO BLK NG VC VOBU SizeE V Rsv RzoneNG V2H APP FL NG V2H Aud Ch NG V2H Aud Md NG V2H Aud Stm ESFSYS INIT easyfsys initializing HDD Buff High High level process executed for the HDD Buffer HDD SIG NG Inconsistent HDD Management Data magic Video Mode Copy Stream Transefer NG Video Mode Copy Tracon tranfer has not been completed Maximum number for Video Mode Copy Cells exceeded Video Mode Copy Copy Cancel Video Mode Copy Flush Cache NG Obtaining Video Mode Copy HDD Cell information failed No information on Video Mode Copy HDD Format failed Video Mode Copy idling NG Analizing Video Mode Copy Pack failed Video Mode Copy Transfer Stop Video Mode Copy TSOBlock transfer has not benn completed Video Mode Copy VOBU Size NG Video Mode Copy Reserve Rzone failed VRHDD APP FLG is OFF VRHDD Audio Channel NG VRHDD Audio mode VRHDD Audio Stream Number HDD DEL PT Delete the dubbing list by HDD recovery HDD Del OC TT Delete the title moving on the way inside HDD NG VR HDD Copy prohibitted material VRHDD Other VR HDD Play back time of each VOBU is different VRHDD Video resolution NG HDD DVD insufficient free space for copy HDD DVD VR Timeout at HDD playing side H2D TO SPRP HDD DVD VR Timeo
173. not available for devices connected via the DVD recorder s LINE 1 DECODER jack To watch the connected VCR or similar device s pictures through the recorder while the recorder is in standby mode set Power Save default in Basic setup page 130 When you record to a VCR from this DVD recorder do not switch the input source to TV by pressing the TV DVD button on the remote If you disconnect the recorder s mains lead you will not be able to view the signals from the connected VCR continued 31 Connecting an External Decoder You can watch or record external decoder PAY T V Canal Plus analogue decoder programmes if you connect a decoder not supplied to the recorder Disconnect the 5 mains lead from the mains when connecting the decoder Note that when you set LINE 1 In to Decoder in step 7 of Setting external decoder PAY TV Canal Plus analogue decoder programme positions page 34 you will not be able to select L1 because Line 1 will become a dedicated line for the decoder Connecting a decoder pue sdmyooH Canal Plus analogue decoder to AERIAL IN Aerial cable supplied SCART cord SCART cord not supplied to LINE3 Tv not supplied to C LINE 1 DECODER HDMI OUT DIGITAL OUT TO 9 Y PE
174. page 133 1 Select Editor in the Menu Bar Pr2 25 10 10 8 Editor displays your channel settings You may turn channel On blue or Off grey and identify its Source ___ and Programme Number Press 4 10 use Press to S Ay Press gt to view Setup a Schedule Ino Editor On Off Source Prog No TV 01 ATV 02 Off 04 On ATV 05 07 09 Promotional ATV 10 11 12 v 2 Press ENTER 3 Press gt to move the cursor to the right column Ajuo 104 5 10109 gt continued 69 70 72 4 Select the programme position you want to check using 4 9 To change the input source press the red button Source To change the programme position press the green button Prog No then enter a programme position number using the number buttons and press ENTER Q Note To receive from the recorder a programme position that can be received by either the set top box receiver or the recorder change the input source in step 4 Disabling programme positions If any programme positions are unused or contain unwanted channels you can hide them 1 Select Editor in the Menu Bar and press ENTER 2 In the left column select the programme position you want
175. press 44 to move the cursor and press wsb Decoder Sets the external decoder PA Y TV Canal Plus analogue decoder channels For details see page 34 Channel Press gt repeatedly until the programme position you want is displayed To select a cable or satellite programme position press gt until the programme position you want is displayed Hint When Input Line System is set to NTSC you can select Auto 3 58NTSC or PAL 60 Q Note Input Colour System cannot be set when viewing digital broadcasts Component Video Out Selects the signal format in which the recorder outputs video signals interlace or progressive from the COMPONENT VIDEO OUT jacks Normal Inter Outputs signals in the lace interlace format Progressive Outputs signals in the progressive format Select this when you want to view progressive signals Q Notes When you set LINE 3 Out to RGB you cannot set Component Video Out When you connect the recorder to a monitor or projector via only the COMPONENT VIDEO OUT jacks do not set LINE 3 Out to RGB If you set LINE 3 Out to in this case the picture may not appear When picture noise appears after you set the recorder to progressive format hold down stop on the recorder and press amp open close on the recorder No video signals are output when using the HDMI connection LINE 3 Out Sele
176. recorded in 48kHz PCM x format and video signals are recorded in HQ MN29 hr 15 2 hr 15 min mode When recording a bilingual programme MN 8 1 hr 20 min 2 hr 24 min select the sound to be recorded page 138 3 Titles recorded in or lower mode cannot be MN27 1 hr 25 min 2 hr 33 min dubbed to DVD RWs DVD Rs at high speed 26 HSP 1 hr 30 min 2 hr 41 min SEP MNI MN2 or mode is not available for DVD RWs DVD Rs DVD R DLs When MN25 1 hr 35 2 hr 50 min recording to DVD RWs DVD Rs the AER Umum GAS D recording mode automatically switches to SLP MN Dn nan mode even if you set to SEP MN2 MN23 1 hr 45 min 3 hr 8 min MN3 mode MN22 1 hr 50 min 3 hr 17 min MN21 SP 2 3 hr 35 min Audio signals are recorded in Dolby Digital 2 ch format except for PCM mode MN20 2 hr 10 min 3 hr 53 min MN19 2 hr 20 min 4hr 11 min 18 LSP 2 hr 30 min 4 hr 29 min MN17 2 hr 40 min 4 hr 47 min MN16 2 hr 50 min 5 hr 5 min MN14 3 hr 10 min 5 hr 41 min MN13 3 hr 20 min 5 hr 59 min HDD Recording Format Selects the HDD recording format Video Mode Records to the HDD in VR Off mode When recording stereo and bilingual programmes both main and sub sounds can be recorded Video Mode_ Records to the HDD in On Video mode When recording stereo and bilingual programmes only one sound track mai
177. recording Q Notes The picture does not pause and the recorder starts only recording in the following cases when the programme positions are preset differently between the recorder and the connected TV when watching the programme from the external equipment connected to your TV The picture tuned by the recorder pauses when TV Pause is set to Recorder s Tuner in the Options 2 setup page 150 You may not be able to use the TV Pause function depending on some TVs For details refer to the operating instructions supplied with your TV The Pause function will not work correctly when watching TV via the connected component such as or digital tuner The Pause function works only with the channel selected on the TV You cannot use Pause function as a recording feature from the component VCR etc connected to the LINE 1 DECODER jack The Pause function will not work if the connected TV does not comply with SMARTLINK To check whether your TV complies with SMARTLINK refer to the operating instructions supplied with your TV yoeq eld 87 Searching for a Time Title Chapter Track etc HDD DATA DivX video file only You can search a disc by title chapter scene or track As titles and tracks are assigned individual numbers select the title or track by entering its number You can also search for a scene using the time
178. satellite tuner and select the satellite programme you want to record Leave the satellite tuner turned on until the recorder finishes recording Even if the timer is set for the same daily or weekly programme the timer recording cannot be made if it overlaps with a programme that has priority Overlap will appear next to the overlapped setting in the Timer List Check the priority order of the settings page 60 Even ifthe timer is set timer recordings cannot be made while recording a programme that has priority The beginning of some recordings may not be made when using the VPS PDC function You cannot extend the recording duration time when VPS PDC is set to The Mode Adjust function only works with a timer recording and the VPS PDC function set to off It does not function with Quick Timer The recording mode cannot be set to AUTO when VPS PDC is set to On Recording programmes using Series Recording Series Recording is a feature which uses information from the Electronic Programme Guide Q Notes This function cannot be used when the broadcaster does not include series information with the programme data Whether or not a programme is in a series is determined by the broadcaster Red button C3 GUIDE TIMER 9 4 gt ENTER EXIT RETURN REC REC STOP Recording TV programmes using the EPG The EP
179. select the item and change the setting 4 select and press ENTER The Timer List display page 60 appears The timer recording indicator lights up on the front panel display and the recorder is ready to start recording Unlike a VCR there is no need to turn off the recorder before the timer recording starts To stop recording during timer recording Press B REC STOP Note that it may take a few seconds for the recorder to stop recording On screen instructions may appear after pressing REC STOP In this case follow the on screen instructions About the VPS PDC function For analogue broadcasting only VPS PDC signals are transmitted with TV programmes in some broadcast systems These signals ensure that timer recordings are made regardless of any broadcast delays early starts or broadcast interruptions To use the VPS PDC function Set VPS PDC to in step 3 above When you turn on this function the recorder starts scanning the channels before the timer recording starts To stop recording during timer recording Press REC STOP Note that it may take a few seconds for the recorder to stop recording On screen instructions may appear after pressing REC STOP In this case follow the on screen instructions If the timer settings overlap See page 55 To extend the recording duration time while recording only when EPG Link is set to Off See page 54 To confir
180. settings are underlined To turn off the display press S YSTEM MENU Next Screen Add New Channels Channel Sort Channel Options Auto Skip Signal Check D TV Language Replace Channels Initial Setup Basic Digital Tuner Analog Tuner Video In Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Scans available digital channels and replaces all the channels already stored in the channel list with the scanned results 1 Select Replace Channels in Digital Tuner and press ENTER 2 Select Next Screen and press ENTER 3 Select your country region using gt and press ENTER The recorder scans available digital channels and stores them To cancel the scan press SYSTEM MENU or EXIT If any programme positions are unused or contain unwanted channels you can disable them page 132 Note The timer settings for the replaced channels are deleted Aerial Reception Settings Analog Tuner The Analog Tuner setup helps you to make analogue tuner and programme position settings for the recorder 1 Press SYSTEM MENU while the recorder is in stop mode 2 Select Initial Setup and press ENTER 3 Select Analog Tuner and press ENTER The Analog Tuner setup appears with the following options The default settings are underlined To turn off the display press SYSTEM MENU Initial Setup Basic Auto Scan Digital Tuner Manual C
181. standard If this signal level is not correct color of the video signal will have different color when the Scart connector output signal is connected to a projector having Scart input Mode PLAY Test point Scart Video output connector pin terminated in 750 Instrument Oscilloscope 700 Check method Note 1 RGB OUT should be set to ON Note 2 Do not connect the HDMI OUT 1 Insert the PAL reference disc and play back the 100 color bars 2 Confirm that the signal level is 700 mV 50 mVp p 700 50 mVp p Fig 7 11 12 Scart Video RGB Output B Check Purpose This check confirms that the B signal of the RGB video conforms to the PAL standard If this signal level is not correct color of the video signal will have different color when the Scart connector output signal is connected to a projector having Scart input Test point Scart Video output B connector 7 terminated 750 Instrument Oscilloscope Specification 700 mV 50 mVp p Check method Note 1 RGB OUT should be set to ON Note 2 Do not connect the HDMI OUT 1 Insert the PAL reference disc and play back the 100 color bars 2 Confirm that the B signal level is 700 mV 50 mVp p Fig 7 12 7 RDR HXD870 HXD970 HXD1070 SECTION 8 REPAIR PARTS LIST 8 1 EXPLODED VIEWS NOTE e XX X mean standardized parts so they may e The mechanical parts with no reference number have some differen
182. sum of Hamming Err Trans Err InvLine Err numbers indicated on the Detail screen A number 999 999 or greater is displayed as 999999 Tips In a case where only HS is displayed in the MD column of the logs the host channel has not been found It is necessary to check the country and postal code settings in the user settings 5 Press ESC Returns to the original screen 6 19 2 Detail screens 1 Press the DIG ANA key while the Summary screen is being displayed Refer to page 6 19 2 Each time DIG ANA key is pressed the Detail screen scrolls maximum six Detail screens 1 to 6 Each Detail screen of 1 to 6 corresponds to the EPG reception error logs from the top of the Summary screen 0 1 2 3 4 012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567 EPG EURO Data Receive Err Details 1 Data 03 31 Start Time 13 00 END Time 13 30 Host CH 03 P ON Kind Download Data Receive Total Err 000000 Pkt Rcv Num 001853 Pkt Snd Num 001853 Inv Line Err 000000 Slice Cont Auto OFF LV h Temporary Buffer Information Pool Num 000000 Store 000000 Discard Pkt 000000 UseNum 000000 Display item Line 01 EPG Data Receive The rightmost figure represents the Err Details X number of the current detail screen This number corresponds to the order of the EPG reception error log from the top Lines 03 05 Data Month day when reception started Reception
183. the FL display as shown below AGING 0001 If an error is generated the aging operation stops Note Indications on the FL display are retained and this information is also retained as an OSD Note Recording time depends on the recording rate set For example if the recording rate is MN32 only up to 60 titles can be registered Check the setting for recording rate before performing aging 9 Press the ESC key the service remote controller to quit Aging mode and return to Normal mode Note If during recording Recording is stopped If during playback Playback is paused aging for RW RAM only If during initialization The unit stops after initialization is finished If the tray is being opened closed The unit stops after the tray 15 opened closed 6 21 2 Aging for the HDD Caution Take caution as the all recorded data of HDD is deleted Turn ofthe main power ON 2 Press the HDD key to switch to HDD 3 Press ESC on the service remote controller 4 Press on the service remote controller 5 Press PLAY to the Aging mode During Aging mode the following operations are repeated in the order shown below 1 Erasure of all the memory data from the HDD 2 Recording for 60 minutes 8 Playback for 60 minutes Tips During Aging the number of loops is indicated on the FL display as shown below AGING 0001 If an error is generated the aging operation stops
184. the PAL reference disc and play back the 100 color bars 2 Confirm that the video level is 1 0 0 07 Vp p 1 0 0 07 Vp p 7 3 9 Scart Video Output S C Check Purpose This check confirms that the Scart output S C conforms to the PAL standard If it adjusted incorrectly the playback color will not be too dark or too thin Test point Scart Video output connector 49 terminated in 750 Specification 300 mV 30 mVp p Check method Note SCART OUT should be set to S Video 1 Insert the PAL reference disc and play back the 100 color bars 2 Confirm that the burst signal level is 300 mV 30 mVp p 300 30 mVp p 7 9 10 Scart Video RGB Output Check Purpose This check confirms that the RGB R signal output has the rated amplitude If this signal level is not correct brightness of the video signal will not be too dark or too thin when the Scart connector output signal is connected to a projector having Scart input Test point Scart Video output R connector pin 19 terminated in 750 700 mV450 Check method Note 1 RGB OUT should be set to ON Note 2 Do not connect the HDMI OUT 1 Insert the PAL reference disc and play back the 100 color bars 2 Confirm that the signal level is 700 mV 50 mVp p 700 50 mVp p Fig 7 10 11 Scart Video RGB Output Check Purpose This check confirms that G signal of the RGB video conforms to the PAL
185. time Grip the HDD on both sides so that you do not touch its terminals or circuit boards Do NOT stack one HDD onto another HDD even if the HDDs are protected by antistatic bags Do NOT bump the HDDs against one another Do NOT bump any tool such as a screwdriver or other hard object against the HDD Whenarepair part HDD is transported and there is a large temperature difference between the outside and inside temperature leave the HDD in its package for about half a day after it is moved inside to gradually cool or warm it to room temperature before unpacking 6 8 6 2 7 HDD Error Logging Use the following operations to display Recording Error History Press ESC DSP and 4 keys followed by DIG ANA key three times Recording Error History Display 07 01 01 00 00 00 The error display appears in the underlined location 07 01 01 00 00 00 07 01 01 00 00 00 Recording Error History Display Note Not only the HDD error history but also the error recovery history are logged in Recording Error History 6 9 6 2 8 ATA ATAPI History ERR Use the following operations to display Error History Press ESC key followed by DSP 2 DIG ANA and FRM TIM key ATA ATAPI History ERR 0223 151843 gt C8 00013 09387FC4 40FC4051 2B 3C 01 0000 000000 00 00000 00000000 00000000 00 00 00 0000 000000 00 00000 00000000 00008000 OO 0
186. time you press briefly fast forwards the current scene for the following duration 30 seconds 1 minute 1 minute 30 seconds 2 minutes 3 minutes 5 minutes 10 minutes 20 minutes advances the time in 10 minute increments 2 hours 4 previous Goes to the beginning of previous next title chapter scene track gt next when pressed during playback Goes to the beginning of the first title track when pressed in stop mode 4 P Fastreverses fast forwards the disc when pressed during playback fast reverse fast forward Search speed changes as follows fast reverse fast forward lt PPFF2 4433 lt gt 3 4 42 FFA When you press and hold button fast forward fast reverse continues at the selected speed until you release the button l When you press 444 once during playback you can play Reverse play not available for VIDEO CDs Super VIDEO CDs DivX video files 72 When you press once during playback you can play quickly with sound not available for VIDEO CDs Super VIDEO CDs Not available for VIDEO CDs Super VIDEO CDs To resume normal playback press 82 Playing a specific portion Playing repeatedly Repeat repeatedly A B Repeat You can play repeatedly all the titles tracks files or a single title chapter track on 1 Pres
187. to hide or display using 3 Press the red button On Off The disabled positions will turn grey To show the disabled positions press the red button On Off again Q Notes You cannot record a programme position if it is not set in Aerial Reception Settings Analog Tuner page 133 even if itis set to in the Editor in the Menu Bar If you are using your set top box receiver to receive programmes when the set top box receiver is connected to the recorder using a SCART cord only page 17 and are able to receive the same programme with both the set top box receiver and the recorder change the Source to receive the programme with the recorder s tuner Q Notes The maximum continuous recording time to the HDD is 12 hours for a single title A title longer than 12 hours is divided Situations below may cause slight inaccuracies with the recording time Recording a programme with poor reception or a programme or video source of low picture quality Recording on a disc that has already been edited Recording only a still picture or just sound Programmes are recorded in the following aspect ratio n the original aspect ratio when recording to the HDD when HDD Recording Format is set to Video Mode Off in the Recording setup page 144 DVD RWs DVD Rs VR mode In 4 3 when recording to DVD RWs DVD Rs When recording to DVD R DLs Video mode
188. to the HDD in step 6 Select Cancel and press ENTER The disc is automatically finalised To make another backup disc replace discs select Start and press ENTER Press HDD or DVD to select the recording destination If you select DVD insert a disc see 1 Inserting a Disc on page 36 Insert the source DV Digital8 format tape into your digital video camera For the recorder to record or edit your digital video camera must be set to video playback mode Press REC MODE on the remote repeatedly to select the recording mode The recording mode changes as follows ud MN lt SEP 4 SLP lt EP lt For details about the recording mode see page 71 Note that you cannot select manual recording mode Set External Audio setting in the Audio In setup page 138 Set the DV Input setting in the Audio In setup page 138 You are ready to start dubbing Select one of the dubbing methods on the following pages To playback DV Digital8 format tape You can check the contents of DV Digital8 format tape before dubbing For details see Playing from a DV Camcorder page 107 Hint The recorder completes dubbing even after being turned off To cancel DVD backup during dubbing Press and hold HDD DVD DUB for more than one second To erase backup data on the HDD 1 Select Erase back up data in step 4 and press ENTER The display asks for confirmation 2 Select
189. upstream LINE 1 DECODER 21 pin CVBS IN OUT S Video RGB IN Decoder DV IN 4 pin i LINK 100 DIGITAL OUT COAXIAL Phono jack 0 5 Vp p 75 ohms COMPONENT VIDEO OUT Y Pr Cr Phono jack Y 1 0 Vp p 0 7 Vp p 0 7 Vp p G LINK mini jack HDMI OUT HDMI 19 pin Standard Connector USB USB jack Type A For connecting digital still camera Memory card reader and USB memory USB jack Type B For connecting PictBridge compatible printers General Power requirements 220 240 V AC 50 60 Hz Power consumption 49 W Dimensions approx 430 x 76 5 x 286 mm width height depth incl projecting parts Hard disk drive capacity RDR HXD770 120 GB RDR HXD870 160 GB RDR HXD970 250 GB RDR HXD1070 500 GB Mass approx 4 7 kg 1 39 Notes About This Recorder On operation f the recorder is brought directly from a cold to a warm location or is placed in a very damp room moisture may condense on the lenses inside the recorder Should this occur the recorder may not operate properly In this case if the recorder is on leave it on if it is off leave it off for about an hour until the moisture evaporates When you move the recorder take out any discs and do not apply shock or vibration to the hard disk drive to avoid damaging the disc or hard disk drive page 3 On adjusting volume Do not turn up the volume while listening to a section with very low level inputs or no
190. using the AUDIO button This does not affect the recorded sound Unrecordable pictures Pictures with copy protection cannot be recorded on this recorder Copy control Recordable discs signals Copy Free HDD Copy Once HDD CPRM CPRM Copy Never None The recorded disc can be played only on CPRM compatible equipment page 10 1 17 Timer Recording For analogue broadcasting only Before Recording Before you start recording Check that the disc has enough available space for the recording page 40 For the HDD DVD RWs and DVD RWs you can free up disc space by erasing titles page 92 Adjust the recording picture quality if necessary page 76 Q Note To play a recorded disc on other DVD equipment finalise the disc page 45 Like the standard x3 recording modes of video tapes you can select the desired recording mode using the REC MODE button Recording modes with higher quality provide a more beautiful recording but the large data volume also results in a shorter recording time Conversely a longer duration provides a longer recording time but the lower data volume results in a coarser picture quality Press REC MODE repeatedly to switch the recording modes To select further options for recording mode manual recording mode set Manual Rec Mode to go to setup in the Recording setup page 141 To record pictures in higher quality than HQ mo
191. you do not intend to use the remote for an extended period of time remove the batteries If battery leakage occurs wipe out any liquid inside the battery compartment and insert new batteries Do not expose the remote sensor marked on the front panel to strong light such as direct sunlight or a lighting apparatus The recorder may not respond to the remote When you replace the batteries of the remote the code number and Command Mode may be reset to the default setting Set the appropriate code number and Command Mode again If you connect a Sony audio component that is compatible with the HDMI control function refer to the operating instructions supplied with the audio component Controlling TVs with the remote You can adjust the remote s signal to control your TV Q Notes Depending on the connected unit you may not be able to control your TV with some or all of the buttons below f you enter a new code number the code number previously entered will be erased Number buttons o 60 G 9 TV DVD e DISPLAY gt Tv Vo eo gt TV A TV PROG 1 Hold down TV located at the bottom of the remote Do not press the button at the top of the remote 2 with TV pressed down enter the TV s manufacturer code using the number buttons For instance to enter 09 press 0 then 9 After you enter the last number release the TV VC butt
192. 0 2 141 10 CIO Fixedat H CH Not open to public Output of HDMI TDMS control 000 CI2 Not open to public O Outputof Not open to public O Outputof CI Notopen to public O Outputof daaj4 CIS Outputof data 6 Output of horizontal synchronization CM DALVDD3 Powersupply input 35 for DAO D8 EE VRTB Fixed at L DADD06 Output of DDRSDRAM address 6 EN ESN ES EN om DADDO Output of DDRSDRAM address o EN EN Output of DDRSDRAM address 8 Output of DDRSDRAM address 11 Output of clock enable Input output of DDRSDRAM data 28 5 Input output of DDRSDRAM data 30 Pinname es RH mex Em EE EE T O Owpu of DDRSDRAM address 151 pe 7 To co ro To ABI VRBB 10 O 31 Vo O 27 1 19 1 0 Dos link data 6 1O 4 E21 AIBDO Input of audio bitstream data 0 5 5 Doom O SSCS DVDDNQSV Powersupply O DVDDNSQSV Powersupply input O DVDDISQSV
193. 0 while reading 00000000 3 Duration of emission of the LD DVD W DVD while writing 00000000 4 Duration of emission of the LD for CD R CD while reading 00000000 5 Duration of emission of the LD for CD W CD while writing This function is not used for this model 2 If the total hours of duration of emission of the laser diode LD for DVDs while reading 2 and that of emission of the LD for DVDs while writing 3 exceed 4 700 hours the LDs may be degraded Perform an LD degradation judgment using subscreen 4 hours for each LD DVD 4 700 hours CD 11 000 hours The ATA ATAPI Writer Maintenance Info is obtained each time the power is turned on Thereafter the data on the subscreen 15 updated each time the SEARCH key is pressed the updating command 15 sent while this subscreen is displayed Care must be taken when updating this subscreen because an undesired command is inserted if it is executed while recording etc Note on lighting time data for each LD Since data on lighting time of each laser diode LD are stored in the flash ROM on the MAIN Assy after the MAIN Assy is replaced the data will be cleared However after the LOADER Assy 15 replaced data on lighting time of each LD will be retained in the MAIN Assy Therefore before either the MAIN Assy or LOADER Assy is to be replaced it is recommended that you write down the lighting time data 5 Press 5 Returns to the original screen
194. 0 0000 090000 00 00000 00000000 00000000 00 80 00 0000 000000 00 00000 00000000 00000008 00 0000 0000 000000 00 00000000 00000000 00 00 00 HDD ERR is Selected ATA ATAPI ERR History display specification CHAI EITEZTESTESTESTES EITETTETTETESTESTETTES cma Error register Status register Command OEEO T PAEO TE DEVOE DACNOSTIG 20 error datecode O FLUSH CACHE E7 error datecode IDENTIFY DEVICE EC L B error time IDLE 2 _____ time BD Bi error time 5 READ J errortime READ 25 _______ 5 _____ SETFEATURES ag error time BO Di 02 03 04 05 2 2 2 STANDBY IMMEDIATE EO 2 registor ______ stot WRITE WRITE EXT 35 E6 IDLE IMMEDIATE E1 F3 F Sector Count ________ 248 Dewis o 0 Read Verify EXT 42 Only use performance and factory check GL Hi H2 Ti command 6 2 9 How to confirm HDD Access Flow Use the following operations to display History Press ESC key followed by DSP 2 and key Confirm whether the result is OK or NG in the screen below If it is NG check t
195. 0 0022uF 0 0022uF 0 1uF 0 047uF 0 1uF 4 7uF 0 068uF 0 1uF 0 1uF 0 01uF 0 1uF 0 0068uF 0 47uF 0 47uF 10uF 10uF 0 01uF 0 01uF 10uF 0 01uF 0 001uF 10uF 0 47uF 0 0018uF 0 01uF 0 01uF 0 1uF 220uF 0 001uF 22PF 22PF 0 1uF 1090 1090 2090 1090 1090 1090 1090 1090 1090 1090 1090 1090 1090 1090 1090 1090 1090 1090 1090 1090 1090 1090 1090 1090 1090 2090 2090 1090 1090 2090 1090 1090 2090 1090 1090 1090 1090 2090 1090 5 5 10 50 50V 4V 6 3V 50V 16V 50V 50V 50V 16V 10V 50V 10V 50V 50V 10V 6 3V 10V 10V 6 3V 6 3V 10V 10V 10V 16V 10V 16V 6 3V 6 3V 10V 10V 16V 16V 10V 16V 50V 16V 6 3V 6 3V 50V 16V 16V 16V 6 3V 4V 50V 50V 50V 16V 10V 8 17 Ref No C170 C171 C172 C173 C174 C176 C177 C180 C181 C182 C187 C188 C189 C194 C197 C199 C201 C202 C280 C281 0282 C283 C284 C285 C286 C287 C288 C289 C290 C291 C501 C503 C504 C505 C508 C509 C510 C511 C512 C513 C514 C515 C516 C532 C1001 C1002 C1003 C1004 C1005 C1006 C1007 C1008 C1009 C1010 C1011 C1012 C1013 C1014 C1015 C1016 Part No 1 164 866 11 1 125 777 11 1 164 866 11 1 164 866 11 1 164 866 11 1 164 858 11 1 164 858 11 1 100 966 91 1 127 760 11 1 100 966 91 1 164 943 81 1 164 943 81 1 164 937 11 1 127 760 11 1 125 777 11
196. 01 V14 U11 U12 W15 ATODOO 32 34 36 38 V11 T12 P13 R15 szasa331 N ATODATAOS A 23 21 2529 WIS 1 15 000 15 P ATOADRO 2 a N 12 U10 ATOCSO 3 14 ATODA2 TIADRO 2 ATOCS1 _ ATOCSOB 1150 CSO ATODIOW ATOCS1B 1 51 51 ATODIOR T1DMARQ DMRQ ATORESET ATODIOWB T1DIOW DIOW ATODIORB T1DIOR DIOR ATOIORDY ATORESETB RESET ATODMACK ATOINTRQ T13 ATOIORDY TTIORDY e V15 ATODMACKB 1DMACK V12 ATOINTRQ T1INTRQ DCLKO DCLKNO PDIAG DWEB DCASB pasrn 34 Tem DRASB DCSOB PDIAGn DCKE DDQN2 IC1 201 1 221 4 7 00050 00052 M4 R1 R4 R2 62 64 2 5 AT1D00 DDQM1 DDQM3 00051 00053 10015 N5 R3 P4 11 7 11 13 15 14 12 10 6 3 1 63 61 512Mbit X 2 DDR SDRAM AT1DATAO 15 T2 P5 T3 R5 U1 N4 U2 W1 N21 T23 R22 W20 P24 17 15 13 11 9 7 5 3 6 8 10 14 16 18 CN3802 DCSOB ATIDAO 703 DAO 2451810 F5 F4 G5 G4 J4 J5 H4 H5 AT1ADRO 2 REKE i 2627 11 13 5456 DDATAO 7 16 23 A8 B8 C8 A7 B6 A6 C7 B7 arias 5602 CN5
197. 01 1 2 MCLK C20 AIOMCKO 3 4 3 7 ec SCLK AIBCKO 16 EG Q pem wem Dl to RFP1 21 11 123203 3 7 103201 3 7 DRIVE H AUDIO LPF AUDIO DAC d eo L_OUT VOUTL DATA co AODO a Pam s cee sn i T gt ao smokour ri ML 3 GPIO54 CN502 DAM TO T SMDOUT HSM TO T HSMTOT LD Mon LDO or LOADING civ 04 DAOUT 46 LDIN DRIVE o MOTOR DAT TO 1 gt 7 B ASCK SMCKOUT CLOSE LPS1 HST TO M NS OPEN z X525P gt X525P OPEN TO FROM CN601 aV T14 BOARD osoa ___ _ IC 3701 3 7 50 E 7 10200 SEE PAGE 3 4 00 DDC SWi SWi XAI SFSCK SCK 4 7 SFCSOB CE 4 ES AG23 CLK24IN RXD1B lt CN1402 5 4 3702 3 7 CLK240UT FSCO XRESET RSTSWB FSCI J24 CLK27AIN O 10570 SPDIFO m SPDIFSEL V19 GPIO36 V41R5 IN Abbreviation AUS Australian model 3 CN201 FOR CHECK CN1401 FOR CHECK DBAO DBA1 DCLKO DCLKNO DWE DCAS DRAS 24 26 28 30 CN38
198. 0104 3 D201 2 0301 0302 0303 034 3 0409 7 0410 C7 0413 7 0414 7 0415 7 m 0605 MIN 0416 0 7 2 eim 64982 me R225 R22 D420 D 4 0501 0 5 0502 0 5 D503 6 C498 10440 428 ES C434 8421 3 D505 E 6 5 D506 6 y D507 E6 d 0508 0 6 N 0509 D 6 im 0510 0 6 0511 0512 0523 6 0524 Z 0526 9405 0527 5 mm 0528 6 5 5 M O 64178412 ur QUE 6545 C150 B 1 WII s Q oo O 6 dd 0930 0 90437 4355 40600204 Tl 2 Q201 DROL 0305 E n OS SP 09 VE 88453 TU me O o E O 0528 um X 0308 05225 975560 12402 0309 3 as a o9 5 Jo 580 gt R291858 6 0501 0 5 0502 5 uih sim 5543 0503 E 5 On ma 0504 5 AAS 76542 R297 9 e Q505 E 5 9 O 8 BA Regs B 0508 5 eames wa RB20 P 0509 6 6 0541 T lt 0510 6 7 O 0511 976 0 as 0601 8 5 C319 N
199. 012 R3101 R3102 3103 1 16W R3104 1 16W 1 16W R3105 3106 3107 1 16W R3108 1 16W R3109 1 10W 1 10W 3111 R3113 1 10W R3201 1 10W R3202 1 10W R3203 1 16W R3204 R3206 1 16W R3207 1 16W R3208 1 16W R3209 1 16W 1 16W R3210 R3211 1 16W R3213 R3214 1 16W R3215 1 16W 1 16W R3216 R3217 1 16W R3218 1 16W R3219 1 16W R3220 1 16W 1 16W R3221 R3222 1 16W R3223 1 16W R3224 1 16W 3227 1 16W 1 16W R3228 R3229 1 16W R3230 R3232 R3233 1 16W 1 16W R3234 8 23 Part No 1 218 827 11 1 218 951 11 1 218 827 11 1 216 864 11 1 218 951 11 1 218 827 11 1 218 951 11 1 218 827 11 1 218 951 11 1 218 827 11 1 218 990 81 1 218 990 81 1 218 990 81 1 234 378 21 1 218 990 81 1 218 990 81 1 218 990 81 1 218 990 81 1 218 990 81 1 218 990 81 1 218 990 81 1 218 990 81 1 218 990 81 1 218 990 81 1 218 990 81 1 218 989 11 1 218 965 11 1 218 937 11 1 218 937 11 1 218 937 11 1 218 990 81 1 218 965 11 1 218 937 11 1 218 937 11 1 218 937 11 1 218 990 81 1 218 937 11 1 218 937 11 1 218 937 11 1 218 977 11 1 218 849 11 1 218 871 11 1 218 951 11 1 218 963 11 1 218 969 11 1 218 849 11 1 218 871 11 1 218 879 11 1 218 963 11 1 218 941 81 1 218 941 81 1 218 963 11 1 218 879 11 1 218 941 81 1 218 941 81 1 218 965 11 1 218 965 11 1 216 295 91 1 218 990 81 1 218 990 81 1 218 990 81 Description METAL CHIP RES CHIP METAL CHIP SHORT CHIP RES CHIP METAL CHIP RES CHIP METAL CH
200. 06h 9m SP Oh 59m SP Set the date using the number buttons and lt gt Then press the green button Next Set the start time using the number buttons and lt gt Then press the green button Next Set the stop time using the number buttons and gt Then press the green button Next To create your own setting 1 2 Select 1 Memory2 Memory3 in step 3 Select Detailed Settings and press ENTER The display for adjusting detailed settings appears Select an item using 44 and adjust settings using For details about each setting see the explanation of the display Prog Motion Adjusts the progressive video signal when Component Video Out is set to Progressive page 136 Select Motion for a picture including subjects that move dynamically Select Still for a picture with little movement Cinema Converts the progressive video signal to match the type of DVD software that you are watching when Component Video Out is set to Progressive page 136 Select Auto to detect the software type Film based or Video based automatically and select the appropriate conversion mode Normally select this position Select Off to fix the conversion mode to the mode for Video based software 3 D Y C Adjusts the brightness colour separation for the video si
201. 07 1 16W R5608 1 16W R5609 1 16W R5610 1 16W R5612 1 16W R5613 1 16W R5614 R5615 1 16W R5617 1 16W R5618 R5619 R5622 1 16W R5623 1 16W R5624 R5626 R5627 1 16W R5628 1 16W R5629 1 16W R5630 1 16W R5631 1 16W R5632 1 16W R5638 1 16W R5642 1 16W R5646 1 16W R5650 1 16W R5651 1 10W R5652 1 10W R5657 1 10W R5658 1 10W R5659 1 10W R5661 1 16W R5664 1 16W R5672 1 16W R5688 1 16W R5689 1 16W R5690 R5692 1 10W R5693 R5701 R5702 5703 5704 1 16W R5 05 5706 5707 5803 1 10W R5804 1 10W R5805 1 16W R5806 R5807 R5808 R5809 1 16W R5812 1 16W 5813 5814 5815 8 25 Part No 1 218 851 11 1 218 973 11 1 218 929 11 1 216 295 91 1 218 940 11 1 218 940 11 1 218 965 11 1 218 965 11 1 218 953 11 1 218 965 11 1 218 953 11 1 218 953 11 1 218 953 11 1 218 953 11 1 218 965 11 1 218 953 11 1 218 940 11 1 218 940 11 1 218 940 11 1 218 933 11 1 218 940 11 1 218 933 11 1 218 940 11 1 218 940 11 1 218 933 11 1 242 963 21 1 242 963 21 1 242 963 21 1 242 963 21 1 218 940 11 1 218 873 11 1 218 941 81 1 218 953 11 1 218 953 11 1 218 953 11 1 218 953 11 1 216 864 11 1 216 864 11 1 218 989 11 1 218 953 11 1 218 990 81 1 218 990 81 1 218 990 81 1 218 949 11 1 218 949 11 1 218 951 11 1 218 943 11 1 216 864 11 1 211 990 11 1 218 977 11 1 164 360 11 1 218 973 11 1 218 961 11 1 218 953 11 1 218 962 11 1 218 961 11 1 218 958 11 1 218 961 11 1 218 958 11
202. 0V 18V R323 GND1 gt OUTPUTI DIGITAL AWRAL F311 0379 317 gt IN AA 6 8k C394 0396 24 t Q 1 0 22 U301 ie 5378 839 Lowe IY 1231 i M 6400 lt 16V F319 0 22 UPC3221GV 5 2 1327 00000 41332 B 5 181 7 JL331 gt 1916 JL330 gt 1515 F309 JL329 5 181 4 JL328 mE qn Y us 0 0 1812 F310 50V B 1 cc 7326 3 S gt 1511 Tg OFDM DEM D ON C 368 i gt 2 2 T pe j S DRX3975D PN 8322 a N JL324 JL323 TS1 10 R680 C C422 04 av JL322 6 79 JL321 TS1 8 R678 679 100x4 AEP1 AEP3 UK AUS MODEL R678 679 33x4 AEP2 MODEL R680 681 682 100 AEP1 AEP3 UK AUS MODEL R680 681 682 33 AEP2 MODEL 2 504 DTBR gt e 1 5 2 5 gt DT43 3V D V43 39W jaye lt XCOFDM_RESET TO 1 5 F318 1304 0303 R312 1 355 17 100 5 gt DT TUON gt TO 4 5 D302 C354 0353 ANSV SW E gt 5 0 8313 5V SW 44 DET ANT 5 0 25V Q306 gt M 2SA1576A 1106 OR R326 R314 r 4 7k 4 Tk 0 R351 4 5 55 8358 5 0 0 22k 0 s di S00 R353 0306 310 22k FLAG CONT 5 359 8315 0 0307 e 10k 10k 280
203. 1 1 218 960 11 1 218 960 11 1 216 864 11 1 216 864 11 1 216 864 11 1 216 864 11 1 216 864 11 1 216 864 11 1 216 864 11 1 216 864 11 Description RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES NETWORK RES NETWORK RES NETWORK RES CHIP SHORT CHIP SHORT CHIP METAL CHIP SHORT CHIP SHORT CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP RES CHIP METAL CHIP RES CHIP METAL CHIP SHORT CHIP METAL CHIP RES CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP SHORT CHIP SHORT CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP SHORT CHIP SHORT CHIP SHORT CHIP SHORT CHIP SHORT CHIP SHORT CHIP SHORT CHIP SHORT CHIP 47 47 5 6 10 22 10 10 47 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 Remarks 1 16W AEP2 1 16W AEP2 1 16W AEP2 1 16W AEP2 1 16W AEP2 1 16W AEP2 1 16W AEP2 1 16W AEP2 100 1005 4 AEP2 100 1005 4 AEP2 100 1005 4 AEP2 10K 4 7K 6 8K 2 2K 47K 2 2K 4 7K 33K 10K 4 7K 6 8K 1 5K 100 3 9K 3 9K 5 5 1 16W AEP2 1 10W 1 10W 1 10W 1 10W 1 10W 1 10W 1 16W 1 16W 1 16W 1 10W 1 10W 1 10W 1 16W 1 10W 1 16W 1 10W 1 10W 1 16W 1 10W 1 10W 1 10W 1 16W 1 16W Ref R351 R352 R353 R354 R355 R356 R357 R358 R359 R361 R363 R527 R5
204. 1 L105 L1005 L1801 L1811 L3301 3302 3303 3304 13305 13306 13307 13308 14551 L5101 L5201 15202 5701 5801 5802 5803 5804 01801 01811 02501 02502 Part No 8 719 077 34 8 719 941 86 8 719 058 24 8 719 058 24 8 719 058 24 8 719 058 24 8 719 058 24 6 708 305 01 6 708 305 01 8 759 693 13 8 759 693 13 6 710 840 01 8 759 100 96 8 759 679 05 6 706 487 01 6 707 472 01 6 702 362 01 8 759 592 47 6 706 365 01 6 710 887 01 6 706 487 01 6 806 103 01 6 707 858 01 6 711 188 01 1 793 446 21 1 821 450 12 1 469 967 21 1 412 008 31 1 412 958 21 1 412 953 11 1 412 954 11 1 412 951 11 1 412 954 11 1 412 951 11 1 412 954 11 1 412 951 11 1 412 954 11 1 412 951 11 1 469 967 21 1 414 235 22 1 456 799 11 1 456 799 11 1 400 330 21 1 457 374 21 1 457 374 21 1 457 374 21 1 457 374 21 6 551 699 01 6 551 699 01 6 551 699 01 6 551 699 01 Description DIODE DIODE DIODE DIODE DIODE DIODE DIODE DIODE IC gt SML 310YTT86 DAN202UT106 RB501V 40TE 17 RB501V 40TE 17 RB501V 40TE 17 RB501V 40TE 17 RB501V 40TE 17 KAH511638C UCBST KAH511638C UCBST NJM12904V NJM12904V AK5358AET E2 uPC4558G2 TC WH34FU TE12R TC7SHO8FU TSRSOYJF PST3813UL MM1563DFBE TC7SZO8FU TE85R uPD72852AGB 8EU A R5523N001B TR F TC7SHO8FU T5RSOYJF 88SA8040 TBC1C000 TC74V
205. 1 1 16W 1 16W R1031 1 16W R1032 1 16W R1033 1 16W 1 16W R1034 1 16W R1035 R1036 1 16W R1037 1 16W R1039 1 16W 1 16W R1040 1 16W R1066 R1067 1 16W R1068 R1069 R1071 R1103 R1107 1 16W 1110 1 16W R1111 1 16W 1 16W 1132 1 16W R1153 R1161 1 16W R1163 1 16W R1164 1 16W R1181 R1182 R1191 R1195 R1199 1 16W 1 16W R1205 1 16W R1219 R1240 1 16W R1241 1 16W R1242 1 10W 1 10W R1243 1 16W R1244 R1245 1 16W R1246 1 16W R1247 1 16W 1 16W R1248 1 16W R1249 R1250 1 16W R1251 1 10W R1252 1 10W 1 16W R1255 1 16W R1256 1257 1 16W 1258 8 22 1 218 965 11 1 218 990 81 1 218 990 81 1 218 990 81 1 218 965 11 1 218 965 11 1 218 965 11 1 218 940 11 1 218 937 11 1 218 941 81 1 218 943 11 1 218 945 11 1 234 378 21 1 234 378 21 1 234 378 21 1 234 378 21 1 211 984 11 1 218 823 11 1 211 984 11 1 218 823 11 1 218 973 11 1 218 973 11 1 218 973 11 1 218 973 11 1 218 965 11 1 218 990 81 1 218 990 81 1 218 990 81 1 218 977 11 1 218 937 11 1 218 961 11 1 218 961 11 1 218 961 11 1 218 961 11 1 218 965 11 1 218 965 11 1 218 961 11 1 218 961 11 1 218 965 11 1 218 965 11 1 218 990 81 1 218 933 11 1 234 400 21 1 234 400 21 1 218 990 81 1 218 935 11 1 234 370 21 1 234 370 21 1 218 933 11 1 234 400 21 1 234 400 21 1 218 990 81 1 218 935 11 1 218 935 11 1 234 370 21 1 234 370 21 1 218 933 11 1 218 933 11 Description RES CHIP SHORT CHIP SHORT CHIP S
206. 1 ISA1602AM1TP 1EF 2 2 1620 QuH aw gt E R 0615 C616 pS 100p E 0 01 50V 609 25 Ou gt gt gt TU VIN 2 11 AVSUP zz AINT E E TU LIN 4 R631 SCOL Q604 TU C623 10601 601 ISA1602AM1TP 1EF 49 9 TESTEN SCOR BUFFER 22 0 1 5 0606 M 1 5 _ 50 EURO MSP 1 5 AW e 2504154 CJ VREF1 8632 JL614 SIF AMP R625 22 XOUT 1C601 TP 3 3k 0 9 n C630 560 MSPSTAT lt P D 369 8 JL657 JL660 ZZ SS TU RIN 0605 ISA1602AM1TP 1EF 25V BUFFER 4627 22 3 3 15 R628 S 3 3k 1658 C633 560 50V R621 100 50 7 507 MW gt R622 100 MW XRST1 Note The components identified by mark A or dotted line with mark A are critical for safety Replace only with part number specified TUNER 4 13 4 14 AV 114 5 5 RDR HXD870 HXD970 HXD1070 For Schematic Diagram Refer to page 4 4 for waveform Refer to page 4 51 for printed wiring board DT 120 BOARD 1 5 4 EMMA2LL 10110 TC7SHO4FU TSRSONYJF INV
207. 1 R242 R243 R244 R245 R246 R248 R250 R251 R252 S201 S203 S204 S207 S208 S209 S210 S211 S212 5213 Part No 8 729 052 91 8 729 052 91 8 729 904 87 8 729 421 19 8 729 029 06 8 729 029 10 1 216 295 91 1 216 864 11 1 216 864 11 1 216 864 11 1 216 833 11 1 216 864 11 1 216 830 11 1 216 833 11 1 216 849 11 1 216 849 11 1 216 295 91 1 216 826 11 1 216 814 11 1 216 838 11 1 216 833 11 1 216 825 11 1 216 825 11 1 216 825 11 1 216 864 11 1 216 845 11 1 216 864 11 1 216 833 11 1 216 833 11 1 216 833 11 1 216 825 11 1 216 825 11 1 216 827 11 1 216 830 11 1 216 833 11 1 216 825 11 1 216 825 11 1 216 827 11 1 216 827 11 1 216 805 11 1 216 805 11 1 216 805 11 1 771 410 21 1 786 726 11 1 771 410 21 1 786 726 11 1 771 410 21 1 771 410 21 1 786 726 11 1 786 726 11 1 786 726 11 1 786 726 11 Description TRANSISTOR TRANSISTOR 2SD1898T100R TRANSISTOR 2SD1898T100R TRANSISTOR 25 1197 TRANSISTOR UN2213 TRANSISTOR DTC124EUA T106 TRANSISTOR DTC143TUA T106 RESISTOR SHORT CHIP 0 SHORT CHIP 0 SHORT CHIP 0 SHORT CHIP 0 METAL CHIP 10K 5 SHORT CHIP 0 METAL CHIP 5 6K 5 METAL CHIP 10K 5 METAL CHIP 220K 5 METAL CHIP 220K 5 0 METAL CHIP 2 K 5 METAL CHIP 2 0 5 METAL CHIP 27 5 METAL CHIP 10K 5 METAL CHIP 2 2K 5 METAL CHIP 2 2K 5 METAL CHIP 2 2K 5 0 METAL CHIP 100K 5 SHORT CHIP 0 METAL CHIP 10K 5 METAL CHIP
208. 1 114 130 11 1 114 130 11 1 114 130 11 1 164 937 11 1 164 937 11 1 164 937 11 1 107 820 11 1 114 130 11 1 114 130 11 1 114 130 11 1 114 130 11 1 107 820 11 1 114 130 11 1 114 130 11 1 114 130 11 1 107 820 11 1 107 820 11 1 114 130 11 1 114 130 11 1 164 852 11 1 164 852 11 1 100 574 81 1 114 130 11 1 126 209 11 1 126 209 11 1 114 130 11 1 114 130 11 1 114 130 11 1 114 130 11 1 107 820 11 1 117 681 11 1 164 937 11 1 125 889 11 1 114 130 11 1 164 937 11 1 114 130 11 1 164 937 11 1 164 937 11 1 107 820 11 1 164 937 11 1 114 130 11 1 114 130 11 1 107 820 11 1 164 943 81 1 164 943 81 Description CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP ELECT CHIP ELECT CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP ELECT CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP ELECT CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP ELECT CHIP ELECT CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP ELECT CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHI
209. 1 164 173 11 1 164 739 11 1 162 919 11 1 162 919 11 1 126 964 11 1 126 962 11 1 104 658 91 1 126 964 11 1 104 658 91 1 104 658 91 Description CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP ELECT ELECT ELECT ELECT ELECT ELECT ELECT ELECT ELECT ELECT ELECT ELECT ELECT CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP ELECT ELECT CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP ELECT ELECT ELECT ELECT ELECT ELECT 470PF 0 1uF 220PF 0 1uF 470PF 220PF 0 001uF 0 001uF 470uF 470uF 470uF 470uF 470uF 4 7uF 4 7uF 4 7uF 4 7uF 100uF 22uF 100PF 0 0022uF 0 0022uF 100PF 0 47uF 100uF 47uF 0 1uF 0 1uF 100PF 0 01uF 0 1uF 0 1uF 0 1uF 56PF 56PF 3PF 3PF 1uF 0 1uF 0 1uF 0 01uF 0 0039uF 560PF 0 01uF 0 0039uF 560PF 22PF 22PF 10uF 3 3UF 100uF 10uF 100uF 100uF 5 5 5 5 2 5 2 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 5 10 10 5 0 5PF 0 5PF 1090 2090
210. 1 164 943 81 1 164 943 81 1 164 943 81 1 164 943 81 1 164 943 81 1 125 777 11 1 126 209 11 1 164 943 81 1 125 777 11 1 125 777 11 1 164 943 81 1 164 943 81 1 164 943 81 1 164 943 81 1 164 943 81 1 164 943 81 1 164 943 81 1 164 943 81 1 164 943 81 1 164 943 81 1 164 943 81 1 164 943 81 1 164 854 11 1 164 854 11 1 114 130 11 1 126 193 11 1 164 937 11 1 164 937 11 1 114 130 11 1 126 210 21 1 114 130 11 1 164 937 11 1 114 130 11 1 164 937 11 1 114 130 11 1 114 130 11 1 114 130 11 1 114 130 11 1 126 210 21 1 107 820 11 1 107 820 11 1 164 360 11 1 100 566 91 1 100 566 91 1 100 566 91 1 100 566 91 1 164 937 11 1 114 130 11 1 164 937 11 1 164 937 11 1 817 705 51 1 766 767 51 1 784 857 51 1 564 729 11 1 779 338 51 1 819 414 11 1 820 176 11 Description CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP ELECT CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP ELECT CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP ELECT CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP ELECT CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERA
211. 1 218 937 11 1 218 937 11 1 218 990 81 1 218 947 11 1 218 839 11 1 208 893 11 1 208 905 11 1 218 929 11 1 218 951 11 1 218 965 11 1 218 839 11 1 208 905 11 1 218 929 11 1 218 951 11 1 218 947 11 1 218 839 11 1 218 929 11 1 218 951 11 1 218 947 11 1 218 839 11 1 208 905 11 1 208 905 11 1 218 929 11 1 218 951 11 1 218 937 11 1 218 990 81 1 218 965 11 1 218 937 11 1 218 990 81 1 218 965 11 1 218 947 11 1 218 941 81 1 218 941 81 1 218 941 81 1 218 965 11 1 218 990 81 1 218 935 11 1 218 990 81 1 218 965 11 1 218 941 81 1 242 963 21 1 242 963 21 1 242 963 21 1 242 963 21 Description RES CHIP RES CHIP SHORT CHIP RES CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP METAL CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP SHORT CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP SHORT CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP SHORT CHIP RES CHIP SHORT CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES NETWORK RES NETWORK RES NETWORK RES NETWORK 47 47 0 UK 330 470 1 8 0 6K 10 680 10K 470 0 6K 10 680 330 470 10 680 330 470 5 6K 5 6K 10 680 47 0 UK 10K 47 0 AEP UK 10K 330 100 100 100 10K 0 33 0 10K 100 33 1005X4 33 1005X4 33 1005X4 33 1005X4 5 5 5 0 5 0 5 0 5 5 5 5
212. 1 218 961 11 1 218 958 11 Description METAL CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP SHORT CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES NETWORK RES NETWORK RES NETWORK RES NETWORK RES CHIP METAL CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP SHORT CHIP SHORT CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP SHORT CHIP SHORT CHIP SHORT CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP SHORT CHIP METAL CHIP RES CHIP CERAMIC CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP Remarks 1 5K 0 599 110W 47K 5 1 16W 10 5 1 16W 0 82 5 1 16W 02 5 1 16W 10K 5 1 16W 10K 5 1 16W 1K 5 1 16W 10K 5 1 16W 1K 5 1 16W 1K 5 1 16W 1K 5 1 16W 1K 5 1 16W 10K 5 1 16W 1K 5 1 16W 02 5 1 16W 82 5 1 16W 02 5 1 16W 22 5 1 16W 02 5 1 16W 22 5 1 16W 02 5 1 16W 02 5 1 16W 22 5 1 16W 33 1005X4 33 1005X4 33 1005X4 33 1005X4 82 5 1 16W 12K 0 5 100 5 1 16W 1K 5 1 16W 1K 5 1 16W 1K 5 1 16W 1K 5 1 16W 0 0 1M 5 1 16W 1K 5 1 16W 0 0 0 470 5 1 16W 470 5 1 16W 680 5 1 16W 150 5 1 16W 0 15 0 5 110W 100K 5 116W 0 1uF 16V 47K 5 1 16W 4 7K 5 1 16W 1K 5 1 16W 5 6K 5 1 16W 4 7K 5 1 16W 2 1K 5 1 16W 4 7K 5 1 16W 2 1K 5 1 16W 4 7K 5 1 16W 2 1K 5 1
213. 113 C114 C115 C118 C120 C121 C122 C123 C124 C125 C126 C127 C131 C132 C133 C134 C135 C138 C139 C140 C141 C142 C149 C150 C152 C156 C157 C202 C204 C205 C206 C208 Part No 1 104 662 91 1 164 156 11 1 164 156 11 1 162 959 11 1 164 156 11 1 165 908 11 1 162 919 11 1 162 919 11 1 115 156 11 1 162 915 11 1 162 915 11 1 115 456 21 1 164 156 11 1 115 156 11 1 115 156 11 1 104 655 91 1 164 156 11 1 164 156 11 1 164 156 11 1 126 933 11 1 164 156 11 1 164 156 11 1 164 156 11 1 164 156 11 1 164 156 11 1 126 961 11 1 164 156 11 1 164 156 11 1 115 156 11 1 100 831 91 1 162 915 11 1 115 156 11 1 115 156 11 1 164 156 11 1 107 826 11 1 164 156 11 1 126 933 11 1 104 662 91 1 164 315 11 1 107 826 11 Description AV 114 CG BOARD not supplied AEP UK AV 114 AS BOARD not supplied AUS CAPACITOR ELECT CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP DOUBLE LAYER CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP ELECT CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP ELECT CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP ELECT CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP ELECT ELECT CERAMIC CHIP RESISTORS resistors are 1n ohms METAL metal film resisto
214. 13 8 729 013 26 8 729 013 26 8 729 028 83 8 729 620 13 8 729 620 13 6 551 699 01 6 551 699 01 6 551 699 01 6 551 699 01 6 551 699 01 8 729 620 13 6 551 699 01 8 729 620 13 Description Remarks Ref No INDUCTOR FERRITE BEAD INDUCTOR FERRITE BEAD INDUCTOR FERRITE BEAD R101 INDUCTOR FERRITE BEAD R102 INDUCTOR FERRITE BEAD R103 R104 FERRITE CHIP R105 TRANSISTOR R106 R107 TRANSISTOR DTC124EUA T106 R109 TRANSISTOR 29C4154TP 1EF R110 TRANSISTOR UMD2N TR R111 TRANSISTOR UMD2N TR TRANSISTOR 29D2114K R112 R113 TRANSISTOR DTC124EUA T106 116 TRANSISTOR DTA143EUA T106 AEP UK R117 TRANSISTOR 25 4154 1 R118 TRANSISTOR 29C4154TP 1EF TRANSISTOR 29D2114K R123 R124 TRANSISTOR UMD2N TR R125 TRANSISTOR 29C4154TP 1EF R126 TRANSISTOR UMD2N TR R127 TRANSISTOR 29D2153T100V TRANSISTOR UMD2N TR R129 R130 TRANSISTOR 2562411 0 131 TRANSISTOR UMD2N TR R132 TRANSISTOR 2562411 0 R133 TRANSISTOR 2505876110608 TRANSISTOR 29C4154TP 1EF R134 R135 TRANSISTOR XP4401 R137 TRANSISTOR DTC124EUA T106 R138 TRANSISTOR 29D2114K R139 TRANSISTOR ISA1602AM1TP 1EF TRANSISTOR UMD2N TR R140 R141 TRANSISTOR 29D2114K R142 TRANSISTOR 29D2114K R143 TRANSISTOR 29C4154TP 1EF R144 TRANSISTOR 29C4154TP 1EF TRANSISTOR UMD2N TR R145 R146 TRANSISTOR DTC124EUA T106 R147 TRANSISTOR UMH1NTN R148 TRANSISTOR ISA1602AM1TP 1EF R149 TRANSISTOR 29C4154TP 1EF TRANSISTOR 25 4154 1 R150 R151 TRANSISTOR 29C4154TP 1EF R152 TRANSISTO
215. 1853 1 414 228 11 INDUCTOR FERRITE BEAD 0518 8 719 081 42 DIODE UMZ6 8N T106 L854 1 414 228 11 INDUCTOR FERRITE BEAD 0519 8 719 081 42 DIODE UMZ6 8N T106 L855 1 500 283 11 INDUCTOR FERRITE BEAD 0520 8 719 081 42 DIODE UMZ6 8N T106 856 1 414 228 11 INDUCTOR FERRITE BEAD D521 8 719 081 42 DIODE UMZ6 8N T106 Note The components identified by mark or dotted 0522 8 719 081 42 DIODE UMZ6 8N T106 line with mark are critical for safety 8 5 Replace only with part number specified Ref No 857 858 859 860 861 L862 Q101 Q102 Q103 Q104 Q105 Q108 Q110 0111 0112 0201 0301 0302 0303 0304 0305 0306 0307 0308 0309 0310 0311 0401 0402 0403 0404 0406 0407 0408 0410 0411 0413 0501 0502 0503 0504 0505 0506 0507 0508 0509 0510 0511 0601 0602 0604 0605 0606 0751 0752 1 414 228 11 1 414 228 11 1 414 228 11 1 500 283 11 1 469 876 11 1 469 796 21 8 729 029 06 8 729 620 13 6 550 375 01 6 550 375 01 8 729 023 22 8 729 029 06 8 729 028 86 8 729 620 13 8 729 620 13 8 729 023 22 6 550 375 01 8 729 620 13 6 550 375 01 8 729 044 09 6 550 375 01 8 729 901 87 6 550 375 01 8 729 901 87 6 551 719 01 8 729 620 13 8 729 427 70 8 729 029 06 8 729 023 22 6 55 1 699 01 6 550 375 01 8 729 023 22 8 729 023 22 8 729 620 13 8 729 620 13 6 550 375 01 8 729 029 06 6 551 718 01 6 551 699 01 8 729 620 13 8 729 620 13 8 729 620
216. 208 754 11 1 216 306 11 1 208 754 11 1 216 306 11 1 216 295 91 1 208 755 11 1 216 845 11 1 208 755 11 1 216 295 91 1 208 755 11 1 216 828 11 1 216 828 11 1 216 817 11 1 216 809 11 1 216 817 11 1 216 809 11 1 216 845 11 1 216 845 11 1 216 809 11 1 216 809 11 1 216 809 11 1 216 809 11 1 216 845 11 1 216 845 11 1 216 845 11 1 216 845 11 1 216 817 11 Description RES CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP SHORT CHIP METAL CHIP RES CHIP SHORT CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP RES CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP RES CHIP METAL CHIP RES CHIP METAL CHIP RES CHIP SHORT CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP SHORT CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP 0 AUS 75 3 9 4 7K 47K 2 K 2 2M 220K 100K 100K 560 1 2 1 5 10 96K 220 3 9 75 100K 75 75 3 9K 3 9K 470 100 470 100 100K 100K 100 100 100 100 100K 100K 100K 100K 470 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 0 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 0 5 5 0 5 5 0 5 5 0 5 5 0 5 0 5 5 5 5 5
217. 28 R529 R530 R531 R532 R534 R535 R538 R540 R542 R544 R546 R547 R550 R551 R554 R556 R558 R560 R561 R564 R566 R568 R569 R570 R571 R572 R575 R576 R577 R579 R580 R589 R594 R595 R597 R598 R605 R606 R607 R608 R609 R610 R616 R621 R622 R623 R624 Part No 1 218 965 11 1 218 965 11 1 218 969 11 1 216 864 11 1 216 864 11 1 216 864 11 1 216 864 11 1 218 969 11 1 218 965 11 1 216 864 11 1 218 965 11 1 218 990 81 1 218 990 81 1 218 990 81 1 218 990 81 1 218 990 81 1 218 990 81 1 218 990 81 1 218 969 11 1 218 969 11 1 218 969 11 1 218 969 11 1 218 969 11 1 218 969 11 1 218 969 11 1 218 969 11 1 218 969 11 1 218 969 11 1 218 969 11 1 218 969 11 1 218 969 11 1 218 969 11 1 218 969 11 1 218 969 11 1 218 969 11 1 218 941 81 1 218 941 81 1 218 990 81 1 218 990 81 1 218 965 11 1 218 965 11 1 218 990 81 1 218 965 11 1 218 965 11 1 218 990 81 1 218 938 11 1 218 938 11 1 218 939 11 1 218 939 11 1 218 990 81 1 218 990 81 1 218 990 81 1 218 937 11 1 218 937 11 1 218 937 11 1 218 937 11 1 218 969 11 1 218 969 11 1 218 990 81 1 234 400 21 Description RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP SHORT CHIP SHORT CHIP SHORT CHIP SHORT CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP SHORT CHIP RES CHIP SHORT CHIP SHORT CHIP SHORT CHIP SHORT CHIP SHORT CHIP SHORT CHIP SHORT CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP
218. 3 16 1804 6 3 01805 16 1811 50 1812 6 3 01813 16 1814 50V 01815 50V 02305 6 3V 02501 16 C2502 50 02503 50 02504 6 3 02505 16 02506 6 3 3103 6 3 3104 16 3105 6 3 3106 16 3107 16 3108 8 18 Part No 1 164 937 11 1 114 130 11 1 164 937 11 1 164 937 11 1 107 820 11 1 107 820 11 1 107 820 11 1 107 820 11 1 126 209 11 1 114 130 11 1 114 130 11 1 114 130 11 1 114 130 11 1 114 130 11 1 114 130 11 1 107 820 11 1 114 130 11 1 164 943 81 1 164 943 81 1 164 937 11 1 114 130 11 1 164 937 11 1 164 937 11 1 107 820 11 1 100 966 91 1 100 966 91 1 126 209 11 1 107 820 11 1 125 889 91 1 107 820 11 1 107 820 11 1 126 205 11 1 107 820 11 1 107 820 11 1 125 889 11 1 100 966 91 1 164 943 81 1 114 130 11 1 114 130 11 1 125 889 11 1 164 882 11 1 164 934 11 1 119 923 11 1 114 130 11 1 125 889 11 1 164 874 11 1 164 878 11 1 119 923 11 1 114 130 11 1 114 130 11 1 114 130 11 1 114 130 11 1 114 130 11 1 114 130 11 1 100 966 91 1 117 681 11 1 114 130 11 1 107 820 11 1 164 937 11 1 114 130 11 1 126 210 21 Description CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP ELECT CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAM
219. 3 1 500 245 11 INDUCTOR FERRITE BEAD 0421 6 501 486 01 DIODE NNCD3 9F T1B L304 1 408 621 31 INDUCTOR 330uH 0422 6 501 486 01 DIODE NNCD3 9F T1B L305 1 500 245 11 INDUCTOR FERRITE BEAD 0501 8 719 069 54 DIODE UDZSTE 175 1B L501 1 414 594 11 INDUCTOR FERRITE BEAD 0502 8 719 069 54 DIODE UDZSTE 175 1B L502 1 414 594 11 INDUCTOR FERRITE BEAD 0503 6 501 486 01 DIODE NNCD3 9F T1B 1601 1 500 245 11 INDUCTOR FERRITE BEAD 0504 8 719 081 42 DIODE UMZ6 8N T106 1602 1 500 245 11 INDUCTOR FERRITE BEAD 0505 8 719 081 42 DIODE UMZ6 8N T106 1604 1 414 760 21 INDUCTOR FERRITE BEAD 0506 8 719 081 42 DIODE UMZ6 8N T106 1605 1 414 760 21 INDUCTOR FERRITE BEAD 0507 8 719 081 42 DIODE UMZ6 8N T106 606 1 500 245 11 INDUCTOR FERRITE BEAD 0508 6 501 486 01 DIODE NNCD3 9F T1B L607 1 412 963 11 INDUCTOR 100uH 0509 8 719 081 42 DIODE UMZ6 8N T106 L608 1 500 245 11 INDUCTOR FERRITE BEAD 0510 6 501 486 01 DIODE NNCD3 9F T1B L609 1 412 951 11 INDUCTOR 10uH D511 8 719 081 42 DIODE UMZ6 8N T106 L751 1 414 760 21 INDUCTOR FERRITE BEAD AEP UK 0512 6 501 486 01 DIODE NNCD3 9F T1B 1801 1 414 228 11 INDUCTOR FERRITE BEAD D513 8 719 081 42 DIODE UMZ6 8N T106 L802 1 414 228 11 INDUCTOR FERRITE BEAD 0514 8 719 081 42 DIODE UMZ6 8N T106 1803 1 216 864 11 SHORT CHIP 0 0515 8 719 081 42 DIODE UMZ6 8N T106 1851 1 414 228 11 INDUCTOR FERRITE BEAD 0516 8 719 081 42 DIODE UMZ6 8N T106 1852 1 414 228 11 INDUCTOR FERRITE BEAD 0517 8 719 081 42 DIODE UMZ6 8N T106
220. 3 Selectanitemto be repeated using 4 epeat Disc repeats all of the tracks on disc Repeat Album except for CD repeats the current album Repeat Track repeats the current track Repeat Programme repeats the current programme page 110 Press ENTER Repeat play starts To cancel Repeat play Press CLEAR Or set Repeat to Repeat Off in the Play Mode menu Hint You can select Repeat from Play Mode in the System Menu Q Note You can select Repeat Programme only during Programme play AQ 107 olpny continued 1 09 110 112 Creating your own programme Programme You can play the contents of an album or disc in the order you want by arranging the order of the albums tracks on a disc to create your own programme You can make a programme of up to 24 steps 1 Press PLAY MODE during playback The Mode menu appears 2 Select Programme and press ENTER 3 Select Input Edit Programme and press ENTER The Input Edit Programme display differs depending upon the disc type Example DATA DVD Programme Current Album 01 Track 001 gt Album 01 03 Track 001 004 01 5 001 SYMPHONYO1 02 BEETHOVEN 002 5 02 03 MOZART 003 5 004 SYMPHONY04 Track Name SYMPHONYO1 select an album example 01 BRAHMS u
221. 350 MNI2 86 115 185 370 MNI1 90 120 190 390 MNIO 93 125 200 405 MN9 100 135 210 420 LP 150 235 45 0 sjuaungsn py pue 139 pue sumag gt 141 142 144 Approx recording time hours Approx recording time Recordin maie 1 RDR RDR RDR RDR hours HXD770 HXD870 HXD970 HXD1070 DVD RW mode DVD RW DVD R DL MN6 150 200 315 635 DVD R MNI2 3 hr 30 min 6 hr 17 min MR se me MNII 3 hr 40 min 6 hr 35 min 22 50 59 MNIO 3 hr 50 min 6 hr 53 min SLP MN3 255 340 530 1060 nodo PIE SEP MN8 4hr 30 min 8 hr 4 min MN2 300 405 635 1275 MN7 5 8 hr 58 min MNI 340 455 710 1420 MN6 EP 6 10 hr 46 min n MN5 7 12 hr 34 min The recording time for DVDs 7 SLP 8 14 hr 21 min Approx recording time ART hours MN3 SEP 7 10 17 hr 57 min Recording DVD RW 34 12 21 hr 32 min mode DVD RW DVD R DL 13 hr 24 DVD R DVD R DL s n DVD R 2 Records in higher quality 15 Mbps PCM Pee HQ mode is not available for DVDs When MN32 l hr 1 min 1 hr 51 min recording to DVDs the recording mode MN31 Ihr 5min lhe 57 min automatically switches to HQ mode even if you set to HQ mode MN30 1 hr 10 min 2 hr 6 min 2 Audio signals are
222. 4 0 y dl 41307 0201 3 3k R220 2502114 146 2 2k FAN CONT GND C R m lt GND V45VI lt TO 3 5 Ss va 0302 elel E gt w 2SC4154TP 1EF ja 5 2 e gt 1 5 3042 0305 JL312 JL315 0 JL336 57 50 R D 100 JL341 F 5 6 5 1339 0306 1308 R306 NE 56 250241 1K T 146 C0 45V REG EX utter n 5 7 5 6 4 49 41334 1 6 JL301 0 0 C314 tL C315 tL 316 ini gt TERN T e 2 UMD2N TR F 4 8 5V REG B Q304 2SD2153T100V swo v gt a JL338 R318 0 JL313 5 6 5 0 JL346 e gt I ew 1 0 41316 25V e F 5 6 JL340 JL309 3 4 2 0 9 6 0308 2 5 5 25 2411 146 0 TO 5 5 ay 031 0 031 2 0329 0304 49V REG z 0303 25V 16V 16V 25V 9 7 9 6 155355 17 UMD2N TR F F 5 5 REG JL335 I 41320 0318 Cap fL TUON pas av 100 5 UMD2N TR 11342 0302 SWIONO V UDZSTE 179 1B 49V REG 10317 AN 5 30V d V432V JL302 TU 0000 N VIDEO SIGNAL AUDIO GND CHROMA Y Y CHROMA SIGNAL Q310 e 0 6 0309 0311 2804154 1 25 5876 1060 G 32V SWITCHING 321 SWITCHING REG REG
223. 4 47 2 1005 4 5 2 2 5 820 5 47 5 47 5 0 47 1005 4 47 1005 4 47 1005 4 47 1005 4 47 1005 4 47 1005 4 47 1005 4 47 1005 4 47 1005 4 47 1005 4 47 1005 4 10K 5 10K 5 0 47 5 47 5 Remarks 1 16W AEP2 1 16W AEP2 1 16W AEP2 1 16W AEP2 1 16W AEP2 1 16W AEP2 1 16W AEP2 1 16W AEP2 1 16W 1 16W AEP2 1 16W AEP2 1 16W AEP2 1 16W 1 16W 1 16W 1 16W Ref No R256 R257 R269 R270 R271 R272 R273 R277 R278 R279 R280 R281 R300 R303 R304 R305 R306 R308 R309 R310 R311 R312 R313 R314 R315 R316 R317 R318 R319 R320 R321 R322 R323 R325 R326 R327 R331 R333 R336 R337 R341 R342 R343 R344 R345 R346 R347 R348 R349 R350 8 13 Part No 1 218 937 11 1 218 937 11 1 218 962 11 1 218 965 11 1 218 969 11 1 218 965 11 1 218 965 11 1 218 937 11 1 234 372 11 1 234 372 11 1 234 372 11 1 218 965 11 1 216 864 11 1 216 864 11 1 216 833 11 1 216 864 11 1 216 864 11 1 218 867 11 1 216 825 11 1 216 825 11 1 216 819 11 1 216 809 11 1 218 961 11 1 218 961 11 1 218 965 11 1 216 829 11 1 218 867 11 1 216 825 11 1 218 973 11 1 216 825 11 1 218 961 11 1 216 839 11 1 216 864 11 1 216 833 11 1 218 961 11 1 218 867 11 1 216 823 11 1 216 809 11 1 216 864 11 1 216 864 1
224. 4081T106R K C313 320 6 6 8 B 74 lt R352 10k R689 R690 R692 R343 R345 0 0 0 0 0 GNDD Q310 3 Q309 DTC143EUA T106 DTC143EUA T106 GNDT R691 8693 R344 8346 0 0 0 0 R350 0 8349 8348 DIGITAL TUNER DT 120 3 5 4 19 4 20 RDR HXD870 HXD970 HXD1070 For Schematic Diagram Refer to page 4 4 for waveform Refer to page 4 51 for printed wiring board CN103 24P R623 1 GND DT 120 BOARD 4 5 z B JL431 5 I 4 REF NO 40 000 SERIES 10304 B 9 CN202 12 621 evet21Vv P CONT 1 304 1 8 41402 595 168 18 gi B GND 3 E R530 10 P CONT2 0 41434 4 gt 5291 DET_ANT 22 JL435 uU Steven fp 9 S one ee CN202 V45 8E 7 gt I 6598 14 GND CN302 JL437 THROUGH THE GND 8 ceg 15 FAN THROUGH THE PV 145 HARNESS 41405 16V FVA 002 FFC m SEE PAGE 4 44 11 9 1 306 44 10 ke S 1170850UC OUJT YIN SEE PAGE 4 8 11 200 11414 1419 18 GND o e R703 C596 SW41 5V 12 0 4 R361 pe 19
225. 4581 05701 05801 05802 05804 05808 mim mmm C CO BBBB EXT tame Cd bol SS ae E i 29 Du DEC SEEBREBHERE n wJ b m POWER BLOCK EMMA BLOCK VIDEO AUDIO BLOCK MEMORY BLOCK SATA IDE IF HDMI DV USB BLOCK DVD DRIVE RD 065 RDR HXD870 HXD970 HXD1070 FL 1 18 BOARD SIDE A e hr Uses unleaded solder FL 178 BOARD SIDE A CN101 3 CN102 B 3 CN103 3 CN104 2 CN105 B 1 CN106 4 2 10101 1 873 465 1 2 3 4 DV USB REMOCON RECEIVER POWER SW 4 59 4 60 RDR HXD870 HXD970 HXD1070 SECTION 5 IC PIN FUNCTION DESCRIPTION 5 1 IT CONTROL IC IC101 LC87F06J2A F58W3 E AV 114 BOARD Pinno PinNam VO 2 00 2 3 NC 000000000002 _4_ _ WDT Fixed a 6 HMSTOT gt Fixed 7 IR I Impuofremoeconmolmceiesignal CNN 10 IN ONE O Output of sub clock 932768KHz o ii _ AnalogGND __ I Input of main clock ISMH2 0000 9 O 000000 Power supply input EN P Fixed ate 0000000 6 P Fixed ate __ NEC 2 EN P Fixed at 22 1 Input of detection signal for euro seart 2 P Fixed at
226. 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 Remarks Ref 1 10W R551 1 10W 1 10W R552 1 10W R553 1 10W R554 R555 1 10W R556 1 10W 1 10W R557 1 10W R558 1 10W R559 R560 1 10W R561 1 10W AEP UK R562 R563 1 10W R564 AUS R565 1 10W R566 AEP UK R568 R569 1 10W R571 1 10W R5 3 1 10W R574 1 10W R602 1 10W R603 1 10W R605 1 10W R606 1 10W R607 1 10W R609 1 10W R616 1 10W R619 1 10W R620 1 10W R621 1 10W R622 1 10W R623 1 10W R624 1 10W R625 1 10W R626 1 10W R627 1 10W R628 R630 1 10W R631 1 10W R632 1 10W R633 R634 1 10W R635 1 10W R636 1 10W R637 1 10W R638 1 10W R701 1 10W R703 1 10W R751 1 10W 1 10W R 52 1 10W 1 10W R 53 1 10W 1 10W R 54 1 10W R 55 1 10W 1 10W R 56 1 10W 1 10W R801 8 8 Part No 1 216 809 11 1 216 817 11 1 216 809 11 1 216 845 11 1 216 845 11 1 216 828 11 1 216 828 11 1 216 833 11 1 216 864 11 1 216 835 11 1 216 819 11 1 216 833 11 1 216 864 11 1 216 835 11 1 216 819 11 1 216 837 11 1 216 834 11 1 216 821 11 1 208 755 11 1 500 283 11 1 216 864 11 1 216 821 11 1 216 864 11 1 216 833 11 1 216 833 11 1 216 821 11 1 216 864 11 1 216 864 11 1 216 833 11 1 216 864 11 1 216 809 11 1 216 809 11 1 216 821 11 1 216 827 11 1 216 827 11 1 216 821 11 1 216 827 11 1 216 827 11 1 216 815 11 1 216 829 11 1 216 801 11 1 216 809 11 1 216 825 11 1 400 330 21 1 400 330 21 1 400 330 21 1 216 809 11 1 216 849 11 1 216
227. 5 6 2 GND 10 1000p C4505 2 5A C 4515 C V 5_AIN lp NN 50V 39 47 2 5V REG V45 m B 6 3V 6 3V ad 3 3V REG V45 3 7 11 X6S gt L 52 5 VI 12 V45 VI TP4512 4513 TP4571 cc V45 VO jean 13 d 5 V42R5 5 T E GND D D4571 R4574 1 8VREG RB501V 40TE 17 R4575 T 0 We 185 IN 4569 gt R4573 TP4572 4609 180 30 Sed 285 3 2 5 TO 4 7 GND D 104531 64572 1 0 C4571 04573 Ay C 6 3V V 1R8 m gt VHR8 gt 5 7 GND D 5 lt V43D 4610 TP4570 12 V43HD 4543 L L 1000 5 0 2 B TO 6 7 gor E V45D 250408171068 gt aa RIPPLE 4551 FILTER GND D B 10uH B 5 em e R4552 B D 0 B 5 V43D TENES R4554 V45 8 4541 3V REG 0 5 VO V 12M TO 7 7 W gt gt 04552 RB5O1V 40TE 17 R4556 GND D 5 e GND M A 5 5 2 134552 1170B50UC OUJTFG 045581 045501 4553 REG 100 100 1000 16V 16V 50V C4555 TP4568 B 47 6 3V Di 04557 16V Note The components identified by mark or dotted line with
228. 50K TS 75 32 01 PS OS 00 CA A000002020 CV MD VTR DVdecode Yes LineSys 525 60 TC 00h20m35s RD 02 02 05 RT 10134 505 ASPECT 4 3 CGMS 000000 APSTB 00 DEC 525 60 SF 32KHz QU 12bit AMODE 4 Stereo 2 2 9 2 2 2 9 9 o Boldface alphanumerics Fixed indications Nonboldface alphanumerics Variable indications No Item Description InitDV Whether the initialization of UPD72893B 1394 LINK and DV If NG is displayed it is considered the communication failure codec IC has been completed OK or not NG to UPD72893B IntVE Whether the initialization of ADV7172 Video Encoder for DV If NG is displayed it is considered the communication failure specific has been completed OK or not NG to ADV7172 Number of AV devices recognizing connection Identification number of AV devices including D VHS Digital Tuner etc other than DV devices DV Number of DV devices recognizing connection If the number does not become 01 even if a DV device is connected identification of that device fails GUID GUID set in ConfigROM of the unit GUID Global Unique ID Specific ID for DV devices If the unit is ROOT IRM IRM is displayed at the side position of GUID display iPCR value of the unit oPCR value of the unit 1 __________ _ l GUID GUID set in ConfigROM of the connected DV device Data are displayed only if one DV device is identified If the conne
229. 58F E2 lt gt CRIN ES LA al lt lt 4 6 4 jm 46 25 D JL4416 6 RIN lt TO 2 5 L_IN R453 0471 474 LIN lt 8 10 10 Pu X RCSEL1 05 95V 50V C450 C451 RCSEL1 gt e w _ RA 5 lt vaio RCSEL2 x 50V 50V E 2 gt 1144234 BLANK 5 gt GND N C OUT ojo C OUT Lis SN Y OUT NM CB OUT 0410 N UMZ6 8N T106 NN OUT 1 Y IN 0 6486 R468 ESSEN lt q 40 68 R469 05 14418 3 9 JL4422 TEN lt 1 6 9 gt C 15 zii 5255 o9 JA401 FF N N gt gt 5 5 ton c 62 62 5 em S VIDEO SS a D C2IN 8 9 0476 9 222 2 gt B R470 C2IN lt lt lt lt 5 5 1 amp amp a SCART B IN 25V 75 R471 XAMUTE2 2 3 41434 B 0 5 JL4421 XAMUTE2 SCART RorC IN r4 AMUTE 18 1433 AMUTE SCART G IN EET is WEE R OUT 272 B L OUT p PY Y G OUT CSYNCIN lt IC 401 Pr Cr RorC OUT SDA VIDEO AUDIO our 44 Sia Sin 8 1 Si SCL Si gt EN SELECTOR e EJ Da ves rM SDA me eet R415 SN HI B
230. 6 807 412 01 IC LGC87F06J2A F58W3 E 0102 8 719 988 61 DIODE 155355 17 0103 8 719 988 61 DIODE 155355 17 0104 8 719 053 18 DIODE 158154 400 25 0106 8 719 988 61 DIODE 155355 17 IC102 6 711 071 01 BD4846G TR 03 6 711 072 01 BU4220G TR 0104 6 711 188 01 TC 7MB3257FK EL 1401 6 711 073 01 HA118326APFR E X X 0108 8 719 941 09 DIODE DAP202UT106 0402 8 759 909 71 BA4558F D201 8 719 988 61 DIODE 155355 17 403 6 703 623 01 MM1503XNRE 0301 8 19 083 83 DIODE UDZSTE 1715B C406 8 759 082 60 TC7S66FU 0302 8 719 069 60 DIODE UDZSTE 179 1B 10601 6 702 714 01 MSP3417G QG B8V3 D303 8 719 988 61 DIODE 155355 17 JACK 0304 8 719 988 61 DIODE 155355 17 0401 8 719 083 61 DIODE UDZSTE 1711B JA401 1 794 198 11 CONNECTOR S TERMINAL 0402 8 719 978 33 DIODE UDZSTE 176 8B JA751 1 764 188 31 JACK SMALL TYPE DIA 3 5 AEP UK 0409 8 719 081 42 DIODE UMZ6 8N T106 0410 8 719 081 42 DIODE 6 8 106 lt TERMINAL gt 0413 8 719 081 42 DIODE 6 8 106 KN101 1 537 771 21 TERMINAL BOARD GROUND 0414 8 719 081 42 DIODE 6 8 106 KN102 1 537 771 21 TERMINAL BOARD GROUND 0415 8 719 081 42 DIODE UMZ6 8N T106 0416 8 719 081 42 DIODE UMZ6 8N T106 COIL D418 8 719 988 61 DIODE 155355 17 L102 1 410 517 11 INDUCTOR 0419 8 719 988 61 DIODE 155355 17 1201 1 412 549 31 INDUCTOR 1mH 0420 8 719 941 09 DIODE DAP202UT106 L30
231. 604 01201 00050 00082 45 46 CK CK 57 59 60 62 15 24 6G1 G2 G3 F1 H3 H2 H1 J3 0015 1 09 9 08 8 07 7 06 6 SATA BRIDGE DDMi DDM3 1 63 65 _ 101221 ATICSOB AT1DMARQ CSOn 101221 00051 00053 ATICS1B ATIDIOW CS1n 5 T 25MHz I V5 ATIDIOR DMARQ 2992 B4 A4 C5 B5 0 0000 ATIDIORB ve ATIRESET xau 82 ao E1 2 D1 02 ATIRESETB v4 ATIIORDY RESETn M2 28 41 42 03 4 4 04 5 DADD12 AT1DMACK XTALO 29 41 1 U4 IORDY ATIDMACKB V2 DMACKn XRESET 5 INTRQ I RXD2B 23 z WEB 1C201 4 7 CASB USB DNO u USBDM2 10 USB DPO i MCLKOUT ee D_CONEECT USB D CONEECT T mee USB D DNO P1 TUPET pem 3 MBA 2451810 AAS USB D MIN cag 11134244 MD0 15 ABSANS WEYA 1 45 47 48 50 W5 W3 Y5 Y2 MD15 USB_D_VBUS 4 USBVFB 5 RASZ AC2 AB5 AA1 Y1 USB_D_VBUS _ 2 5 5 4 USB CLKI VSB GENI 15202 6 7 5V SW V 3D MAO 11 AE4 AD2 AD1 AC5 USB USB H PPONO PW AD4 AC1 AC3 err SB H OCIO D5 AG MD5 D1 SL MD1 DO MA TX 4 PB7 FE 5_ 6 n FCSBO
232. 61 The JPEG image files do not play gt The JPEG image files are not recorded a format that the recorder can play page 161 gt Progressive JPEG images cannot be played gt The remote s manufacturer code returned to the default setting when you replaced the batteries Reset the code page 24 gt The remote is not pointed at the remote sensor on the recorder Others The recorder does not detect a USB device connected to the recorder gt Make sure that the USB device is securely connected to the recorder page 126 gt Check if the USB device or a cable is damaged w Check if the USB device is on Display language on the screen switches automatically gt When HDMI Control is set to in the HDMI Output setup page 148 the display language on the screen automatically switches according to the language setting of the connected TV if you change the language settings on your TV etc The recorder does not operate properly gt Press down the recorder for more than five seconds until the recorder turns off Then press ID again to turn on the recorder gt When static electricity etc causes the recorder to operate abnormally turn off the recorder and wait until the clock appears in the front panel display Then unplug the recorder and after leaving it off for a while plug it in again The disctray does not open after you press o
233. 65 11 1 218 937 11 1 218 965 11 1 234 371 21 1 234 371 21 1 234 371 21 1 234 371 21 1 234 371 21 1 234 371 21 1 218 965 11 1 218 965 11 1 218 952 11 1 218 937 11 1 218 937 11 1 218 990 81 1 234 371 21 1 234 371 21 1 234 371 21 1 234 371 21 1 234 371 21 1 234 371 21 1 234 371 21 1 234 371 21 1 234 371 21 1 234 371 21 1 234 371 21 1 218 965 11 1 218 965 11 1 218 990 81 1 218 937 11 1 218 937 11 Description RES NETWORK SHORT CHIP SHORT CHIP RES NETWORK RES NETWORK RES NETWORK RES NETWORK RES NETWORK RES NETWORK RES NETWORK RES NETWORK RES NETWORK SHORT CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP SHORT CHIP SHORT CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES NETWORK RES NETWORK RES NETWORK RES NETWORK RES NETWORK RES NETWORK RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP SHORT CHIP RES NETWORK RES NETWORK RES NETWORK RES NETWORK RES NETWORK RES NETWORK RES NETWORK RES NETWORK RES NETWORK RES NETWORK RES NETWORK RES CHIP RES CHIP SHORT CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP 56 1005X4 0 0 47 1005X4 AEP2 47 1005X4 AEP2 47 1005 4 AEP2 47 1005X4 AEP2 47 1005X4 AEP2 47 1005X4 AEP2 47 1005X4 AEP2 47 1005X4 AEP2 47 1005X4 AEP2 0 AEP2 10K 5 47 5 100 5 100 5 0 0 10K 5 47 5 10K 5 47 1005 4 2 47 1005 4 AEP2 47 1005 4 AEP2 47 1005X4 47 1005
234. 655 91 1 126 947 11 1 126 923 91 1 126 947 11 1 164 156 11 1 164 156 11 1 164 156 11 1 164 156 11 1 164 156 11 1 162 927 11 1 100 831 91 1 164 315 11 1 100 831 91 Description CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP ELECT ELECT ELECT ELECT ELECT ELECT ELECT ELECT ELECT CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP ELECT ELECT ELECT ELECT ELECT CERAMIC CHIP SHORT CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP SHORT CHIP ELECT ELECT ELECT ELECT ELECT ELECT ELECT ELECT CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP 0 1uF 0 1uF 0 1uF 0 1uF 0 1uF 0 01 4 7uF 4 7uF 100uF 100uF 100uF 4 7uF 10uF 100uF 0 1uF 0 1uF 10uF 10uF 100uF 10uF 10uF 0 01uF 0 0 470uF 470uF 470uF 470uF 470uF 47uF 220uF 47uF 0 1uF 0 1uF 0 1uF 0 1uF 100PF 0 001uF 0 001uF 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20
235. 7 F318 F321 F397 F398 10101 10104 10106 10110 10201 10202 10203 10204 10208 16302 10304 10307 309 10311 10312 105313 10318 16320 1001 1304 1314 315 11001 11002 11003 1004 1005 1006 1007 1008 0201 0202 0203 0305 0306 0307 0308 0309 0310 0312 01001 01002 01003 01004 01005 1 543 949 22 1 543 949 22 1 543 949 22 1 543 949 22 1 543 949 22 1 543 949 22 1 543 949 22 1 543 949 22 1 543 949 22 6 705 306 01 6 711 077 01 6 711 206 01 6 706 484 01 6 711 207 01 6 710 050 01 6 711 290 01 6 711 290 01 6 707 361 01 6 702 362 01 6 711 026 01 6 711 027 01 6 711 146 01 6 708 075 01 6 711 026 01 6 711 223 01 8 759 693 13 6 708 708 01 6 711 285 01 1 412 938 61 1 469 110 21 1 400 703 21 1 412 951 11 1 412 951 11 1 412 951 11 1 412 951 11 1 412 954 11 1 412 954 11 1 412 954 11 1 412 954 11 8 729 029 06 8 729 028 86 8 729 905 35 8 729 120 28 8 729 026 53 8 729 905 35 8 729 905 35 8 729 029 09 8 729 029 09 8 729 029 06 8 729 026 53 8 729 026 53 8 729 026 53 8 729 026 53 8 729 905 35 Description Remarks Ref No BEAD FERRITE CHIP 1608 01006 1608 01007 1608 01008 1608 1608 1608 R100 BEAD FERRITE CHIP 1608 R101 BEAD FERRI
236. 7 11 1 216 817 11 1 216 817 11 1 216 817 11 1 216 817 11 1 216 817 11 1 216 817 11 1 216 860 11 1 216 860 11 1 216 833 11 1 216 845 11 1 216 864 11 1 216 857 11 1 216 857 11 1 216 857 11 1 216 857 11 1 216 857 11 1 216 809 11 1 216 809 11 1 216 295 91 1 216 860 11 1 208 755 11 1 208 755 11 1 208 755 11 1 216 295 91 1 218 869 11 1 218 871 11 1 216 805 11 1 216 817 11 1 208 755 11 1 216 819 11 1 218 871 11 1 218 869 11 1 216 817 11 1 208 754 11 1 216 306 11 1 208 755 11 1 216 295 91 1 208 754 11 1 216 306 11 1 208 754 11 1 216 306 11 1 208 754 11 1 216 306 11 1 208 754 11 1 216 817 11 Description METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP SHORT CHIP SHORT CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP SHORT CHIP SHORT CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP SHORT CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP SHORT CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP SHORT CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP RES CHIP METAL CHIP SHORT CHIP METAL CHIP RES CHIP METAL CHIP RES CHIP METAL CHIP RES CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP 4 7K 820 180K 22K 100K 22K 960 960 470 470 470 470 470 470 4
237. 70 470 1 8 1 8 100K 1M 1M 1M 1M 100 100 1 8M 75 75 75 8 2 10 470 75 680 10 8 2 470 3 9 5 5 5 5 5 0 5 0 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 Remarks 1 10W 1 10W 1 10W 1 10W 1 10W 1 10W 1 10W 1 10W 1 10W 1 10W 1 10W 1 10W 1 10W 1 10W 1 10W 1 10W 1 10W 1 10W 1 10W 1 10W 1 10W 1 10W 1 10W 1 10W 1 10W 1 10W 1 10W 1 10W 1 10W 1 10W 1 10W 1 10W 1 10W 1 10W 1 10W 1 10W 1 10W 1 10W 1 10W 1 10W 1 10W 1 10W 1 10W 1 10W 1 10W 1 10W 1 10W 1 10W 1 10W 1 10W 1 10W 1 10W Ref No R480 R482 R484 R485 R486 R487 R488 R490 R501 R502 R503 R504 R504 R505 R505 R506 R507 R508 R509 R510 R511 R512 R513 R514 R515 R516 R517 R518 R519 R520 R521 R522 R523 R524 R525 R526 R527 R528 R529 R530 R531 R532 R534 R535 R536 R537 R538 R539 R540 R541 R542 R543 R544 R545 R546 R547 R548 R549 R550 Part No 1 216 306 11 1 216 809 11 1 216 821 11 1 216 837 11 1 216 821 11 1 216 837 11 1 216 817 11 1 216 809 11 1 208 755 11 1 208 755 11 1 208 755 11 1 208 754 11 1 216 295 91 1 208 755 11 1 216 306 11 1 216 864 11 1 216 829 11 1 216 841 11 1 216 838 11 1 216 861 11 1 216 849 11 1 216 845 11 1 216 845 11 1 208 755 11 1 216 043 91 1 216 822 11 1 216 823 11 1 216 797 11 1 216 842 11 1 216 813 11 1 208 754 11 1 216 306 11 1
238. 9 00 1 218 990 81 1 218 963 11 1 218 990 81 1 218 990 81 1 216 295 91 1 216 295 91 1 216 295 91 1 216 295 91 1 218 969 11 1 218 990 81 1 218 990 81 1 216 864 11 1 216 864 11 1 218 941 81 1 234 372 11 1 234 372 11 1 218 941 81 1 218 990 81 1 218 990 81 1 218 990 81 1 218 965 11 1 234 378 21 1 234 378 21 1 218 965 11 Description RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES NETWORK RES NETWORK RES NETWORK RES NETWORK RES NETWORK RES NETWORK RES NETWORK RES CHIP RES NETWORK RES NETWORK RES NETWORK RES NETWORK RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES NETWORK SHORT CHIP SHORT CHIP RES CHIP SHORT CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP SHORT CHIP RES CHIP SHORT CHIP SHORT CHIP SHORT CHIP SHORT CHIP SHORT CHIP SHORT CHIP RES CHIP SHORT CHIP SHORT CHIP SHORT CHIP SHORT CHIP RES CHIP RES NETWORK RES NETWORK RES CHIP SHORT CHIP SHORT CHIP SHORT CHIP RES CHIP RES NETWORK RES NETWORK RES CHIP 22 5 82 5 82 5 22 5 82 5 22 5 82 5 82 1005 4 22K 1005X4 22K 1005X4 22K 1005X4 22K 1005X4 22K 1005X4 22K 1005X4 33 5 33 1005 4 33 1005 4 33 1005 4 33 1005 4 82 5 5 6 5 22 5 22 5 82 5 5 22 5 82 5 10K 5 33 5 33 1005 4 0 0 22K 5 0 2 7K 5 2 7K 5 2 7K 5 0 6 8K 5 0 0 0 0 0 0 22K 5 0
239. 9 to select the item to be set then press 44 to set the numbers The day of the week 15 set automatically To change the numbers press to return to the item to be changed and press 44 6 Press ENTER to start the clock Input Line System Selects the colour system when recording from the connected equipment NTSC Records in NTSC or PAL 60 colour system PAL Records in PAL or SECAM SECAM colour system Q Notes When picture noise appears after you change the Input Line System setting change the Input Colour System setting page 136 If picture noise still appears hold down stop on the recorder and press INPUT on the recorder When you change the Input Line System setting the Dubbing List is erased Power Save Selects whether this recorder is in power save mode when the power is turned off standby Mode 1 Only antenna input signals are output to the connected TV when the recorder is in standby Mode 2 No input signals are output when the recorder is in standby Off Does not set to power save mode Normally select this setting Q Note Power Save mode does not function in the following cases even when Power Save is set to Mode 1 or Mode 2 There is a timer setting with VPS PDC in the SCHEDULE list The SMARTLINK features are not available when Power Save is set to Mode 1 or Mode 2 Channel Options You can sk
240. 985 11 1 218 985 11 1 218 971 11 1 218 990 81 1 218 959 11 1 218 939 11 1 218 990 81 1 218 990 81 1 218 990 81 1 218 990 81 1 218 945 11 1 218 945 11 1 218 945 11 1 218 945 11 1 218 973 11 1 218 945 11 1 218 945 11 1 218 945 11 1 218 973 11 1 218 945 11 1 218 952 11 1 218 952 11 1 218 952 11 1 218 990 81 1 218 959 11 1 218 959 11 1 218 959 11 1 218 863 11 1 216 809 11 1 218 990 81 1 218 965 11 1 218 935 11 1 218 935 11 1 242 963 21 Description Remarks TRANSISTOR ISA1602AM1TP 1EF TRANSISTOR ISA1602AM1TP 1EF TRANSISTOR ISA1602AM1TP 1EF TRANSISTOR ISA1602AM1TP 1EF TRANSISTOR 25 4154 1 TRANSISTOR ISA1602AM1TP 1EF AUS TRANSISTOR 29C4154TP 1EF AUS TRANSISTOR ISA1602AM1TP 1EF AUS TRANSISTOR 2504154 1 AUS TRANSISTOR ISA1602AM1TP 1EF AUS TRANSISTOR 2504154 1 AUS TRANSISTOR 25 4154 1 TRANSISTOR 25 4154 1 TRANSISTOR UMXIN TN TRANSISTOR DTC124EUA T106 TRANSISTOR ISA1602AM1TP 1EF TRANSISTOR 25 2034 TRANSISTOR UMD2N TR RESISTOR RES CHIP 12K 5 1 16W SHORT CHIP 0 RES CHIP 47K 5 1 16W RES CHIP 6 8K 5 1 16W METAL CHIP 6 2K 0 5 1 16 RES CHIP 1K 5 1 16W RES CHIP 470K 5 1 16W RES CHIP 470K 5 1 16W RES CHIP 33K 5 1 16W SHORT CHIP 0 RES CHIP 3 3K 5 1 16W RES CHIP 68 5 1 16W SHORT CHIP 0 SHORT CHIP 0 SHORT CHIP 0 SHORT CHIP 0 RES CHIP 220 5 1 16W RES CHIP 220 5 1 16W RES CHIP 220 5 1 16W RES CHIP 220 5 1 16W RES CHIP 47K 5
241. 99 The total number of JPEG image files MP3 audio tracks under an album exceeds 999 The MP3 audio tracks are 1 GB or larger Note that the size of JPEG image files copied to the HDD may be automatically increased to fit the TV screen Youcannot copy JPEG image files onto a DATA DVD finalised on other recorders or devices f a warning message indicating that the HDD is full appears erase several albums or files to make space For details on erasing tracks or files see page 117 or 125 Guide to Parts and Controls For more information see the pages in parentheses Remote 4 4 0 0 1 HDD button 36 DVD button 36 2 1 00 on standby button 26 open close button 36 PROG programme buttons 36 The button has a tactile dot 5 Number buttons 42 89 The number 5 button has a tactile dot 6 INPUT input select button 61 79 AUDIO button 82 108 The AUDIO button has a tactile dot CLEAR button 42 84 109 110 9 ANGLE button 80 125 TV DVD button 24 11 SUBTITLE button 82 12 text button 51 13 MENU button 80 Colour buttons 48 65 15 SYSTEM MENU button 76 85 100 106 112 118 128 TITLE LIST button 38 80 92 TOP MENU button 80 GUIDE button 48 63 TIMER button 53 60 INFO information butt
242. AGRAM 56 CN201 13 080 HARNESS E SW 3 3V M HDD UNIT B only CN202 12 5 POWER LINE 2 OUT VIDEO OUT G LINK E BLOCK 059 a HARNESS s TUNER 00 ce REGULATOR z E CN2301 40P CN101 40P ETE ow s sp CN5604 7P FRA 006 cone FLAT CABLE C CN4501 13 CN203 4P ee m RD 065 BOARD Paw fa O E am PROE 114 i D HARNESS CN5201 10P LL EL m o wm p CN502 4P CN5101 6P CN4701 28P 5 4 FVR 001 CN601 FLEXIBLE FLAT CABLE JUEPIL JEE 55 2 2 2 2 8 5 5 8 8 CN103 24P CN302 24P CN501 12P 1 C104 28 FVA 002 ao RATOABLE E oo e F m ss m pos E BE PV 145 DT 120 BOARD Paw ae CN106 11P CN105 17P
243. AL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP SHORT CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP SHORT CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP SHORT CHIP SHORT CHIP SHORT CHIP SHORT CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP SHORT CHIP METAL CHIP SHORT CHIP SHORT CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP 100 100 100 47 100 330 100 100 1 330 330 100 100 330 4 7 6 8K 100K 1K 100K 100 470 6 8K 100 6 8K 100 100 10K 100 1K 100 100 100 100 100 100K 100K 100 100 180 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 Remarks 1 10W 1 10W 1 10W 1 10W 1 10W 1 10W 1 10W 1 10W 1 10W 1 10W 1 10W 1 10W 1 10W 1 10W 1 10W 1 10W 1 10W 1 10W 1 10W 1 10W 1 10W 1 10W 1 10W 1 10W 1 10W 1 10W 1 10W 1 10W 1 10W 1 10W 1 10W 1 10W 1 10W 1 10W 1 10W 1 10W 1 10W 1 10W 1 10W 1 10W 1 10W 1 10W Ref R169 R171 R172 R173 R174 R175 R176 R177 R178 R179 R180 R181 R182 R183 R184 R185 R186 R187 R188 R189 R193 R194 R195 R196 R197 R199 R200 R201 R202 R203 R204 R205 R207 R208 R209 R210 R214 R215 R216 R217 R218 R219 R220 R221 R222 R223 R224 R225 R228 R233 R251 R301 R302 R303 R304 R305 R306 R307 R308 R309 Pa
244. AV 114 03321 7 50 1 5 03322 5p 50V 1 03323 68p 50V CR_OUT gt gt SEE PAGE 4 6 3324 15p 50V gt gt 02505 03325 0 01u 50V 10u 10V lt PR ROU T ISA1602AM1TP 1EF VIDEO BUFFER C3329 5p 50V o dee 3330 68p 50V 5 I T 2504154 9917 R3306 03335 1u S0V Y EQ 50 DAM TO T C3339 1u 50V THERE TY em mm ELM C3341 1u 50V D AUDIO LPF 3303 3304 10uH vaza gt gt ISA1602AM1TP 1EF us 3305 13306 10uH 3307 13308 C R IN 03303 ISA1602AM1TP 1EF a 1P2327 _ TP2329 TP2331 03304 25 4154 28 P2330 035 03306 2SC4154TP 1 EF R3317 3101 TU iio 03307 ISA1602AM1TP 1EF C3334 63340 NT C 03308 25041 54 B L A OB R2316 TE TU DSCL 3 03319 CIEN mo 8 7 83307 1 8 0 5 5 6 0 5 nas R3310 83312 470 0 5 C3321 HSMTOT HSTTOM x ur R3314 XX 10 83317 330 3325 8337 lt lt 525 R3318 4 0 0 5 p lt R3319 BI 4 R3322 F 2 s 103707 Le 9 PB BOUT R3324 5 6k 0 5 PST3813UL COU Y GOUT f 9 o R3325 5 6k 0 5 AMU NC f GND OUT AW AMUTE ux m 63738 SMCKOUT 15701 is mm lt 2 mus P 4 R3715 03707 AOBCK 0 ZA AODO 2 7 R3337 10k XX SELECT AOL lt 2 7 S AT BCK
245. BOARD not supplied AEP UK FR 274 1640 HCA BOARD not supplied Remarks AUS Ref No 30000 series K K K K K K K K K K K K K K KK K K K K K K K K K K SPACER FL lt CAPACITOR gt ELECT CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP MYLAR CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP ELECT CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP 100uF 220PF 220PF 0 0027 0 1uF 22uF CONNECTOR CONNECTOR FPC FFC 5P HOUSING CONNECTOR 11P CONNECTOR FFC 17P DIODE DIODE DIODE DIODE DIODE DIODE DIODE DIODE DIODE DIODE DIODE DIODE DIODE DIODE ST26 8N T146 5 126 8 146 5 126 8 146 ST26 8N T146 ST26 8N T146 5 126 8 146 155355 17 155355 17 155355 17 155355 17 SDPB31H3C0100 SLI 343YC3F MM3Z6V2ST1 lt FERRITE BEAD gt INDUCTOR FERRITE BEAD INDUCTOR FERRITE BEAD IC PT6315 JACK TERMINAL BOARD S TERMINAL 3P COIL INDUCTOR FLUORESCENT INDICATOR TUBE 100000PF 0 1uF 0 01uF 0 01uF 100uH 2090 5 5 5 10 10 20 10 10 10 10 INDICATOR TUBE FLUORESCENT 25V 50V 50V 200V 16V 35V 50V 50V 50V 16V 16V 50V 8 16 Ref No Q201 Q202 Q203 Q204 Q205 Q206 R201 R205 R206 R207 R209 R213 R215 R217 R218 R220 R222 R223 R225 R227 R228 R229 R230 R231 R232 R233 R235 R236 R237 R238 R239 R240 R24
246. CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP ELECT CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP ELECT CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP ELECT CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP 0 1uF 0 1uF 0 001uF 220uF 0 1uF 0 1uF 0 1uF 0 1uF 0 1uF 0 1uF 0 1uF 0 1uF 0 1uF 0 1uF 0 1uF 0 1uF 0 1uF 0 1uF 10uF 0 001uF 0 1uF 0 001uF 0 001uF 220uF 0 1uF 220uF 1090 2090 2090 1090 1090 1090 2090 2090 0 5PF 0 5PF Remarks Ref No 16V 01098 16 01099 6 3 C1100 50V C1101 4V C1103 16V C1104 16V C1105 16V C1106 16V C1107 16V C1108 16V C1109 16
247. D Refer to Note Has the Final check ended with success 4 5 When playing a VIDEO MP3 or JPG the contents freeze When playing a VIDEO MP3 or JPG the contents freeze Any error is not displayed on the FLD Is the HDD free from NO abnormal noises YES Display the ATA ATAPI history by using HDD Access Flow on page 6 10 NO Does the history show no errors YES Final check Note Performing Final Check will not erase the HDD data Has the Final check ended with success Replace the HDD Refer to Note 4 6 Factory Check 1 Pullout and then reconnect the AC cable 2 Press ESC key followed by P RUN key to start Formatting 3 When B COMPLETE appears the Factory Check is complete 4 Press Power button The unit starts normally When Factory Check has finished completely without error reset Recording Error History and History Error with the Clear key Recording Error History Display 07 03 19 12 36 06 07 03 19 12 36 06 07 03 19 12 36 06 07 03 19 12 36 06 07 03 19 12 27 27 4 7 Final Check ESFSYS INIT HDD Zero MR HDD Initialze HDD Zero MR Status NG 4 7 1 SELF TEST SMART TEST This is a simplified diagnosis for the HDD A serious failure in the HDD can be detected with this test Time required for testing Approx 60 sec How to start terminate the diagnostic program Use the r
248. DMI jack Follow the steps below Improper handling may damage the HDMI jack and the connector 1 Carefully align the HDMI jack on the rear of the recorder and the HDMI connector by checking their shapes Make sure the connector is not upside down or tilted P Connector is upside down Not straight mro DIGITAL AERIAL DVD recorder TV 2 Insert the HDMI connector straight into the HDMI jack Do not bend or apply pressure to the HDMI connector Q Notes Be sure to disconnect the HDMI cord when moving the recorder Do not apply too much pressure to the cabinet wall if you place the recorder on the cabinet with the HDMI cord connected It may damage the HDMI jack or the HDMI cord Do not twist the HDMI connector while connecting to or disconnecting from the HDMI jack to avoid damaging the HDMI jack and connector When playing wide screen images Some recorded images may not fit your TV screen To change the picture size see page 144 If you are connecting to a VCR Connect your VCR to the LINE 1 DECODER jack on the recorder page 31 Q Notes Do not connect more than one type of video cord between the recorder and your TV at the same time Do not make connections at the same time When you connect the recorder to your TV via SCART jacks the TV s input source is set to the recorder automatically when you start playback If necessary pr
249. Digital Text Service Many digital TV channels broadcast information via their text service This digital service includes high quality digital text and graphics along with advanced navigation options Additionally this recorder has access to dedicated text channels transmitted by the broadcasters Note The appearance content and navigation methods of all digital text services are decided by the broadcaster Number PROG buttons Olt t4 ENTER RETURN Selecting digital text from dedicated digital teletext channels 1 selecta dedicated channel that broadcasting digital text You can search for a dedicated digital text channel using the Electronic Programme Guide page 48 The text page is displayed Approx recording time hours Recording HDD mode RDR RDR RDR RDR HXD HXD HXD HXD 770 870 970 1070 HQ High 25 34 53 105 1hr quality 1 min HSP 137 50 79 155 30 min SP 51 68 105 210 2 Standard mode LSP 63 84 130 265 2hr 30 min ESP 75 100 155 315 3 LP 100 135 210 420 4 EP 150 200 315 635 6 SLP 200 270 425 850 8 SEP 255 340 530 1060 10 Long duration The approximate recording time is for 12 cm DVD discs The approximate recording times for DVD R DL Double Layer DVD R DL Dual Layer discs are as follows HQ 1 hour 51 minutes 2 hours 41 minutes
250. EE MARK Unleaded solder has the following characteristics Unleaded solder melts at a temperature about 40 C higher than ordinary solder Ordinary soldering irons can be used but the iron tip has to be applied to the solder joint for a slightly longer time Soldering irons using a temperature regulator should be set to about 350 Caution The printed pattern copper foil may peel away if the heated tip is applied for too long so be careful Strong viscosity Unleaded solder is more viscous sticky less prone to flow than ordinary solder so use caution not to let solder bridges occur such as on IC pins etc Usable with ordinary solder It is best to use only unleaded solder but unleaded solder may also be added to ordinary solder Special Component Notice The components identified by mark contain confidential information Strictly follow the instructions whenever the components are repaired and or replaced SAFETY CHECK OUT After correcting the original service problem perform the following safety checks before releasing the set to the customer Check the area of your repair for unsoldered or poorly soldered connections Check the entire board surface for solder splashes and bridges 2 Check the interboard wiring to ensure that no wires are pinched or contact high wattage resistors 3 Look for unauthorized replacement parts particularly transistors that were installed during a previous repair Point
251. ENC DEC 101001 MC10050F1 105 LU1 A 165801 Note1 The HDMI block is highly confidential and prohibited from releasing to public Note2 The components identified by mark contain confidential information Strictly follow the instructions whenever the components are repaired and or replaced 105801 E pes B LE ps 15203 AND GATE LO AIBCK1 Not open to public Don CTL1 AIBD1 2 Not open to public 1000 5 B 65 65213 iih gt uenis tal IM mum co EA USB D2NI 5 open to public USBDM2 0 BE a mE s e m z BOARD cf D6 VI open to public A A V45USB CN102 USB D VBUS 5205 C 3 gt Not open to public USBVF THROUGH THE RU 001 HARNESS _IN GP1052 Not open to public m n GND USB_D_DNO 5 o 5802 5208 af USB DNO 5207 USB DNO u l Not open to public AW Q USBDP1 USB CLKI DA TP5803 R5205 USB CLKI GPIO55 open
252. ERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP 1000uF 0 1uF 0 001uF 330PF 0 1uF 47uF 100uF 560 560 82PF 82PF 0 1uF 100uF 220uF 1uF TPF TPF 15 68PF 82PF 15PF 22PF 10uF 7PF 7PF 10uF 0 01uF 68PF 15PF 10uF 0 01uF 68PF 15PF 2090 1090 1090 2090 2090 5 5 5 5 20 20 0 5PF 5 5 5 5 5 20 0 5PF 0 5PF 2090 1090 0 5PF 0 5PF 5 5 20 10 0 5PF 0 5PF 5 5 Remarks Ref 6 3 03325 16V 03325 50V 50V 03329 16V 6 3V C3330 16V 03331 16 50V 50V 03332 50V 03333 50V C3334 16V 16V 03335 4V 6 3 03339 50V 50V C3340 50V AUS 03341 50V AEP UK 03342 50V 3701 AUS C3703 50V C3704 AEP UK C3705 50V C3706 AUS C3707 50V 03738 10V 03801 50V 03802 AUS 03803 03804 50V 04501 AUS 10V C4502 AUS C4503 50 04504 AEP UK 04505 50V 04506 AUS 50V 04507 AUS 04508 04509 50V 64511 AUS C4513 50V AUS 04515 50V 04516 AUS 64522 10V C4524 AUS C4525 50V AEP UK C4526 C4531 50V C4532 AUS C4533 50V C4534 AUS 50V C4535 AUS C4536 50 C4537 AUS C4539 50V 04540 AUS 64541 64542 8 19 Part No 1 100 966 91 1 163 021 91 1 164 845 11 1 164 870 11 1 164 854 11 1 114 130 11 1 114 130 11 1 114 130 11 1 114
253. F 0 01uF 1uF 10uF 0 001uF 0 001uF 0 1uF 0 1uF 100uF 220uF 220uF 4 7uF 4 7uF 47uF 10uF 4 7uF 4 7uF 15K 0 01uF 10uF 0 001uF 0 001uF 0 001uF 0 001uF 0 001uF 2 2UF 2090 1090 5 5 10 20 10 10 20 Remarks 10V AUS 50V AEP UK 50V AUS 50V AUS 50V AUS 6 3V 6 3V AUS 6 3V AUS 6 3V AUS 6 3V AUS 6 3V AUS 6 3V AUS 6 3V 16V 6 3V 10V 90V 50V 6 3V 6 3V 6 3V 6 3V 6 3V 6 3V 20 4V 20 4 10 10 20 20 10 10 5 10 20 10 10 10 10 10 10 1 16W 6 3V 16V 6 3V 10V 50V 50V 50V 50V 50V 6 3V 10V Ref No C4543 C4553 C4555 C4556 04557 04558 04559 04562 C4563 C4567 C4570 C4571 C4572 C4573 C4585 C4586 C4701 C4702 C4703 C4704 C4705 C4706 C5104 C5105 C5106 C5107 C5108 C5109 C5110 C5111 C5112 C5113 C5114 C5115 C5116 C5117 C5118 C5119 C5120 C5121 C5122 C5123 C5132 C5133 C5205 C5209 C5210 C5211 C5212 C5213 C5216 C5217 C5218 C5219 C5222 C5223 C5601 C5602 C5603 C5604 C5605 Part No 1 164 937 11 1 162 964 11 1 127 760 11 1 127 760 11 1 164 943 81 1 117 681 11 1 117 681 11 1 114 130 11 1 114 130 11 1 114 130 11 1 114 130 11 1 127 760 11 1 126 210 21 1 127 760 11 1 107 820 11 1 117 681 11
254. G function is a feature that simplifies setting the timer Just select the programme you want to record in the EPG display The date time and channel of that programme are set automatically Red button GUIDE t4 PAGE G PAGE REC STOP 1 Press GUIDE Guide Digital Thu 10 Aug 10 08 D001 DDE NEWS 15 DDE News News 7 10 00 11 30 Thu t0 Aug 10 00 10 30 11 00 DDE NEWS 15 DDE News DDE News Live from Prague INCE News Opening Foreign Markets Morning Hobbies and Interests News 7 Weather Family Drive in City Houses Tennis No information available Timer Jump Search 2 Select a programme using 4 4 gt know more about navigation options in the EPG application see page 48 Ajuo 51950 w81 8314 104 L gt continued 55 Series Recording Automatically record programmes in a series 1 Press GUIDE Guide Digital Thu 10 Aug 10 08 0001 DDE NEWS 15 DDE News News Thuto Aug 10 30 7 10 00 11 30 Hobbies and Interests JEFF News
255. H Setting Download from Analog Tuner Channel Swapping Video In Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording Auto Channel Setting Auto Scan If you connect a TV to this recorder not using SMARTLINK you can preset programme positions automatically using Auto Scan 1 Select Auto Channel Setting in Analog Tuner and press ENTER 2 Select Auto Scan and press ENTER 3 Select your country region using gt and press ENTER The programme position order will be set according to the country region you set If any programme positions are unused or contain unwanted channels you can disable them page 134 Add New Channels Scans digital channels and adds found channels to the channel list 1 Select Add New Channels in Digital Tuner and press ENTER 2 Select Next Screen and press ENTER The recorder scans channels and stores them To cancel the scan press SYSTEM MENU or EXIT Channel Sort After the programme positions have been set you can change the order of each programme position in the displayed list 1 Select Channel Sort Digital Tuner and press ENTER 2 Select Next Screen and press ENTER Sis Channel Sort CMY 0001 DDE News Digital Teletext 0002 HGF 0003 5 9 0004 Channel J 0005 CDE CCD 0006 FGH 3 Press 4 4 to s
256. HCOOFT TC7MB3257FK EL JACK JACK PIN 1P CONNECTOR HDMI COIL INDUCTOR INDUCTOR INDUCTOR INDUCTOR INDUCTOR INDUCTOR INDUCTOR INDUCTOR INDUCTOR INDUCTOR INDUCTOR INDUCTOR INDUCTOR 10uH 15uH 39uH 15uH 18uH 10uH 18uH AUS 10uH AUS 18uH AUS 10uH AUS 18uH AUS 10uH AUS 10uH INDUCTOR FERRITE BEAD COIL COMMON MODE CHOKE COIL COMMON MODE CHOKE INDUCTOR FERRITE BEAD 1608 COMMOM MODE CHOKE COIL COMMOM MODE CHOKE COIL COMMOM MODE CHOKE COIL COMMOM MODE CHOKE COIL TRANSISTOR TRANSISTOR TRANSISTOR TRANSISTOR TRANSISTOR ISA1602AM1TP 1EF ISA1602AM1TP 1EF ISA1602AM1TP 1EF ISA1602AM1TP 1EF Remarks 8 21 Ref No Q2503 Q2504 Q2505 Q3301 Q3302 Q3303 Q3304 03305 03306 03307 03308 04581 05701 05801 05804 05805 05808 05809 R104 R105 R107 R108 R109 R110 R111 R112 R114 R115 R116 R117 R119 R124 R128 R129 R130 R131 R132 R133 R134 R135 R136 R137 R138 R139 R165 R166 R167 R168 R170 R171 R172 R174 R192 R193 R201 R202 R203 R204 Part No 6 551 699 01 6 551 699 01 6 551 699 01 6 551 699 01 8 729 620 13 6 551 699 01 8 729 620 13 6 551 699 01 8 729 620 13 6 551 699 01 8 729 620 13 8 729 620 13 8 729 620 13 6 550 376 01 8 729 029 06 6 551 699 01 8 729 031 34 6 550 375 01 1 218 966 11 1 218 990 81 1 218 973 11 1 218 963 11 1 208 702 11 1 218 953 11 1 218
257. HDD Promotional Panel HDD Remain DVD Remain 1h 9m SP 63h 52m SP continued 77 3 Select the timer setting you want to change using and press the green button Edit Pr2 25 10 10 Please enter the recording date and press the green button to confirm A 25 Search Schedule a Grid Record Schedule Qual Freq Dest SP Once HDD 25 May Travel SP HDD Promotional Panel HDD Remain 63h 52m SP DVD Remain 1h 9m SP in the left column select an item using the red button Back or the green button Next and adjust using the number buttons or 4 4 4 You can change date start time stop time programme position or input source The cursor moves to the right column Press the corresponding colour button repeatedly to change settings Yellow button Destination Sets the recording destination If there is not enough available DVD disc space for the recording the recorder automatically records the programme to the HDD even if you select DVD Recovery Recording When you set a daily or weekly timer HDDr allows you to replace the previous timer recording with the new one automatically HDD only e Green button Frequency Selects the
258. HDD model dit T FFFF is diplayed when the writer is not adjusted If the results of degradation of LDs for CDs and DVDs are both NG replace drive 5 Press ESC Returns to the original screen 6 12 6 2 11 History of VR Recording related Errors 1 Turn of the main power ON 2 screen after exiting all menu screens press ESC on the service remote controller 3 Press DISP 4 Press 4 Used for broadly dividing the poorly reproducible trouble RunFnc Ecl STDBY Rate 21 VID 1000 h phenomena enVobu Ren Sec ChgAtr Workst EngTyp Prot F TmSto Output Wait Press DIG ANA three times to browse the error log LastRecMsg PARAMCHG LyrOren LyrBndlISN SglLayer Drv Err ErrAdr Pause DscSt1 DscSt3 LastLSN WrtSpd BrdNum RzNun Format tySys HMDn LstErr 5 Press 5 Returns to the original screen Error Message Check Method Turnofthe main power ON 2 screen after exiting all menu screens press ESC on the service remote controller 3 Press DISP 4 Press 4 5 Press DIG ANA Select the desired screen RunFnc Ecl STDBY Rate 21 VID 1000 from the error message information Recording related errors are displayed v Press DIG ANA three times on the above screen to select the desired screen R
259. HIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP ELECT CHIP CERAMIC CHIP ELECT CHIP 0 1uF 22PF 0 1uF 47uF 10uF 47uF 0 001uF 100PF 2 2uF 0 01uF 10uF 0 1uF 47uF 47uF 0 1uF 47uF 47uF 0 01uF 2 2uF 2 2uF 0 1uF 47uF 0 22uF 10PF 0 1uF 0 1uF 0 22uF 2 2uF 0 1uF 0 1uF 0 1uF 0 1uF 0 1uF 0 1uF 0 1uF 0 1uF 0 1uF 2 2uF 4 74 0 1uF 0 1uF 0 1uF 220uF 0 1uF 220uF 5 20 20 20 10 5 10 10 20 20 20 10 20 10 20 10 10 10 20 10 0 5PF 10 5 0 5PF 10 10 10 10 10 0 5PF 0 5PF 0 5PF 20 20 Remarks Ref No 25V C598 25 0599 50V C600 25V C601 16V C602 50V C603 16V C614 50V 6615 50V C616 25 C618 10V C620 25 C621 16V C623 25 0626 25 0628 16 0629 16 0630 25 C633 16V C634 16V C636 10V C637 16V C638 25 0639 10V 0640 10V C1001 25V C1002 16V C1003 16V C1004 50V 01005 25 C1006 25V 1007 16 1008 50V 01009 50V 01010 10V C1011 25V C1012 25V C1013 16V 1014 25 01015 16 C1016 25V C1017 25V C1018 25V C1019 25V
260. HORT CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES NETWORK RES NETWORK RES NETWORK RES NETWORK METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP SHORT CHIP SHORT CHIP SHORT CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP SHORT CHIP RES CHIP CONDUCTOR NETWORK CONDUCTOR NETWORK SHORT CHIP RES CHIP RES NETWORK RES NETWORK RES CHIP CONDUCTOR NETWORK CONDUCTOR NETWORK SHORT CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES NETWORK RES NETWORK RES CHIP RES CHIP 10K 0 10K 10K 10K 82 47 100 150 220 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 10K 1005X4 10K 1005X4 10K 1005X4 10K 1005X4 43 100 43 100 47 47 47 47 10 0 0 0 100 47 4 7K 4 7K 4 7K 4 7K 10K 10K 4 7K 4 7K 10K 10K 0 22 0 33 0 5 0 5 0 5 0 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 1005 4 1005X4 5 22 1005 4 22 1005 4 22 0 33 33 5 1005 4 1005 4 5 5 22 1005 4 22 1005 4 22 22 5 5 Remarks 1 16W 1 16W 1 16W 1 16W 1 16W 1 6W AUS 1 16W AEP UK 1 16W AUS 1 16W AEP UK 1 10W 1 10W 1 10W 1 10W 1 16W 1 16W 1 16W 1 16W 1 16W 1 16W 1 16W 1 16W 1 16W 1 16W 1 16W
261. IC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP 47PF 0 1uF 47PF 47PF 47PF 22PF 22PF 10uF 4 7uF 10uF 0 01uF 0 01uF 0 001uF 4 7uF 0 1uF 0 1uF 10uF 0 1uF 0 001uF 0 1uF 0 001uF 0 1uF 0 1uF 0 1uF 0 001uF 33PF 68PF 0 1uF 0 1uF 0 1uF 0 1uF 0 1uF 0 1uF 100uF 0 001uF 220uF 220uF 0 001uF 100uF 0 001uF 0 1uF 0 1uF 5 10 5 5 5 5 5 20 10 20 10 10 10 10 10 10 20 10 10 10 10 10 10 5 5 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 20 10 20 20 10 20 10 10 10 Remarks 50V 10V 50V 50V 50V 50V 50V 10V 6 3V 10V 16V 16V 50V 6 3V 10V 6 3V 10V 6 3V 6 3V 6 3V 6 3V 6 3V 6 3V 6 3V 10V 6 3V 16V 50V 16V 50V 16V 50V 10V 25V 50V 50V 50V 16V 16V 16V 25V 25V 10V 10V 10V 10V 4V 6 3V 50V 6 3V 4V 6 3V 4V 6 3V 50V 4V 6 3V 50V 10V 10V Ref No C1017 C1018 C1019 C1020 C1021 C1022 C1023 C1024 C1025 C1026 C1027 C1028 C1029 C1030 C1031 C1032 C1033 C1034 C1035 C1036 C1037 C1038 C1039 C1040 C1041 C1044 C1044 C1045 C1045 C1047 C1048 C1049 C1050 C1051 C1052 C1053 C1056 C1057 C1058 C1059 C1060 C1061 C1062 C1063 C1064 C1065 C1066 C1067 C1068 C1101 C1104 C1105 C1113 C1202 C1203 C1204
262. IC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP ELECT CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP ELECT CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP ELECT CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP ELECT CHIP 0 001uF 1uF 0 001uF 0 001uF 0 1uF 0 1uF 0 1uF 0 1uF 100uF 0 1uF 0 01uF 0 01uF 0 001uF 0 001uF 0 001uF 10uF 10uF 100uF 2 2uF 0 1uF 47uF 0 1uF 0 1uF 2 2uF 10uF 0 01uF 2 2 220PF 330PF 0 047 2 2uF 100PF 150PF 0 047 10uF 100uF 0 001uF 220uF 1090 1090 1090 2090 1090 1090 1090 1090 1090 2090 2090 2090 1090 2090 1090 2090 1090 2090 2090 1090 2090 Remarks 50V 6 3V 50V 50V 16V 16V 16V 16V 4V 6 3V 6 3V 6 3V 6 3V 6 3V 6 3V 16V 6 3V 16V 16V 50V 6 3V 50V 50V 16V 10V 10V 4V 16V 10V 16V 16V 6 3V 16V 16V 10V 10V 16V 6 3V 6 3V 10V 16V 50V 10V 6 3V 10V 50V 50V 10V 6 3V 6 3V 6 3
263. IDE CN102 9 16320 CN103 F5 1631 201 62 161001 202 4 203 10 01001 01002 E IC104 B 8 01003 E Ic106 8 01004 10205 01005 300 B 5 01006 302 5 01007 1 313 B 10 01008 1 319 6 EMMA2LL CONTROL DIGITAL TUNER POWER VIDEO DECODER 4 52 DT 120 DT 120 BOARD SIDE B D302 D303 D304 10101 10110 10201 10202 10203 10204 16208 10304 10306 1307 10309 10311 F 1 E 1 D 2 c mu 1312 1318 16322 101002 Q201 Q202 Q203 Q305 Q306 Q307 Q308 Q309 Q310 Q312 DT 120 BOARD SIDE B RF BW CO Uses unleaded solder 4 53 Een 1286 ob 822 8228 8226 07 RDR HXD870 HXD970 HXD1070 B EMMA2LL CI CONTROL DIGITAL TUNER POWER VIDEO DECODER DT 120 RDR HXD870 HXD970 HXD1070 RD 065 BOARD SIDE A RD 065 BOARD SIDE A CN201 5 CN1401 E 5 CN1402 F 1 CN2301 E 1 CN3802 C 1 CN4501 D 5 CN4701 D 5 CN5601 D101 D3201 D3711 D3712 04521 04552 11001 101221 11302 103201 103202 13701 103707 14501 104502 14511 164521 104552 104562 105202 15203 105204 105602 165801 105802 Q1811 Q2501 Q2502 Q2503 Q2504 Q2505 Q3301 Q3302 Q5805 Q5809 Q5810 an mS
264. IDE Plus host channel manually If the set top box receiver is connected to the recorder using a SCART cord only and you want to receive the programme guide data from your set top box receiver search for the host channel on the following website and set it for your area following the steps below www europe guideplus com 1 Select Setup in the Menu Bar The GUIDE Plus setup menu appears 2 Select Host Channel Setup using 4 4 and press ENTER 3 Press the yellow button Change twice Manual appears Press the green button to save your entries Press the yellow button to switch between automatic and manual Press gt to edit Source and Programme Number Host Channel Setup Source Prog No Manual Tuner Promotional In order to receive TV listing data you must enter the Panel correct Source and Programme Number of a GUIDE Plus Host Channel It may take up to 24 hours to receive complete TV listings data Select Source using gt Press the yellow button Source repeatedly to select the input source Select Prog No using gt Enter the programme position number using the number buttons Press green button Save The display asks for confirmation Listing Up Your Favourite Programme Information My TV You can set a profile and list up only your favourite programme information pde but
265. ION COMMEND 24 NO TN TYPE NO 494 500NR HEPE NO FCC16 9044 D O 62552205 59 01006600060 o Qj e Sor e 9999 C 5895 omi B 9201 4 o e WHO 1 317 Oo m m P302 C317 TO R303 2010328 0 9 R5 160 C 54 40 49525 5009 8503 T C502 R502 el 2 83 8565 1 020 000 gt 5 Hf KH gt C203 B a 8512 5098511 0527 515 n 1 FAN e e 22 GND Ors evra OS CONT2 10 DT TUON7 Q L P CONT 17 6ND 19 6ND 2 ANT 9 6ND 6 8 IN D 20 EV5 8V 14 V432V 11 5 SW 8 Y_IN 5 080 IT CONTROLLER IR POWER FAN CONT VIDEO AUDIO EURO TUNER 4 48 AV 114 RDR HXD870 HXD970 HXD1070 AV 114 BOARD SIDE B La Uses unleaded solder AV 114 BOARD SIDE B C6390
266. IP RES CHIP METAL CHIP SHORT CHIP SHORT CHIP SHORT CHIP RES NETWORK SHORT CHIP SHORT CHIP SHORT CHIP SHORT CHIP SHORT CHIP SHORT CHIP SHORT CHIP SHORT CHIP SHORT CHIP SHORT CHIP SHORT CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP SHORT CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP SHORT CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP METAL CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP SHORT CHIP SHORT CHIP SHORT CHIP SHORT CHIP 150 680 150 680 150 680 150 680 150 oO OO O amp O 100K 1 2K 10K 680 6 8K 22K 1 2K 10K 100 0 5 5 0 5 5 0 5 5 0 5 5 0 5 1005 4 Remarks 1 10W 1 16W 1 10W 1 16W 1 10W 1 16W 1 10W 1 16W 1 10W 1 16W 1 16W 1 16W 1 16W 1 16W 1 16W 1 16W 1 16W 1 16W 1 16W 1 16W 1 16W 1 16W 1 10W 1 10W 1 16W 1 16W 1 16W 1 10W 1 10W 1 10W 1 16W 1 16W 1 16W 1 16W 1 10W 1 16W 1 16W 1 16W 1 16W Ref R3301 R3302 R3302 R3305 R3306 R3307 R3307 R3308 R3309 R3310 R3312 R3313 R3314 R3315 R3317 R3318 R3319 R3320 R3322 R3323 R3324 R3325 R3326 R3327 R3336 R3336 R3337 R3341 R3341 R3342 R3344 R3703 R3704 R3705 R3708 R3715 R3716 R3720 R3738 R3808 R3810 R3811 R3812 R3813 Part No
267. MENU while the recorder is in stop mode 2 Select Initial Setup and press ENTER 3 Select Video In Out and press ENTER The Video In Out setup appears with the following options The default settings are underlined es Initial Setup Component Video Out LINE 3 Out LINE 1 In NTSC on PAL TV Basic Digital Tuner Analog Tuner Video In Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording v Input Colour System Selects the colour system when picture noise appears after you change the Input Line System setting page 130 Recorder automatically detects signals of colour systems and selects the appropriate colour system Selects the PAL colour system when Input Line System is set to SECAM Selects the SECAM colour system when Input Line System is set to PAL SECAM Sound System Select an available TV system page 135 B G Select this when in West European countries except those listed in Receivable channels on page 135 D K Select this when in East European countries Select this when in Great Britain Ireland L Select this when in France Name Changes or enters a new station name up to 5 characters The recorder must receive programme position information e g SMARTLINK information for station names to appear automatically Press then press repeatedly to select a character To change the characters
268. MIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CONNECTOR 0 01uF 0 01uF 0 01uF 0 01uF 0 01uF 0 01uF 0 1uF 100uF 0 01uF 0 1uF 0 01uF 0 01uF 0 01uF 0 01uF 0 01uF 0 01uF 0 01uF 0 01uF 0 01uF 0 01uF 0 01uF 0 01uF 15PF 15PF 0 001uF 0 001uF 220uF 0 001uF 0 001uF 220uF 0 1uF 0 1uF 0 1uF 0 1uF 0 1uF 0 1uF 0 001uF 1uF 0 001uF 0 001uF CONNECTOR FPC 10P CONNECTOR FPC 12P CONNECTOR FFC LIF NON ZIF 5P PIN CONNECTOR SMALL TYPE 13P CONNECTOR FFC FPC 28P 1090 1090 1090 1090 1090 1090 1090 2090 1090 1090 1090 1090 1090 1090 1090 1090 1090 1090 1090 1090 1090 1090 1090 5 5 20 10 10 20 10 10 20 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 PIN CONNECTOR 1 5 6P 1 5 10 Remarks 16V 16V 16V 16V 16V 16V 10V 4 16 10V 10V 16V 16V 16V 16V 16V 16V 16V 16V 16V 16V 16V 16V 50V 50V 6 3V 50V 50V 50V 6 3V 4V 6 3V 50V 6 3V 50V 6 3V 6 3V 6 3V 6 3V 4V 16V 16V 16V 25V 25V 25V 25V 50V 6 3V 50V 50V Ref 0101 03201 03711 03712 04521 04552 04571 1201 1221 1301 1302 3101 103202 103701 103702 103707 164541 164702 105103 15202 105203 105602 15701 105802 JA5701 JA580
269. N Press the following buttons on the service remote controller in this order ESC gt CHAP gt 1 Confirm that the above operation is performed in the state that the screen has exited all settings such as Home Menu or Simple Setting Turn the main POWER OFF Turn the main POWER ON The screen as shown in Fig 1 appears Select 2 on the screen by using the service remote controller f 15 selected on the screen the machine will not work at all Be sure to select 2 Find out the tentative model name from the Correspondence Table Table 1 for the client machine Then enter the 4 digit Input No on the screen using the service remote controller The model name setting method is complete Screen disappears Upon completion of the model name setting be sure to press both ENTER and 3 simultaneously on the service remote controller without fail It sets the remote control code 3 Fig 1 S company P company selection Recorder s Model Setting Input the number using the remote for Service gt Input Manufacturer Table1 Correspondence table between tentative model name and final product Tentative model name Model name 2 Australian RDR HXD870 1660 MRX 1665 EC2 MRX 1660 EC3 MRX 1660 CEK MRX 1660 AU2 RDR HXD970 MRX 1670 EC1 MRX 1675 EC2 MRX 1670 EC3 MRX 1670 CEK MRX 1670 AU2 RDR H
270. Nt ATIDATA R4 R2 ATIDATAA ATIDATAS R3 ATIDATAG P4 ATIDATA7 Cim gt 1 ATIDATAB 2 ATIDATAO SX 22 DATA10 gt gt 11 e gt DATA13 M U3 ATIADR1 We ATIADR2 5 ATIDIOR ATIINTRQ ATIDMACK ATIDMARQ AT1CSO AT1CS1 ATIIORDY ATIRESET IC1001 3 5 AV ENC DEC 11001 MC10050F1 105 LU1 A ATODOOHI 0001 2 ATODO3 HI ATODO4 HI ATODOS HI ATODOG HI ATODO7 HI ATODOS HI ATODOG HI ATOD10 HDI ATOD11 HDI ATOD12 HDI ATOD13 HDI ATOD14 HDI ATOD15 HDI ATODAO HDAO ATODAT HDAT ATIDA2 ATODA2 HDA2 DIOWB ATODIOWBDIOW DIORB ATODIORB DIORB ATOINTRQ HINTRQ ATOCSOB HCSOB ATOCS1B HCS1B ATOIORDY ORDY ATORESETB HRSTB V14 ATODATAO Uti 12 ATODATA2 W15 Vti ATODATA4 T12 ATODATAS P13 ATODATAG Kaa gt gt ATODATA7 R13 v10 KS ATODATAQ P15 U13 14 ATODATA12 U15 ATODATA13 W13 ATODATA14 114 15 w14 ATOADRO U10 ATOADR1 U14 ATOADR2 ATODIOW ATODIOR ATOINTRQ ATODMARQ ATOCSO ATOCS1 ATOIORDY ATORESET SIGNAL PATH
271. OW ADCCLKO DACCLKO AILRCKO AIBCKO AIBDO AOLRCK 4000 SPDIFO SMDIN SMDOUT SMCKOUT 232RST a 4 31313 3 7 4 7 6 7 TO DT 120 BOARD CN104 THROUGHTHE FVR 001 FFC SEE PAGE 4 16 2 3 7 RDR HXD870 HXD970 HXD1070 For Schematic Diagram Refer to page 4 55 for printed wiring board RD 065 BOARD 3 7 LEN Q2501 VIDEO AUDIO BLOCK ISATG02AMTTP IEF REF NO 20 000 SERIES AUDIO DAC R2304 CN2301 40 0 C OUT 02502 MARKED MOUNTED TEBLE 5 1602 AEP UK AUS VIDEO BUFFER 03303 15p 50V 5p 50V C3304 82p 50V 68p 50V C3305 22p 50V 15p 50V pu tm gt es mw R3310 C3312 7p 50V 02503 03313 0 01u 50V 10u 10V 5 1602 E VIDEO BUFFER m mm 0818 m IPM R3302 C3316 5p 50V 2308 C3317 68p 50V R3336 C3318 15p 50V PB BOU T iste mes 63319 0 01u 50V 10u 10V AW GNDA dase TO
272. P 13 00 Fri20 04 Pr4 SLP By Date Oh30m 0 46 Genres NEW 21 00 TUE 10 04 Pr9SLP 77 21 00 10 04 Pr9 SLP Oh30m 0 46 3 amp lt 9 00 MON 02 04 SLP 29 Mystery 1h00m 0 8G 20 00 FRI 30 03 Pr5 SLP 4 World Sports 1h00m 0 86 8 Title List 1 Title List HDD 10 Titles 2 B Titles FRI 20 04 13 00 Fri20 04 Pr 4 SLP Pr 4 9 NEW TUE 10 04 21 00 Tue10 04 Pr 9 51 Pr9 8 MON 02 04 Mystery Pr3 30 03 World Sports Pr5 WED 28 03 Family Pr4 SUN 25 03 Nature Pr1 3 By Date Genres 5 TUE 20 03 News Pr6 THU 15 03 Weather 2 61 13 00 120 04 13 00 Pr4 Resume Remain err 70h03m Oh15m 0 46 lt gt 1 Disc type Displays the media type HDD or DVD 2 Total number of titles Sub menu Press to display sub menu The sub menu displays options applicable only to the selected item The displayed options differ depending upon the model situation and disc type Title List HDD 10 Titles TETTE 13 00 Fri20 04 Erase Edit 4 Titles By Date All Genres E 21 00 TUE 10 04 TOW 21 00 10 04 1 Genre Name 9 00 02 04 vi Mystery Multi Mode DUM UB HDD SP Remain 70h03m 20 00 FRI 30 03 World
273. P CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP 0 001uF 0 001uF 4 7 4 7uF 0 01uF 100uF 100uF 4 7uF 220uF 4 7uF 0 1uF 100uF 0 001uF 0 001uF 0 001uF 0 1uF 0 1uF 12 12 2 0PF 100uF 100uF 100uF 0 001uF 2 2uF 0 001uF 0 001uF 0 001uF 0 1uF 0 001uF 0 01uF 0 01uF 1090 1090 1090 1090 1090 2090 2090 1090 2090 1090 2090 1090 1090 1090 5 5 10 20 20 20 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 Remarks Ref 50V C5606 50V C5607 6 3V C5608 6 3V C5609 16V C5610 16V C5611 16V C5612 6 3V C5613 6 3V C5614 6 3V C5615 6 3V C5616 6 3V C5617 4 C5622 6 3V C5623 16V C5624 16V C5625 6 3V C5626 6 3V C5627 6 3V C5628 50V 05629 50V C5630 50V C5631 16V C5632 6 3V C5640 6 3V C5641 6 3V C5702 6 3V C5704 16V C5705 6 3V C5706 6 3V C5707 6 3V C5708 16V C5801 16V C5802 6 3V C5803 6 3V C5804 50V 05805 50 C5806 50 05807 6 3 05808 4V 05809 4V 5812 6 3V C5813 6 3V C5814 6 3V C5815 6 3V C5816 16V C5817 16V C5818 50V 05819 10V C5820 6 3V C5821 50 C5822 6 3V 50V 50V CN201 16V CN501 50V CN601 6 3V 4501 6 3V CN4701 16V CN5101 16V CN5201 16V 8 20 Part No 1 164 943 81
274. P TPBN FR 274 BOARD IN EE T o P Abbreviation Note1 The HDMI block is highly confidential and prohibited from releasing to public AUS Australian model Note2 The components identified by mark amp contain confidential information Strictly follow the instructions whenever the components are repaired and or replaced 3 1 3 2 RDR HXD870 HXD970 HXD1070 3 2 AV 114 BLOCK DIAGRAM AV 114 BOARD m BUFFER Q511 RTOMAIN BUFFER U601 TUNER Q601 BUFFER TU VIN VIDEO OUT Q AERIAL IN 16601 5 5 EURO MSP Q604 BS IN A TUNER IN L A TUNER IN R AERIAL 18 432MHz E Q602 BUFFER SEP Y2 IN 2Y Him E 1 SEP C2 IN SDET2 SDET2 2 2VIN FR 274 BOARD VIDEO L2 IN CN202 SEE PAGE 3 9 AL2 IN L 41 V Y IN 36 R CIN 32 GIN 28 BIN C OUT 40 V Y OUT 37 BLANKING IN 31 N LINK VIDEO L3 IN RorC IN R CIN GIN B IN AV2 OUT PAL SCART IN AV2_V YOUT AV2 L IN JA501 2 2 LINE3 DECODER 29 FUNCTION SW FUNC IN 27 LIN SERERE ALS IN L 23 RIN AVERIN A L8 IN R 24 LOUT AV2 OUT L 22 ROUT 4 5 AVLTH SW AVLTH C401 3 5 VIDEO AUDIO SELECTOR Y2 OUT PY Y OUT Pb C
275. R HN1COSFU TE85R R153 TRANSISTOR HN1COSFU TE85R R154 TRANSISTOR DTA124EUA T106 TRANSISTOR 25 4154 1 R155 R156 TRANSISTOR 25 4154 1 R157 TRANSISTOR ISA1602AM1TP 1EF R158 TRANSISTOR ISA1602AM1TP 1EF R159 TRANSISTOR ISA1602AM1TP 1EF TRANSISTOR ISA1602AM1TP 1EF R160 R161 TRANSISTOR ISA1602AM1TP 1EF R165 TRANSISTOR 29C4154TP 1EF R167 TRANSISTOR ISA1602AM1TP 1EF R168 AEP UK TRANSISTOR 25C4154TP 1EF AEP UK 8 6 Part No 1 216 809 11 1 216 809 11 1 216 809 11 1 216 841 11 1 216 809 11 1 216 864 11 1 216 833 11 1 216 815 11 1 216 809 11 1 216 809 11 1 216 833 11 1 216 864 11 1 216 864 11 1 216 857 11 1 216 864 11 1 216 815 11 1 216 815 11 1 216 809 11 1 216 809 11 1 216 833 11 1 216 815 11 1 216 864 11 1 216 829 11 1 218 867 11 1 216 845 11 1 216 821 11 1 216 845 11 1 216 809 11 1 216 817 11 1 218 867 11 1 216 809 11 1 218 867 11 1 216 809 11 1 216 809 11 1 216 864 11 1 216 833 11 1 216 809 11 1 216 821 11 1 216 809 11 1 216 864 11 1 216 864 11 1 216 864 11 1 216 864 11 1 216 809 11 1 216 809 11 1 216 809 11 1 216 809 11 1 216 845 11 1 216 845 11 1 216 864 11 1 216 809 11 1 216 864 11 1 216 864 11 1 216 809 11 1 216 812 11 Description RESISTOR METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP SHORT CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP SHORT CHIP SHORT CHIP METAL CHIP SHORT CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP MET
276. RAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP ELECT CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP 100uF 0 1uF 100uF 4 7uF 22UF 0 1uF 0 1uF 2 2uF 10uF 10uF 0 022uF 2 2 0 001uF 2 2uF 0 001uF 0 001uF 22PF 22PF 22PF 22 82PF 82PF 82PF 82PF 7PF 7PF 7PF 7PF 15PF 15PF 15PF 15PF 0 01 0 01 0 01 0 01 0 01 220uF 0 1uF 0 1uF 0 1uF 2090 2090 1090 2090 1090 2090 2090 1090 1090 1090 1090 1090 1090 5 5 5 5 0 5PF 0 5PF 0 5PF 0 5PF 5 5 5 5 0 5PF 0 5PF 0 5 5 5 5 5 10 10 10 10 10 20 Remarks 25V 16V 25V 16V 6 3V 6 3V 16V 16V 10V 10V 10V 50V 6 3V 6 3V 6 3V 10V 50V 10V 6 3V 6 3V 6 3V 50V 50V 6 3V 6 3V 6 3V 6 3V 6 3V 50V 50V 50V 50V 50V 50V 50V 50V 50V 50V 50V 50V 50V 50V 50V 50V 50V 50V
277. RCK 2 W2EN 5 W3EN W3EN UK A S model W1EN W1EN S 1 ede N E E 24 576MHz DRIVER 1 R G B 114 N STREAM 0 7 STREAM 97 11000 17007 FMO FMO LASER FRONT i ER 1001 MONITOR em VIDEO VCLK gt 1001 LINE LR DECODER AV ENC DEC RF RF l o IR PHOTO LE XRESET A B C D 51 52 53 54 DETECTOR 9 FUNCTION diii SDA VDEC a 16401 16401 SELECTOR FAN SCL VDEC 4 2 DRIVE 7 VIDEO AUDIO TUL 1 16406 TUR SELECTER LE XRESET AVLTH SW SDA e og ane T T TRACKING 450102 o o G o L COIL o BUFFER IC3101 2 9 13101 o AUDIO ADC XDMUTE1 XDMUTE2 501 HU HU SPINDEE di 3201 TRACKING COIL DRIVE MOTOR FOCUS COIL DRIVE AUDIO DAC SPINDLE MOTOR DRIVE 104 3203 SLED MOTOR DRIVE LOADING MOTOR DRIVE 5 1 8 1 006 SW AUDIO LPF ST2 SLED MOTOR SDA X101 SCL 16 i LDO LDO LOADING MOTOR AEP UK only 1C3702 24 576 T OO
278. RDR HAD670 HXD970 SERVICE MANUAL Self Diagnosis Supported model Ver 1 1 2007 10 Digital Video VIDEO R RW Broadcasting Theatre Sync COMPACT y Photo RDR HXD870 0248 SE DVD ReWritable e System Laser Semiconductor laser Transmission standards Digital broadcasting DVB T Channel coverage Digital broadcasting VHF 5 to E12 F5 to Italian D to H2 Australian AS6 to AS12 UHF E21 to E69 B21 to B68 F21 to F69 Australian AS27 to AS69 Channel coverage Analogue broadcasting PAL B G D K D SECAM L VHF E2 to E12 R1 to R12 F2to F10 Italian A to H ASO to AS12 NZI to NZ11 Ireland A to J South Africa 4 to 11 13 UHF E21 to E69 AS28 to AS69 R21 to R69 B21 to B69 F21 to F69 501 to S05 S1 to S20 France BtoQ HYPER 521 to S41 The above channel coverage merely ensures the channel reception within these ranges It does not guarantee the ability to receive signals in all circumstances For details see Receivable channels Video reception Frequency synthesizer system Audio reception Split carrier system Aerial out 75 ohm asymmetrical aerial socket Timer Clock Quartz locked Timer indication 24 hour cycle digital Power back up duration hour SPECIFICATIONS Video recording format 2 1 Audio recording format applicable bit rate Dolby Digital 2 ch 256 kbps 128 kbps in EP SLP and
279. RS2 Yo4 08 DDATA2 6 161 1 02 HADRS3 P Es DDATA 7 RADI R1288 1077 FLASH ROM HADRSA wea D7 DDATA2 8 22 TCLKO o HADRS5 DDATA2 9 imo age 8095 101221 52961 06 90 9 DORS 6 0 HADRSS RAD HADRSG HADRS16 HADRS7 voi E6 1 R1278 61221 DDR SDRAM HADRS6 RADI 101221 7 HADRS7 c3 06508 K4H511638C UCB3T HADRS7 gt RADI TO 2 7 HADRS9 E3 RAD VREF D 5 P22 DRAS VREFD gt RADI 22 B2 DCAS 1 P23 RAD 091 DDATA2 9 RAD 3 u20 rag w DDATA 8 FEET RAD 2 B9 DDM 3 RAD 0005 0 2 m7 4 DDATA2 7 RAD HADRS18 C6 0005 1 DDATA2 6 XRESET 0 1 HADRS19 123 DDATA2 5 2 7 3 7 5 7 7 7 HADRS20 R22 0005 3 DDATA2 4 RAD 1 0 HADRS 1 W20 83 DBAO RAD HDATA2 HADRS22 RAD NOT USE Meo HADRS23 RADD23 GPI002 9 00053 rum RADD24 GPI003 10k 19 RADD25 GPI004 wet HDOE ii 81021 R1037 81036 10k 2 C10 C202 DDM 3 lt AW E a hy TU HCSO TCLKNO 2 7 2 7 22 5 124
280. Recording is set to A L or B R in step 3 you cannot select the sound when playing in the following cases When recording in PCM mode When recording to the HDD HDD Recording Format is set to Video Mode in the Recording setup page 144 DVD RW DVD R DVD RW DVD R Video mode e You cannot select 1 17 in step 2 if LINE 1 In 15 set to Decoder in the Video In Out setup page 137 Info Shows information when available Editor Allows you to edit the channel lineup and channel display page 69 Setup Allows you to change the language country region postal code input source or host channel 5 Home position When you press the blue button the cursor returns to the last programme position on the Grid 6 Tiles Shows the programme titles and category green sports purple movies blue children s teal others 7 Broadcast station Logo Shows the broadcast station logo 8 Time Slot Indicates the currently selected time slot Use amp ws to select a different time slot Hint You can also move the cursor to the Menu Bar by pressing MENU Troubleshooting guide If you are having trouble displaying the television programme list please check the following The clock must be set correctly If the clock 15 not set set it manually page 129 This recorder downloads the GUIDE Plus data several ti
281. Recording from Connected Equipment on page 79 the input signal is not in DVC SD format Do not connect a MICRO MV format digital video camera even if it has an i LINK jack the images on the tape contain copy protection signals which limit recording If you want to play DVDs dubbed from a DV camcorder on other DVD equipment finalise the disc page 45 Set the recorder and DV camcorder to the same colour system page 130 Hookups DVD recorder i LINK cable not supplied DV camcorder oN Signal flow 1 25 1 2 3 4 Press SYSTEM MENU The System Menu appears Select Dubbing and press ENTER Select DVD Backup and press ENTER Select Start new DVD Backup and press ENTER If you have previously dubbed backup data to the HDD select Resume writing data and go to step 7 Insert the DVD you are going to make a backup of Select Start and press ENTER The recorder starts dubbing all of the contents on a DVD to the HDD Press amp open close and replace the DVD with a recordable DVD RW DVD RW or an unused DVD R DVD R To make a backup disc of DVD RWs DVD Rs insert a recordable DVD RW or unused DVD R To make a backup disc of DVD RWs DVD Rs insert a recordable DVD RW or unused DVD R Select Start and press ENTER The recorder starts High speed dubbing the contents that were dubbed
282. SLP Oh30m 0 46 All Genres NEW 21 00 TUE 10 04 9 SLP 21 00 Tue10 04 Pr9 SLP iig m 046 S 9 00 MON 02 04 Pr3 SLP if Mystery V 1h00m 0 86 gt 12 20 00 30 03 5 SLP World Sports 1h00m 0 86 To open up disc space on the HDD DVD RW VR mode you can erase any title See Erasing and Editing a Title on page 92 For DVD Rs and DVD Rs the available disc space does not increase even if you erase titles To switch between the Playlist and Original Title List DVD RW DVD R in VR mode only You can display the Playlist titles in the Title List Playlist or the Original titles in the Title List Original 1 Press while the Title List is displayed 2 Select Original using and press ENTER 3 Select Original or Play List using and press ENTER About editing accuracy When editing the titles recorded on the HDD you can select the type of editing Video Mode Compatible Editing Recommended if you are going to dub the titles to DVD RWs DVD Rs Video mode or DVD RWs DVD Rs afterward by High speed dubbing The editing points and chapter marks may be slightly different from those you selected Frame Accurate Editing Recommended when you want to edit titles precisely However the editing points may be slightly different
283. Scan Download from TV Digital Tuner Manual CH Setting Analog Tuner Channel Swapping Video In Out Audio In Audio Out Language Recording v 10 Select Manual CH Setting and press ENTER 2 Recording a Programme HDD This section introduces the basic operation to record a current TV programme to the hard disk HDD or to a disc DVD For an explanation of how to make timer recordings see page 52 Digital Mode or page 71 Analogue Mode _ 29 pvp PROG INPUT TV DVD DISPLAY TV PAUSE 717 6 REC gt REC eP STOP e IVa Press HDD or DVD If you want to record to a DVD insert a recordable DVD 2 Press PROG to select the programme position or input source you want to record MODE 1 8 11 Select Next Screen and press ENTER 12 Select your country region and press ENTER Programme position Skip 4 CH System Channel AFT Level Sound System Name Decoder 13 Select the desired programme position using gt gt or number buttons 14 select Channel using 15 Select the external decoder programme position using 16 select Sound System using 1 7 Press lt gt to select an available TV system B G D K 1 or L To receive broadcasts in France select ud 18 select Decoder usin
284. Select this when connecting to an external decoder PAY TV Canal Plus analogue decoder If you connect to a cable box satellite receiver such as CanalSat do not select this option NTSC on PAL TV Sets the recorder to convert signals of the NTSC colour system to the PAL colour system to play NTSC discs on PAL only TVs Refer to the operating instructions supplied with your TV On Plays NTSC discs on PAL only TVs Off Select this if the connected TV is a multi system NTSC compatible TV Channel Swapping After the programme positions have been set you can change the order of each programme position in the display list 1 Select Channel Swapping in Analog Tuner and press ENTER 2 Select Next Screen and press ENTER 28 Initial Setup 1 inz 2 117 Pr System CH Pr System CH 2 3 4 5 6 2 3 4 5 6 B G Swap Preset 3 Press 4 8 to select the programme position number you want to swap and press To display other pages press 19 Wl repeatedly 4 Press 4 8 to select the programme position number to swap for the one selected in step 3 and press ENTER The programme position numbers are swapped To swap the programme position number of another station repeat from step 3 Audio Input Settings Audio In The Audio In setup
285. Settings Audio In AH 1 33 Audio Output Settings Audio Out HH 1 34 Language Settings Language EE 1 34 Recording Settings Recording 1 34 Playback Settings Playback M 1 35 Limitation Settings Parental Lock 1 35 HDMI Settings HDMI Output EEEE 1 36 Other Settings Options Eua 1 36 Additional Information 1227 Troubleshooting eerte 1 37 Resetting the Recorder 95 n cerei 1 39 Notes About This Recorder 1 39 S DecIfICdlloDS 1 39 Notes Audio Tracks JPEG Image Files and Die VIGGO ie nate 1 39 About LLINK Rete es SEEN On 1 40 Guide to Parts and Controls 1 40 Language Code Lis 9 eterne eng 1 41 Country Area 1 41 2 DISASSEMBLY Ol UPPER CASE 2 2 2 2 TRAY COVER ASSEMBLY 252 224 FRONT PANEL SECTION 0 9 2 4 274 BOARD FL 178 BOARD 2 3 258 2 4 Io Tad c EET Ne 2 4 Dore HARD TOES 2 5 Iul 2 8 2 9 2 10 2 11 3 1 3 2 3 3 3 4 3 5 3 6 4 1 4 2 RE E UT 2 5 tua 2 6 POWER SUPPLY BLOCK 2 6 CIRCUIT BOARDS LOCATION
286. Sports Sub menu 4 Scroll bar Appears when all of the titles do not fit on the list To view the hidden titles press 4 Displaying the Playing Time and Play Information HDD CD DATA DATA CD You can check the playing time of the current title chapter track or disc Also you can check the disc name recorded on the DVD CD DISPLAY Press DISPLAY repeatedly The displays differ depending on the disc type or playing status In stop mode Example DVD RW in VR mode 5 6 ABC Pri Resume Stereo Original HQ 1hO1m DVD 0h35m Copy Once Finalised Disc Name World Sports 1 9 5 Title information Displays the title number title thumbnail picture playback picture for the selected title still images for the other titles recording date recorded station name or programme position number recording mode title name and title size Recording Indicates that the title is currently being recorded Indicates protected title NEW Indicates that the title is newly recorded not played back HDD only C Press DISPLAY to display Ga indicates titles containing copy protection signals HDD only page 99 Indicates that the title is recorded using the Update function Genre icons Indicates the title s ge
287. Start Time Time when reception started conditions END Time Time when reception ended Host CH Data receiving channel P ON Kind Methods for acquiring the EPG data host scanning and downloaing Lines 07 10 Total Err Total numbers of errors during reception details on errors The total number of Hamming Err Trans during reception Err and InvLine Err indicated on the Detail screen A number 999 999 or greater is displayed as 999999 Pkt Num Total number of received packages A number 999 999 or greater is displayed as Pkt Snd Num 79999997 Total number of packages that were sent to the application program among all the received packages A number 999 999 or greater 15 displayed as 999999 InvLine Err Total number of errors that were generated by receiving data from invalid lines A number 999 999 or greater is displayed as 999999 Slice Cont Slice level control Auto Tu Con Manual Syscon Slice level 10 30 hex Only when the slice Cont is Manual Note The data on lines 12 14 are for software development not for service use 5 Press ESC Returns to the original screen 6 20 Only during initialization host scanning is automatically executed to find the host broadcast Total Errors If the total number of errors reaches two digits or greater it is likely that EPG data acquisition failed Display subscreen 1 of the first screen and check the electric field intensi
288. Still Cinema BNR Sharpness Fine Detail Fine 3 Select an item using and adjust settings using e wsb For details about each setting see the explanation of the display Prog Motion Adjusts the progressive video signal when Component Video Out is set to Progressive page 136 Select Motion for a picture including subjects that move dynamically Select Still for a picture with little movement Cinema Converts the progressive video signal to match the type of DVD software that you are watching when Component Video Out is set to Progressive page 136 Select Autol to automatically detect the software type Film based or Video based and select the appropriate conversion mode Normally select this position If the picture appears unnatural select 2 or Off YNR luminance noise reduction Reduces noise contained in the luminance element of the video signal BNR block noise reduction Reduces block noise or mosaic like patterns in the picture Playing from the Beginning of the Programme You Are Recording Chase Play HDD Chase Play allows you to view the recorded part of a programme on the HDD while the recording is being made You do not need to wait until the recording finishes gt _ Press C gt whil
289. TCH TACTILE 1048 1 234 372 11 RES NETWORK 100 1005X4 5102 1 771 410 21 SWITCH TACTILE ONE TOUCH DUB R1049 1 218 990 81 SHORT CHIP 0 R1050 1 234 372 11 RES NETWORK 100 1005 4 lt VARISTOR gt R1051 1 234 372 11 RES NETWORK 100 1005 4 VDR102 1 802 071 21 VARISTOR CHIP R1052 1 234 372 11 RES NETWORK 100 1005 4 VDR104 1 802 071 21 VARISTOR CHIP R1053 1 218 953 11 RES CHIP 5 146W R1054 1 218 965 11 10K 5 1 16W R1055 1 218 973 11 RES CHIP 47K 5 1 16W Note The components identified by mark A or dotted line with mark A are critical for safety Replace only with part number specified 8 15 Ref No C201 C204 C206 207 C211 C213 C215 C216 C217 C221 C222 C223 CN201 CN202 CN203 D202 D203 D204 D205 D206 D207 D208 D209 D210 D211 D212 D214 D216 FB201 FB202 10201 J201 L201 ND201 Part No 2 319 520 01 1 128 111 11 1 164 230 11 1 164 230 11 1 107 377 21 1 107 826 11 1 131 992 91 1 115 339 11 1 128 131 11 1 115 339 11 1 107 726 91 1 107 726 91 1 115 339 11 1 815 381 11 1 563 614 31 1 784 739 11 8 719 067 40 8 719 067 40 8 719 067 40 8 719 067 40 8 719 067 40 8 719 067 40 8 719 988 61 8 719 988 61 8 719 988 61 8 719 988 61 6 501 884 01 6 501 437 01 8 719 056 82 1 414 228 11 1 414 228 11 6 701 729 01 1 780 049 11 1 411 919 11 1 519 964 11 Description FR 274 BG
290. TE CHIP 1608 R104 BEAD FERRITE CHIP 1608 R105 R107 lt 16 gt R109 IC HYB25DC256160CE 6 R110 KABSDKASOT1TSN R111 uPD61111GM 200 UEV A R114 TC7SHO4FU TSRSOYJF R116 IC CIMAX SP2L AEP2 R121 TC74LCX245FK EL AEP2 R122 IC TC74LCX373FK EL AEP2 R123 TC74LCX373FK EL AEP2 R124 ST890BDR AEP2 125 MM1563DFBE 126 MM1685ANRE 127 MM1689FHBE R128 FPF2007 R138 uPC3221GV R139 MM1685ANRE R141 DRX3975D R142 NJM12904V R143 IC MM1561FFBE R144 uPD64015AGM UEU A R145 lt COIL gt R146 R147 INDUCTOR 0 92 148 FERRITE EMI SMD 1608 R149 3216 EMI FERRITE SMD R151 INDUCTOR 10uH INDUCTOR 10uH R153 154 INDUCTOR 10uH R155 INDUCTOR 10uH R159 INDUCTOR 18uH R160 INDUCTOR 18uH INDUCTOR 18uH R166 R167 INDUCTOR 18uH R168 R169 lt TRANSISTOR gt R170 TRANSISTOR DTC124EUA T106 AEP2 R172 TRANSISTOR DTA143EUA T106 AEP2 R173 TRANSISTOR 2504081 2 R174 TRANSISTOR 25 1623 1 516 179 TRANSISTOR 25 1576 106 0 R182 TRANSISTOR 29C4081 R R183 TRANSISTOR 29C4081 R R185 TRANSISTOR DTC143EUA T106 R186 TRANSISTOR DTC143EUA T106 187 TRANSISTOR DTC124EUA T106 R188 TRANSISTOR 25 1576 106 0 R189 TRANSISTOR 25 1576 106 0 R190 TRANSISTOR 25 1576 106 0 R191 TRANSISTOR 25 1576 106 0 R192 TRANSISTOR 29C4081 R R193 8 12 Part No 8 729 905 35 8 729 905 35 8 729 905 35
291. TER The Options or Options 2 setup appears with the following options The default settings are underlined Example Options setup amp Initial Setup a Playback On Screen Display mon Parental Lock Front Panel Display Off HDMI Output Command Mode Options SMARTLINK Options 2 DivX Set Preview Software Update Options On Screen Display On Automatically displays information on the screen when the recorder is turned On etc Off Displays information only when DISPLAY is pressed Front Panel Display Adjusts the lighting of the front panel display On Bright lighting Off Turns off the lighting when the power is off 720 576 Sends 720x576p video signals 720 x 480 2 Sends 720x480p video signals 720 x 576 Sends 720x576i video signals 720x480i Sends 720x480i video signals 1 Can be selected only when Input Line System is set to PAL SECAM in the Basic setup page 130 2 Can be selected only when Input Line System is set to NTSC in the Basic setup page 130 Q Notes When picture noise appears after you change the Screen Resolution setting hold down stop on the recorder and press amp open close on the recorder e When Colour is set to YCbCr 4 2 2 in the HDMI Output setup you cannot select 720 x 5761 or 7720 x 4801 4 3 Video Output This setting is ef
292. TER The Album List appears 2 3 Select Music Jukebox and press A Select an album and press gt Select Edit using and press ENTER The sub menu appears c Press the number buttons to select the number of the album or track you want If you make a mistake select another number Press ENTER The recorder starts playback from the selected number Hint You can select an album or track using 4 in step 4 1 Select Album and press ENTER The display asks for confirmation 8 Select Yes using gt and press ENTER The selected album is copied to the HDD To copy more albums go to step 5 To cancel copying Press ENTER 111 113 114 116 Playing Audio Tracks Using Jukebox USB Device SUBTITLE CLEAR ANGLE SYSTEM MENU C3 t4 ENTER 4 0 1 Press SYSTEM MENU The System Menu appears 2 Select Music Jukebox and press ENTER 3 Select Listen to Music Edit or Listen to Music from USB Device and press ENTER To listen to the audio tracks on the HDD select Listen to Music Edit To listen to the MP3 audio tracks from the connected USB device select Listen to Music from USB Device The Album List appears Music Jukebox 10 Albums By number The Best 2 3
293. V 6 3V 6 3V 6 3V 10V 16V 6 3V 16V 50V 6 3V 4V Ref 03201 C3202 C3203 C3204 C3206 C3207 C3211 C3212 3213 03214 03215 03216 03217 03218 03219 C3220 C3301 C3302 C3303 C3303 C3304 C3304 C3305 C3305 C3307 C3311 C3312 C3313 C3313 C3314 C3315 C3316 C3317 C3318 C3319 C3319 C3320 03321 C3322 C3323 C3324 Part No 1 126 916 11 1 107 820 11 1 164 937 11 1 164 934 11 1 107 820 11 1 126 205 11 1 117 681 11 1 107 820 11 1 100 741 81 1 100 741 81 1 164 872 11 1 164 872 11 1 107 820 11 1 117 681 11 1 126 210 21 1 114 130 11 1 162 912 11 1 162 912 11 1 164 845 11 1 164 854 11 1 164 870 81 1 164 872 11 1 164 854 11 1 164 858 11 1 100 966 91 1 162 912 11 1 162 912 11 1 100 966 91 1 163 021 91 1 162 912 11 1 162 912 11 1 164 845 11 1 164 870 11 1 164 854 11 1 100 966 91 1 163 021 91 1 162 912 11 1 162 912 11 1 164 845 11 1 164 870 11 1 164 854 11 Description ELECT CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP ELECT CHIP ELECT CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP ELECT CHIP ELECT CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP C
294. V 7 pi t A gt SW 1 5V NTZJ27B CN203 4 e 5 8113 0 39 DAS 47 0201 2 P Um L P 049 4 5 GND 105 gt w TA FA5518N gt C207 208 5 8V ADJ 4 107 R110 D106 lt gt 15000 1500 20 101 8107 Ri05z 4700 220 155133 gt NEU 470 L C206 DSP 501N C133 ik 100 2 7 lt gt 5k C204 47u gt 47 35 e ni 5 33N R209 STPONLO3L C106 I 0105 R108 gt 4 C205 3 3V REG 6800P PR1003L 33 ES 4700p gt 4 gt 116 tL c108 5 gt R503 220 PC101 1 2 e 47u lt gt lt 47 _ C504 1 2W 35 gt 1 202 op 47 CIUS R210 R501 R509 TL431CLP 35V SW 3 3V PHOTO COUPLER leS 316 10 12k pas RD me BOARD 1 7 i C503 504 SW 3 3V CN450 D502 0 01 47 PAGE 4 21 R101 155133 SEE PAG TH101 Um IC101 1 2W 10501 CS Ww OVS TL431REF NT OSC D604 P501 505 C101 155133 2 5 32 150 C 0 22u 275V C507 C501 470 470 35V 7101 S10K300 L601 NO u T i 58360 F Fina 540 201 1 202 n 250 35V 16V 00 SHUNT z R601 C603 lt R604 T L104 6607 REGULATOR 470 1 5 EU u 35V 35V CN101 601 CS ACHINLET HA17L431 R605 10k e SHUNT REGULATOR Note The components identified by mark or dotted line with mark are critical for safety Repl
295. V C1110 16V 01111 16 1112 16 C1113 16V C1114 16V C1115 16V C1116 16V C1117 6 3V C1118 6 3V 01119 16 1120 50V C1121 6 3V 1122 6 3 16 6 3 CN102 6 3V CN103 6 3V CN202 6 3V CN203 6 3V 6 3V 6 3V 0302 6 3V D303 6 3V D304 6 3V 6 3V 6 3V F101 6 3V F102 6 3V F103 F104 6 3V F105 50V 6 3V F106 50V F108 4V F202 F203 6 3V F204 6 3V 6 3V F205 6 3V F206 6 3V F300 F301 16V F302 6 3V 6 3V F305 4V F306 6 3V F309 F310 6 3V F311 50V 50V 6 3V 6 3V 8 11 Part No 1 114 130 11 1 114 130 11 1 114 130 11 1 114 130 11 1 107 820 11 1 107 820 11 1 107 820 11 1 100 966 91 1 164 937 11 1 164 937 11 1 164 937 11 1 107 820 11 1 107 820 11 1 164 937 11 1 164 943 81 1 114 130 11 1 164 937 11 1 164 937 11 1 164 937 11 1 164 937 11 1 126 210 21 1 107 820 11 1 107 820 11 1 117 681 11 1 779 338 51 1 569 940 11 1 564 728 11 1 564 704 41 6 501 864 01 8 719 988 61 8 719 988 61 1 543 949 22 1 543 949 22 1 543 949 22 1 543 949 22 1 543 949 22 1 543 949 22 1 543 949 22 1 543 949 22 1 543 949 22 1 543 949 22 1 543 949 22 1 543 949 22 1 543 949 22 1 543 949 22 1 543 949 22 1 543 949 22 1 543 949 22 1 543 949 22 1 543 949 22 1 543 949 22 Description CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP 0 1uF CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP 0 1uF 0 1uF 10uF 0 001uF 0 001
296. V GUIDE INTERNATIONAL INC AND ITS RELATED AFFILIATES ARE NOT IN ANY WAY LIABLE FOR THE ACCURACY OFTHEPROGRAM SCHEDULE INFORMATION PROVIDED BY THE GUIDE PLUS SYSTEM IN NO EVENT SHALL GEMSTAR TV GUIDE INTERNATIONAL INC AND ITS RELATED AFFILIATES BELIABLE FOR ANY AMOUNTS REPRESENTING LOSS OF PROFITS LOSS OF BUSINESS OR INDIRECT SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES IN CONNECTION WITH THE PROVISION OR USE OF ANY INFORMATION EQUIPMENT OR SERVICES RELATING TO THE GUIDE PLUS SYSTEM About this manual Check your model name The instructions in this manual are for 4 models RDR HXD770 RDR HXD870 RDR HXD970 and RDR HXD1070 Check your model name by looking at the front panel of the recorder n this manual the internal hard disk drive is written as and disc is usedasa general reference for the HDD DVDs or CDs unless otherwise specified by the text or illustrations Icons such as listed at the top of each explanation indicate what kind of media can be used with the function being explained Instructions in this manual describe the controls on the remote You can also use the controls on the recorder if they have the same or similar names as those on the remote The on screen display illustrations used in this manual may not match the graphics displayed on your TV screen The explanations regarding DVDs in this manual refer to DVDs created on this recorder The
297. VD VIDEOs VIDEO CDs according to the disc contents the software producers designed some playback features may not be available See the instructions supplied with the DVD VIDEOs VIDEO CDs Region code DVD VIDEO only Your recorder has a region code printed on the rear of the unit and will only play DVD VIDEOs playback only labelled with identical region codes This system is used to protect copyrights DVD VIDEOs labelled will also play on this recorder If you try to play any other DVD VIDEO the message Playback prohibited by region code will appear on the TV screen Depending on the DVD VIDEO no region code indication may be labelled even though playing the DVD VIDEO is prohibited by area restrictions Region code AC 000 00 2 00W CORPORATION MADE IN XXX NO Music discs encoded with copyright protection technologies This product is designed to play back discs that conform to the Compact Disc CD standard Recently various music discs encoded with copyright protection technologies are being marketed by some record companies Please be aware that among those discs there are some that do not conform to the CD standard and may not be playable by this product Note on DualDiscs A DualDisc is a two sided disc product which mates DVD recorded material on one side with digital audio material on the other side However since the audio material sid
298. VIBRATOR CRYSTAL 24 576 4 7K 5 4 7K 5 4 7K 5 4 7K 5 0 1uF 22 1005X4 22 1005X4 22 1005X4 22 1005X4 56 5 0 0 1uF 22 5 22 5 10K 5 0 33 5 470 5 330 5 330 5 330 5 330 5 4 1K 5 4 7K 5 10K 5 10K 5 10K 5 10 1005 4 10K 5 10K 5 10K 5 10K 5 4 7K 5 680 5 1K 5 0 560 5 2 2K 5 4 7K 5 27K 5 0 OSCILLATOR CRYSTAL 48 2 VIBRATOR CRYSTAL 25MHz Remarks 1 16W 1 16W 1 16W 1 16W 25 1 16W 16V 1 16W 1 16W 1 16W 1 16W 1 16W 1 16W 1 16W 1 16W 1 16W 1 16W 1 16W 1 16W 1 16W 1 16W 1 16W 1 16W 1 16W 1 16W 1 16W 1 16W 1 16W 1 16W 1 16W 1 16W 1 16W gt gt 8 26 Ref No Note Part No 1 480 167 11 1 480 526 11 1 575 131 82 1 696 593 11 1 759 586 41 1 555 074 52 1 827 946 21 1 828 145 11 3 113 760 11 3 113 760 21 3 113 760 31 3 113 760 41 3 113 760 51 3 113 760 61 3 196 450 11 3 196 450 21 3 196 450 31 3 196 450 41 3 275 466 11 Description Remarks ACCESSORIES KK K K K K REMOTE COMMANDER RMT D248P AEP UK REMOTE COMMANDER RMT D2480 AUS CORD POWER AEP CORD CONNECTION PAL CONTROLLER VIDEO AV MOUSE CORD POWER AUS CORD POWER UK CORD CONNECTION AV AUS MANUAL INSTRUCTION ENGLISH UK MANUAL INSTRUCTION FRENCH AEP1 AEP3 MANUAL INSTRUCTION GERMAN AEP1 MANUAL INSTRUCTION ITALIAN AEP1 MANUAL INSTRUCTION SPANISH AEP1
299. VIDEO 4 Front display 166 13 4 Front panel display 166 L MONO AUDIO R jacks 32 5 close button 36 14 ONE TOUCH DUB button 106 6 B play button 80 108 124 The B button has a tactile dot 15 Jack stop button 80 108 114 124 16 USB jack type A 112 118 REC button 36 17 PictBridge USB jack type 126 9 REC STOP button 36 Use the tactile dot as a reference when operating HDD button indicator 36 DVD button indicator 36 gt 2 3 2 gt gt 1 65 166 168 Front panel display 1 Displays the following Playing time Current title chapter track index number Recording time recording mode Clock Programme position EPG indication 63 appears when receiving GUIDE Plus data TV Direct Rec indication 36 TV appears in the right most two digits 2 NTSC indicator 130 137 3 VPS PDC indicator 78 4 Timer indicator 73 5 Disc type Lights when a recordable DVD R or DVD RW disc is loaded 6 Command Mode indicator 149 Displays the Command Mode of the remote When the Command Mode for the recorder is set to DVD3 default either 1 or 2 does not appear Recording status Dubbing direction indicator 9 Playing status LINE 2 OUT rAUDIOs VIDEO R L
300. WORK CONDUCTOR NETWORK SHORT CHIP RES CHIP RES NETWORK RES NETWORK RES CHIP CONDUCTOR NETWORK CONDUCTOR NETWORK SHORT CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES NETWORK RES NETWORK RES CHIP RES CHIP SHORT CHIP SHORT CHIP RES CHIP RES NETWORK RES NETWORK RES NETWORK RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES NETWORK RES CHIP RES CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP SHORT CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES NETWORK RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP SHORT CHIP SHORT CHIP RES CHIP RES CHIP 22 5 1005 4 1005 4 0 33 5 22 1005 4 22 1005 4 22 5 1005 4 1005 4 0 33 5 33 5 22 1005 4 22 1005 4 22 5 22 5 0 0 390 5 47 1005 4 47 1005 4 47 1005 4 47 5 47 5 47 5 47 1005 4 22 5 22 5 470 0 5 0 5 0 5 0 5 0 5 0 22 5 22 5 22 5 22 5 22 5 22 5 22 5 10 1005 4 10K 5 47 5 22 5 22 5 22 5 10K 5 10K 5 220 5 330 5 33 5 220 5 330 5 33 5 3 3K 5 0 0 10K 5 680 5 Remarks Ref No 1 16W R2502 R2504 R2505 R2506 R2507 1 16W R2508 R2510 R2511 1 16W R2513 R2514 R3002 R3003 1 16W R3004 1 16W R3005 R3006 1 16W R3007 R3008 1 16W R3009 R3010 R3011 1 16W R3
301. XD1070 MRX 1680 EC1 MRX 1685 EC2 MRX 1680 CEK 4 HOW DIAGNOSE HDD FAILURE 4 1 Defective HDD There are four symptoms of defects in the HDD 1 EOI is displayed on the FLD The HDD is not recognized or is not authorized 2 E02 is displayed on the FLD 3 When playing a video MP3 or JPG contents freeze 4 Irregular noises from the HDD 4 2 HDD Recognition status How to enter Recognition status and sub screen mode While the GUI screen is not displayed use the service remote controller and press ESC key followed by DISP key While the first screen is displayed press DIG ANA key repeatedly until the desired subscreen is displayed The subscreens change Service remote controller Part code J 6090 203 A MRX 1635 EC1 SYSCON VERSION 1 01 RELEASE 104 Rev 1 5895 TUNERCON DRIVE 1 178 DVD RW DVR L12X 1 00 000800004940 WDC WD2500AAJS 9 Details on HDD data are described below 250 lt HDD WDC1023456 160 HDD identification error indication HDD model name Details on HDD data R k conditions are described below paeem Check the connection to the Blank space SATA cable and power cable WDC 10234564 160 PIC SERIAL HDD INT Capacity of the HDD unit Gbytes DEVICE E2R FEx1 0 FLASH 64M C 0000400259 HDCP 0000400259 FL Display OS Display Repaining the HDD REPAIR REGION 2 HDD identification HDD
302. Y FRONT HXD970 AUS CABLE FLEXIBLE FLAT FLR 012 BV3 3 3 070 883 41 SCREW TAPPING SILVER HXD870 SILVER 3 070 883 71 SCREW TAPPING CASE BLACK HXD870 BLACK AEP UK HXD970 BLACK AEP UK HXD1070 2 899 646 01 CASE DT UPPER BLACK EXCEPT HXD870 SILVER 2 899 646 21 CASE DT UPPER SILVER HXD870 SILVER CASE DT BLOCK ASSY SERVICE BLACK HXD870 AUS HXD970 AUS A 1382 868 A A 1382 874 A CASE DT BLOCK ASSY SERVICE SILVER HXD870 AUS SCREW SPECIAL FRONT POINT REMOTE COMMANDER RMT D248P AEP UK REMOTE COMMANDER RMT D2480 AUS 3 076 563 11 1 480 167 11 1 480 526 11 8 1 2 CHASSIS SECTION 51 j Des not supplied not supplied not supplied 4 7 59 AEP2 supplied supplied not supplied U601 not supplied not supplied not supplied Ref No Part Description Remarks Ref No Part No Description Remarks 51 3 077 331 01 4BV3 3 CR 60 1318 134 HDD S TONKA2 S 160GB E ASSY fr 52 1271 316 DRW U1280 COMPL HXD870 AEP UK A 52 1382 914 DRW U12EM HDD ASSY S COMPL AUS 53 7 682 947 01 SCREW PSW 3X6 61 1 834 072 11 CABLE FLEXIBLE FLAT FAR 006 54 4 237 065 01 CLAMP L35 62 1 834 074 11 CABLE FLEXIBLE FLAT FAR 007 63 1 834 168 11 CABLE FLEXIBLE FLAT FVR 001 A55 1 474 047 11 REGULATOR SWITCHING SRV2057EK 64 1 965 191 11 HARNESS RH 059
303. _RESET 008 109 d CN102 28 JL107 0051 104 ATIXDT s TOT i 69 SDA VDEC ad 2 SENI T DOE d T u ttt DADD12 Do DADD11 0 DADD11 179 D T Du VDD2 3 9 607 79 GND 17 55 6590 D RFE LL 15 Y 177 VDD1 5 3 0 DADD9 E E ST it 179 DADD8 92 100 G m DADD6 BAORD 2 7 lt ____ peri 182 DADD5 R721 1 9 100 THROUGH THE 183 FVR 001 FAM iai 900 18 0 6 AM 4 32 5 186 VDD2 4 1 R722 EMMA2LL 100 E 189 DADD3 10106 a E 0 1 47 E 09 ap DBAO 9 DADDO ae nit o o J i 1 9 DADD10 192 DBA1 R616 DADDO 0 5 DBAO 47 AN DADD1 194 GND 20 DADD2 195 VDD2 5 es DADD3 196 DCSB 11149 5 197 DRASB m L1143 DCASB ECT R595 199 ECB F 56 ECS DQMO 09 DOMO EC9 0050 EC9 201 EC10 sei 202 a EM 203 EN _ XCD FDM_RESET 85 RESET 005 gt I2C SCL DTBR 02 0 2 Eu 2 561 DTBR gt M 2 2 5 3 5 I2C SDA DTBR 206 21 2 SDA DTBR EAS im EA6 nical INT CI 02 09 004 e 51 Wis 01 81 EAB
304. a recordable DVD which has been recorded using other recorders devices DATA DVDs finalised on this recorder may not be able to play on other equipment page 45 No more than 99 slideshows can be recorded to a disc For DVD Rs the available disc space does not increase even if you erase slideshows To reload the files or folders When a disc or the connected USB device contains 1 000 or more files and or 100 or more folders select Read next in the Photo Album list and press ENTER to view unloaded files or folders It may take a few minutes to load files or folders Q Note The thumbnail for a file that cannot be playable on the recorder is displayed as Viewing a JPEG image file 1 Follow steps 1 to 4 of Using the Photo Album List The Photo Album list appears Switch to the album list if necessary 2 selecta JPEG image file using and press ENTER The selected JPEG image file is displayed on the entire screen To display the detailed information 1 Select a JPEG image file and press 2 Select Detailed Information and press ENTER The detailed information for the selected JPEG image file appears Playing a slideshow 1 Follow steps 1 to 4 of Using the Photo Album List The Photo Album list appears Switch between the album list and JPEG image file list if necessary 2 Select an album or JPEG image file using and press gt The slideshow starts If
305. a number button repeatedly to select a character Example Press the number 3 button once to enter p Press the number 3 button three times to enter F 2 Press ENTER and select the next character 3 Press M or select and press ENTER 1 Playing the Disc on Other DVD Equipment Finalise Finalising is necessary when you play discs recorded with this recorder on other DVD equipment When you finalise a DVD RW DVD RW Video mode DVD R or DVD R Video mode a DVD menu will be automatically created which can be displayed on other DVD equipment Before finalising check the differences between the disc types in the table below Differences between disc types Discs are automatically finalised when removed from the recorder However you may need to finalise the disc for certain DVD equipment or if the recording time is short You can edit or record on the disc even after finalising RW Finalising is unnecessary when playing a disc on VR format compatible equipment Even if your other DVD equipment is VR format compatible you may need to finalise the disc especially if the recording time is short You can edit or record on the disc even after finalising Finalising is necessary when playing on any equipment other than this recorder After finalising you cannot edit or record on the disc If you want to record on it again unfinalise page 46 or reformat the disc pag
306. ace only with part number specified SWITCHING REGULATOR 4 44 SRV 2057EK 4 43 RDR HXD870 HXD970 HXD1070 4 3 PRINTED WIRING BOARDS 274 BOARD SIDE A Uses unleaded solder g Li au Ed Tite 2 A IRA steer m 5 o 7 m mim 79 P souls Som 00 A lt D L a ae ay CR p B TAL V 400 CN201 41 D212 B 6 D202 1 0216 7 CN202 4 0214 7 0203 5 CN203 6 D204 1 10201 4 0201 5 0205 2 0208 7 0202 5 0206 2 0203 7 0209 7 0205 6 0207 2 0204 6 0210 7 0206 7 0211 7 FL DRIVER LINE 2 FUNCTION SW 4 45 4 46 FR 274 RDR HXD870 HXD970 HXD1070 AV 114 BOARD SIDE A Uses unleaded solder AV 114 BOARD SIDE A CN101 CN103 CN105 CN106 CN302 o oo 99 D101 x LS OFO OO gt O R639 0601 11 E E m 66 7008000 eO B C310 e X C122 C6 D102 I D103 D106 D108 D401 D402 D419 D421 D422 D513 D514 D515 D516 D517 D518 D519 D520 D521 D522 D530 D531 D801
307. acters appears Press or to highlight a character on the keyboard then press ENTER to select Press the ___ yellow button to see special characters Press the green button to save Please enter a keyword 4 Selecta character on keyboard using xt Im and press ENTER To switch between upper case lower case or characters with accents press the yellow button Keyboard repeatedly To cancel entering a new keyword press the red button Back 5 Repeat step 4 to enter keyword 6 Press the green button Save The entered keyword is registered To delete the keyword select the keyword you want to delete and press the red button Delete To change the keyword select the keyword you want to change and press the green button Edit To set a programme for timer recording See One Button Recording GUIDE Plus in the UK only page 73 Hint When two or more keywords are set for Choice you can select for sub category 5 for one day until the programme guide data can be received Ifthe programme guide data has not been received after waiting for a day search for the host channel at the following website and set the host channel manually Changing the GUIDE Plus host channel manually page 69 www europe guideplus com Changing the GU
308. allows you to adjust the sound according to the playback and connection conditions 1 Press SYSTEM MENU while the recorder is in stop mode 2 Select Initial Setup and press ENTER 3 Select Audio In and press ENTER The Audio In setup appears with the following options The default settings are underlined e initial Setup Basic m NICAM Digital Tuner Analog Tuner Level Standard Analog Tuner External Audio Video In Out Bilingual Recording DV Input Audio Out Language Recording v NICAM Select page 72 NICAM Normally select this position Standard Select this if the sound from NICAM broadcasts is not clear Analog Tuner Level If the playback sound is distorted set this item to Compression The recorder reduces the audio output level This function affects the output of the following jacks LINE 2 OUT R AUDIO L jacks LINE 3 TV jack LINE 1 DECODER jack Normal Normally select this position Compression Select this when the playback sound from the speakers is distorted pue 135 pue continued 1 37 138 140 External Audio Stereo Select this when receiving stereo programmes from connected equipment Bilingual Select this when receiving bilingual programmes from connected equipment Q Note When receiving audio input signals from the DV input jack the record
309. amme of up to 24 steps 1 Press PLAY MODE during playback The Play Mode menu appears 2 Select Programme and press ENTER 3 Select Input Edit Programme and press ENTER The Input Edit Programme display differs depending upon the disc type Example DVD Programme Current Title 001 Chapter 01 gt Step Title 001 014 Chapter 01 02 Title 001 Chapter 01 Title 002 Chapter 02 Title 003 Title 004 Title 005 Title 006 Title 007 Title 008 Selecta title or album example Title 001 using and press ENTER D Selecta chapter or track example Chapter 01 using and press ENTER The chapter or track is programmed If you make a mistake select the step number example 01 using t and press CLEAR 6 To programme other chapters or tracks press 4 4 to selecta step number and repeat steps 4 and 5 7 Press Programme play starts gt continued 63 To cancel Programme play Press CLEAR during playback Or set Programme to Cancel Programme Play in the Play Mode menu To erase the programme Press CLEAR in stop mode Or set Programme to Erase Programme List in the Play Mode menu Hints The program you made remains after Programme play finishes To play the same program again set Programme to Start Programme Play in the Play Mode menu However the programme is
310. an inclined position It is designed to be operated in a horizontal position only Keep the recorder and discs away from equipment with strong magnets such as microwave ovens or large loudspeakers Do not place heavy objects on the recorder On recording Make trial recordings before making the actual recording On compensation for lost recordings Sony is not liable and will not compensate for any lost recordings or relevant losses including when recordings are not made due to reasons including recorder failure or when the contents of a recording are lost or damaged as a result of recorder failure or repair undertaken to the recorder Sony will not restore recover or replicate the recorded contents under any circumstances Copyrights Television programmes films video tapes discs and other materials may be copyrighted Unauthorized recording of such material may be contrary to the provisions of the copyright laws Also use of this recorder with cable television transmission may require authorization from the cable television transmitter and or programme owner This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is protected by U S patents and other intellectual property rights Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized by Macrovision and is intended for home and other limited viewing uses only unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision Reverse engineering or dis
311. an record any programme position on the set top box receiver To watch cable programmes you need to match the programme position on the recorder to the aerial output programme position on the set top box receiver Place the set top box controller near the remote sensor on the set top box receiver Set top box controller age 15 Set top box pag receiver SCART supplied Aerial cable not supplied to ANALOG AERIAL IN to G LINK 5 DIGITAL AERIAL DVD recorder to ANALOG AERIAL OUT TV q Aerial cable supplied to aerial input p Signal flow your set top box receiver does not have an aerial output jack connect aerial to recorder s ANALOG AERIAL IN jack 72 Connect only if your set top box receiver has a SCART connector pue sdmyooH continued 17 18 20 C Receiving terrestrial For analogue broadcasting Use this hookup if you watch cable programme positions without a set top box receiver Also use this hookup if you are only connecting an aerial antenna With this hookup you can record any programme position by selecting the programme position Step 2 Connecting the Video Cords HDMI Cord Select one of the following patterns through according to the input jack on your TV monitor proj
312. an unexpected phone call or visitor while watching TV When connecting the recorder to your TV using the SCART jack do the followings set SMARTLINK to This Recorder Only in the Options setup page 150 set Pause to TV s Tuner in the Options 2 setup page 150 preset programme positions by downloading from your TV using Download from TV of Auto Channel Setting in the Analog Tuner setup page 133 If you do not make the SCART connection set Pause to Recorder s Tuner in the Options 2 setup page 150 44 9 gt gt TV PAUSE STOP Example Play a DVD while recording to the HDD 1 while recording press DVD and insert the DVD into the recorder 2 Press TITLE LIST to display the DVD Title List 3 Select the title you want to play and press ENTER Playback starts from the selected title Q Note You cannot play a DVD DivX video or VIDEO CD recorded in the NTSC colour system while recording on the HDD in the PAL SECAM colour system 1 While viewing a TV broadcast press TV PAUSE The picture pauses and the recorder starts recording the current TV channel to the HDD It may take up to 10 seconds to start recording 2 Press to resume watching the programme You can fast forward fast reverse pause or stop the programme using 44 H and without affecting the recording 3 Press REC STOP stop
313. and JPEG image file information Displays the image JPEG image file number recording date and time JPEG image file name and JPEG image file size 6 Disc type and remaining space of current disc To scroll the list display by page Page mode Press 19 P while the Photo Album list is displayed Each time you press 99 PPI the entire Photo Album list changes to the next previous page of albums JPEG image files 9114 switch between the album list and JPEG image file list 1 Press while the Photo Album list is displayed 2 Select Display Mode using and press ENTER 3 Select File or Album using 44 press ENTER To turn off the Photo Album list Press SYSTEM MENU continued 12 3 Managing JPEG Image Files on the HDD SYSTEM MENU t4 ENTER Press SYSTEM MENU The System Menu appears 2 Select Photo Album and press ENTER The Photo Album menu appears 3 Select View Edit Photos on the HDD and press ENTER The Photo Album list appears 4 select an album or JPEG image file and press gt The sub menu appears D select an option and press ENTER You can make the following edits to the album JPEG image file 9114 Start Slideshow Starts slideshow page 124 Start Audio Slideshow HDD only Starts a slideshow with the sound page 124 New Album Creat
314. and press ENTER 4 select Basic and press ENTER seu Next Screen Format Protect Disc Finalise Format DVD RW Optimise HDD 5 Select Input Disc Name and press ENTER 6 Select Next Screen and press ENTER Enter the disc name page 42 Q Note You can enter up to 64 characters for a DVD RW DVD R VR mode disc name and 40 characters fora DVD RW DVD RW Video mode DVD R DVD R Video mode disc name The disc name may not appear when the disc is played on other DVD equipment Protecting a disc 1 inserta disc See 1 Inserting a Disc on page 36 2 Press SYSTEM MENU The System Menu appears 3 Select Disc Setup and press ENTER Setup Input Disc Name Next Screen Format Protect Disc Off Finalise Format DVD RW VR Mode Optimise HDD 4 Select Title Name and press ENTER The display for entering characters appears The current name is displayed at the input row Input row Input Title 13 00 Fri20 04 Pr4 Upper case Lower case 5 Move the cursor to the point where you want to insert the character using 4 To erase all of the characters press and hold CLEAR for 2 seconds or more 6 Select Upper case or Lower case using 44 gt gt The characters for the selected type are displayed The type of characters will change according to the languag
315. ape e g card heart disc with a label or sticker on it disc that has cellophane tape or sticker adhesive on it On replacement of parts In the event that this unit is repaired repaired parts may be collected for reuse or recycling purposes 159 Notes Audio Tracks JPEG Image Files and DivX Video Files About MP3 audio tracks JPEG image files and DivX video files MP3 is an audio compression technology that satisfies certain ISO MPEG regulations JPEG is an image compression technology You can play MP3 MPEGI Audio Layer 3 format audio tracks and JPEG image files on the HDD or DATA CDs CD ROMs CD Rs CD RW3s or JPEG image files on the HDD or DATA DVDs DVD ROMs DVD RWs DVD Rs DVD RWs DVD Rs DivX is a video file compression technology developed by DivX Inc This product is an official DivX Certified product You can play DATA CDs CD ROMs CD Rs CD RWs and DATA DVDs DVD ROMs DVD RWs DVD Rs D VD RWs DVD Rs that contain DivX video files DATA DVDs must be recorded according to 1509660 Level 1 Level 2 Romeo Joliet or UDF Universal Disk Format 1 02 1 50 2 00 or 2 01 format for the recorder to recognise the MP3 tracks JPEG image files and DivX video files DATA CDs must be recorded according to 1509660 Level 1 Level 2 Romeo or Joliet format for the recorder to recognise the MP3 tracks JPEG image files and DivX video
316. appears in the front panel display One Touch Play for SCART HDMI connections only Press C gt With one touch of button the recorder and your TV automatically turn on and the TV s input is switched to the recorder Playback starts automatically 6 Hint You can also use C gt button in step 3 page 80 to start playback yoeq eld Note When using the HDMI connection there may be a delay before the playback picture appears on the TV screen and the beginning portion of the playback picture may not be displayed continued 61 Playback options To check the position of the buttons below see the illustration on page 80 Buttons Operations AUDIO Selects one of the audio tracks recorded on the disc when pressed a repeatedly in normal playback mode HDD Selects the language ES 3 uM DATA guage HDD Selects the main or sub sound RECEN video file only BAD Selects stereo or monaural audio tracks SUBTITLE Selects a subtitle language when pressed repeatedly DivX video file only lt e instant replay instant advance Each time you press replays the scene for the following duration 5 seconds 15 seconds 30 seconds 1 minute 2 minutes 3 minutes 5 minutes 10 minutes 20 minutes advances the time in 10 minute increments 2 hours Each
317. are looking for use the GUIDE Plus system to set the timer for recording page 73 You can set the system to display your favourite programmes according to conditions that you set such as category and keyword page 67 For more information see Watching TV Using the GUIDE Plus System page 65 Watching TV Using the GUIDE Plus System Colour buttons 7 GUIDE 13 ent PAGE PAGE DAY DAY Press GUIDE The GUIDE Plus system Home Screen appears Pr2 25 1010 Record Channels Home Friends The one with the Male Nanny A jealous Ross mocks Rache s choice of an over sensitive male nanny for Emma while Phonbe must choose between two unexpected 02 10 00 120 B 6 4 Search MyTV Schedule Tue 25 10 00 10 30 m ONE Flimbles Starship two Friends it v 1 This Alias This gt Promotional 4 Sally Jessy Raph Our b Go Panel Armageddon News at Ten The Secret 2 Football Emmerdale Homes gt 2 Select a programme using 4 gt and press ENTER The GUIDE Plus system disappears and the programme position changes to the selected programme Learning the common element
318. ars The title starts to play Divide Title HDD World Sports Rec time 74 0 10 00 Play Divide 1 Select the dividing point using lt lt gt gt and press To return to the beginning of the title press M and then press Ke Press ENTER The display asks for confirmation Select Yes and press ENTER The title is divided into two Creating and Editing a Playlist Playlist edit allows you to edit or re edit without changing the actual recordings You can create up to 99 Playlist titles Q Note Playlist titles containing titles recorded with the copy protection signal cannot be dubbed or moved page 99 gt jG N TITLE LIST et ENTER Press TITLE LIST Switch to the Playlist page 92 Press gt The sub menu appears Select Create and press ENTER The original titles in the Title List appear Select an original title to add to the Playlist and press ENTER The selected title is added to the Playlist Repeat steps 3 and 4 to select all of the titles you want to add to the Playlist 1 23 Erasing and Editing a Chapter HDD You can edit individual chapters within a title To edit DVD RWs DVD Rs VR mode without changing the original recordings create a Playlist page 96 NN TITLE LIST t4 ENTER 44 lt lt o 1 Press TITLE LIST Fo
319. assembly is prohibited continued 3 10 12 Quick Guide to Disc Types Recordable and playable discs Icon used Type Disc Logo in this manual Formatting new discs Compatibility with other DVD players finalising Select Video Mode Off in HDD Dub HDD contents to a Recording Format ARE aa Hard disk page 144 play drive HDD internal Vi Select Video Mode Dub HDD contents to a On default in N DVD Video mode to play HDD Recording on other DVD players Format page 144 Automatically DVD RW formatted mode DVD RW r ET VIDEO automatically finalise Playable only on VR mode compatible players finalisation unnecessary Format in VR mode page 36 DVD R DVD R Em DVD R DL Playable on most DVD players finalisation necessary page 45 Format in Video mode page 36 Automatically formatted in VR mode DVD R VIDEO Playable on most DVD players finalisation necessary page 45 VR DVD R m de DP R4 7 DVD R Video gt DL mode 4 2 Playahle discs Format in VR mode page 36 1 Formatting is performed in the Format setup page 47 Playable only on DVD R in VR mode compatible players finalisation necessary page 45 Automatically Playable on most DVD formatted in Vide
320. atically when you do not use the recorder for more than 20 minutes after the dubbing has finished To cancel dubbing Press and hold HDD DVD DUB for more than one second When dubbing Move is stopped partway no part of the title will be moved to the dubbing target However note that this will decrease the free space for DVD Rs DVD Rs About dubbing mode appears next to the title that can be dubbed at high speed High speed dubbing in the Title Edit display The following titles are dubbed at normal speed Real Time dubbing Titles containing both main and sub sounds except DVD RWs DVD Rs VR mode Titles recorded in mixed picture size 4 3 and 16 9 etc except for DVD RWs DVD Rs VR mode Titles recorded on DVD RWs DVD RWs Video mode DVD R DVD R Video mode 16 9 size titles recorded on DVD RW DVD R The minimum required time is as follows approximate HDD DVD Dubbing HDD You can dub a single title by pressing the HDD DVD DUB button during playback 1 Start playback of a title For playing a title see Playing the Recorded Programme DVD on page 80 2 Press HDD DVD DUB The recorder starts dubbing the current playing title from the beginning The recorder turns off automatically when you do not use the recorder for more than 20 minutes after the dubbing has finished To cancel the dubbing Press and hold HDD DVD DUB for more than one secon
321. atically output even when you select MPEG Audio DRC Dynamic Range Control DVDs only Selects the dynamic range difference between soft and loud sounds setting when playing a DVD that conforms to Audio DRC This affects the output from the following jacks LINE 2 OUT R AUDIO L jacks LINE 3 TV jack LINE 1 DECODER jack DIGITAL OUT COAXIAL HDMI OUT jack only when Dolby Digital Output is set to Dolby Digital gt PCM page 138 On Makes low sounds clear even if you turn the volume down Off Normally select this position Manual recording mode The table below shows the approximate recording times for the HDD and the different DVD types in each manual recording mode as well as the standard recording mode equivalents The recording time for the HDD Recording mode RDR RDR RDR RDR HXD770 HXD870 HXD970 HXD1070 Approx recording time hours HQ 17 23 36 73 25 34 53 105 MN32 25 34 53 105 HQ MN31 27 36 57 115 MN30 29 39 61 120 MN29 31 42 66 130 MN28 33 45 70 140 MN27 36 48 75 150 MN26 37 50 79 155 HSP MN25 39 53 84 165 MN24 42 56 88 175 MN23 44 59 92 185 MN22 46 62 97 195 MN21 51 68 105 210 SP MN20 54 73 115 230 MNI9 59 79 120 245 MNI8 63 84 130 265 LSP MNI7 67 90 140 280 MNI6 72 96 150 300 MNI5 75 100 155 315 ESP MNI4 78 105 165 335 MNI3 82 110 175
322. ayback For MP3 discs goes to the next or previous album when pressed repeatedly lt lt gt gt Fast reverses fast forwards the fast disc when pressed during reverse fast playback forward Search speed changes as follows fast reverse fast forward 44 lt 44 lt 2 When you press and hold the button fast forward fast reverse continues at the selected speed until you release the button To resume normal playback press Pauses playback To resume normal playback press I pause 1 26 Hint You can turn off the dubbing menu by pressing the DISPLAY button during dubbing Press the DISPLAY button again to display the dubbing menu Q Note You cannot set a scene to be shorter than one second Notes on playing sound tracks on a cD When playing DTS encoded CDs excessive noise will be heard from the LINE 3 TV LINE 1 DECODER LINE 2 OUT R AUDIO L jacks To avoid possible damage to the audio system the user should take proper precautions when the LINE 3 TV LINE 1 DECODER LINE 2 OUT R AUDIO L jacks of the recorder are connected to an amplification system To enjoy DTS Digital Surround M playback an external DTS decoder must be connected to the DIGITAL OUT jack of the recorder Set the sound to Stereo using the AUDIO button when you play DTS sound tracks on a CD page 108 Playing a specific portion repeatedly A B Repeat 1
323. b OUT Pr Cr OUT 20 BLUR 16 VIDEO L1 IN 19 OUT _________ OUT Y10UT 15 R C OUT Pr Cry RorC OUT 11 G OUT PY Y G OUT a 16 BLANKING OUT LINE1 TV 10 N LINK RGB M OUT 8 FUNCTION SW OUT 6 LIN 2 RIN A L1 IN L AL1 IN R AV1_R_IN E E L OUT LOUT A AVUOUTL O O 0501 502 FUNC ON FUNCTION SW Abbreviation AUS Australian model 3 3 DVD C OUT 59 B IN DT 120 BOARD lew B CN103 1 2 0408 C R IN SEE PAGE 3 5 T BUFFER C R IN RCSEL1 Y_IN T CN302 BUFFER 4 JA401 12 S VIDEO 1 VIDEO 1 AUDIO L a406 1 i AUDIO 0404 AMUTE1 i 0407 9 1 1 40 v 39 CB VIDEO OUT 1 1 39 CR 177 3 402 a YP_OUT Pg 2 4 10 12 AUS only B IN G IN 2 52 14 16403 3 5 SELECTOR TO FROM RD 065 BOARD CN2301 1 2 SEE PAGE 3 7 R IN CN101 1 2 402 3 5 BUFFER CSYNCIN Q403 BUFFER TEXTVIN 16101 1 5 IT CONTROLLER 12103 1 5
324. ces from the original one in the exploded views are not supplied Tap by 5 pp dotted line with mark are critical for safety e Items marked are not stocked since they e Color Indication of Appearance Parts Replace only with part number specified are seldom required for routine service Some Example delay should be anticipated when ordering these KNOB BALANCE WHITE RED Abbreviation items 1 1 AUS Australian model Parts Color 8 1 1 OVERALL SECTION Ref No Part No Description Remarks 1 X 2176 442 1 COVER ASSY TRAY AEP UK 1 2177 245 1 COVER ASSY TRAY AUS 2 A 1259 528 A PANEL BLOCK ASSY FRONT BLACK HXD870 BLACK AEP1 UK 2 A 1267 797 A PANEL BLOCK ASSY FRONT SILVER HXD870 SILVER AEP1 UK 2 A 1267 983 A PANEL BLOCK ASSY FRONT HXD870 BLACK AEP2 2 1268 004 PANEL BLOCK ASSY FRONT HXD870 SILVER AEP2 2 A 1268 009 A PANEL BLOCK ASSY FRONT HXD970 AEP1 UK 2 A 1268 031 A PANEL BLOCK ASSY FRONT HXD1070 AEP1 UK 2 A 1268 074 A PANEL BLOCK ASSY FRONT HXD970 AEP2 2 A 1268 084 A PANEL BLOCK ASSY FRONT HXD1070 AEP2 2 A 1367 716 A PANEL BLOCK ASSY FRONT BLACK HXD870 BLACK AUS 2 1367 717 PANEL BLOCK ASSY FRONT SILVER HXD870 SILVER AUS 8 1 Ref No 2 Cabinet s Color not supplied Part No A 1367 718 A 1 834 077 11 3 077 331 01 Description Remarks PANEL BLOCK ASS
325. channel is skipped page 134 gt A timer recording started which changed the channels gt The Parental Lock is activated page 145 The picture from equipment connected to the recorder s input jack does not appear on the screen gt If the equipment is connected to the LINE 1 DECODER jack select L1 in the front panel display by pressing INPUT If the equipment is connected to the LINE 2 IN jacks select L2 in the front panel display by pressing INPUT The playback picture or TV programme from the equipment connected through the recorder is distorted gt If the playback picture output from a DVD player VCR or tuner goes through your recorder before reaching your TV the copy protection signal applied to some programmes could affect picture quality Disconnect the playback equipment in question and connect it directly to your TV The picture does not fill the screen gt Set Type in the Playback setup in accordance with the screen size of your TV page 144 The picture does not fill the screen even though the picture size is set in TV Type in the Playback setup gt The picture size of the title is fixed The picture is black and white gt Check that LINE 3 Out in the In Out setup is set to the appropriate item that conforms to your system page 136 gt If you using a SCART cord be sure to use one that is fully wired 21 pins 1 37
326. cleared after you remove the disc or press 1 0 You can repeat Programme play Set Repeat to Repeat Programme in the Mode menu page 84 You can select Programme from Play Mode in the System Menu Adjusting the picture quality HDD yoeg e d DivX video file only You can adjust the picture quality from connected equipment such as a TV or projector by selecting a preset setting You can also adjust the picture quality by changing detailed settings and store up to three settings in the memory 1 Press SYSTEM MENU during playback or in pause mode The System Menu appears 2 Select Picture Adjustment and press ENTER 3 Select a preset setting using gt and press ENTER Dynamic produces a bold dynamic picture by increasing the picture contrast and the colour intensity Standard displays a standard picture Professional displays an original picture Memory 1 Memory2 Memory3 Your own settings To create your own settings see To create your own setting below gt continued 85 86 88 To check detailed settings for the selected preset press DISPLAY 4 Press SYSTEM MENU to exit To create your own setting 1 Select Memory 1 Memory2 or Memory3 in step 3 2 Select Detailed Settings and press ENTER The display for adjusting detailed settings appears GJ Memory1 Prog Motion Motion
327. cording to DVD and the VPS PDC function set to off The recording mode cannot be set to AUTO when VPS PDC is set to 14 Adjusting the recording picture quality You can adjust the picture quality by selecting a preset setting You can also adjust the picture quality by changing detailed settings and store up to three settings in the memory SYSTEM MENU E S 4 14 e DISPLAY 1 Press SYSTEM MENU in stop mode The System Menu appears 2 Select Picture Adjustment and press ENTER 3 Select a preset setting and press ENTER Tuner TV broadcasts VCR Video cassettes DTV Digital broadcasts Memory 1 Memory2 Memory3 Your own settings To create your own settings see create your own setting on page 76 To check the detailed settings for the selected preset press DISPLAY Press SYSTEM MENU to exit 16 Setting the timer manually butions 999 Colour buttons GUIDE TI tL ENTER CN Press GUIDE Select Schedule in the Menu bar The SCHEDULE list appears Press the green button Manual Pr2 25 10 10 Please enter the recording date and press the green button to confirm 215 Grid Search No programmes MyTV Schedule SP Once HDD HDD Remain DVD Remain 1
328. cted DV device is ROOT IRM IRM is displayed at the side position of GUID display 9e lt Vendor name set in ConfigROM of connected DV device Data are displayed only if one DV device 15 identified Depending on the device the vendor name may not be set in ConfigROM MN Model name set in ConfigROM of the connected DV device Data are displayed only if one DV device 15 identified Depending on the device the model name may not be set in ConfigROM Transport Mode data obtained from the DV device Data are displayed only if one DV device is identified 2 Transport State data obtained from the DV device CT Cassette Type data obtained from the DV device W S Power state data obtained from the DV device 9 Write protection data obtained from DV device 9 5 Output signal mode data obtained from DV device A Connect AV data obtained from the DV device V Camera Vtr mode data obtained from the DV device MD DV device mode Camera or VTR is displayed only if one DV device is identified Whether Yes in the process of requesting DV input or No is Normally Yes is indicated only when CH is set to DV indicated in XXX Input Line System setting DV decode XXX LineSys TC Time code data of the DVdecode Stream or response data of the Time Code command Stream time code data are obtained when the tape is played in forward direction
329. cts a method of outputting video signals for the LINE 3 TV jack Video Outputs video signals S Video Outputs S video signals RGB Outputs RGB signals Q Notes f your TV does not accept S video or RGB signals the image will not be displayed in the selected method on the TV screen even if you select S Video or See the instructions supplied with your TV SMARTLINK is available only when Video is selected RGB signals are not output when using the HDMI connection Receivable channels TV system Channel coverage BG West European E2 E12 VHF Countries except those listed below Italia A H VHF E21 E69 UHF 51 520 CATV 521 541 HYPER 01 505 East European R1 2 Countries R21 R69 UHF 51 520 521 S41 HYPER 01 S05 CATV I Great Britain Ireland J VHF Ireland South Africa 4 11 13 VHF B21 B69 UHF 51 520 521 541 HYPER 501 S05 L France F2 F10 VHF F21 F69 UHF B QCATV 521 541 HYPER receive broadcasts in France select L LINE 1 In Selects a method of inputting video signals for the LINE 1 DECODER jack The picture will not be clear if this setting does not match the type of video input signal Video Inputs video signals S Video Inputs S video signals RGB Inputs RGB signals Decoder
330. d When dubbing Move is stopped partway no part of the title will be moved to the dubbing target However note that this will decrease the free space for DVD Rs DVD Rs About dubbing mode Titles on the HDD are dubbed to a disc at high speed High speed dubbing Titles on a disc are dubbed to the HDD at normal speed Real Time dubbing To convert the recording mode only when dubbing from a disc to the HDD After step 1 press REC MODE to select the recording mode Note You cannot use the HDD DVD DUB button in the following cases Dub the title using Dubbing List page 100 When dubbing the title recorded in MN6 mode or longer duration mode to a DVD RW DVD R When dubbing the title recorded in HQ mode to a DVD Required times for High speed Dubbing from HDD to DVD for 60 minute programme Speed 2 4 2 High speed Rec DVD RW DVD R DVD R mode DVD RW Double Dual DVD R Layer Layer DVD R HQ Approx Approx Approx 10 min 25 min 30 min HSP Approx Approx Approx 6 min 16 min 20 min 40 sec 40 sec SP Approx Approx Approx 5 min 12 min 15 min 30 sec LSP Approx Approx Approx 4 min 10 min 12 min ESP Approx Approx Approx 3 min 8 min 10 min 20 sec 20 sec LP Approx Approx Approx 2 min 6 min 7 min 30 sec 15 sec 30 sec EP Approx Approx Approx min 60min 5min 40 3 SLP Approx Approx Approx min 60
331. de on the HDD set Manual Rec Mode to go to setup and then select HQ For details about manual recording mode see page 141 For timer recording you can also select AUTO as recording mode which maximizes the recording quality for the space available on the disc if recording to DVD or to fit onto a blank disc if recording to HDD Timer Recording GUIDE Plus Manual HDD There are two methods to set the timer within the GUIDE Plus system One Button Recording and setting the timer manually You can set the timer for a total of 32 programmes 8 programmes when using the VPS PDC function up to 30 days in advance Notes When the recorder is connected to set top box receiver and you want to record using the GUIDE Plus system turn on the set top box receiver and connect the set top box controller Do not operate your set top box receiver just before or during a timer recording This may prevent the accurate recording of a programme One Button Recording GUIDE Plus in the UK only You can use the GUIDE Plus system to set the timer to record a programme up to seven days in advance Colour buttons 7 GUIDE lt 206 Hitt Approx recording time hours Recording HDD mode RDR RDR RDR RDR HXD HXD HXD HXD 770 870 970 1070 HQ High 25 34 53 105 1hr quality 1 min HSP 137 50 79 155 Ihr 30 min
332. deo mode set by Format DVD RW of Basic in the Disc Setup setup page 128 For DVD R discs DVD Rs are automatically formatted in Video mode To format an unused DVD R in VR mode format the disc in the Format setup page 47 before you make a recording If the disc is recordable on this recorder you can manually re format the disc to make a blank disc page 47 3 Select Video In Out and press ENTER Initial Setup Basic Input Colour System Next Screen Digital Tuner Component Video Out Analog Tuner LINE 3 Out Video In Out LINE 1 In Audio In NTSC on PAL TV Audio Out Language Recording v 4 Select LINE 3 Out and press ENTER 25 Initial Setup Basic Input Colour System Digital Tuner Component Video Out S Video Analog Tuner LINE 3 Out RGB Video In Out LINE 1 In Audio In NTSC on PAL TV Audio Out Language Recording v D Press 4 4 to select Video or RGB and press ENTER 6 Select LINE 1 In and press ENTER BS Initial Setup Basic Input Colour System Digital Tuner Component Video Out S Video Analog Tuner LINE 3 Out RGB Video In Out Decoder Audio In NTSC on PAL TV Audio Out Language Recording v 7 Press 4 4 to select Decoder and press ENTER 8 Press 97 RETURN to return the cursor to the left column 9 Select Analog Tuner and press ENTER Initial Setup Basic Auto Channel Setting Auto
333. ding format on DVD RWs or record again on DVD RWs that have been finalised Programme Information The programme information display provides a quick and easy way to View descriptions of the programmes being broadcast now and next on the current channel View descriptions of the programmes being broadcast now and next on the other channels e INFO et D Displaying the programme information 1 Select a channel 2 Press INFO The Information display appears showing a description of the current programme on view 40002 10 10 08 Now Live from Prague 10 00 11 00 Next NCE News 11 00 11 30 suoljesadg aiseg 14613 7 gt i J rJ Ajuo 19 1 1 104 59911185 0 apiny gt continued 49 50 52 Available buttons Information display Buttons Operations 4 Toggle display between description of the current next programme Display programme information for other channels ENTER View the selected channel INFO Display the detailed programme information Timer Recording For Freeview users only Before Recording Before you start recording Check that the disc has enough available space for the recording page 40 For the HDD DVD RWs and DVD RWs you
334. directly connected equipment Note however that the method of operation sometimes varies according to the characteristics and specifications of the equipment to be connected and that operations and data transactions are sometimes not possible on some connected equipment Note Normally only one piece of equipment can be connected to this recorder by the i LINK cable DV connecting cable When connecting this recorder to i LINK compatible equipment having two more 1 LINK jacks DV jacks see the instruction i LINK baud rate i LINK s maximum baud rate varies according to the equipment Three maximum baud rates are defined S100 approx 100 Mbps 5200 approx 200 Mbps S400 approx 400 Mbps The baud rate is listed under Specifications in the instruction manual of each equipment It is also indicated near the i LINK jack on some equipment The maximum baud rate of equipment on which it is not indicated such as this unit is 5100 When units are connected to equipment having a different maximum baud rate the baud rate sometimes differs from the indicated baud rate What is Mbps Mbps stands for megabits per second or the amount of data that can be sent or received in one second For example a baud rate of 100 Mbps means that 100 megabits of data can be sent in one second i LINK functions on this recorder For details on how to dub when this recorder is
335. displayed when the diagnostic program is started To enter each mode press the corresponding key 1 HDD CHECK MODE 1 4 HDD Information S M A R T Attribute Information S M A R T DST HDD R W Check Check the HDD information Press 1 key the remote control unit for servicing Check the following data Model Is the correct model name of the HDD displayed Recog No Is a positive value displayed SMART threshold Is not exceeded displayed 7 HDD Information Cylinders Heads 0x0010 Sec Track Model Maxtor 4808010 Firmware SN R22RRL2SE Major ATA ATAPI 7 E Life Time 33h 10m 30s B Recog No 1 C SMART threshold not exceeded To return to the menu screen press Clear key C How to check the HDD return sheet MODEL 6 not recognize or recognize gt RECOG NO Positive or Negative gt SMART threshold exceeded or not exceeded gt Check HDD not recognize or recognize gt 4 5 HDD Life Time h m 5 gt 6 HDD Status Blank No Model Name gt 7 FL Display E01 E02 No Problem gt Recording Error history E 9 AIA ATAPI History ERR ete gt 4 remote control unit for servicing Tests to be executed D HDD Information Checks the HDD information 2 S M A R T DST Executes a simplified test or a
336. e Audio In setup to Normal page 137 An alternate audio track cannot be recorded or played gt When recording from connected equipment set External Audio to Bilingual in the Audio In setup page 138 gt Multilingual tracks main and sub cannot be recorded on the HDD when Video Mode DVD RWs DVD RWs Video mode DVD Rs or DVD Rs Video mode To record the language set Bilingual Recording in the Audio In setup to A L or B R before recording page 138 To record both the main and sub sounds on a disc record on DVD RWs DVD Rs VR mode To record on the HDD set HDD Recording Format to Video Mode Off in the Recording setup page 144 gt If you have connected an audio component to the DIGITAL OUT COAXIAL jack and want to change the audio track for the HDD when HDD Recording Format is set to Video Mode Off in the Recording setup page 144 DVD RWs DVD Rs VR mode during playback set Dolby Digital Output in the Audio Out setup to Dolby Digital gt PCM page 138 The sound is breaking up gt The signal strength is low gt Check aerial installation 154 Recording does not stop immediately after you press REC STOP gt It will take a few seconds for the recorder to input disc data before recording can stop On screen instructions may appear after pressing REC STOP In this
337. e my 1401 Nauru na 1405 Nepali ne 1412 Dutch nl 1415 Norwegian no 1503 Occitan oc 1513 Afan Oromo om 1518 Oriya or 1601 Panjabi pa 1612 Polish pl 1619 Pashto ps Pushto ps 1620 Portuguese pt 1721 Quechua qu Number Language 1813 1814 1815 1821 1823 1901 1904 code Rhaeto Romance rm Kirundi rn Romanian ro Russian ru Kinyarwanda rw Sanskrit sa Sindhi sd Sangho sg Serbo Croatian sh Singhalese si Slovak sk Slovenian sl Samoan sm Shona sn Somali so Albanian sq Serbian sr Siswati ss Sesotho st Sundanese su Swedish sv Swahili sw Tamil ta Telugu te Tajik tg Thai th Tigrinya ti Turkmen tk Tagalog tl Setswana tn Tonga to Turkish tr Tsonga ts Tatar tt Twi tw Ukrainian uk Urdu ur Uzbek uz Vietnamese vi Volap k vo Wolof wo Xhosa xh Yoruba yo Chinese zh Zulu zu jeuonippy 167 1 42 SECTION 2 DISASSEMBLY NOTE The following flow chart shows the disassembly procedure Set Upper case Page 2 2 Tray cover assembly Page 2 2 Front panel section Page 2 3 FR 274 board FL 178 board Page 2 3 DVD drive Page 2 4 Power supply block AV 114 board Page 2 6 Page 2 5 2 1 RDR HXD870 HXD970 HXD1070 Hard disk Page 2 5 DT 120 board Page 2 6 NOTE Follow the disassembly procedure the numerical order given
338. e 47 However if you reformat the disc all recorded contents will be erased Finalising is necessary The disc can be played only on equipment that supports DVD R in VR mode After finalising you cannot edit or record on the disc using this recorder 6 Labelling and Protecting a Disc You can execute options effective for the entire disc in Disc Setup setup SYSTEM MENU t4 ENTER Labelling a disc 1 inserta disc See 1 Inserting a Disc on page 36 2 Press SYSTEM MENU The System Menu appears 3 Select Disc Setup and press ENTER Disc Setup Input Disc Name Next Screen Format Protect Disc Off Finalise Format DVD RW gt VR Mode Optimise HDD gt continued Finalising is necessary when playing on any equipment other than this recorder After finalising you cannot edit or record on the disc SYSTEM MENU ey 6 th ENTER e DISPLAY 1 inserta disc See 1 Inserting a Disc on page 36 2 Press SYSTEM MENU The System Menu appears 3 Select Disc Setup and press ENTER Disc Setup Input Disc Name Next Screen Format Protect Disc Off Finalise Format DVD RW gt VR Mode Optimise HDD 4 Select Finalise and press ENTER Disc Setup Basic Next Screen Format Unfinalise xx min required Optimise HDD 5 Select Finalise and press ENTER gt 62
339. e does not conform to the Compact Disc CD standard playback on this product is not guaranteed continued 11 Q Notes Some DVD RWs DVD Rs DVD RWs DVD Rs DVD RAMs CD RWs CD Rs cannot be played on this recorder due to the recording quality or physical condition of the disc or the characteristics of the recording device and authoring software The disc will not play if it has not been correctly finalised For more information see the operating instructions for the recording device You cannot mix VR mode and Video mode on the same DVD RW To change the disc s format reformat the disc page 47 Note that the disc s contents will be erased after reformatting You cannot shorten the time required for recording even with high speed discs It is recommended that you use discs with For Video printed on their packaging You cannot add new recordings to DVD Rs DVD Rs or DVD RWs Video mode that contain recordings made on other DVD equipment In some cases you may not be able to add new recordings to DVD RWs that contain recordings made on other DVD equipment If you do add a new recording note that this recorder will rewrite the DVD menu You cannot edit recordings on DVD RWs DVD RWSs Video mode DVD Rs or DVD Rs that are made on other DVD equipment If the disc contains PC data unrecognizable by this recorder the data may be erased You may not be able to record edit or dub on some recordable discs d
340. e into chapters according to the Auto Chapter Video or Auto Chapter DVD R RW setting in the Recording setup page 143 Preparing for DV camcorder dubbing You connect a digital video camera to the DV IN jack on the recorder to record or edit from a DV Digital8 format tape Operation is straightforward because the recorder will fast forward and rewind the tape for you you do not need to operate your digital video camera Do the following to start using the Manual Dubbing functions of this recorder See the instruction manual supplied with the digital video camera as well before connecting The seams that are left over from editing may remain on the disc after dubbing to DVD RWs DVD RWSs Video mode DVD Rs DVD Rs Video mode Finalisation is cancelled if a timer recording starts even if you set Finalise to Yes in step 9 Hint If you plan to do additional editing on a disc after the initial dub use the DV IN jack and record on a DVD RW DVD R VR mode or HDD Q Notes e You cannot make a recording while DV camcorder dubbing The DV IN jack is for input only It will not output signals You cannot use the DV IN jack when signal input to the DV IN jack on the front panel or recorder operation cannot be performed correctly when using a digital video camera see About i LINK on page 163 Connect the camera to the LINE IN jack and follow the instructions of
341. e programme you are recording may be erased You cannot watch a PAY TV Canal Plus programme while recording another PAY TV Canal Plus programme To use the TV Direct Rec function you must first correctly set the recorder s clock Checking the disc status while recording You can check the recording information such as recording time or disc type Press DISPLAY during recording The recording information appears 1 12 3 Rec Mode SP 2h00m DVD DVD RW Video Remain 10h35m Remain 0h52m Wi Stop Rec 1 Recording mode 2 Recording time Disc type format 4 Recording status Press DISPLAY to turn off the display pue sdmyooH 35 m gt e gt 7 7 i E rJ 5 3 Playing the Recorded Programme Title List HDD To play a recorded title select the title from the Title List pvp TITLE LIST gt bod EXIT ENTER 4 RETURN e DISPLAY P REM rri 9 PLAY MODE 1 Press or DVD If you select DVD insert a DVD see 1 Inserting a Disc on page 36 Playback starts automatically depending on the disc 2 Press TITLE LIST To show the 8 Title List press
342. e recording Playback starts from the beginning of the programme you are recording When you fast forward to the point that you are recording Chase Play returns to normal playback MNR mosquito noise reduction Reduces the faint noise appearing around the outlines of the images The noise reduction effects are automatically adjusted within each setting range according to the video bit rate and other factors Sharpness Sharpens the outlines of the images Detail Adjusts the sharpness of images outlines White Enhancer Adjusts the intensity of white Black Enhancer Adjusts the intensity of black Black Level Selects the black level setup level for the video signals Select ON to raise the standard black level Select this when the picture appears too dark Select OFF to set the black level of the input signals to the standard level Normally select this position Gamma Correction Adjusts how dark areas look Adjusts the colour balance Chroma Level Makes the colours deeper or lighter 4 Press SYSTEM MENU to exit The setting is automatically stored as the setting you selected in step 1 Notes If the outlines of the images on your screen become blurred set BNR and or MNR to Off Depending on the disc or the scene being played the above BNR or MNR effects may be hard to discern Also these functions may n
343. e screen may differ from the actual remaining disc space When editing a DVD R or DVD R finish all editing before finalising the disc You cannot edit a finalised disc HDD Edit features Original Playlist ww title title Title edit Erase page 92 Yes Yes Yes Yes Title Name page 92 Yes Yes Yes Yes Set Thumbnail page 92 Yes Yes Yes Yes A B Erase page 93 Yes No Yes Yes Divide page 94 Yes No No Yes Set Genre page 92 Yes No No No Protect page 92 Yes Yes Yes No Move page 97 No No No Yes Combine page 97 No No No Yes Genre Name page 92 Yes No No No Editing multiple titles Multi Mode Yes No No No page 93 Creating a Playlist page 96 No No No Yes Undo page 92 No Yes Yes Yes Chapter Divide page 95 Yes No Yes Yes edit Erase page 96 Yes No Yes Yes Move page 97 No No No Yes Combine page 96 Yes No Yes Yes Erase Erases a section of the title page 93 Divide Divides a title into two titles page 94 Chapter Edit Edits chapters in a title page 95 Set Genre Assigns a genre to a title Protect Protects the title appears next to the protected title Move Changes the title s playing order page 97 Combine Combines two titles into one page 97 Genre Name Allows you to enter a genre name up to 12 characters page 42 Multi Mode Allows you to select and edit mu
344. e tape s time code is not sequential If the picture size or the recording mode on the tape being dubbed changes A blank or black coloured screen will be dubbed when the recorder is set to a different colour system from the DV tape contents system Set Input Line System in the Basic setup to same colour system as the DV tape contents system page 130 gt 103 Buigqng 105 106 108 Dubhing an Entire DV Format Tape DV One Touch Dubbing HDD You can record the entire contents of a DV Digital8 format tape onto a disc with a single press of the ONE TOUCH DUB button on the recorder The recorder controls the digital video camera for the whole process and completes the recording Follow steps 1 to 5 of Preparing for DV camcorder dubbing on page 104 and press ONE TOUCH DUB on the recorder The recorder rewinds the tape and then starts recording the tape contents After the recording is finished the recorder rewinds the tape in the digital video camera and finalises the recorded disc except DVD RW DVD R VR mode automatically To stop during recording Press REC STOP more than 3 seconds Note that it may take a few seconds for the recorder to stop recording 6 Hint You can also start DV One Touch Dubbing by selecting One Touch Dubbing of DV in the System Menu Notes When a blank space b
345. e until you find the one that works with your TV Manufacturer Code number Sony 01 default Grundig 11 Hitachi 24 ITT Nokia 15 16 JVC 33 Loewe 45 Nokia 69 73 Panasonic 17 49 Philips 06 07 08 72 Saba 12 13 74 Samsung 22 23 71 Sanyo 25 Sharp 29 Telefunken 36 Thomson 43 75 Toshiba 38 The remote performs the following Buttons Operations TV Turns your TV on or off TV volume Adjusts the volume H of your TV TV PROG Selects the programme position on your TV TV input select Switches your TV s input source Step 4 Connecting the Mains Lead Connect the supplied mains lead to the AC IN terminal of the recorder Then plug the recorder and TV mains leads AC power cords into the mains After you connect the mains lead you must wait for a short while before operating the recorder You can operate the recorder once the front panel display lights up and the recorder enters standby mode If you connect additional equipment to this recorder page 31 be sure to connect the mains lead after all connections are complete to AC IN gt to mains To operate the TV DVD button for SCART connections only The TV DVD button switches between TV mode and DVD mode Press the TV DVD button when in stop mode or no menu appears on the TV screen Point your remote at the recorder when using this button
346. e you select in Easy Setup 7 Press lt 4 4 gt to select the character you want to enter and press ENTER The selected character appears at the input row To insert a space press M or select Space and press ENTER 8 Repeat steps 6 and 7 to enter the remaining characters To erase a character move the cursor to the character at the input row and press CLEAR or select Clear and press ENTER To insert a character move the cursor to the right of the point where you want to insert the character Then select the character and press ENTER To erase all of the characters press and hold CLEAR for 2 seconds or more 4 select Basic and press ENTER Disc Setup Basic Input Disc Name Format Protect Disc 5 Select Protect Disc and press ENTER Finalise Format DVD RW Input Disc Name Format Protect Disc Finalise Format DVD RW Optimise HDD 6 Select and press ENTER 7 Press SYSTEM MENU to exit To cancel the protection Select Off in step 6 Hint You can set protection for individual titles page 92 1 10 9 Press or select and press ENTER To cancel the setting press RETURN To use the number buttons You can also use the number buttons to enter characters Refer to the number next to each row of letters on your TV screen 1 step 7 above press
347. easurement mode Turn on the main power 2 Press DISP 3 Press DIG ANA three times Checks the HDD power on time HDD Info Life Time h Tips How the cumulative HDD on time data is processed in memory Storage place FLASH ROM Timing for referring to the cumulative HDD on time data If the power attempts to turn on but fails the unit refers to the FLASH ROM Timing for updating the cumulative HDD on time data While the HDD is on the cumulative HDD on time data in the RAM is updated every 3 seconds and the data is stored in the Backup SRAM every update When the power is turned off the data is stored in the FLASH ROM How to clear the cumulative HDD on time data FLASH ROM When the HDD Identification Setting is configured the cumulative HDD on time data is automatically cleared The HDD Identification Setting is automatically configured when the CPRM setting 15 configured on the CPRM setting screen To display the CPRM setting screen press the ESC key then the STEREO key Note The cumulative HDD on time data is not cleared when resetting to default values The cumulative HDD on time data is not cleared when system control computer software is downloaded 4 Press ESC Returns to the original screen 6 2 6 Cautions for handling the HDD 1 Cautions for handling the HDD The HDD is very sensitive to shocks and vibrations Care must be taken especially during operati
348. ecording Error History Display 01 06 01 20 05 130 SysHar IN Error message display screen 01 06 02 00 22 110 Write Error 1 There are two error log screens and up to 9 logs are displayed per screen generation time year month day hour minute second error data in simplified description Tips e The two error log screens be switched by pressing the SPEED or SPEED key For details on error messages see table Description of VR recording related errors page 6 14 to 6 16 6 Subscreen 5 to 11 These subscreens are not for service use 7 Press ESC Returns to the original screen 6 13 Used for localizing the cause of trouble to an approximate area Description of VR recording related errors Error Message Contents Abbreviations ECC 4 byte Code for Error Correction UDF Universal Disc Format PCA Power Calibration Area Optical Power Control NWA Next Writable Address Video Manager RMA Recording Management Area Media Key Block VMGI Temporary Video Manager Information Border from Lead in to Lead out MPEG Encoder Related Errors ERROR MESSAGE DESCRIPTION IN Encode Changes cannot be made in process of encoding No SysHdr IN System packet is not input periodically Stm Start NG Failure to start encoding reasons not clear Strm Start NG Stream NG Inappropriate input stream data Timeout waiting for system packet input at the
349. ecording for 60 minutes 5 Playback for 45 minutes lt DVD RW gt The initialization process in step 3 follows the setting specified in Setting of the main unit Recording Auto initialization of a DVD RW lt DVD RW gt The initialization process in step 3 is the same as that described in Disc setting Initialization Initialization of a DVD RW lt DVD RAM gt In the initialization process in step 3 physical formatting is performed if required During Aging the number of loops 15 indicated on FL display as shown below AGING 0001 If an error is generated the aging operation stops Note Indications on the FL display are retained and this information is also retained as an OSD 1 The tray opens 2 The tray closes 3 Recording for 1 minute 4 Recording pause for 6 minutes 5 Recording stops Playback for 1 minute 7 Playback pause for 6 minutes Playback stops Note A continuous test of the above operations is possible for approximately 23 hours After 2 the tray closes disc detection is performed DVD R In step 2 if the disc is judged to have recorded up to 99 titles the operation stops at that point lt DVD R gt If the disc is judged to have recorded up to 49 titles the operation stops at that point On the FL display the number of loops is retained On the OSD display the error indication is retained During Aging the number of loops is indicated on
350. ect Photo Album and press ENTER The Photo Album menu appears 5 Select Copy Photos from Digital Camera and press ENTER The display asks for confirmation 6 Select Yes and press ENTER To cancel select Hint See 8 Reformatting a Disc page 47 to format DVD RWs DVD Rs in Video mode Q Notes During copying other operations cannot be performed While copying JPEG image files timer recordings are unavailable If the timer is set during copying the recorder starts the timer recording after copying is finished Copying JPEG image files or albums on the HDD HDD HDD 1 Press SYSTEM MENU The System Menu appears 2 Select Photo Album and press ENTER The Photo Album menu appears Select View Edit Photos on the HDD and press ENTER The Photo Album list appears select an album using 4 To copy the selected album go to step 6 To copy a JPEG image file go to step 5 continued 119 9114 4 select View Edit Photos on the HDD and press ENTER The Photo Album list appears Select an album using 4 9 and press ENTER The photo list appears 6 select a JPEG image file using and press gt The sub menu appears 7 Select Multi Mode and press ENTER To copy the JPEG image file selected in step 6 only go to step 11 8 Select a JPEG image file and press ENTER A check mark a
351. ect Start Audio Slideshow and press ENTER 4 Selecta genre using m w For details about assigning a genre see Managing Audio Tracks on the Music Jukebox on page 117 D Select Start and press ENTER The slideshow and the playback from the first track of the selected genre start Q Notes Depending on the aspect ratio some pictures may be displayed with black bands at top and bottom or left and right Large picture files may take a few seconds to display This is not a malfunction All albums or tracks in the selected genre will be played during Slideshow even if some albums or tracks are set to skip To stop a slideshow Press stop RETURN To pause a slideshow Press pause Note that only slideshow pauses and the sound continues to play To view the next previous image during a slideshow Press 444 P 1 To zoom an image Press ZOOM repeatedly during a slideshow Each time you press ZOOM the magnification changes as shown below 2x 4x normal magnification You can move the area you want to zoom using 14 1 30 12 Photo List Example HDD Eh Photo Album oe 12 Photos 002 Giraffe 003 E m 004 Lion 005 Ostrich 006 Monkey 007 Calf 008 Koala 009 Swan 010 Gorilla 9 011 Hippopotanu 012 Kangaroo
352. ector or audio component such as an AV amplifier receiver This will enable on the recorder fe 1 to ANALOG AERIAL OUT to aerial input oN Aerial cable Supplied Signal flow SCART input jack When setting LINE 3 Out to S Video or RGB in the Video In Out setup page 136 use aSCART cord that conforms to the selected signal Video input jack You will enjoy standard quality images Q VIDEO input jack You will enjoy high quality images Component video input jacks Y Pn Cn You will enjoy accurate colour reproduction and high quality images If your TV accepts progressive 525p 625p format signals use this connection and set Progressive to Compatible in the Easy Setup setup page 26 Then set Component Video Out to Progressive in the In Out setup to send progressive video signals For details see Component Video Out on page 136 Q HDMI input jack Use a certified HDMI cord not supplied to enjoy high quality digital picture and sound through the HDMI OUT jack When connecting a Sony TV that is compatible with the HDMI control function see page 21 To see the signals from the connected set top box receiver when the set top box receiver is connected to the recorder using a SCART cord only turn the recorder on When connecting to the H
353. een VR recording related error logs Each screen has sublevel screens Note After entering any Service mode screen to shift to another Service mode screen first quit that Service mode screen then enter another Service mode screen 5 Press ESC Returns to the original screen 6 2 3 Version Information and Other Information First screen Turn ofthe main power ON 2 screen after exiting all menu screens press 5 on the service remote controller 3 Press DISP Checking respective software version numbers and other HDD information OK Appropriate version compared with that of the firmware of OD pee 2 VERSION 1 the system control computer 3 SYSCON RELEASE 100 NG The version of the TUNER microcomputer is older Rev 1 1000 Measures to be taken S 198 000 Download the firmware DVD RW DVR L11X 1 00 OK The appropriate drive is mounted NG inappropriate drive is mounted 6 WDC WD1600BB xxGUCx Measures to be taken Download the firmware OK Appropriate version compared with that of the firmware of the system control computer 7 DEVICE E2R FE 8 FLASH 64M NG The version of the drive microcomputer is older 9 REGION 2 Measures to be taken Download the firmware Model name destination 2 Version of the recorder software 8 Revision No of the system control computer software 4 Version No of the tun
354. een instructions in Easy Setup Be careful not to disconnect the cables or exit the Easy Setup function during this procedure O 5j GUIDE et ENTER EXIT RETURN TV MK Turn on the recorder and your TV Then switch the input selector on your TV so that the signal from the recorder appears on your TV screen The Language display appears If the Language display does not appear select Setup in the Basic setup from Initial Setup in the System Menu page 130 Select a language for the on screen displays using 4 f gt and press ENTER The initial settings message appears Select Start using and press ENTER Follow the on screen instructions to make the following settings Setting up your set top box receiver for the GUIDE Plus system For analogue broadcasting Follow the steps below to set up the GUIDE Plus system and set top box controller The GUIDE Plus system is available in the UK only 1 Press GUIDE The GUIDE Plus system Basic Setup appears Please enter a valid postal code The postal code is required to complete the installation Basic Setup Language English Country United Kingdom Postal Code External Receiver 1 External Receiver 2 External Receiver 3 For users other than in the UK go to step 4 Select Postal Code and press ENTER Enter your p
355. elect a programme position you want to move and press ENTER To display other pages press 44 repeatedly 4 Press 4 8 to select the programme position number to swap for the one selected in step 3 and press ENTER The programme position numbers are swapped To move other programme positions repeat from step 3 sjuaungsn py pue sumag continued 1 31 Download from TV If you connect a TV to this recorder with SMARTLINK you can preset programme positions by downloading from your TV For details refer to the operating instructions supplied with your TV 1 Select Download from and press ENTER 2 Select your country region using 4 amp wsb and press ENTER The tuner preset data will be downloaded from your TV to this recorder If any programme positions are unused or contain unwanted channels you can disable them page 134 Manual CH Setting Presets programme positions manually If some programme positions could not be set using the Easy Setup function you can set them manually If there is no sound or if the picture is distorted the wrong tuner system may have been preset during Easy Setup Set the correct tuner system manually in the steps below 1 Select Manual CH Setting in Analog Tuner and press ENTER 2 Select Next Screen and press ENTER 3 Select your country region using lt gt and press ENTER Programme position Skip 4 Wester
356. emain R World Sports 70h03m 1h00m 0 86 80 Q Notes The new settings become effective when you exit the GUIDE Plus system When you set the recording destination to HDDr the previous timer recording will be replaced with the new one even if you have not watched it About the VPS PDC function VPS PDC signals are transmitted with TV programmes in some broadcast systems These signals ensure that timer recordings are made regardless of any broadcast delays early starts or broadcast interruptions To use the VPS PDC function Select VPS PDC in step 7 above When you turn on this function the recorder starts scanning the channels before the timer recording starts Cancelling timer settings 1 Press GUIDE 2 Select Schedule in the Menu The SCHEDULE list appears 3 Select the timer setting you want to cancel using and press the red button Delete To close the SCHEDULE list Press GUIDE When the timer settings overlap The programme that starts first has priority and the entire programme is recorded After finishing the previous recording the other recording starts with several tens of second s delay when the end time of one recording and the start time of another are the same When the recordings start at the same time only one of them will be recorded Cancel the timer setting for the programme that you are not going t
357. emote control unit for servicing e How to start Press ESC 0 and 1 keys simultaneously How to terminate Press ESC key Execute Self Test Note Write down the HDD information on the HDD return sheet before replacing the HDD Note the information on pages 6 6 6 7 6 9 and 6 10 of Chapter 6 SERVICE When performing Factory Check the data saved to the HDD by the customer is erased Obtain customer consent before performing Factory Check Recording Error History and History Error see pages 6 9 6 10 of Chapter 6 SERVICE Press 3 key on the remote control unit for servicing while the menu screen is displayed When the following screen is displayed press 1 key to start Self Test S M A R T DST Drive Self Test me 1 Exe Self Test 1 I 2 Exe Ext Self Test Note 2 Exe Ext Self Test is not used Diagnosis results e Without an error Completed is displayed Then proceed to the Extended Self Test SELF TEST PAUSE Test Stop Test Remainder 70 eM Test Result Under execut ion Note Performing Self Test will not erase the HDD data With an error Error is displayed Look at the number in Test Result If the place value for tens is or 2 execute the Self Test again If it is from to 7 the HDD must be replaced Note If the resul
358. en Plasma display panels and projection televisions are especially susceptible to this If you have any questions or problems concerning your recorder please consult your nearest Sony dealer Notice for customers in the United Kingdom and Republic of Ireland A molded plug complying with BS1363 is fitted to this equipment for your safety and convenience Should the fuse in the plug supplied need to be replaced a 5 AMP fuse approved by ASTA or BSI to BS1362 i e marked with or Y mark must be used If the plug supplied with this equipment has a detachable fuse cover be sure to attach the fuse cover after you change the fuse Never use the plug without the fuse cover If you should lose the fuse cover please contact your nearest Sony service station Precautions This unit operates on 220 240 V AC 50 60 Hz Check that the unit s operating voltage is identical with your local power supply To prevent fire or shock hazard do not place objects filled with liquids such as vases on the apparatus Install this system so that the mains lead can be unplugged from the wall socket immediately in the event of trouble GUIDE Plus and G LINK are 1 registered trademarks or trademarks of 2 manufactured under license from and 3 subject of various international patents and patent applications owned by or licensed to Gemstar TV Guide International Inc and or its related affiliates GEMSTAR T
359. en if the recorder is turned off This is because the set top box controller has changed the programme position to receive the GUIDE Plus data When you reset the recorder page 158 the following GUIDE Plus system settings are reset Country region setting in Setup Country of Setup Basic Setup in the Menu Bar Postal Code of Setup Basic Setup in the Menu Bar Note that the GUIDE Plus system is also reset when you make changes to the host channel settings The GUIDE Plus system cannot be used when Input Line System is set to NTSC in the Basic setup page 130 GUIDE Plus For analogue broadcasting only Introduction to the GUIDE Plus System The GUIDE Plus system is a free interactive programme guide It displays up to seven days of programme listings including programme titles promotions and broadcast information GUIDE Plus data for the television programme listings are carried by your local broadcast host channel and are received through your aerial set top box receiver or direct cable connection from the wall Visit www europe guideplus com for a list of all European host channels These are just a few of the ways to use the GUIDE Plus system Search for programmes by listing them according to category such as Movies or Sport or by using the Keyword Search function page 66 Once you have found the programme you
360. epending on the disc Do not insert any discs that cannot be recorded or played on this recorder This may cause the recorder to malfunction 13 14 16 Hookups and Settings Hooking Up the Recorder Follow steps through 6 to hook up and adjust the settings of the recorder Do not connect the mains lead until you reach Step 4 Connecting the Mains Lead on page 23 Notes See Specifications page 160 for a list of supplied accessories Plug in cords securely to prevent unwanted noise Refer to the instructions supplied with the components to be connected You cannot connect this recorder to a TV that does not have a SCART or video input jack Be sure to disconnect the mains lead of each component before connecting Checking hookup and setting methods The recorder incorporates both analogue and digital tuners The programme guide and timer recording method differ depending on which one you select Depending on the broadcasts you are receiving and your equipment select one of the following aerial hookups Do NOT set LINE 1 In to Decoder in the Video In Out setup page 137 when making connection B When you receive Hookup Programme guide Timer recording using programme guide Freeview A page 16 Digital Service See page 52 page 48 Satellite Cable B page 17 GUIDE Plus page 63 See page 71 Terrestrial C page 18 GUIDE Plus page 63 See page 71 Note Beginn
361. ept HDD you switch the Title List to Original or Playlist DVD RWs DVD Rs in VR mode only you edit the title after stopping playback you change the settings on the recorder you make a recording except HDD DVD RWs DVD Rs in VR mode you disconnect the mains lead Q Notes You cannot resume playback during TV Pause Resume Play is not available for Super VIDEO CDs To play restricted DVDs Parental Lock If you play a restricted DVD the display for entering your password appears on your TV screen Enter your four digit password using the number buttons and press ENTER The recorder starts playback To register or change the password see Limitation Settings Parental Lock on page 145 3 Select the desired audio signal when recording a bilingual programme to the HDD or DVD RWs DVD Rs Video mode Set External Audio to Bilingual and Bilingual Recording to A L or B R in the Audio In setup page 138 4 Press REC MODE repeatedly to select the recording mode For details about the recording mode see page 71 5 Insert the source tape into the connected equipment and set to playback pause 6 Press 6 This recorder starts recording 1 Press the pause or play button on the connected equipment to cancel the playback pause status The connected equipment starts playback and the playback image is recorded by this recorder To stop record
362. er 1 The Best 3 esse enres 4 Samba Edit 5 Live Mode 5 6 7 My heart Genre Name 8 Paradise The Best HDD DP Jazz Remain Total 5 30MB 228 8G 4 Select an album or track and press Playing repeatedly Repeat You can play repeatedly all the tracks or a single track in the album 1 Press gt during playback 2 Select Play Mode using 4 4 and press ENTER The Play Mode menu appears Select Repeat and press ENTER Select to be repeated using 4 Repeat Album repeats the current album Repeat Track repeats the current track Repeat Programme repeats the current programme page 116 O Press ENTER Repeat play starts To cancel Repeat play Set Repeat to Repeat Off in the Play Mode menu Q Notes You can select Repeat Programme only during Programme play Repeat is not available when using Music Jukebox S904 continued 11 5 D select an option and press ENTER Erase Erases the selected album track Select Yes when asked for confirmation Edit Allows you to make the following edits Album Allows you to enter or re enter an album name page 42 Track Name Allows you to enter or re enter a track name page 42 Set Ge
363. er a country area code in the table page 168 and press ENTER 5 Select Change Level and press ENTER 25 Initial Setup A Playback 4 Parental Control Change Level Parental Lock HDMI Output W Options Options 2 6 Enter your four digit password using the number buttons and press ENTER 7 Select the level The lower the value the stricter the limitation Discs rated higher than the selected level will be restricted 8 Press ENTER The DVD Playback setting is completed To cancel the DVD Playback setting for the disc select in step 7 D TV Age Limit Viewing of some digital TV programmes can be limited according to the age limit you set To watch programmes that exceed the age limit you set your password is required for customers in France Denmark Finland or Sweden only 1 Select D TV Age Limit in Parental Lock and press ENTER 2 Select Next Screen and press ENTER The D TV Age Limit display appears 3 Enter your four digit password using the number buttons and press ENTER 4 Select an age as limitation level and press ENTER The setting is completed To cancel the setting select Off HDMI Control Allows you to use the HDMI control features page 21 Turns off the function 1 36 HDMI Settings HDMI Output The HDMI Output setup allows you to adjust items related to the HDMI connection You can se
364. er automatically selects Stereo or Bilingual regardless of the External Audio setting Bilingual Recording Selects the sound to be recorded A L Records the main sound for the bilingual programme B R Records the sub sound for the bilingual programme Note When recording a bilingual audio signal to the HDD when HDD Recording Format is set to Video Mode Off page 144 except in PCM mode ora DVD RW DVD R in VR mode except in PCM mode both audio channels are recorded and you can select the sound when playing DV Input Select the setting for the audio input when DV camcorder dubbing Select Stereo 1 75 Mix Stereo 1 50 7 Stereo 1 25 96 or Stereo 2 only if you have added a second audio when recording with your digital video camera Stereo 1 Records original sound only Normally select this when dubbing a DV format tape Records additional audio only Stereo 2 Mix Stereo 1 75 Records both stereo Mix Stereo 1 50 Land 2 Mix Stereo 1 25 Language Settings Language The Language setup allows you to adjust language settings 1 Press SYSTEM MENU while the recorder is in stop mode 2 Select Initial Setup and press ENTER 3 Select Language and press ENTER The Language setup appears with the following options The default settings are underlined 25 Initial Setup A
365. er microcomputer Result of the combination check with system microcomputer 5 Information on the built in drive Model name version No model type 6 Data of the built in HDD capacity of the HDD 7 DEVICE information type ES No FLASH ROM information 9 Region No CPRM information CPRM key No 4 Press ESC Returns to the original screen 6 4 6 2 4 Level Simplified Diagnosis 1 Turn of the main power ON 2 screen after exiting all menu screens press ESC on the service remote controller 3 Press DISP 4 Press DIG ANA The RF signal status can be obtained from the input frequency VERSION 1 deviation information and the AGC voltage SYSCON RELEASE Rev TUNERCON 198 000 OK DRIVE DVD RW DVR L11X OK 1 00 OK HDD WDC WD1600BB xxGUCx 160 DEVICE E2R FE FLASH 64M REGION 2 Input ch Input channel Freq Diff Low 1 Input frequency difference AGC Volt mV voltage 2 1 Frequency Difference Freg Diff How much tuning is off is monitored as shown below Input Frequency Display Faraway High 7 High within 200kHz High 1 5 Just Tune Center within 200kHz over 200kHz Low 1 5 Low 7 2 AGC voltage AGC Volt The gain controlled by the tuner is monitored to infer the input electric field intensity The accuracy of inference differs depending on the
366. es a new album Album Options Erase Album Erases the selected album Album Contents Copies all JPEG image files in the selected album to the HDD page 119 continued 1 25 126 128 Rename Album Changes selected album name page 42 Protect Album Contents Protects all JPEG image files in the selected album Protection Cancels protection of all JPEG image files in the selected album to DVD Copies the selected album or JPEG image file to a DVD page 120 Multi Mode Selects multiple albums or JPEG image files to edit Copy all to HDD Copies all the albums and JPEG image files to the HDD page 118 to HDD Copies the selected album or JPEG image file to the HDD page 118 File Options Erase Erases the selected JPEG image file Copy Copies the selected JPEG image file page 119 Rename File Changes the selected JPEG image file name page 42 Protect Protects the selected JPEG image file Select again to cancel the protection Print Prints the selected JPEG image file page 126 Detailed Information Displays the detailed information for the selected JPEG image file page 124 Single Mode Cancels Multi Mode Settings and Adjustments Disc Settings Disc Setup The Disc Setup setup allows you to adjust DVD related settings 1 Press SYSTEM
367. ess the TV button on the remote to return the input to the TV If you connect the recorder to a TV with SMARTLINK set LINE 3 Out to Video in the Video In Out setup You cannot connect the HDMI OUT jack connection to DVI jacks that are not HDCP compliant e g DVI jacks on PC displays Component video and RGB signals are not output when using the HDMI connection This DVD recorder incorporates High Definition Multimedia Interface HDMI technology HDMI the HDMI logo and High Definition Multimedia Interface are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC you to view pictures INPUT VIDEO AUDIO Or 4 TV projector audio component to LINE 2 OUT VIDEO Audio video ipi cord not supplied SCART cord not supplied to LINE3 to COMPONENT VIDEO OUT Component video cord not supplied green 1 COMPONENT VIDEO IN TV projector or audio component EM Signal flow About the SMARTLINK features for SCART connections only If the connected TV or other connected equipment such as a set top box complies with SMARTLINK NexTView Link 2 MEGALOGIC EASYLINK 2 CINEMALINK Q Link 3 EURO VIEW or T V you can enjoy following SMARTLINK features TV Direct Rec page 37 One Touch Pla
368. etup page 130 For the HDD HDD Recording Format is set to Video Mode Off DVD RW VR mode DVD R VR mode HQ PCM MN32 to 16 720 x 480 720 x 576 MNIS to MNI2 544 x 480 544 x 576 to MN9 480 x 480 544 x 576 8 MN7 352 480 352 x 576 MN6 to 1 352 240 352 x 288 For the HDD HDD Recording Format is set to Video Mode On DVD RW DVD RW Video mode DVD R DVD R Video mode HQ PCM MN32 to 720 x 480 720 x 576 8 and MN7 352 480 352 x 576 MN6 to 1 352 x 240 352 x 288 Rec Mode Adjust On Automatically adjusts the recording mode to enable the entire programme to be recorded page 74 Off Turns off the function Subtitle Recording On Records digital broadcast subtitles Off No digital broadcast subtitles are recorded Set Thumbnail Selects a scene for the thumbnail picture shown in the Title List first frame of the title is set for the thumbnail picture 0 seconds 30 seconds The frame at 30 seconds from the first frame is set for the thumbnail picture The frame at3 minutes from the first frame is set for the thumbnail picture 3 minutes 4 3 Letter Box 4 3 Pan Scan 16 9 Q Note Depending on the disc 4 3 Letter Box may be selected automatically instead of 4 3 Pan Scan vice versa Pause Mode Selects the picture quality in pause mode
369. etween the recordings on the tape continues for more than two minutes DV One Touch Dubbing ends automatically The recorder will pause recording when there is a blank space or an image containing copy protection signals on the tape The recorder will resume recording automatically when receiving a recordable signal Finalisation is cancelled if a timer recording starts except for DVD RW DVD R VR mode DV One Touch Dubbing ends automatically when there are images containing copy protection signals at the beginning of the tape Audio Tracks Playing Audio Tracks from CD DVD You can play audio tracks on CDs DATA DVDs DVD ROMs DVD RWs DVD Rs DVD RWs DVD Rs DVD RAMs DATA CDs CD ROMs CD Rs CD RWs AUDIO CLEAR TITLE LIST ey ED lt lt Q 1 inserta disc See 1 Inserting a Disc on page 36 2 Press Playback starts To stop playback Press stop 6 Hint You can play audio tracks using the Title List Press TITLE LIST Then select a track and press ENTER Q Note When any video titles are recorded on a DATA DVD the MP3 audio tracks on that DATA DVD cannot be played Dubbing Selected Scenes Manual Dubbing HDD You can select and dub scenes while playing a DV Digital8 format tape 1 Follow steps 1 to 5 of Preparing for DV camcorder dubbing on page 104 Press SYSTEM MENU The System Menu appears
370. fective only when you set TV Type to 16 9 in the Playback setup Adjust this setting to watch 4 3 aspect ratio signals If you can change the aspect ratio on your TV change the setting on your TV not this recorder Note that this setting is effective only for HDMI connection Full Select this when you can change the aspect ratio on your TV Normal Select this when you cannot change the aspect ratio on your TV Shows a 4 3 size video with the aspect ratio as it is 520 16 9 aspect ratio TV sjuaungsn py pue gt continued 147 Command Mode Changes the Command Mode of the recorder to avoid interference with your other Sony DVD recorder or player 1 Select Command Mode in Options and press ENTER 2 Selecta Command Mode DVD2 or DVD3 and press ENTER Q Note The default command mode setting for this recorder and the supplied remote is DVD3 remote does not function if different command modes are set for the recorder and remote Set the same command mode 3 Set the Command Mode for the remote soit matches the Command Mode for the recorder you set above Follow the steps below to set the Command Mode on the remote D Hold down ENTER 2 While holding down ENTER enter the Command Mode code number using the number buttons Command Mode Code number DVDI number button 1 DVD2 number button 2 DVD3 number butto
371. files You can also play discs recorded in MultiSession Border See the instructions supplied with the disc drives and the recording software not supplied for details on the recording format jeuorippy Not available for MP3 audio tracks Note on MultiSession Border discs If audio tracks and images in Music CD format or Video CD format are recorded in the first session border only the first session border will be played back continued 1 61 162 164 audio tracks JPEG image files or DivX video files that the recorder can play The recorder can play the following tracks and files MP3 audio tracks with the extension mp3 JPEG image files with the extension or jpg Baseline JPEG image files that conform to the Exif 2 2 image files format and is 4 4 4 4 2 2 4 2 0 DivX video files with the extension avi or divx Exchangeable Image File Format The file format used by digital still cameras Hint Since a disc with many trees takes longer to start playback it is recommended that you create albums with no more than two trees Q Notes Therecorder will play any data with the extension mp3 jpeg jpg avi or divx even if they are not in MP3 JPEG or DivX format Playing these data may generate a loud noise which could damage your speaker system Depending on the
372. from the point you selected when you dub the titles by High speed dubbing Erasing and Editing a Title HDD This section explains the basic edit functions Note that editing is irreversible To edit DVD RWs DVD Rs VR mode without changing the original recordings create a Playlist title page 96 TITLE LIST e n tM EXIT ENTER RETURN 44 gt ico 1 Press TITLE LIST For DVD RWs DVD Rs in VR mode switch the Title List Original or Playlist if necessary 2 Select a title and press gt The sub menu appears 3 Select an option and press ENTER You can make the following edits to the title Erase Erases the selected title Select Yes when asked for confirmation Edit Allows you to make the following edits Title Name Allows you to enter or re enter a title name page 42 Set Thumbnail Changes the title s thumbnail picture that appears in the Title List page 39 Erasing and Editing Before Editing This recorder offers various edit options for various disc types Notes You may lose the edited contents if you remove the disc or a timer recording starts while editing DVD discs created by DVD camcorders cannot be edited on this recorder message appears and indicates that the disc s control information is full erase or edit unnecessary titles The remaining disc space displayed on th
373. g 19 Select On using lt gt and press ENTER To return to the previous step Press RETURN 3 Press REC MODE repeatedly to select the recording mode Each time you press the button the display on the TV screen changes as follows N lt LP Available when Rec Mode is set to go to setup in the Recording setup page 141 For more details about the recording mode see page 71 4 Press 6 REC Recording starts When recording to the HDD recording stops after 12 hours of continuous recording or when the HDD is full When recording to a DVD recording stops when the DVD is full To stop recording Press REC STOP Note that it may take a few seconds for recorder to stop recording To watch another TV programme while recording If your TV is connected to the CZ LINE 3 TV jack set your TV to the TV input using the TV DVD button and select the programme you want to watch If your TV is connected to the LINE 2 OUT or COMPONENT VIDEO OUT jacks set the TV to TV input using the TV button page 24 TV Direct Rec for SMARTLINK connections only When the TV is turned on and the recorder is turned off press TV PAUSE The recorder automatically turns on and starts recording what you are watching on the TV to the HDD Set Pause to TV s Tuner in the Options 2 setup page 150 Hint If the aer
374. gle layer disc J 6090 077 A HLX 506 PAL dual layer disc J 6090 078 A 1 Video Output Level Check Purpose This check is made to satisfy the PAL signal standard If it is adjusted incorrectly brightness will be too bright or too dark Mode PLAY signal 100 Color bars Test point Output VIDEO connector terminated in 750 Instrument Oscilloscope Specification 1 0 V 0 07 Vp p Check method Insert the PAL reference disc and play back the 10046 color bars 2 Confirm that the video level is 1 0 0 07 Vp p 0 07 Vp p Fig 7 1 7 1 2 S Video Output S Y Check Purpose This check confirms that the S video Y signal output has the rated amplitude If it adjusted incorrectly the playback video signal will not be displayed corrected even when the S video cable is connected Test point S VIDEO OUTPUT S Y connector terminated in 750 Check method 1 Insert the PAL reference disc and play back the 100 color bars 2 Confirm that the video level is 1 0 0 07 Vp p Fig 7 2 3 S Video Output S C Check Purpose This check confirms that the S video output S C conforms to the PAL standard If it adjusted incorrectly the playback color will not be too dark or too thin Test point S VIDEO OUTPUT S C connector terminated in 750 500 Vp Check method 1 Insert the PAL reference disc and play back the 100 color bars 2 Confirm that the burst signal level is 300 mV
375. gnals Select Motion for a picture including subjects that move dynamically Select Still for a picture with little movement YNR luminance noise reduction Reduces noise contained in the luminance element of the video signal CNR chroma noise reduction Reduces noise contained in the chroma element of the video signal Detail Adjusts the sharpness of images outlines White AGC Turn on for automatic white level adjustment White Enhancer Adjusts the intensity of white Black Enhancer Adjusts the intensity of black 1 18 7 Select the input source using and select the programme position using the number buttons or You can also select the programme position using the yellow button Channels 8 Press the green button Next The display for entering characters appears To change the title name select a character on the keyboard using and press ENTER To switch between upper case lower case or characters with accents press the yellow button Keyboard 9 Press the green button Save The date start and stop times programme position etc settings appear The recorder is ready to start recording To confirm change or cancel a timer recording See Checking Changing Cancelling Timer Settings on page 77 To stop recording during timer recording Press REC STOP Note that it may take a few second
376. gramme by keyword select Choice You can search for all programmes that contain the keyword in the programme s title and in the programme s Information Box If no keywords are displayed enter the keyword See enter a new keyword below 3 Select a sub category using and press ENTER Programmes that meet the conditions are listed The sub categories differ according to country region Making Changes to the GUIDE Plus System Vo Number buttons 0 G9 Colour e e buttons t4 ENTER Searching for the GUIDE Plus host channel The default host channel setting is set to Automatic so you should not have to change the host channel setting However if the host channel has changed or moved update the host channel setting If the set top box receiver is connected to the recorder using a SCART cord only page 17 see Changing the GUIDE Plus host channel manually on page 69 1 Select Setup in the Menu Bar The GUIDE Plus setup menu appears Select Host Channel Setup using 4 and press ENTER 2 3 Press the yellow button Reset Press 1 01 to turn off the recorder 1 16 4 Select a programme using 4 9 and press ENTER To enter a new keyword 1 Select Search in the Menu Bar and press ENTER 2 Select Choice using m w 3 Press the yellow button The display for entering char
377. gual subtitles are not recorded on the DVD VIDEO gt The DVD VIDEO prohibits changing of the subtitles gt Try changing the subtitle using the DVD VIDEO s menu gt The subtitles cannot be changed for the titles recorded on this recorder The angles cannot be changed gt Multi angles are not recorded on the DVD VIDEO being played gt You are trying to change the angles when o does not appear on the TV screen page 80 To display if various angles multi angles for a scene are recorded on the disc set Angle Indicator to in the Playback setup page 145 The DVD VIDEO prohibits changing angles Try changing the angle using the DVD VIDEO s menu The angles cannot be changed for the titles recorded on this recorder VV 4 The angles cannot be changed during slow motion playback or when playback is paused The DivX video files do not play gt The file is not created in DivX format gt The file has an extension other than avi or divx gt The DATA CD DivX video DATA DVD DivX video is not created in a DivX format that conforms to ISO9660 Level 1 Level 2 Romeo Joliet or UDF Universal Disk Format 1 02 1 50 2 00 or 2 01 gt The DivX video file format is larger than 720 width x 576 height The MP3 audio tracks do not play MP3 audio tracks are not recorded in a format that the recorder can play page 1
378. he error in the command table to the lower right NG IA ATAPL History 10 RATA ALAPI History 00 EXECUTE DEVICE DIAGNOSTIC 90 28 3540060426A800 NC Ree E7 28 4 Us IR IDLE E3 28 _ 3540066 165 6000 0K am READ OMA ExT 25 28 3b4006E ACE 4400 SMART y ONU N 2 78 0 v 2 28 28 80006240 28 80006242002 OK 28 READ N 28 3540C6E16F6000 6 10 6 2 10 Debugging Screen Second Screen LD Deterioration Judgment for writer 1 OO Tips Writer maintenance information of DEBUG OSD Subscreen3 Turn of the main power ON On the screen after exiting all menu screens press ESC on the service remote controller Press DISP Press 2 Simplified judgment method of optical pickup quality 1 Stains on pickup lens 2 Deterioration of CD R DVD RW laser diode ATA ATAPI History ALL Screens are switched when DIG ANA is pressed two times or three times to select the desired menu Press SEARCH to start measurement ATA ATAPI Writer Maintenancelnfo Error log for the Writer Power ON Not for Service 00000000 00000000 CD Power on time cumulative power on time 00000000 2 Duration of emission of the laser diode LD for DVD R DVD 0000000
379. he set top box controller is directly above the remote control sensor on your set top box receiver gt continued 29 To change the basic GUIDE Plus settings 1 Press GUIDE The GUIDE Plus system Screen appears 2 Select Setup in the Menu Bar using gt and press ENTER The GUIDE Plus setup menu appears 3 Select Basic Setup using 4 4 and press ENTER 4 Repeat from step 2 of Setting up your set top box receiver for the GUIDE Plust system For analogue broadcasting on page 28 30 Connecting to the LINE 2 IN jacks on the front panel Connect a VCR or similar recording device to the LINE 2 IN jacks of this recorder If the equipment has an S video jack you can use an S video cord instead of an audio video cord OUTPUT VCR etc S VIDEO VIDEO AUDIO 4 R gt tr Audio video cord not supplied DVD recorder oN Signal flow Hint When the connected equipment outputs only monaural sound connect to only the L MONO and VIDEO input jacks on the front of the recorder Do not connect the R input jack Notes Do not connect the yellow LINE IN VIDEO jack when using an S video cord Do not connect the output jack of this recorder to another equipment s input jack with the other equipment s output jack connected to the input jack of this recorder This may cause noise feedback Do not con
380. his may result in malfunction If the hard disk drive should malfunction you cannot recover lost data The hard disk drive is only a temporary storage space About repairing the hard disk drive The contents of the hard disk drive may be checked in case of repair or inspection during a malfunction or modification However the contents will not be backed up or saved by Sony If the hard disk needs to be formatted or replaced it will be done at the discretion of Sony contents of the hard disk drive will be erased including contents that violate copyright laws On power sources The recorder is not disconnected from the AC power source mains as long as it is connected to the wall outlet even if the recorder itself has been turned off If you are not going to use the recorder for a long time be sure to disconnect the recorder from the wall outlet To disconnect the AC power cord mains lead grasp the plug itself never pull the cord On placement Place the recorder in a location with adequate ventilation to prevent heat build up in the recorder Do not place the recorder on a soft surface such as a rug that might block the ventilation holes Do not place the recorder in a confined space such as a bookshelf or similar unit Do not place the recorder in a location near heat sources or in a place subject to direct sunlight excessive dust or mechanical shock Do not place the recorder in
381. ial cables are connected to both DIGITAL AERIAL IN and ANALOG AERIAL IN jacks you can switch between digital mode and analogue mode using the INPUT button Q Notes If you disconnect the s mains lead you will not be able to view the signals from the connected decoder To watch the connected external decoder PAY TV Canal Plus analogue decoder programmes during recording press the PROGRAM button on the recorder SCART THRU appears on the front panel display To return to the previous display press the PROGRAM button on the recorder SCART NORM appears on the front panel display The recorder automatically switches to the programme tuned by the recorder s tuner after the recording has finished To watch the connected external decoder PAY TV Canal Plus analogue decoder programmes while the recorder is in standby mode set Power Save to default in the Basic setup page 130 Notes To turn off the TV Direct Rec function set SMARTLINK to Pass Through in the Options setup page 150 Some buttons such as the TITLE LIST button or button do not work when TV appears in the front panel display If you press the VQ button while recording the recorder stops recording and turns off After pressing the REC button it may take a short while to start recording You cannot change the recording mode while recording If there is a power failure th
382. ing press REC STOP on this recorder If you connect a digital video camera with a DV IN jack See DV Camcorder Dubbing on page 104 for an explanation of how to record from the DV IN jack Auo anfiojeue 104 Hint You can adjust settings for the recording picture before recording See Adjusting the recording picture quality on page 76 Q Notes When recording a video game image the screen may not be clear Any programme that contains a Copy Never copy guard signal cannot be recorded When Bilingual Recording is set to A L or B R in step 3 you cannot select the sound when playing in the following cases When recording in PCM mode When recording to the HDD HDD Recording Format is set to Video Mode in the Recording setup page 144 DVD RW DVD R DVD RW DVD R Video mode You cannot select L1 in step 2 if LINE 1 In is set to Decoder in the Video In Out setup page 137 19 To lock the recorder Child Lock You can lock all of the buttons on the recorder so that the settings are not cancelled by mistake When the recorder is turned off hold down on the recorder until LOCKED appears in the front panel display The recorder does not work except for timer recordings while the Child Lock is set To unlock the recorder hold down on the recorder until UNLOCKED
383. ing a Disc on page 36 2 Press INPUT to select an input source according to the connection you made The front panel display changes as follows programme position 4 12 sd gt continued 61 62 64 3 Select the desired audio signal when recording a bilingual programme to the HDD or DVD RWs DVD Rs Video mode Set External Audio to Bilingual and Bilingual Recording to A L or B R in the Audio In setup page 138 4 Press REC MODE repeatedly to select the recording mode For details about the recording mode see page 52 5 Insert the source tape into the connected equipment and set to playback pause 6 Press 6 REC This recorder starts recording 1 Press the pause or play button on the connected equipment to cancel the playback pause status The connected equipment starts playback and the playback image is recorded by this recorder To stop recording press REC STOP on this recorder If you connect a digital video camera with a DV IN jack See DV Camcorder Dubbing on page 104 for an explanation of how to record from the DV IN jack Hint You can adjust the settings for the recording picture before recording See Adjusting the recording picture quality on page 59 Q Notes When recording a video game image the screen may not be clear Any programme that contains a Copy Never copy guard signal cannot be recorded When Bilingual
384. ing in 2008 analogue broadcasts in the UK will end area by area with all analogue broadcasts scheduled to end by 2012 After analogue broadcasts end in your area you will not be able to use hookup C to view TV broadcasts At that time change to hookup A to view digital broadcasts A Receiving Freeview For digital broadcasting Use this hookup if you can receive Freeview With this hookup you can record any programme position by selecting the programme position on the recorder TV to aerial input Aerial cable supplied mm mm mm m mm mmm n m n to DIGITAL AERIAL OUT to DIGITAL AERIAL IN DVD recorder UREZOUT Signal flow If you want to view both analogue and digital broadcasts This recorder has separate built in TV tuners for terrestrial digital and terrestrial analogue TV broadcasts TV Wall 2 Aerial cable supplied to aerial input to ANALOG AERIAL IN to DIGITAL AERIAL OUT 25 to ANALOG AERIAL OUT CN Signal flow Une ST 1 3 Step 1 Connecting the Aerial Cable and Set Top Controller If the set top box receiver can output RGB signals This recorder accepts RGB signals If the set top box receiver can output RGB signals connect the TV SCART connector on
385. iojeue 104 continued T3 Rec Mode Adjust If there is not enough available disc space for the recording the recorder automatically adjusts the recording mode to enable the entire programme to be recorded Set Rec Mode Adjust to in the Recording setup page 143 If the timer settings overlap If one or more timer settings overlap a message appears To change the timer settings see Checking Changing Cancelling Timer Settings on page 77 6 Hint If you are recording to the HDD you can play the title as it is being recorded by selecting the programme title on the Title List page 88 Q Notes If a message indicating that the HDD is full appears on the screen change the recording destination to DVD or make available space for the recording page 92 If there is not enough available DVD disc space for the recording the recorder automatically records the programme to the HDD even if you select DVD Recovery Recording The last recording mode you selected manually becomes the default recording mode for timer recordings made from the GUIDE Plus system You cannot adjust the recording quality HDD or DVD once the recording starts The beginning of some recordings may not be made when using the VPS PDC function You cannot extend the recording duration time when VPS PDC is selected page 78 The Mode Adjust function only works with a timer re
386. ion is executed while a blank disc media DVD RW R exists on the tray e Insert a DVD ROM DVD test disc DVD software available on the market or the like in the tray and then close the tray Note1 If you close the tray while it is empty ejection of the tray becomes impossible Note2 If you close the tray with a CD disc inserted in it the CD can be ejected However if you close the tray while it is empty there can be a case that ejection of the tray becomes impossible Note3 Even if you replace the DVD drive unit while the tray remains under the state as described above the situation cannot be improved 2 If tray cannot be ejected while the disc is not inserted Execute the forced ejection e Insert a DVD ROM DVD test disc DVD software available on the market or the like on the tray and try to close the tray There are cases that it recovers the trouble 3 Contents of forcedly ejected blank disc media DVD RW R can be damaged There can be a case that initialization is also impossible 2 BOARD CONNECTION SERVICE REMOTE CONTROLLER Extension cable 6090 201 RD 065 board CN2301 40core AV 114 board 101 40 SERVICE REMOTE CONTROLLER J 6090 203 A 3 MODEL NAME SETTING METHOD WHEN ENGINE IS REPLACED Required equipment Remote controller RMT D248P Service remote controller J 6090 203 A Monitor Model name delete method L 2 Turn main POWER O
387. ip or lock certain channels 1 Select Channel Options in Digital Tuner and press ENTER 2 Select Next Screen and press ENTER 3 Enter your four digit password using the number buttons and press ENTER To set a password see page 145 Channel Options Channel Skip 0001 DDE News 0002 AAC 0003 NCES 0004 Channel J 0005 CDE 0006 FGH 0007 4 Select the programme position you want to skip or lock using and press ENTER 5 Select an option and press ENTER To skip the programme position select Jeu To lock the programme position select B A check mark appears in the check box next to the selected programme position Auto Skip Selects whether to skip radio or data channels Off No channels are skipped Radio Radio channels are skipped Data Data channels are skipped Radio amp Radio and data channels are Data skipped when selecting channels HELP Setting Displays Help information for GUI displays Does not set to HELP setting mode EPG Type Select Selects the EPG Electronic Programme Guide type to use GUIDE Select this to use the Gemstar Plus GUIDE Plus electronic programme guide page 63 Guide Digital Select this to use the digital electronic programme guide page 48 Easy Setup Resetting the Recorder Select this to run the Easy Setup
388. irms that the R Y signal of the component video conforms to the PAL standard If this signal level is not correct color of the video signal will have different color when the COMPONENT connector output signal is connected to a projector having COMPONENT input connector terminated in 750 Check method Note 1 Do not set RGB OUT to ON Note 2 Do not connect the HDMI OUT 1 Insert the PAL reference disc and play back the 100 color bars 2 Confirm that the burst signal level is 700 mV 50 mVp p Test point 700 50 anuli Fig 7 6 7 Scart Video Output Level Check Purpose This check is made to satisfy the PAL signal standard If it is adjusted incorrectly brightness will be too bright or too dark Test point Scart Video output connector pin 9 terminated in 750 Check method Note SCART OUT should be set to Video Insert the PAL reference disc and play back the 100 color bars 2 Confirm that the video level is 1 0 0 07 Vp p 1 0 0 07 Fig 7 7 8 Scart Video Output S Y Check Purpose This check confirms that the Scart Y signal output has the rated amplitude If it adjusted incorrectly the playback video signal will not be displayed corrected even when the Scart cable is connected Test point Scart Video output connector 49 terminated in 750 Check method Note SCART OUT should be set to S Video Insert
389. l designation internal component adjustment for repair IN OUT direction of line Line B Line Circled numbers refer to waveforms Voltages are dc between measurement point and ground Readings are taken with a color bar signals on DVD reference disc Readings are taken with a digital multimeter DC 10 Voltage variations may be noted due to normal production toler ances Abbreviation AUS Australian model 1 1 7 JA402 COMPONENT Pn 8 JA402 COMPONENT 1 6 9 501 Note The components identified by mark or dotted line with mark are critical for safety Replace only with part number specified When indicating parts by reference number please include the board name WAVEFORMS AV 114 DT 120 4 3 4 4 RDR HXD870 HXD970 HXD1070 For Schematic Diagram Refer to page 4 47 for printed wiring board ms T Note The components identified by mark or dotted SA MUTECONTROL SANIUTE CONTROL line with mark A are critical for safety AV 114 BOARD 1 5 WERE
390. l digital cord not supplied to DIGITAL OUT COAXIAL Y DIGITAL OUT PCM DTS MPEG DOLBY DIGITAL COAXIAL Ge LINE 3 TV J G LINK LINE 2 OUT rAUDIOn VIDEO R L Audio video oN Signal flow not supplied OU N DIGITAL AERIAL DVD recorder cord TV projector or audio component The yellow plug is used for video signals page 19 Digital audio input jack If your audio component has a Dolby Digital DTS or MPEG audio decoder and a digital input jack use this connection You can enjoy Dolby Digital 5 1ch DTS 5 1ch and MPEG audio 5 1ch surround effects Step 5 Preparing the Remote You can control the recorder using the supplied remote Insert two R6 size AA batteries by matching the and ends on the batteries to the markings inside the battery compartment When using the remote point it at the remote sensor on the recorder Q Notes If the supplied remote interferes with your other Sony DVD recorder or player change the command mode number for this recorder page 25 Use the batteries correctly to avoid possible leakage and corrosion Should leakage occur do not touch the liquid with bare hands Observe the following Do not use a new battery with an old battery or batteries of different manufacturers Do not attempt to recharge the batteries If
391. l selected titles at a time using page 71 Input Disc Name Changes the disc name page 42 Finalise Select Yes to finalise a disc automatically after dubbing DVD RW DVD R Video mode or DVD R 1 24 Dubbing restriction You cannot dub movies and other DVD VIDEOs to the HDD Also when dubbing from a DVD to the HDD scenes that contain a copy protection signal cannot be recorded Titles containing Copy Once copy protection signals can be moved only from the HDD to a DVD RW DVD R VR mode after the title is moved the original title in the HDD is erased The Move function is performed using Dubbing List Titles containing copy protection signals are indicated with Copy Dubbing protection signals Copy Free protection HDD signal Copy Once HDD EJ EB CPRM compatible DVD RWs DVD Rs VR mode only CPRM Content Protection for Recordable Media is a coding technology that protects copyrights for images Q Notes Protected titles in the HDD cannot be moved The Move function is not available for HDD DVD DUB dubbing Even if you erase a scene that contains a copy protection signal the recording restrictions on that title are retained 10 Select Start Dubbing and press ENTER When you set Finalise to Yes in step 9 select the title menu style and press ENTER The recorder turns off autom
392. lable buttons in the programme list Buttons Operations PAGE Display the previous next eight channels INFO Display the detailed information of the programme page 49 RETURN Close the display To search for programmes by date 1 Press the green button while the programme list is displayed 2 Select a date in the Date row Select a time in the Time row 4 Select Jump and press ENTER The programme list for the specified date and time is displayed To search programmes by genre 1 Press the yellow button while the y programme list is displayed 2 Select a date in the Date row Select a time in the Time row 4 Select the Genre row and press ENTER The genre list is displayed 5 Selecta genre using 4 gt and press ENTER Select OK and press ENTER 7 Select Search and press ENTER The programme list for the specified genre is displayed 4 select Format and press ENTER 51 Start Video Mode xx min required Finalise Format DVD RW Optimise HDD 5 Select an and press ENTER VR Mode Formats DVD RWs DVD Rs VR mode or unrecorded discs in VR mode Video Mode Formats DVD R Ws DVD Rs in Video mode Format DVD RW Formats DVD RWs 6 Select Start and press ENTER All contents on the disc are erased 6 Hint By reformatting you can change the recor
393. le Mode while selecting titles Erasing a section of a title A B Erase HDD You can select a section scene in a title and erase it Note that erasing scenes in a title cannot be undone 1 After step 2 of Erasing and Editing a Title select Edit and press ENTER 2 Select A B Erase and press ENTER For the HDD select a type of editing and press ENTER For details see page 92 The display for setting point A appears The title starts to play A B Erase HDD World Sports Rec time TA 0 10 00 gt Play pue gt continued 93 3 Select point A using 44 and press To return to the beginning of the title press and then press Ke 4 select From and press ENTER The position of point A is displayed and the title re starts playing 5 Select point B using lt 4 gt and press 6 Select To and press ENTER The position of point B 15 displayed T Select Yes and press ENTER The scene is erased To cancel A B Erase Press 9 RETURN The Title List appears Hint A chapter mark is inserted after the scene is erased The chapter mark divides the title into separate chapters on either side of the mark Q Notes mages or sound may be momentarily interrupted at the point where you erase a section of a title Sections shorter than five seconds may not be
394. lect HDMI Output only when connecting equipment to the HDMI OUT jack 1 Press SYSTEM MENU while the recorder is in stop mode 2 Select Initial Setup and press ENTER 3 Select HDMI Output and press ENTER The HDMI Output setup appears with the following options The default settings are underlined After connecting equipment to the HDMI OUT jack Screen Resolution 4 3 Video Output and Colour are automatically set to the appropriate settings Initial Setup Playback 1920 x 1080 Parental Lock 4 3 Video Output 1920 x 1080i HDMI Output Colour 1280 x 720p Options Audio Output 720 x 576p Options 2 HDMI Control 720 x 576i Screen Resolution Selects the type of video signals output from the HDMI OUT jack If the picture is not clear natural or to your satisfaction try another option that suits the disc and your TV projector etc For details refer also to the instruction manual supplied with the TV projector etc 1920 x 1080p Sends 1920x1080p video signals 1920 x 1080i Sends 1920 10801 video signals 1280 x720p Sends 1280x720p video signals Other Settings Options The Options and Options 2 setups allow you to set up other operational settings 1 Press SYSTEM MENU while the recorder is in stop mode 2 Select Initial Setup and press ENTER 3 Select Options or Options 2 and press EN
395. lingual programmes set Bilingual Recording to either A L default or B R in the Audio In setup page 138 About HDD Recording format see page 144 A title name in the dubbing source is dubbed However only up to 40 characters of a title name are dubbed when dubbing from the HDD to a DVD RW DVD RW Video mode DVD R DVD R Video mode Dubbing Using Dubbing List HDD You can select the titles you want to dub using Dubbing List You can also edit titles before dubbing without changing the original titles Press SYSTEM MENU The System Menu appears 2 Select Dubbing and press ENTER 3 Select a dubbing direction and press ENTER To dub titles from the HDD to a disc select HDD gt DVD To dub titles from a disc to the HDD select DVD CD gt HDD 4 Select Create New Dubbing List and press ENTER The Dubbing List appears If you have previously saved a Dubbing List and want to resume editing it select Use Previous Dubbing List and go to step 7 By Date SAT 10 11 World Tour Asia 2 All Genres 2 TUE 06 11 World Tour Asia 1 1THUO1 11 World Cup Final World Tour Asia 3 5 00 Oh30m 0 9G Spo 1 Sports Dubbing List Total Current DVD Remain 4 46 1 Direction of dubbing 2 Total number of titles to be dubbed Dubbing step number Display 1 Select a title you wan
396. ltiple titles at one time page 93 Create Creates a Playlist page 96 Undo Undoes the last edit you made 6 Hint You can label or re label DVDs page 43 Editing multiple titles Multi Mode HDD You can select and edit up to 24 titles at one time 1 Press TITLE LIST 2 Press gt The sub menu appears 3 Select Multi Mode and press ENTER The display for selecting titles to be edited appears 4 Titles By Date Oh30m 0 46 All Genres 21 00 10 04 9 SLP 75225 21 00 Tue10 04 Pr9 SLP a 0 46 CE 9 00 02 04 SLP AAT PD Mystery 1h00m 0 86 20 00 FRI 30 03 5 World Sports HDD SP Remain 70h03m 1h00m 0 86 pue gt continued 91 4 selecta title and press ENTER A check mark appears in the check box To clear the check mark press ENTER again 5 Repeat step 4 to select all of the titles you want to edit When you finish selecting titles press The sub menu appears 7 Select an option and press ENTER Erase Erases the selected titles Protect Protects the titles appears next to the protected title Unprotected Unprotects the titles Change Genre Changes the genre of the titles Hint You can exit Multi Mode by pressing gt and selecting Sing
397. m Language Code List on page 167 Q Note If you select a language in DVD Menu Language Subtitle Language or Audio Language that is not recorded on the DVD VIDEO one of the recorded languages will be automatically selected 1 34 DTS Output DVD VIDEOs only Selects whether or not to output DTS signals On Select this when the recorder is connected to an audio component with a built in DTS decoder Off Select this when the recorder is connected to an audio component without a built in DTS decoder Note When HDMI output is performed to equipment not compatible with DTS signals the signals will not be output regardless of the DTS Output setting 96 kHz PCM Output DVD VIDEOs only Selects the sampling frequency of the audio signal 96 kHz gt 48 kHz The audio signals of DVD VIDEOs are converted to 48 kHz and output 96 kHz All signals containing 96 kHz are output without conversion However the signals are output at 48 kHz if copyright protected signals are contained Notes 796 kHz PCM Output setting has no effect when audio signals are output from the LINE 2 OUT R AUDIO L jacks or LINE 3 TV LINE 1 DECODER jack If the sampling frequency is 96 kHz signals are simply converted to analogue signals and output If the HDMI OUT jack is connected to equipment not compatible with 96 kHz signals 48 kHz PCM will be automatically output e
398. m change or cancel timer recording only when EPG Link is set to Off See Checking Changing Cancelling Timer Settings Timer List page 60 Hint The Mode Adjust function also works with this timer method page 55 Q Note The EPG programme start and end time are determined by the broadcaster 1 13 Rec Mode Adjust If there is not enough available disc space for the recording the recorder automatically adjusts the recording mode to enable the entire programme to be recorded Set Mode Adjust to in the Recording setup page 143 If the timer settings overlap The confirmation screen appears To store the setting select Yes To cancel the overlapped setting select No To confirm change or cancel a timer recording See Checking Changing Cancelling Timer Settings Timer List on page 60 Hints You also display the Timer display by selecting Timer Recording from the System Menu Youcan play the title as it is being recorded by selecting the programme title on the Title List page 88 Q Notes message indicating that the HDD is full appears on the screen change the recording destination to DVD or make available space for the recording page 92 Check that the clock is correctly set before setting the timer recording If not the timer recording cannot be made To record a satellite programme turn on the
399. mage files or MP3 audio tracks DVD Audio discs Cartridge only type DVD RAMs HD layer on Super Audio CDs DVD VIDEOs with a different region code page 13 DVDs that were recorded on a different recorder and not correctly finalised Maximum recordable number of titles Disc Number of titles HDD 999 DVD RW DVD R 99 DVD RW DVD R 49 DVD R DL 49 DVD R DL 99 The maximum length for one title is 12 hours 1 2 Usable disc versions as of April 2007 8x speed or slower DVD RWs e 6x speed or slower DVD RWSs Ver 1 1 Ver 1 2 with 2 16x speed or slower DVD Rs 16x speed or slower DVD Rs Ver 2 0 Ver 2 1 with 2 8x speed or slower DVD R DL Double Layer discs 8x speed or slower DVD R DL Dual Layer discs Ver 3 0 with 2 DVD RW DVD RW DVD R DVD R DL DVD R and DVD R DL are trademarks 1 When an unformatted DVD R is inserted into this recorder it is automatically formatted in Video mode To format a new DVD R in VR mode format in the Format setup page 47 2 Content Protection for Recordable Media is a coding technology that protects copyrights for images Discs that cannot be recorded on DVD RAMs Note on playback operations of DVD VIDEOS VIDEO CDs Some playback operations of DVD VIDEOs VIDEO CDs may be intentionally set by software producers Since this recorder plays D
400. mes a day when the recorder 15 turned off standby mode Turn off the recorder when you are not using it for example at night After initial setup page 26 it may take up to 24 hours for your recorder to start receiving programme listings It may take up to one day to receive all seven days of TV programme listings Check the following if the programme guide data has not been received after waiting for a day Setup page 26 is completed The host channel is not disabled see Disabling programme positions on page 70 timer is not set If the programme guide data still cannot be received after checking the above search for the host channel at the following website and set the host channel manually page 69 www europe guideplus com If the host channel has changed or moved the programme guide data cannot be received In this case follow the steps in Searching for the GUIDE Plus host channel page 68 to update the host channel setting If the set top box receiver is connected to the recorder using a SCART cord only do the following Turn on your set top box receiver Connect the set top box controller Follow the steps in Changing the GUIDE Plus host channel manually page 69 to set the host channel manually Be sure to set your set top box receiver tuner as the source Q Notes Your set top box receiver s programme position may suddenly change ev
401. mme Guide type to use If no programme positions for digital broadcasts are found after scanning the Type Select display does not appear The EPG type is automatically set to the country area you select when setting the program positions continued 27 If you cannot get the recorder to control your set top box receiver Check the connection and position of the set top box controller page 17 If your set top box receiver still does not operate with this recorder refer to the instructions supplied with your set top box receiver and contact your cable or satellite company to see if they can provide you with a compatible set top box receiver Q Notes The list of external receivers controllable by the GUIDE Plus system is updated constantly and is distributed through GUIDE Plus system data signals Since the time your recorder has been produced and the time you installed your recorder for the first time new external receiver codes might have been added If the external receiver is still not on the list or is not controlled properly by the recorder please call Customer Support to report the brand and model of your external receiver pue sdmyooH To fix the set top box controller to your set top box receiver Once you have confirmed that the set top box controller controls your set top box receiver fix it in place 1 Remove the backing on the double sided tape 2 Attach it so that t
402. n 3 3 Hold down both the number and ENTER buttons at the same time for more than three seconds Hint Youcan check the Command Mode for the recorder in the front panel display Command In the front panel Mode display DVDI 1 appears DVD2 2 appears DVD3 Either 1 or 2 does not appear sjuaungsn py pue sumag continued 1 49 150 152 SMARTLINK This Recorder Allows you to use the Only SMARTLINK function with the recorder when the recorder is in standby mode Pass Through Allows you to use the SMARTLINK function with the connected equipment when the recorder is in standby mode Q Note Set Power Save to Off in the Basic setup page 130 to set SMARTLINK to Pass Through DivX Registration Code Displays the registration code of DivX video files for this recorder For more information go to http ww w divx com vod on the Internet Set Preview HDD only Selects the thumbnail type shown in the Title List Quick Plays short excerpts from Preview throughout the selected title Normal Plays the selected title from the beginning Software Update You can check the current software version of the built in digital tuner and keep it up to date with the latest software Manual Update Updates the software manually 1 Select Software Update in Options and press ENTER 2 Press Next Screen
403. n Euro Channel 1 AFT On Level Sound System B G Name AAB Decoder Off 4 Press 44 PP to select the programme position 5 Select the item you want to change using 4 4 and change the settings using gt then press ENTER To preset another programme position repeat from step 4 sjuaungsn py pue continued 1 3 3 134 136 Select this when programme position is unused or contains unwanted channels The selected position will be skipped when you press PROG L Does not skip the selected programme position CH System Select the region to get the best broadcast reception Select this when in France Western Select this when in West Euro European countries UK amp IE Eastern Euro AFT Select this when in Great Britain Ireland Select this when in East European countries On Turns on the Auto Fine Tuning function Normally select this position Off Allows you to adjust the picture manually If the Auto Fine Tuning function does not work effectively select Off and press Press gt to obtain a clearer picture and press ENTER Video Settings Video In Out The Video In Out settings will adjust items related to the image such as size and colour Select the settings according to the type of TV tuner or decoder connected to the DVD recorder 1 Press SYSTEM
404. n or sub can be recorded Set Bilingual Recording to A L default or B R in the Audio In setup page 138 Hint The HDD contents recorded in Video mode can be dubbed to a disc at high speed page 98 Playback Settings Playback The Playback setup allows you to adjust the playback settings 1 Press SYSTEM MENU while the recorder is in stop mode 2 Select Initial Setup and press ENTER 3 Select Playback and press ENTER The Playback setup appears with the following options The default settings are underlined 25 Initial Setup A 4 3 Letter Box Parental Lock Pause Mode 4 3 Pan Scan HDMI Output Seamless Playback m 16 9 Options Angle Indicator Options 2 TV Type Select the playback picture size according to the type of connected TV wide screen wide mode TV or conventional 4 3 screen TV 4 3 Letter Box Select this when connecting to a 4 3 screen TV Displays a wide picture with bands on the upper and lower portions of the screen 4 3 Pan Scan Select this when connecting to a 4 3 screen TV Automatically displays a wide picture on the entire screen and cuts off the portions that do not fit 16 9 Select this when connecting to a wide screen TV or TV with a wide mode function 1 35 Resolution The first figure refers to when Input Line System is set to NTSC the second when set to PAL SECAM in the Basic s
405. nd Scan Audio When you press during playback you can play quickly with dialogue or sound except for VIDEO CDs Super VIDEO CDs No sound is output when you press P gt two or more times to change search speed 1 19 Recording from Connected Equipment HDD You can record from a connected VCR or similar device To connect a VCR or similar device see Connecting a VCR or Similar Device on page 31 Use the DV IN jack on the front panel if the equipment has a DV output jack i LINK jack HDD LI gg 8 23 DVD INPUT REC gt e REC MODE REC STOP 1 Press or DVD If you select DVD insert a recordable DVD see 1 Inserting Disc on page 36 2 Press INPUT to select an input source according to the connection you made The front panel display changes as follows programme position 2 To display the registration code for this recorder Select Registration Code of DivX in the Options setup page 150 To resume playback from the point where you stopped Resume Play When you press gt again after you stop playback the recorder resumes playback from the point where you pressed To start from the beginning press again and press C gt Playback starts from the beginning of the title track scene The point where you stopped playing is cleared when you open the disc tray except HDD you play another title exc
406. nect more than one type of video cord between the recorder and your TV at the same time 32 1 7 Connecting a VCR or Similar Device After disconnecting the recorder s mains lead from the mains connect a VCR or similar recording device to the LINE IN jacks of this recorder Use the DV IN jack on the front panel if the equipment has a DV output jack i LINK jack page 104 For details refer to the instruction manual supplied with the connected equipment To record this recorder see Recording from Connected Equipment on page 79 Connecting to the LINE 1 DECODER jack Connect a VCR or similar recording device to the LINE 1 DECODER jack of this recorder pue sdmyooH VCR TV t SCART cord not supplied to SCART input our TINE 2 OUT AUDIO VIDED Laer Y COMPONENT VIDEO OUT 5 1060 GUNES DVD recorder Q Notes Pictures containing copy protection signals that prohibit any copying cannot be recorded If you pass the recorder signals through a VCR you may not receive a clear image on your TV screen DVD recorder VCR ch Be sure to connect your VCR to the DVD recorder and to your TV in the order shown below To watch video tapes watch the tapes through a second line input on your TV Line input 1 VCR P DVD recorder gt TV The SMARTLINK features are
407. ng Encorder routine is hung up F Alrdy Exst Extension file 15 already exist File cansel Extension file is canseled FileNot Exist Extension file is not exist No More Info No more space in the internal work management area No Permission No permossopn to write to the disc No Video No Video input not locked Now busy In the process of the emergency processing NV Pck DMA Er Inappropriate NaviPack DMA Pck MK Err Error in creating NaviPack Ourob Strm NG Inappropriate Stream data to the Ouroboros input Over Heat Abnormal temperature PARAM NO ACCP Recording parameter is not matched Process Over Process is overfull Protect Scr Source to be recorded is copy protected Rec Pause No operation permitted during recording pause Relocation Do VR recording data was relocated Repair Excec Repairing has been executed Something Undetermined error SRAM NG Abnormality in access to the backup Work SRAM Status NG Abnormality in change of statuses 6 16 6 2 12 DV Service Mode 1 DV debug Turnofthe main power ON 2 screen after exiting all menu screens press ESC on the service remote controller 3 Press DISP 4 Press 3 Used when an error exists in connection with the DV equipment DV 1394 InitDV OK InitVE OK 02 DV 01 Recorder GUID 00E0360006100001 IRM COSF0000 oPCR 0000007A DV GUID 0080880303480E96 VICTOR GR D
408. nre Assigns an album a genre Set Skip Sets a track to be skipped page 115 Play Mode Selects play modes page 115 Genre Name Allows you to enter a genre name up to 12 characters page 42 Q Note You cannot edit audio tracks on the connected USB device olpny 117 JPEG Image Files About the Photo Album Function The Photo Album function enables you to do following Store JPEG image files on the HDD View JPEG image files on the HDD DATA DVDs DVD RWs DVD Rs DATA CDs or connected USB device Edit JPEG image files Print JPEG image files Copy JPEG image files and slideshow to DVD RWs DVD Rs Preparing for Using the Photo Album Function Connect a USB device to the USB jack on the recorder or copy JPEG image files from DATA CDs DATA DVDs or the connected USB device to the HDD SYSTEM MENU lt 4 118 5 Press ENTER select a JPEG image file using 6 Press gt The sub menu appears 7 Select an item and press ENTER To copy two or more albums or files select Multi Mode To copy the selected album select Copy Album Contents in Album Options and go to step 12 copy the selected files select in File Options and go to step 12 8 Select an album or JPEG image file and press ENTER A check mark appears in the check box by the selected item
409. nre HDD only 6 Remaining time of the current disc in the current recording mode example SP mode Detailed information for the selected title The resume point time is shown in the 8 Title List 3 Select a title using and press ENTER Playback starts from the selected title To stop playback Press stop To scroll the list display by page Page mode Press while the Title List is displayed Each time you press 44 gt the entire Title List changes to the next previous page of titles About the Title List for DVD RWs DVD Rs VR mode You can switch the Title List to show Original or Playlist titles 1 Press while the Title List is displayed 2 Select Play List using and press ENTER During playback Example DVD R in Video mode 1 12 13 14 15 3 2 0 00 15 Chapter Time 0 00 21 Chapter Total 010111525 Title Tennis 1 Playing status 2 Shows that the Resume Play is available page 81 Current selected recording mode remaining DVD recording time disc type page 71 4 Remaining time 5 Station name and programme position number 6 Audio setting for the current programme Recording restrictions for the current programme TV mode or DVD mode page 25 9 Disc information Title type Original or Playlist for DVD RW DVD R in VR mode 11 Disc type f
410. nt with a built in Dolby Digital decoder Dolby Digital Select this when the recorder is connected to an audio component lacking a built in Dolby Digital decoder Q Note If the HDMI OUT jack is connected to equipment not compatible with Dolby Digital signals the PCM signals will be automatically output even when you select Dolby Digital Auto Language The Auto Language function is available when Audio Language and Subtitle Language are set to the same language and Subtitle Display is set to On On For DVD VIDEOs whose main audio track is the language you set in Audio Language and Subtitle Language the recorder plays the main audio track without subtitles For DVD VIDEOs whose main audio track is not the language you set in Audio Language and Subtitle Language the recorder plays the main audio track with subtitles in the language you set Off Turns off the function DVD Menu Language DVD VIDEO only Switches the language for the DVD menu Select w Subtitle Language to set the same language as the language you set in Subtitle Language Subtitle Display On Displays subtitles Off Does not display subtitles Assist Subtitle Displays special assistive subtitles where available Hint If you select Others in Audio Language Subtitle Language or DVD Menu Language press and enter a language code fro
411. ntrol unit onto the case or bumping an object against the cabinet Physically dragging the unit Stacking another product on the unit Note Do NOT to apply shock such as bumping or hitting a screwdriver against the HDD during diagnosis with the case open Examples of dangerous handling while the power is off Applying strong shock although the HDD is more resistant to shock when the power is off Dropping the unit from a height of several centimeters or lifting one side of the unit and letting it drop Do NOT move the unit immediately after the power is turned off Wait at least 30 seconds after the indication on the FL display changes from POWER OFF to the clock indication before moving the unit If the AC power cable is accidentally disconnected before turning the unit off wait at least for one minute before moving the unit In this case damage to the HDD caused by sudden shutoff may be small because the emergency relief mechanism is activated However if sudden shutoff occurrs during recording or playback recorded data may be damaged Be sure to check the operations Caution for handling the HDD repair part 1 Handle the HDD in a safe environment Handle the HDD over an antistatic pad that can also absorb shock Wear wrist bands to prevent electrostatic charges generated in your body from affecting the HDD 2 Observe the following rules when handling the HDD Handle one HDD at a time Do NOT hold several HDDs at the same
412. o players finalisation mode necessary page 45 Type Disc Logo Icon used in this manual Characteristics VIDEO DVD VIDEO DVD Discs such as movies that can be purchased or rented This recorder also recognises DVD RAMs as DVD Video compatible discs COMPACT VIDEO CD WST DIGITAL VIDEO VIDEO CDs or CD Rs CD RWs in VIDEO CD Super VIDEO CD format DIGITAL AUDIO Music CDs or CD Rs CD RWs in music CD format DVD RWs DVD Rs DVD RAMs containing MP3 audio tracks or DivX video files DVD VIDEO and CD are trademarks DivX DivX Certified and associated logos are trademarks of DivX Inc and are used under license DivX is a video file compression technology developed by DivX Inc f the DVD RAM has a removable cartridge remove the cartridge before playback Discs that cannot be played PHOTO CDs CD ROMSs CD Rs CD RWs that are recorded in a format different from the formats mentioned in the table above Data part of CD Extras BDs HD DVDs Discs recorded with an AVCHD compatible DVD video camera DATA DVD DVD RWs DVD Rs DVD ROMs containing MP3 audio tracks JPEG image files or DivX video files CD ROMs CD Rs CD RWs DATA CD containing either MP3 audio tracks JPEG image files or DivX video files DVD ROMs DVD RWSs DVD RWs DVD Rs DVD Rs that do not contain DVD Video DivX video JPEG i
413. o 30 days in advance There are three methods to set the timer the standard method EPG method and Series Recording method Standard Set the date time and programme position of the programme manually EPG Seta programme to be recorded based on the information provided by the EPG Electronic Programme Guide page 55 Series Recording Automatically sets the recorder to record programmes in a series page 57 Setting the timer manually Standard Ajuo 51950 104 Tg ENTER STOP gt continued 53 94 96 1 Press The List display appears e Timer List 10 30SUN 25 11 VPS PDC 0 8 Counts 0 32 New Input 2 Select the New Input row and press ENTER 10 30 5 25 11 Date SUN 25 11 Detailed Settings Record to Set Details Recording Mode VPS PDC Z Update Cancel Genre EPG Link Series Recording VPS PDC 0 8 Set Title Name 3 Select an using gt and adjust using Then press ENTER The adjustable items are listed below Pr CH Sets the programme position and the source Sets the date up to 30 days later Select a recording pattern by pressing 4 repeatedly to set the timer for the same daily or weekly programmes Start Sets
414. o record Q Note When VPS is set for or more timer recordings the start times may change in the event of a broadcast delay or early start 3 Select a title using and press ENTER Playback starts from the selected title To use the DVD s Menu When you play a DVD VIDEO or a finalised DVD RW DVD RW Video mode DVD R or DVD R Video mode you can display the disc s menu by pressing TOP MENU or MENU Q Note The gt button is not available in the disc s menu To play VIDEO CDs Super VIDEO CDs with PBC functions PBC Playback Control allows you to play VIDEO CDs Super VIDEO CDs interactively using the menu on your TV screen When you start playing a VIDEO CD Super VIDEO CD with PBC functions the menu appears Select an item using the number buttons and press ENTER Then follow the instructions in the menu press L when Press SELECT appears Note Some playback options such as search repeat play or programme play cannot be played with PBC function To play with playback options start playback without PBC functions using the Title List To change the angles If various angles multi angles for a scene are recorded on the disc go appears on the screen Press ANGLE during playback To switch the angle mark indicator to off set Angle Indicator to in the Playback setup page 145 To stop playback Press To playback quickly with sou
415. on 1 5 Q Audio L R left right input jacks This connection will use your TV s or audio component s two speakers for sound Hint For correct speaker location see the operating instructions supplied with the connected components Q Notes Do not connect your TV s audio output jacks to the LINE IN R AUDIO L jacks at the same time This will cause unwanted noise to come from your TV s speakers With connection do not connect the LINE IN R AUDIO L and LINE 2 OUT R AUDIO L jacks to your TV s audio output jacks at the same time This will cause unwanted noise to come from your TV s speakers With connection after you have completed the connection make the appropriate settings in the Audio Out setup page 138 Otherwise no sound or a loud noise will come from your speakers When you connect the recorder to an audio component using an HDMI cord you will need to do one of the following Connect the audio component to the TV with the HDMI cord or Connect the recorder to the TV with a video cord other than HDMI cord component video cord S video cord or audio video cord Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories Dolby and the double D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories 72 DTS and DTS Digital Out are registered trademarks of DTS Inc Code numbers of controllable TVs If more than one code number is listed try entering them one at a tim
416. on 48 63 tI button 26 d RETURN button 26 EXIT button 131 DISPLAY button 40 21 instant replay instant advance buttons 82 22 44 1 previous next buttons 82 108 115 PAGE buttons 48 65 44 41 10 gt gt search slow freeze frame buttons 82 108 115 DAY buttons 65 play button 80 108 124 pause button 82 108 115 124 stop button 80 108 114 124 The button has a tactile dot 25 TV PAUSE button 87 REC button 36 REC STOP button 36 HDD DVD DUB button 99 REC MODE button 36 ZOOM button 124 TV on standby button 24 1 40 About i LINK The DV IN jack on this recorder is i LINK compliant for digital video cameras This section describes the i LINK standard and its features What is i LINK i LINK is a digital serial interface for handling digital video digital audio and other data in two directions between equipment having i LINK jack and for controlling other equipment i LINK compatible equipment can be connected by a single i LINK cable Possible applications are operations and data transactions with various digital AV equipment When two or more i LINK compatible equipment are connected to this recorder in a daisy chain operations and data transactions are possible with not only the equipment that this recorder is connected to but also with other devices via the
417. on when the power is on The HDD is very sensitive to electrostatic charges Rapid change in temperature or humidity may cause deterioration of the HDD Note After receiving damage caused by any above mentioned factors the HDD may operate normally for dozens or hundreds of hours but then suddenly crash If you are certain you have damaged a new repair part HDD while making repairs do not use the part Reference Main specifications for damage to the HDD During operation During 9 op nonoperation Shock Approx 20 or more Approx 200 or more The HDD is about 10 times as sensitive to shock during acceleration operation compared to nonoperation Temperature change 15 C hour or more Reference Estimated value of falling distance vs shock G when the HDD is dropped without protection Landing Falling surface distance 0 5 inch 12 7 mm 1 0 inch 25 4 mm 2 0 inch 50 8 mm 4 0 inch 101 6 mm Granite Concrete Synthetic resin Antistatic surface floor coated table sponge 6 7 2 Cautions for handling and examples of dangerous handling for the product that the HDD is mounted on or HDD repair part Cautions for handling the product that the HDD is mounted on The HDD is always in operation while the unit is turned on Do NOT to apply shock to the unit Examples of dangerous handling while the power is on Bumping the case Dropping an object such as a small screwdriver or remote co
418. opou SY 910N AHdt6 D 29 3urTp6 I 20101 22Jnos euru Aq Jo uorooeuuoo 1odoudur 9An29Jo q 4 4 22 D COLOI 9 n29jeq IMAP 99 1910 POE 3591482 CAHdt6t D 80101 euru AG 24 Jo 8 9An29Jo q ojo A ddns Jamod 3 90101 TOTOI uonoeuuoo 80121 2 6 TOLOI AYPA sosneo 9415504 Apoyeudoudde 80101 TOLON IST AC Jo 100 seu 10101 JepoougooprA Jo uonezienrug LSOH 10101 1opoougooptA orroods Aq uoneorunurmioo MAPPA ON pojo duroo Ajoyetidoidde 10101 2112945 Aq Jo uonezi eniu HAUL 943 3991 ndur sutog st ZHY pp eusrs uy ZH prp DAG ndur Suroq st Sur dures zppi gp peusis uy 7 8p ndur Suroq st Su
419. ordings are unavailable If the timer is set during copying the recorder starts the timer recording after copying is finished Copy protected CDs cannot be copied to the HDD To cancel Programme play Press CLEAR during playback Or set Programme to Cancel Programme Play in the Play Mode menu To erase the programme Press CLEAR in stop mode Or set Programme to Erase Programme List in the Play Mode menu Hints The programme you made remains after Programme play finishes To play the same programme again set Programme to Start Programme Play in the Mode menu However the programme is cleared after you remove the disc or press VO e You repeat Programme play Set Repeat to Repeat Programme in the Play Mode menu page 109 You can select Programme from Play Mode in the System Menu Preparing for Using Jukebox Connect a USB device to the USB jack on the recorder or copy audio tracks from CDs DATA CDs DATA DVDs or the connected USB device to the HDD SYSTEM MENU t4 ENTER HDD DVD DUB Connecting the USB device You can connect a USB device to the USB jack on the recorder to listen to the MP3 audio tracks or copy to the HDD Refer to the operating instructions supplied with the USB device before connecting DVD recorder
420. ormat page 10 Displays the finalised disc in Video mode as DVD Video 12 Title number Chapter number page 89 Playing time Multi angles indicator page 80 15 Copy protected indicator page 99 Data transfer bar and rate 3 Select Original or Play List using and press ENTER To change the title order for HDD Sort Titles 1 Press while the Title List is displayed 2 Select Sort Titles using 44 and press ENTER 3 Select the item using and press ENTER Order Sorted In order of when the titles were recorded The title that is recorded most recently is listed at the top By Date In order of when the titles were recorded The title that is recorded most recently and has not been played is listed at the top Playlist titles are not Unseen Title displayed By Title In alphabetical order By Number In order of recorded title number To search for a title by genre HDD only 1 Press while the Title List is displayed 2 Select Genre using and press ENTER 3 Selecta genre using and press ENTER To change a title thumbnail picture Thumbnail After recording the first scene of the recording the title is automatically set as the thumbnail picture You can select a favourite scene for the thumbnail picture shown in the Title List 1 Press TITLE LIST For DVD RWs DVD Rs VR mode switch the Title Lists if necessary
421. ostal code using 4 gt and press ENTER If Country is set to Others you cannot enter a postal code and the GUIDE Plus system will not search for a host channel Select External Receiver 1 and press ENTER You can also select External Receiver 2 or External Receiver 3 if you have connected additional set top box receivers Press ENTER to select Continue Select the set top box receiver type using and press ENTER Select the provider using 0 4 and press ENTER 1 6 D TV Auto Channel Setting If the aerial cable is connected to the DIGITAL AERIAL IN jack hookup A select Auto Scan Then select your country region using lt and press ENTER The recorder will automatically capture and store the available TV and Radio channels If the aerial cable is connected to the ANALOG AERIAL IN jack hookup B or C select Do not set For details see page 15 Auto Channel Setting If the aerial cable is connected to the ANALOG AERIAL IN jack hookup B or C and the TV is connected to this recorder not using SMARTLINK select Auto Scan Then select your country region using lt and press ENTER The programme position order will be set according to the country region you set If the aerial cable 15 connected to ANALOG AERIAL IN jack hookup B or C and the TV is connected to this recorder with SMARTLINK select Download from TV
422. ot work with some screen sizes The following settings are not available for the signals output from the HDMI jack Sharpness White Enhancer Black Enhancer Black Level Gamma Correction Hue Chroma Level Playing a Previous Recording While Making Another Simultaneous Rec and Play HDD Simultaneous Rec and Play allows you to view a previously recorded programme while recording programmes Playback continues even if a timer recording starts Use this function as follows While recording to the HDD Play another title on the HDD Play a previously recorded programme a DVD by pressing the DVD button While recording to a DVD Play a previously recorded programme on the HDD by pressing the HDD button You can also play a DVD VIDEO VIDEO CD Super VIDEO CD DATA DVD or DATA CD while recording on the HDD pvp REN TITLE LIST d t Example Play another title on the HDD while recording to the HDD 1 While recording press TITLE LIST to display the HDD Title List 2 Select the title you want to play and press ENTER Playback starts from the selected title 1 21 Pausing a TV Broadcast TV Pause Pause Live TV HDD You can pause a current TV broadcast and record it on the HDD then continue watching the programme at a later time This is useful when you receive
423. ound the list Channel name 4 Indicates if a timer recording is associated with the programme page 55 5 Colour buttons 6 Indicates that short programmes that are not displayed on the list are scheduled Truncated programme title in case the name is too long to be displayed in the cell Time slot 9 Indicates the current time and date 2 selecta programme using 4 4 gt and press ENTER You can also select a programme using the red button If you press gt after selecting the last programme on the right the schedule for the next 30 minutes is displayed depending on availability from the broadcaster 1 11 8 Reformatting a Disc New discs are automatically formatted when inserted If necessary you can manually re format DVD RW DVD RW or DVD R disc to make a blank disc For DVD RWs or DVD Rs you can select a recording format VR mode or Video mode according to your needs SYSTEM MENU 1 inserta disc See 1 Inserting a Disc on page 36 2 Press SYSTEM MENU The System Menu appears 3 Select Disc Setup and press ENTER Disc Setup Input Disc Name Next Screen Format Protect Disc Off Finalise Format DVD RW VR Mode Optimise HDD 6 Hint You can display the channel list by pressing the ENTER button while watching a programme To watch another channel select a channel using amp and press ENTER Avai
424. pen close gt t may take a few seconds for the disc tray to open after you have recorded or edited a DVD This is because the recorder 15 adding disc data to the disc Any buttons do not function and LOCKED appears in the front panel display gt The recorder is locked Cancel the Child Lock page 81 108 TV Pause does not work gt You are recording to the HDD the HDD 15 full Recording Timer recording Editing The programme position cannot be changed from the programme position you are recording gt Set the TV s input source to TV Recording does not start immediately after you press 6 REC gt Operate the recorder only after LOAD FORMAT or INFO WRITE disappears from the front panel display Nothing was recorded even though you set the timer setting correctly gt There was a power failure during recording gt recorder s internal clock stopped due to a power failure that lasted for more than 1 hour Reset the clock page 129 gt The channel was disabled after the timer recording was set See Manual CH Setting on page 133 The programme position was hidden after the timer recording was set See Disabling programme positions on page 70 Disconnect the mains lead from the mains and connect it again The programme contains copy protection signals that restrict copying Another timer setting overlapped the timer setting page
425. pen the disc tray except when dubbing Next you edit the titles on a disc except when wo dubbing from the HDD o you switch the Title List to Original or Playlist Dubbing when dubbing from DVD RWs DVD Rs in VR mode only you finalise the disc Dubbing gt 0 0 video mode 4 Titles Title Edit 1 223 2 World Tour Asia 2 o 3 World Tour Asia 1 o 4 World Cup Final o No The recorder turns off automatically when you do not use the recorder for more than 20 minutes after the dubbing has finished You can dub all of the contents on a finalised DVD RW DVD32R or finalised DVD RW DVD R Video mode to another recordable DVD RW DVD RW or unused DVD R DVD R via the HDD as a backup copy 346 L 4 46 gt To display the dubbing information Press DISPLAY while dubbing Q Note Backup discs of unfinalised discs cannot be made 2 Selecta title you want to edit and press ENTER The sub menu appears 3 Select an option and press ENTER The options differ depending on the dubbing direction or disc type Erase Frases the selected title Title Name Names or renames a title page 42 Erase Erases the section of the title page 93 Changes the order of titles page 97 Preview Allows you to check the content of a title Divide
426. ppears in the check box by the selected item To clear the check mark press ENTER again To clear all check marks select Single Mode 9 Repeat step 8 to select all of the JPEG image files you want to copy 10 Press gt The sub menu appears 11 Select to DVD and press ENTER The display asks for confirmation 12 Select Yes and press ENTER The selected JPEG image files are copied in the PICTURE folder on the disc The JPEG image file names are automatically labelled as PHOT If you want to play the disc on other DVD equipment finalise the disc page 45 To cancel select 9114 To select a JPEG image file from a different album 1 Switch to the album list in step 8 For instructions see switch between the album list and JPEG image file list on page 123 2 Select an album using and press lt continued 121 122 124 3 Switch to the JPEG image file list For instructions see switch between the album list and JPEG image file list on page 123 4 SelectaJPEG image file using and press ENTER Hints See 8 Reformatting a Disc page 47 to format DVD RWSs DVD Rs in Video mode See the Photo Album list to check which albums have been copied page 122 Q Notes You may not be able to play the slideshow depending on DVD equipment You cannot copy JPEG image files to
427. product P Intensity AGC Volt 70 dBu more 3100 mV less Clear image Less intense field area 50 dBu or more 100 44 Noise may be generated 70 dBu or less eee way Weak field area 4400 mV or more Much noise EPG VPS PDC sometimes cannot be x It is unable to discriminate obtained under weak field area Very weak field area 4400 mV or more 30 4 or less Image damaged EPG VPS PDC cannot be obtained It is unable to discriminate Tips For good reception the field intensity must be 50 dBu or more AGC Volt 4400 mV or less For accurate measurement use a field intensity meter 5 Press 5 Returns to the original screen 6 5 6 2 5 HDD Information for the HDD return sheet Simplified measurement mode HDD Information How to start terminate the diagnostic program Use the remote control unit for servicing How to start Press ESC 0 and 1 keys simultaneously How to terminate Press ESC key Do not perform other operations on the unit while HDD diagnosis is in progress Although the diagnostic program is designed to function independently from the unit s functions operations on the unit during a diagnosis may cause a malfunction The following status is recommended during diagnosis stop no timer recording including auto recording A Display the menu on the screen The menu shown below is
428. r mm MM 1 3 Step 1 Connecting the Aerial Cable and Set Top Box Control legate ap arai Meca drea 1 3 Step 2 Connecting the Video Cords HDMI Cord 1 4 Step 3 Connecting Audio Cords HDMI Cord 1 5 Step 4 Connecting Mains Lead HH 1 5 Step 5 Preparing the Remote eere eret retener 1 5 Step 6 Easy Setup desde s aret 1 6 Connecting VCR or Similar Device mA 127 an External tenses 1 7 Eight Basic Operations Getting to Know Your DVD Recorder ee 1 8 2 22 ERE QURE ets 1 8 2 Recording a Programme mH 1 8 3 Playing the Recorded Programme Title List 1 9 4 Displaying Playing Time and Play Information 1 9 5 Changing Name of a Recorded Programme 1 10 6 Labelling and Protecting a Disc A 1 10 7 Playing the Disc on Other DVD Equipment Finalise 1 10 8 Betormatine 1 11 Guide to Digital Services For Freeview users only 1 11 EPG Electronic Programme Guide 1 11 Programme 1 11 Viewing a Digital Text Service mM 1 12 Timer Recording For Freeview users Only 1 12 Before assis 1 12 Timer Recording Standard EPG
429. r METAL OXIDE Metal Oxide film resistor F nonflammable COILS uH uH SEMICONDUCTORS In each case u for example uA uPB uPC uPD Remarks Ref No C301 0302 Ref No 10000 series C303 C306 C307 22uF 20 25V 0308 0 1uF 25V 0309 0 1uF 25V C310 5 50V C311 0 1uF 25V 0312 10 10V C314 22PF 5 50V 315 22PF 5 50V 0316 10V 0318 0 5PF 50V 0319 0 5PF 50V 0320 0 22F 5 5V C322 0 1uF 25V 0323 10V 0324 10V 0326 470uF 20 6 3V C328 0 1uF 25V 0329 0 1uF 25V C401 0 1uF 25V C402 100uF 20 16 C403 0 1uF 25V C404 0 1uF 25V 0406 0 1uF 25V C407 0 1uF 25V 0408 0 1uF 25V 0409 2 2uF 20 50V C410 0 1uF 25V 0411 0 1uF 25V C412 10V C413 0 001uF 2 50V 0414 0 5PF 50 0415 10V 0418 10V 0419 0 1uF 25V 0420 0 1uF 10 16 0421 0 1uF 25V C422 100uF 20 16 C423 22uF 20 25V C424 470PF 5 50V C428 0 1uF 10 16 CERAMIC CHIP 8 3 Part No 1 164 156 11 1 164 156 11 1 126 933 11 1 164 156 11 1 164 156 11 1 126 933 11 1 126 933 11 1 164 156 11 1 164 156 11 1 126 934 11 1 126 933 11 1 164 156 11 1 126 933 11 1 126 933 11 1 164 156 11 1 126 933 11 1 126 933 11 1 162 927 11 1 100 162 91 1 164 156 11 1 126 964 11 1 165 621 91 1 164 156 11 1 115 156 11 1 162 927 11 1 162 927 11 1
430. r DVD RWs DVD Rs in VR mode switch the Title List Original or Playlist if necessary 2 Select a title containing the chapter you want to edit and press gt The sub menu appears Select Edit and press ENTER Select Chapter Edit and press ENTER For the HDD select a type of editing and press ENTER For details see page 92 Moving a Playlist title Move 1 Press TITLE LIST Switch to the Playlist page 92 Select a Playlist title and press gt The sub menu appears 2 3 Select Edit and press ENTER select Move and press ENTER Title List DVD 2 Titles 8 Titles 1 FRI 20 04 Tennis Play List 2 TUE 10 04 Travel Tennis 1h03m 5 Select a new location for the title using and press ENTER The title moves to the new location To move more titles repeat from step 2 Combining multiple Playlist titles Combine 1 Press TITLE LIST Switch to the Playlist page 92 2 Select a Playlist title and press gt The sub menu appears 3 Select Edit and press ENTER 4 select Combine and press ENTER Title List DVD 2 Titles 1 FRI 20 04 Tennis 8 Titles Play List 2 TUE 10 04 Travel DVD Tennis Remain 11 36 1103 5 Select a title you want to combine 6 Select Yes and press ENTER The titles are combined 5 select an option and press ENTER Yo
431. r dures ZHY ZE peusis uy ZHY HS 2594 SINDD T9941 2 jndur sr peusis ON ON 991A9p sr 8051 AQ V 06 659 eotA9p dur st 2151 AQ 5 UV 09 656 HG 2594 ndur Sunnooxo jou sr ON uone1odo ndur 10 5599014 ur sr ou 594 0 18 SI ouue qo Surpooop Jo 42949 JOU SI po1 ouuoo 10 2410 gt st PAUUO 10 1 gt 0 SI 9290 UAM Joquinu 40947 TOOTOD pue 80121 COTOD IST pees uoneorunuruoo eAnosjeq Apredoud Jou seu 801212010 IST Aq Jo uonezienrmg AIUT JOYO DAG pue ui 72 Aq 103 Aq punos o qrssodum Aq jndur 10 punos Jou ON Aq ON swojdwAs 6 18 6 2 13 EPG Service Mode 1
432. r recording starts with several tens of second s delay when the end time of one recording and the start time of another are the same When the recordings start at the same time only one of them will be recorded Cancel the timer setting for the programme that you are not going to record 1 14 Adjusting the recording picture quality You can adjust the picture quality of digitally broadcasts programmes by selecting a preset setting You can also adjust the picture quality by changing detailed settings and store up to three settings in the memory Note Only progressive video signals for recording can be adjusted SYSTEM MENU t4 ENTER e DISPLAY 1 Press SYSTEM MENU stop mode The System Menu appears 2 Select Picture Adjustment and press ENTER 3 Select a preset setting and press ENTER Tuner TV broadcasts Video cassettes DTV Digital broadcasts 1 2 3 Your own settings To create your own settings see create your own setting on page 59 To check the detailed settings for the selected preset press DISPLAY 4 Press SYSTEM MENU to exit Hints For manual timer settings you cannot modify the timer setting for the current recording but you can extend the duration of the recording time while recording page 56 For timer settings using the EPG you can modify the timer set
433. re see the TV s instruction manual Place the recorder and TV farther apart Place the TV and any bunched aerial cables farther apart The aerial cable is connected to the AERIAL OUT jack on the recorder Connect the cable to the AERIAL IN jack The recorder s colour system is different from your TV Hold down stop on the recorder and press INPUT on the recorder to change the recorder s colour system 4 41 4 Auto Update On Updates the software automatically Normally select this position Off Does not update the software automatically Technical Info You can check the current hardware and software versions of the digital tuner Options 2 USB Restart USB Device Restarts the connected USB device if it does not respond to the recorder If the connected USB device still does not work properly try following Turn the connected USB device off and on again Disconnect and then connect the USB cable Confirm Printer Displays the manufacturer and model name of the printer connected to the recorder Note that this function may not work depending on the printer TV Pause Selects the tuner for the TV Pause page 87 TV s Tuner Selects this when connecting the recorder to your TV using the SCART jack Recorder s Selects this when Tuner connecting the recorder to your TV not using the SCART jack TV channels cannot be changed gt The
434. reading test for all data 3 HDD R W Check Executes a writing reading test for all data data on the HDD will be erased if this test is executed Note 2 SSM A R T Attribute is not used Detailed description D Model For the correct model name refer to the display of the unit 2 Recog Positive value The HDD has been recognized Negative value The HDD has not been recognized SMART threshold exceeded The has come near the end of its service life not exceeded The HDD has not reached the end of its service life Check HDD SN 3 Enter a symptom Enter a model name Refer to A of the above screen When the model name is recognized circle recognize Check whether Recog No is positive or negative Refer to of the above screen Check whether SMART threshold is exceeded or not exceeded Refer to of the above screen Note If the HDD model name and serial number cannot be read check the HDD label Enter the HDD SN Refer to D of the above screen Check whether the HDD SN is recognized Enter the Life Time Refer to E of the above screen Note If the HDD life time is not found check it on page 6 7 of Chapter 6 SERVICE MODE Check HDD Status Refer to SERVICE NOTE page 7 Check Display Refer to SERVICE page 6 9 Refer to SERVICE page 6 10 6 6 HDD Information Simplified m
435. recording pattern Red button Quality Selects the recording mode page 71 Press gt to display Timing C Press the green button Timing repeatedly to select the duration time or to set the VPS PDC function See About the VPS PDC function below If you want to record to a particular HDD genre press the yellow button Genre repeatedly 18 Playback Playing the Recorded Programme DVD HDD Number buttons AUDIO SUBTITLE CLEAR SYSTEM MENU TITLE LIST gt 4 t4 ENTER e DISPLAY I 4 gt gt I 4441140 9 I II D E PLAY MODE 1 Press HDD or DVD If you select DVD insert a disc see 1 Inserting a Disc on page 36 If you insert a DVD VIDEO VIDEO CD DATA DVD or DATA CD press gt Playback starts 2 Press TITLE LIST For details about the Title List see 3 Playing the Recorded Programme Title List on page 38 Example HDD Title List HDD 10 Titles 4 Titles 0 NEW 13 00 FRI 20 04 18 00 Fri20 04 4 SLP By Date EE Oh30m 0 46 All Genres NEW 21 00 10 04 9 51 SS 21 00 10 04 Pr9 SLP 046 9 00 02 04 Pr3 SLP Mystery 1h00m 0 86 20 00 FRI 30 03 5 51 R
436. repair is complete An error occurred Please consult your nearest Sony dealer Note that contents on the HDD may be Failure to physically identify the HDD no connection defective HDD interface error Replace the SATA cable or power cable Replace the HDD Replace the FE or part in the SATA ATA communication erased when servicing this unit Physical identification of HDD possible but not identified indicates that the HDD is not recognized The Hard Disk Drive Physical identification of indicates an HDD info 1s incorrect Use the Disk Setup menu to reformat HDD possible HDD identified but failure in logical formatting Physical identification of HDD possible HDD identified and correct logical formatting HDD correctly identified WDC 10234564 160 WDC 10234564 160 authorization error Initialize the HDD 4 3 Display E01 FLD with unrecognized HDD Is the HDD free from NO abnormal noises YES Is not displayed NO 11 5 Unauthorized HDD Replace the HDD Refer to Note Note Write down the HDD information on the HDD YES return sheet before replacing the HDD Note the information on pages 6 6 6 7 6 9 and 6 10 of Chapter 6 SERVICE Reconnect the SATA NO cable Does the problem Replace the SATA Cable For information about replacing the HDD see still occur page 2 5 of Chapter 2 DISASSEMBLY
437. ress the yellow button You can register up to 4 categories To cancel the registration select a category and press the red button Delete Keywords Enter a keyword See enter a new keyword on page 67 To add more keywords press the yellow button You can register up to 16 keywords To cancel the registration select a keyword and press the red button Delete 3 Press ENTER To change the profile settings Repeat from step 1 above Selecting and watching a programme from My TV 1 Select My TV in the Menu Bar and press ENTER The programmes that match the profile conditions are displayed 2 Select programme using 4 f V gt and press ENTER To set a programme for timer recording See One Button Recording GUIDE Plus in the UK only page 73 Searching for a Programme Using the GUIDE Plus System Y Y Y Colour buttons et ENTER 1 Select Search in the Menu and press ENTER a Press ENTER to search for Movies Highlights Press 4 or for other sub categories Press to search the My Choice category Press to search the Sport category Grid Seach Schedule My Choice Movies Sport All Action Animation Comedy Drama Romance Sci Fi Thriller 2 Select a category using lt To search for a pro
438. ric am 0118 Arabic ar 0119 Assamese as 0125 Aymara ay 0126 Azerbaijani az 0201 Bashkir ba 0205 Byelorussian be 0207 Bulgarian bg 0208 Bihari bh 0209 Bislama bi 0214 Bengali bn 0215 Tibetan bo 0218 Breton br 0301 Catalan ca 0315 Corsican co 0319 Czech cs 0325 Welsh cy 0401 Danish da 0405 German de 0426 Bhutani dz 0512 Greek el 0514 English en 0515 Esperanto eo 0519 Spanish es 0520 Estonian et 0521 Basque eu 0601 Persian fa 0609 Finnish fi 0610 Fiji fj 0615 Faroese fo 0618 French fr 0625 Frisian fy 0701 Irish ga 0704 Scots Gaelic gd 0712 Galician gl 0714 Guarani gn 0721 Gujarati gu 0801 Hausa ha 0809 Hindi hi 0818 Croatian hr 0821 Hungarian hu 0825 Armenian hy 0901 Interlingua ia Number Language code 0905 Interlingue ie 0911 Inupiak ik 0914 Indonesian in 0919 Icelandic is 0920 Italian it 0923 Hebrew iw 1001 Japanese ja 1009 Yiddish ji 1023 Javanese jw 1101 Georgian ka 1111 Kazakh kk 1112 Greenlandic kl 1113 Cambodian km 1114 Kannada kn 1115 Korean ko 1119 Kashmiri ks 1121 Kurdish ku 1125 Kirghiz ky 1201 Latin la 1214 Lingala In 1215 Laothian lo 1220 Lithuanian It 1222 Latvian lv Lettish 1307 Malagasy mg 1309 Maori mi 1311 Macedonian mk 1312 Malayalam ml 1314 Mongolian mn 1315 Moldavian mo 1318 Marathi mr 1319 Malay ms 1320 Maltese mt 1325 Burmes
439. roller Recorder s Model Setting Input the number using the remote for Service gt Input No Manufacturer 0101 0201 0102 0202 0103 0203 7 Disconnect then reconnect AC power cord of unit Be careful not to impart vibration to unit immediately after AC power cord is disconnected 8 Reset the recorder to all its factory settings Make sure that the recorder is on Press and hold STOP key and press ys STANDBY ON key on the front panel The recorder turns off with all settings reset 9 Turn of the main power ON 10 Press ESC then DISP keys by using the service remote controller and then confirm each Model Name VERSION SYSCON RELEASE 100 Rev presens TUNERCON 198 000 DRIVE DVD RW DVR L11X PIC SERIAL HDD INT DEVICE FLASH 64M HEGION 2 11 Press ESC Returns to original screen 6 3 6 2 2 Service Mode Turn ofthe main power ON 2 screen after exiting all menu screen s press ESC on the service remote controller 3 Press DISP 4 Press DIG ANA Overview and purposes To be used to check the status of the product and to collect the information for failure diagnosis The following information to be used for servicing is displayed 1 First screen Version HDD information etc 2 Second screen ATA ATAPI debug screen Writer information 4 Fourth scr
440. rt No 1 216 833 11 1 216 809 11 1 216 809 11 1 216 845 11 1 216 845 11 1 216 815 11 1 216 821 11 1 216 809 11 1 216 809 11 1 216 809 11 1 216 809 11 1 216 809 11 1 216 809 11 1 216 809 11 1 216 809 11 1 216 809 11 1 216 809 11 1 216 809 11 1 216 815 11 1 216 817 11 1 216 845 11 1 216 845 11 1 216 845 11 1 216 809 11 1 216 864 11 1 216 809 11 1 216 815 11 1 216 864 11 1 216 864 11 1 216 864 11 1 216 809 11 1 216 809 11 1 216 817 11 1 216 864 11 1 216 827 11 1 218 845 11 1 216 827 11 1 216 819 11 1 218 844 11 1 216 821 11 1 216 295 91 1 216 827 11 1 216 825 11 1 216 809 11 1 216 864 11 1 216 809 11 1 216 809 11 1 216 835 11 1 216 864 11 1 216 845 11 1 216 295 91 1 216 295 91 1 216 295 91 1 216 295 91 1 216 809 11 1 216 803 11 1 216 803 11 1 216 295 91 1 216 295 91 1 216 823 11 Description METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP SHORT CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP SHORT CHIP SHORT CHIP SHORT CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP SHORT CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP SHORT CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP SHORT CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP METAL CHIP SHORT CHIP METAL
441. s Press GUIDE The GUIDE Plus system Home Screen appears Pr2 25 May 10 10 Record Channels Home Friends The one with the Male Nanny A jealous Ross mocks Rache s choice of an over sensitive male nanny for Emma while Phonbe must choose between two unexpected 10 00 120Min My TV Schedule 10 30 last Channel lone Starship two itv is This Promotional Sally Jessy Raph Our b Go 6 Panel Armageddon News at Ten The Secret Football Emmerdale Homes Polic 1 Video Window This shows the programme you were watching when you pressed GUIDE 2 Action Bar When the same colour button on the remote is pressed the Action Bar functions The Action Bar function differs according to the screen Information Box Shows information about the selected programme when the Home Screen is displayed Contents will differ according to the displayed screen 4 Menu Bar Press the blue button Home and press t to move the cursor to the Menu Bar Then select one of the following features using amp gt and press ENTER Shows the programmes for the current time slot and next 7 days Search Allows you to search for titles by category or by keyword
442. s PLAY MODE during playback HDD or a disc The Play Mode menu appears 2 Select A B Repeat and press 1 Press PLAY MODE during playback ENTER The Play Mode menu appears Set point A is selected 2 Select Repeat and press ENTER 3 Selectanitem to repeated using sarch Mode Repeat Off Progamm Repeat Title for HDD DVDs DATA CDs repeats the current title Repeat Chapter for HDD DV Ds repeats the current chapter Repeat Track for VIDEO CDs 2 3 While monitoring the sound press repeats the current track ENTER at the starting point point A of Repeat Programme repeats the current the portion to be played repeatedly programme page 85 Set point B is selected Repeat Disc for VIDEO CDs DVD P RWs DVD Rs VR mode repeats all of 4 Continue playing to locate the ending the tracks on a disc point point B and press ENTER DivX video file only A B Repeat starts Available only when playing without PBC functions 4 Press ENTER To cancel A B Repeat Repeat play starts Press CLEAR Or set Repeat to Off in Mode menu TN To cancel Repeat play Tess Or set Repeat to Repeat Hint a 2 api 4 CLEAR R p 99 R can select rom ay ode in Off in the Play Mode menu the System Menu Hint Note When playing HDD DVD VIDEO DVD
443. s for the recorder to stop recording On screen instructions may appear after pressing REC STOP In this case follow the on screen instructions Rec Mode Adjust If there is not enough available disc space for the recording the recorder automatically adjusts the recording mode to enable the entire programme to be recorded Set Rec Mode Adjust to On in the Recording setup page 143 Black Level Selects the black level setup level for the NTSC video signals Select ON to raise the standard black level Select this when the picture appears too dark Select OFF to set the black level of the input signals to the standard level Normally select this position Adjusts the colour balance Chroma Level Makes the colours deeper or lighter Press SYSTEM MENU to exit The setting is automatically stored as the setting you selected in step 1 Creating chapters in a title The recorder can automatically divide a recording a title into chapters by inserting chapter marks To select chapter mark intervals or disable this function see Auto Chapter HDD VR Auto Chapter Video or Auto Chapter DVD R RW in the Recording setup page 143 When recording to the HDD a DVD R VR mode or a DVD RW VR mode you can edit chapter marks page 95 Using the Quick Timer function You can set the recorder to record in 30 minute increments
444. sing and press 5 Selecta track example 001 5 01 using 4 4 and press ENTER The track is programmed If you make a mistake select the step number example 01 001 using 4 4 and press CLEAR 6 To programme other tracks press 4 amp 15 gt to select a step number and repeat steps 4 and 5 7 Press Programme play starts About Jukebox There are two methods to use Jukebox connecting the USB device or copying audio tracks to the HDD When using Jukebox you can do followings Store audio tracks on the HDD Play audio tracks using various play modes Label tracks or albums Assign albums a genre Change the track order Notes on copying You cannot copy audio tracks on the HDD to discs or USB devices Some audio tracks may not be copied depending on the file size You cannot copy audio tracks if the HDD is full or almost full An album name and MP3 audio track name are also copied However there may be some names that cannot be copied When copying is stopped partway tracks finished copying before you stop will remain copied onto the HDD as an album See the Album List to check which albums have been copied page 114 When copying audio tracks from a CD the album name is labelled as and the audio track names are labelled as automatically During copying other operations cannot be performed While copying timer rec
445. t Aging mode HDD 3 HDD gt gt ESC gt REP FU 2 7 Load the DL Disc 1 Recording stop 2 then press Play 2 gt gt 9 to tray 2 gt Firmware Download CD Holding user setting V data 1 DL Disc Download Disc 2 Shipping mode 2 Key on the front panel 6 2 6 2 Diagnostic Mode 6 2 1 Model Setting 1 Turn of the main power ON 2 screen after exiting all menu screen s press the following buttons ESC gt CHAP gt 1 on the service remote controller 3 of the main power OFF 4 Turn of the main power ON When the MAIN Assy and or TUJB Assy that 15 commonly used with another model are is replaced they it must recognize the model of this unit Recorder s Model Setting Input the number using the remote for Service gt Input No Manufacturer tems to be set The model number destination and region No must set Note Once the setting has been made it can never be changed Be sure to make the setting correctly As this setting resets the Assy s in question to the factory preset status it is recommended that you obtain the customer s consent beforehand 5 Press four digits properly Refer to page 5 service remote controller by using the according to the screen information 6 Press the following buttons ESC gt CHAP gt 1 on the service remote cont
446. t of the second test is the same replacement of the HDD is required Example No error SELF TEST Test Remainder clear Test End 00 Test Result 00 BP Completed mm um Gm 1 Example With an error SELF TEST clear Test End Test Remainder 60 Test Result 7 6 E 4 7 2 Performance Check Press ESC key then A MON key This is a reading test across all sectors of the HDD Data recorded on the HDD will not be erased because no writing operation is performed Time required for testing Approx 45 min 160 G 75 min 250 G 130 to 150 min 500 G When Performance Check finishes completely without error reset ATA ATAPI History Error with the Clear key FL display specification HDD factory Check ONormal display 0 Check start 0 0 000000 Power On 1 Power ON Test 1 0 000000 2 Random Write Read Compare 2 0 000000 3 10 Sequential Read Verify Test 5 4 OD Sequential Read Verify Test H 5 5 Format 5 6 6 0 000000 TIE Power On M 7 0 000000 205 Power off 8 0 000000 ms Power On 9 0 000000 205 Power off A 0 000000 HDD performance Check OkError display HDD ERR 01 HDD ERR 02 HDD ERR 03 HDD ERR 04 HDD ERR O0 HDD ERR 07 HDD ERR O0 ONormal display 80 Performance Check start 180 0
447. t to dub the Select Titles display Display 2 Edit a title the Title Edit display Display 3 Confirm the settings and start dubbing the Start Dubbing display The chapter marks in the dubbing source are dubbed The position of chapter marks may be slightly changed from the original However the chapter marks in the dubbing source are not retained in the dubbed title when dubbing to a DVD RW DVD R Video mode DVD RW or DVD R at normal speed The chapter marks are automatically inserted according to the Auto Chapter Video and Auto Chapter DVD R RW settings in the Recording setup page 143 The Set Thumbnail setting in the dubbing source is dubbed as a thumbnail picture marker except when dubbing from a DVD RW DVD RW Video mode DVD R DVD R Video mode The position of thumbnail picture markers may be slightly changed from the original Hint When you dub a Playlist title it is recorded as an Original title Notes e You cannot make a recording while dubbing Before playing a dubbed disc on other DVD equipment finalise the disc page 45 100 You cannot dub from DVD VIDEOS or finalised DVD RWs DVD Rs Video mode to the HDD Titles containing mixed aspect ratios cannot be dubbed to a DVD RW DVD R DVD RW DVD R Video mode using the HDD DVD DUB button Titles over 8 hours cannot be dubbed to single layer DVD RWs DVD Rs Low resolution SEP through LP modes
448. tarily interrupted at the point where the layers switch There is no picture or picture noise appears when connected to the DV IN jack gt Try the following Turn the recorder off and on again Turn the connected equipment off and on again S Disconnect and then connect the i LINK cable again There is no picture or picture noise appears when connected to the HDMI OUT jack gt Try the following MTurn the recorder off and on again the connected equipment off and on again S Disconnect and then connect the HDMI cord again jeuonippy continued 1 51 Programme listings for some programme positions are missing gt The programme guide data may not be updated Turn off the recorder and let the recorder receive the programme guide data gt Some broadcast stations support only two days of data For details see the following website www europe guideplus com gt All of the GUIDE Plus data could not be received because the reception is poor The programme listing is not up to date gt The recorder was in use during the time that the GUIDE Plus data was scheduled to be downloaded gt All of the GUIDE Plus data could not be received because the reception is poor Sound There is no sound gt Re connect all connections securely gt The connecting cord is damaged gt The input source setting on the audio component or the connection to the audio
449. that you are watching when Component Video Out is set to Progressive page 136 Select Auto to detect the software type Film based or Video based automatically and select the appropriate conversion mode Normally select this position Select Off to fix the conversion mode to the mode for Video based software 4 Press SYSTEM MENU to exit The setting is automatically stored as the setting you selected in step 1 Ajuo 51950 104 13W L Creating chapters in a title The recorder can automatically divide a recording a title into chapters by inserting chapter marks To select chapter mark intervals or disable this function see Auto Chapter HDD VR Auto Chapter Video or Auto Chapter DVD R RW in the Recording setup page 143 When recording to the HDD a DVD R VR mode or a DVD RW VR mode you can edit chapter marks page 95 99 Recording from Connected Equipment HDD You can record from a connected VCR or similar device To connect a VCR or similar device see Connecting a VCR or Similar Device on page 31 Use the DV IN jack on the front panel if the equipment has a DV output jack 1 LINK jack 2 pvp INPUT Ajuo 51950 w831 8314 104 REC gt MODE REC STOP 1 Press HDD or DVD If you select DVD insert a recordable DVD see 1 Insert
450. the programme listing does not match the broadcast station gt There may be more than one channel lineup for your area To change the channel lineup select Editor in the Menu Bar of the GUIDE Plus system page 69 Picture noise appears gt If the picture output signal from your recorder passes through your VCR to get to your TV or if you are connected to a combination TV VIDEO player the copy protection signal applied to some DVD programmes could affect picture quality If you still experience this problem even when you connect your recorder directly to your TV try connecting your recorder to your TV s S VIDEO input gt You have set the recorder to progressive format even though your TV cannot accept the progressive signal In this case hold down stop on the recorder and press open close on the recorder gt Even if your TV is compatible with progressive format 525p 625p signals the image may be affected when you set the recorder to progressive format In this case hold down stop on the recorder and press amp open close on the unit and the recorder is set to normal interlace format gt You are playing title recorded in a colour system that is different from your TV gt Noise may appear in the pictures recorded on the HDD which is due to the characteristics of HDD and is not a malfunction gt When playing double layer DVD the video and audio may be momen
451. the set top box receiver to the LINE 1 DECODER jack and set LINE 1 In to RGB in the Video In Out setup page 137 See the instructions supplied with the set top box receiver Using the set top box receiver control function The set top box receiver control function can be used with hookup B It allows the recorder to control a set top box receiver via the supplied set top box controller The recorder controls programme positions on the set top box receiver for timer recording You can also use the recorder s remote control to change programme positions on the set top box receiver whenever the set top box receiver and recorder are turned on To use the set top box receiver control function you need to connect the set top box controller page 17 After setting up the set top box receiver control check that the recorder can correctly control the set top box receiver page 28 Q Notes If your aerial is a flat cable 300 ohm twin lead cable use an external aerial connector not supplied to connect the aerial to the recorder f you have separate cables for AERIAL antennas use an AERIAL UHF VHF band mixer not supplied to connect the aerial to the recorder If you disconnect the recorder s mains lead you will not be able to view the signals from the connected set top box receiver pue sdmyooH continued 1 5 Receiving cable satellite For analogue broadcasting With this hookup you c
452. the start time Stop Sets the stop time Extend Sets duration when a timer recording is in progress If the programme set to be recorded daily or weekly is extended the manually extended time set here will be added to the subsequent timer recording times Note that when VPS PDC is set to On you cannot make the Extend setting If you want to make the detailed settings select Set Details and press ENTER Select an item using 44 set using 3 Press the red button The date start and stop times programme position recording mode etc settings appear 10 30 5 25 11 Date Extend SUN 25 11 Detailed Settings Record to Set Details Recording Mode VPS PDC C Update Cancel Genre EPG Link Series Recording VPS PDC 0 8 Set Title Name If you want to change the setting press lt to select the item and press 44 to change setting page 54 Link page 58 Series Recording page 57 4 select OK and press ENTER case of a current TV radio data broadcast timer setting your recorder will immediately start recording Guide Digital Thu 10 Aug 10 08 D001 DDE NEWS 15 DDE News News 7 10 00 11 30 10 30 11 00 DDE NEWS 15 DDE News DDENews 7 Live from Prague
453. then turn it on again If E02 still appears format the HDD following the instructions of Format HDD page 128 Note that all of the recorded contents on the HDD will be erased If this does not fix the problem contact your nearest Sony dealer HDCP ERR appears in the front panel display gt The recorder is connected to an input device that is not HDCP compliant Connect the equipment that is HDCP compliant page 19 Disregard this error message if the output picture is displayed correctly The Parental Lock does not work gt Check the D TV Age Limit setting in the Parental Lock setup page 146 jeuonippy continued 1 57 Mechanical sounds are heard when the recorder is off gt While the recorder is updating the EPG information operational noises such as the internal fan may be heard even when the power is off This is not a malfunction gt While the recorder is adjusting the clock for the Auto Clock Set function or updating the EPG information operational noises may be heard even when the power is off This is not a malfunction 158 Specifications System Laser Semiconductor laser Transmission standards Digital broadcasting DVB T Channel coverage Digital broadcasting VHF E5 to E12 F5 to F10 Italian D to H2 UHF E21 to E69 B21 to B68 F21 to F69 Channel coverage Analogue broadcasting PAL B G D K D SECAM L VHF E2 to
454. ting for the current recording while recording and extend the duration of the recording only when Link is set to Off e You can move to the first row bottom row of the Timer List using kK 1 while the list is displayed Q Notes When VPS PDC is set to for one or more timer recordings the start times may change in the event of a broadcast delay or early start Even if timer is set timer recordings cannot be made while recording a programme that has priority Even if the timer is set for the same daily or weekly programme the timer recording cannot be made if it overlaps with a programme that has priority Overlap will appear next to the overlapped setting in the Timer List Check the priority order of the settings To create your own setting Select 1 Memory2 or Memory3 in step 3 2 Select Detailed Settings and press ENTER The display for adjusting detailed settings appears 3 Select an item using 44 and adjust settings using For details about each setting see the explanation of the display Prog Motion Adjusts the progressive video signal when Component Video Out is set to Progressive page 136 Select Motion for a picture including subjects that move dynamically Select Still for a picture with little movement Cinema Converts the progressive video signal to match the type of DVD software
455. to Repeat Programme in the Play Mode menu page 115 1 28 To skip a track Set Skip If you want a track not to play set the track to be skipped 1 Selecta track you want to skip 2 Press gt while the Album List is displayed 3 Select Edit using and press ENTER 4 Select Set Skip using 4 4 and press ENTER appears next to the selected track To cancel select Set Skip and press ENTER again Playback options Buttons Operations 44 1 Goes to the next or previous previous track when pressed during next playback lt lt gt gt Fast reverses fast forwards the fast disc when pressed during reverse fast playback forward Search speed changes as follows fast reverse fast forward lt lt 44 lt When you press and hold button fast forward fast reverse continues at the selected speed until you release the button To resume normal playback press D gt M pause Pauses playback To resume normal playback press D gt Managing Audio Tracks on the Music Jukebox You can erase or label albums tracks on the HDD You can also assign an album a genre SYSTEM MENU 14 Press MENU The System Menu appears 2 Select Music Jukebox and press ENTER 3 Select Listen to Music Edit and press ENTER The Album List appears music Jukebox 10 Albums 2 numb
456. to public TP5804 USB_D_CONEECT USB_D_DP 0 Sei USB OCIO GPIO56 Not open to public USB H OCIO p USB H PPONO GPIO57 Not open to public USB H USB D 5 Not open to public ME Q gs USB D DNO x Not open to public 5 c pr ed USB D VBUS GPIOSS 1 23 AV 0 4 R5214 0 i D ES 8 GNDHS 0 58 R5832 D 1000 05813 65812 C5814 50V 0 1 ot 01 16 5209 0 4 16V F 5210 05802 RN2903 T5RSONY D F SWITCH 15 gt TO 4 7 ScL GP 15202 CL VEG DTC124EUA T106 SWITCH USB 5V SW SDA VDEC E TO 2 7 1080 gt f e T N E 88 88 651 03 TO FL 178 DDC swi BOARD 006 CN101 TU HPD F TU HPD THROUGH THE 9 T 165802 15802 TU DSDA 1687 105103 SEE PAGE 4 19 9 D DDCSW UPD72852AGB 8EU A TU_DSCL TU_DSCL B 2 L E B G V45HD 05805 15 1602 1 1 HOT PLUG DET 1 7 5853 TP5806 8585 GND D B H gt E HDMI DV USB BLOCK RD 065 6 7 4 39 4 40 RDR HXD870 HXD970 HXD1070 For Schematic Diagram Refer to page 4 55 for printed wiring board
457. ton SCAN button PAUSE button X3 button button button FRM TIM CHAP CHP TIM SEARCH DEA STILL SIDE B CHAPTER SKIP Netep CHAPTER SKIP A MON PRUN PLAY 5 gt fe CO SONY DVD J 6090 203 A SPEED button TV LDP button STEREO button CLEAR button SEARCH button CHP TIM button DIG ANA button TEST button SIDE B button CHAPTER SKIP button SCAN button PLAY button X3 button P RUN button A MON button 6 1 6 1 SERVICE MODE Operation Mode Name ESC gt ose Version info etc gt Lose gt DIG ANA 2 times lt Second screen subscreen 3 gt ae writer maintenance information of DEBUG OSD SEARCH DIG ANA lt Second screen subscreen 4 gt SEARCH 259 O LD degration judgement of ATA ATAPI DEBUG OSD gt Lose L s gt __ gt _____ Mode gt 3 times NS ee gt gt DGANA gt gt lt Fouth screen subscreen 4 gt VR Recording Related Error Logs 9 Video Adjustment For Specific Area gt D General Setting mode DIGANA gt 2 Q QSbpec ic channel Setting mode gt Jo SS Load the Select the Recordable o gt Recordable Input Disc Function DVD esc 7 REPB 72 PLAY gt g
458. tons tx ENTER Setting a profile 1 Select My TV in the Menu Bar and press the yellow button Profile Pr2 25 May 10 10 8 Add Home Use this screen to enter channels categories and keywords for your profile Press or to select then __ press the yellow button to define your profile settings Profile Settings Channels Categories Promotional Panel Keywords Press ENTER to activate your Profile Auo 104 5 10109 gt continued 67 9 Select Confirm using gt and press ENTER The display returns to the GUIDE Plus setup menu 10 Wait one day until the programme guide data can be received To cancel the settings Press the red button Back To return to the Home position Press the blue button The cursor returns to the home position on the Grid To check the GUIDE Plus system information 1 Select Setup in the Menu Bar and press ENTER 2 Select GUIDE Plus system Information using 44 and press ENTER Checking programme positions Check whether programme position numbers are the same as the programme position numbers set in the Analog Tuner setup If you want to make adjustments to the channel settings or change the channel name see Aerial Reception Settings Analog Tuner
459. tops recording the power turns off To cancel the Quick Timer Press REC repeatedly until the counter appears in the front panel display The recorder returns to normal recording mode To stop recording press REC STOP Q Note If you turn off the recorder during recording recording is stopped 2 Select the timer setting you want to check change cancel and press gt The sub menu appears 3 Select an option and press ENTER Modify Changes the timer setting Select an item using and adjust using Select OK and press ENTER Timer 10 30SUN 25 11 Date Extend 25 11 Detailed Settings Record to Set Details Recording Mode VPS PDC Z Update Cancel Genre EPG Link Series Recording VPS PDC 0 8 Set Title Name Erase Erases the timer setting Select Yes and press ENTER Skip Once Cancels the daily or weekly recordings only once After cancelling the timer setting Skip Once appears next to the timer setting in the Timer List Alternate Search page 58 Series Search page 58 Recommendation Search page 58 To change or cancel the setting repeat steps 2 and 3 above When the timer settings overlap The programme that starts first has priority and the entire programme is recorded After finishing the previous recording the othe
460. tray 3 Press Stop and key at the same time to start version upgrade 6 3 2 Area Specific Channel Setting When the following trouble symptom is displayed set the broadcast reception channels as described below When flickering is visible as if horizontal synchronization or vertical synchronization is lost on the broadcast reception screen Entry Entry from the normal operating mode Record Play Stop Turnofthe main power ON 2 Press 5 on the service remote controller 3 Press FRM TIM Setting screen VDEC Specific Area Mode Ver 2 00 Input LINE Sync ACC 1 Threshold Level V Threshold Level 4 Press ESC Returns to the original screen Entry from the individual setting mode 1 Upon completion of the above operation press DIG ANA Setting screen VDEC Specific Area Mode Ver 2 00 Input LINE Sync ACC Threshold Level V Threshold Level Individual setting state Input Channell OV Sync ACC H Threshold Level V Threshold Level 2 Press ESC Returns to the original screen 6 23 6 3 3 OSD Filter Setting Subscreen 4 When the following trouble symptom occurs correct it by setting the OSD filter as described below Characters on the OSD screen flicker depending on the monitor connected Entry Turn ofthe main power ON 2 Press 5 on the service remote controller 3
461. ty from the AGC level If the total numbr of received packages is O it is likely that the country and postal code settings are wrong 6 2 14 Aging Mode 1 Aging for the DVD RW DVD R Turn of the main power ON 2 Press the DVD key to switch to DVD 3 Load a recordable disc 4 Select the input function of a recordable source 5 After disc detection is confirmed exit all menu screens 6 Press ESC on the service remote controller 7 Press on the service remote controller 8 Press PLAY to enter the Aging mode If symptoms regarding recording playback of discs and or the HDD that your customer claimed are difficult to reproduce they can be reproduced with a long time test in Aging mode Note When aging for the DVD RW RW RAM and HDD is executed a recorded data on them will be erased Commands from the remote control unit are accepted during Aging mode If Aging mode is quit using the ESC key indications on the FL display will return to normal display Cancel timer settings before entering Aging mode Set the recording rate beforehand It cannot be changed during Aging mode Aging for the DVD RW RW RAM During Aging mode the following operations are repeated in the order shown below Aging for the DVD R R During Aging mode the following operations are repeated in the order shown below 1 The tray opens 2 The tray closes 3 Initialization 4 R
462. u can make the following edits to the chapter Divide Divides a chapter into two page 95 e Erase Erases selected chapter page 96 Move for Playlist titles on DVD RWSs DVD Rs in VR mode Changes the chapter s playing order page 97 Combine Combines two chapters into one page 96 Dividing a chapter Divide 1 After step 4 of Erasing and Editing a Chapter select Divide Chapter Edit HDD World Sports Rec time 1h00m Chapters 3 H A 7 1 gt Play Exit Divide Erase Combine pue 2 Select a chapter using gt and press ENTER The chapter starts to play 3 Select the dividing point using lt lt gt gt and press 11 To return to the beginning of the chapter press M and then press 89 4 Press ENTER The chapter is divided into two continued 95 Dividing a Playlist title Divide You can divide a Playlist title For instructions see page 94 Moving a chapter Move 1 Press TITLE LIST Switch to the Playlist page 92 2 Select a Playlist title containing the chapter you want to edit and press The sub menu appears 3 Select Edit and press ENTER 4 Select Chapter Edit and press ENTER 5 Select Erase Move Chapter Edit DVD VR mode Play List World Sports Rec time 1 00 Chapter Oh20m
463. u record erase and edit recordings repeatedly the HDD file system gradually becomes fragmented To clean up all the fragmented files optimise the HDD periodically When the HDD needs optimising a message recommending optimisation will appear automatically 1 Select Optimise HDD in Disc Setup and press ENTER 2 Select Start and press ENTER A progress bar appears and the optimisation starts To cancel optimisation press ENTER The HDD will be partly optimised Notes It will take about eight hours to optimise the HDD During optimisation other operations such as recording or playback cannot be performed You cannot optimise the HDD when the HDD disc space is insufficient for optimising Erase titles to open up disc space page 92 Format HDD You can format the HDD and resolve the problem when the hard disk error occurred Format HDD can be selected only when the hard disk needs formatting Note that all of the recorded content on the HDD will be erased 1 Select Format HDD in Disc Setup and press ENTER 2 Select Start and press ENTER 1 31 2 Connect the USB device to the USB jack on the recorder When printing JPEG image files on the HDD skip this step 13 Select Start and press ENTER You can set the paper size and layout Refer to the operating instructions supplied with the printer Press SYSTEM MENU The System Menu appears 4
464. uF CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP 0 001uF 0 1uF 0 1uF 0 001uF 0 01uF CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP 1uF 0 001 uF 0 001 uF 0 001 uF 0 001uF ELECT CHIP CERAMIC CHIP CERAMIC CHIP ELECT CHIP 220uF 0 1uF 0 1uF 100uF CONNECTOR CONNECTOR FFC FPC 28P SOCKET CONNECTOR 24P PIN CONNECTOR SMALL TYPE 12P PIN CONNECTOR SMALL TYPE 2P DIODE DIODE SM15T6V8A DIODE 155355 17 DIODE 155355 17 FERRITE BEAD BEAD FERRITE CHIP 1608 BEAD FERRITE CHIP 1608 BEAD FERRITE CHIP 1608 BEAD FERRITE CHIP 1608 BEAD FERRITE CHIP 1608 BEAD FERRITE CHIP 1608 BEAD FERRITE CHIP 1608 BEAD FERRITE CHIP 1608 BEAD FERRITE CHIP 1608 BEAD FERRITE CHIP 1608 BEAD FERRITE CHIP 1608 BEAD FERRITE CHIP 1608 BEAD FERRITE CHIP 1608 BEAD FERRITE CHIP 1608 BEAD FERRITE CHIP 1608 BEAD FERRITE CHIP 1608 BEAD FERRITE CHIP 1608 BEAD FERRITE CHIP 1608 BEAD FERRITE CHIP 1608 BEAD FERRITE CHIP 1608 2090 1090 1090 1090 1090 1090 1090 1090 1090 1090 2090 2090 1608 2 1608 2 1608 AEP2 1608 AEP2 Remarks 6 3V 6 3V 6 3V 6 3V 16V 16V 16V 10V 50V 50V 50V 16V 16V 50V 16V 6 3V 50V 50V 50V 50V 4V 16V 16V 16V Ref X X F312 F313 F314 F316 F31
465. unctions for BRAVIA Theatre Sync for HDMI connections only By connecting Sony components that are compatible with the HDMI Control function with an HDMI cord not supplied operation is simplified as below One Touch Play page 81 System Power Off When you turn the TV off by using the power button on the TV s remote the components compatible with the HDMI Control function turn off automatically To prepare for the BRAVIA Theatre Sync features Set HDMI Control to On in the HDMI Output setup page 148 For details on TV settings refer to the operating instructions supplied with the TV Notes Depending the connected component the HDMI Control function may not work Refer to the operating instructions supplied with the component The recorder supports only the playback option of HDMI Control Player appears on the TV screen when using the HDMI Control functions pue sdnyooy 21 22 24 Step 3 Connecting the Audio Cords HDMI Cord Select one of the following patterns according to the input jack on your TV monitor projector or audio component such as an AV amplifier receiver This will enable you to listen to sound Speakers Rear L Audio co Front L a decoder Centre HDMI cord not supplied g to HDMI OUT HDMI OUT mponent with or to coaxial HDMI digital input 4 Coaxia
466. und ne R107 TCS G gt 7 3 AD11 TADRS1 2 823 TADRS 1 1 7 B TBA TADRSO V 2R5 gt OUT GPIO53 eon 0 NOTUSE P201 TADRS10 TADRS8 rman not o R1182 1016 202 TADRSO TADRS7 GCSBO 10k 10k 2 203 TADRS1 TADRS6 GCSB1 204 TADRS2 TADRS5 GCSB2 GPI05 4 D1 SL HSTTOM HATA wd 3 _ lees o P205 TADRS3 TADRS4 HSTTOM GCSB3 GPIO6 mE 9 4 5 HSMTOT 206 61220 HSMTOT GRDYBIGPIO7 6 FOR CHECK ms TO 3 7 0 X6S R1205 FCSB1 7 XRESET 10k P207 0 6122 FCSBO IX FE 1000 P208 50V 61291 FE 8 04 209 16 V 3D SCL GP SCL GP 15 SDA GP gt SG 1067 REM REM REMO SI g 8I TO 7 7 7 SCLK SCLK MEMORY BLOCK RD 065 4 7 4 35 4 36 For Schematic Diagram Refer to page 4 55 for printed wiring board RD 065 BOARD 5 7 SATA IDE IF A REF NO 20 000 SERIES CN3801 40P P3801 83808 37 36 35 ATODATA15 DVD UNIT ATODIOW ATODIOR ATOIORDY ATOINTRQ 4 ATIDATAO
467. und to comply with the limits set out in the EMC Directive using a connection cable shorter than 3 metres On safety Should any solid object or liquid fall into the cabinet unplug the recorder and have it checked by qualified personnel before operating it any further About the hard disk drive The hard disk has a high storage density which enables long recording durations and quick access to the written data However it can easily be damaged by shock vibration or dust and should be kept away from magnets To avoid losing important data observe the following precautions Do not apply a strong shock to the recorder Do not place the recorder in a location subject to mechanical vibrations or in an unstable location Do not place the recorder on top of a hot surface such as a VCR or amplifier receiver Do not use the recorder in a place subject to extreme changes in temperature temperature gradient less than 10 C hour Do not move the recorder with its mains lead connected Do not disconnect the mains lead while the power is on When disconnecting the mains lead turn off the power and make sure that the hard disk drive is not operating the clock is displayed in the front panel display for at least 30 seconds and all recording or dubbing has stopped Do not move the recorder for one minute after you have unplugged the mains lead Do not attempt to replace or upgrade the hard disk by yourself as t
468. ut at internal processing H2D TO DVDWR HDD DVD VR Timeout at HDD recording side V2H SRC Prot V2H Unknown V2H VOBU TMNG V2H V Reso NG H2D CP NoSpec H2D TO HDDRD 6 15 Other Errors Backup Data has been erased ERROR MESSAGE DESCRIPTION SW Vpb mode Switching to video playback routine is required SW Vrec mode Switching to video recording routine is required Unmatch Stamp Impossible to modify because of nonmatching time stamp VBR SRAM NG Abnormality in VBR SRAM BK FSYS Dirty Backup Data has not been written on the File Sys BUG some Bugs BusReset Done Bus Reset has been excecuted Cell Close NG Cell Close NG CPRM IC NG Inappropriate CPRM IC Dir Depth Err Tree of Directory is too deep Disc No further data can be written because the disc 1 full DRAM CLR Err Video Mode DRAM Stream Buffer Clear failure DRAM NG Abnormality in access to the Work DRAM Drive Destroy The Drive has crashed Editting Error Clear A B Information of VR is NG VRMD Format Excec Formatting has been executed No Error Invalid Disc The disc cannot be recognized ERROR MESSAGE DESCRIPTION Invalid Param Invalid parameter Invalid TMVMG Invalid TMP VMGI content Invalid UDF Invalid UDF content Invalid VMG Invalid VMG content Invalid VTSI V TSI information of VR is unusual Irr Action Incorrect action MKB REVOKED Error is gaining data limit Over Standard maximum limit exceeded EncModul Ha
469. utput of data 07 for IDE GCSB2 RDATAIS 10 RADD20 RDATAOS RADDi OwpworROMGlOaMes Id Kecso Ouput ochip seeto frao SS IE 22 23 24 1 2 5 P10 P12 P13 P14 P15 P19 P20 21 p22 23 24 R2 R3 O R4 O R5 O R10 R11 R12 R13 R14 R15 R19 R20 R21 O R22 R23 O R24 T1 O T2 O T3 T4 T5 T6 T10 DVDD10 1 0V Power supply input DVDD10 1 0V Power supply input 5 11 ATODOS Output of data 05 for IDE ATOIORDY Output of IORDY signal for IDE ATODIS Output of data 15 for IDE ATODMARQ res Output of DMARQ signal for IDE I F GCSB3 Output of GIO chip select 11 Input output of ROM GIO data 11 RDATA 10 VO Input output of ROM GIO data 10 vo 3 6 05 3 AD Input output of ROM GIO data 5 RADDI9 Output of ROM GIO address 19 ATIDI2 VO Input output of IDE data 12 Vo Vo O biiugND ___ 7 Owprof m I rIDEWF 5 O Output of address Uis um 0 um Rabbi Output of ROWGIO addres 13
470. ven when you select 96 kHz Recording Settings Recording The Recording setup allows you to adjust recording settings 1 Press SYSTEM MENU while the recorder is in stop mode 2 Select Initial Setup and press ENTER 3 Select Recording and press ENTER The Recording setup appears with the following options The default settings are underlined initial Setup Basic On go to setup Digital Tuner Rec Mode Adjust m Off Analog Tuner Subtitle Recording Video In Out Set Thumbnail Audio In Auto Chapter HDD VR Audio Out Auto Chapter Video Language Auto Chapter DVD R RW Recording HDD Recording Format Manual Rec Mode On go to setup Allows you to select all recording modes Select this and press ENTER Then select a recording mode using 4 and press ENTER Off Allows you to select standard recording modes only MPEG Output DVD VIDEOs only Selects the type of MPEG audio signal MPEG Select this when the recorder is connected to an audio component with a built in MPEG decoder MPEG gt Select this when the PCM recorder is connected to an audio component without a built in MPEG decoder If you play MPEG audio sound tracks the recorder outputs stereo signals via the DIGITAL OUT COAXIAL jack Q Note If the HDMI OUT jack is connected to equipment not compatible with MPEG audio signals the PCM signals will be autom
471. y page 81 Preset Download You can download the tuner preset data from your TV to this recorder and tune the recorder according to that data in Easy Setup NexTView Download You can easily set the timer by using the NexTView Download function on your TV To prepare for the SMARTLINK features Set LINE 3 Out to Video in the Video In Out setup page 136 and SMARTLINK to This Recorder Only in the Options setup page 150 Q Notes For correct SMARTLINK connection you will need a SCART cord that has the full 21 pins Refer to your TV s instruction manual as well for this connection Not all TVs respond to the functions above 1 MEGALOGIC is a registered trademark of Grundig Corporation 2 KASYLINK and CINEMALINK are trademarks of Philips Corporation Q Link NexTView Link are trademarks of Panasonic Corporation 4 EURO VIEW LINK is a trademark of Toshiba Corporation 5 T V LINK is a trademark of JVC Corporation o LINE 2 OUT S VIDEO 1 9 PR CR 9 9 TV projector or audio component HOM OUT DIGITAL OUT otay ri DIGITAL AERIAL DVD recorder to HDMI OUT HDMI cord S video cord 1 not supplied not supplied TV projector or audio component sumag pue sdmyooH gt continued 1 9 About the HDMI Control f
472. you press while selecting a JPEG image file the slideshow starts from the selected JPEG image file Using the Photo Album List You can play JPEG image files on the HDD DATA DVDs DATA CDs or connected USB device using the Photo Album list ANGLE 22 99 SYSTEM MENU Mx EXIT ENTER 4 RETURN 9 6 gt Press MENU The System Menu appears 2 Select Photo Album and press ENTER The Photo Album menu appears 3 Select the item and press ENTER To play JPEG image files on the HDD select View Edit Photos on the HDD To play JPEG image files on DATA CDs DATA DVDs select View Photos on a CD DVD To play JPEG image files from the connected USB device select View Photos on a USB Device The Photo Album list appears 4 Select album using and press ENTER To show the 4 Photo List or 1 Photo List press to select Title View and press ENTER then select 4 Photos or 1 Photo using 4 and press ENTER To play a slideshow with the sound HDD only You can enjoy a slideshow while listening to the sound stored in the HDD 1 Select View Edit Photos on the HDD in step 3 of Using the Photo Album List on page 122 The Photo Album list appears Switch between the album list and JPEG image file list if necessary 2 Select an album or JPEG image file using 44 press gt 3 Sel

SERVICE MANUAL

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents